JP2018015642A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of excellently improving the degree of attention to a game.SOLUTION: When a game ball enters an upper actuation hole 33 or lower actuation hole 34, suspension information according to the actuation hole the game ball enters is stored in a main control device, and the variable display of symbols in a symbol display device 41 is started based on the suspension information. A variable display mode of symbols related to the suspension information including predetermined specific information sometimes differs according to the number of pieces of suspension information in the case of performing variation start processing here. Special notification to be easily recognized is configured not to be performed or to hardly be performed when a variable display of symbols having a relatively high expectation degree is performed about suspension information including the specific information.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 4

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to a predetermined gaming state such as a winning gaming state triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into a starting pitching portion provided in the gaming area Done. Further, for example, in the display device provided in the game area, the display of the variation of the picture is started based on the fact that the lottery has been performed, and a stop result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed in the final stop display of the variation display. A display effect corresponding to one game is displayed.

  In addition, when a game ball enters the starting entrance part while the display of the change of the pattern is being performed, information used for the winning lottery is held and stored with a predetermined number (for example, 4) as an upper limit. There are pachinko machines that are designed to be used. In the case of hold storage, after the display of the variation of the pattern is completed, a winning lottery is performed using the information stored and stored, and the next variation display of the pattern is started (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2004-81853 A

  Here, in the gaming machine, it is necessary to increase the degree of attention to the game by diversifying the game. However, there is still room for improvement in order to raise the attention to the game. This point applies not only to pachinko machines but also to other game machines in which display effects are executed.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to a game.

The present invention
It is a configuration where the production is executed based on the start opportunity,
First control means for transmitting a command based on the start trigger;
Second control means for causing the performance executing means to execute an effect corresponding to the command;
In a gaming machine equipped with
As the effect, at least a first effect and a second effect that are different in timing at which the start opportunity occurs are set,
The first control means includes
A first output means for outputting a command based on a first start opportunity corresponding to the execution of the first effect;
A second output means for outputting a command based on the second start trigger corresponding to the execution of the second effect;
With
The second control means includes
First effect control means for causing the effect execution means to execute the first effect corresponding to the command output by the first output means;
Second effect control means for causing the effect execution means to execute the second effect corresponding to the command output by the second output means;
With
The command output by the first output means includes specific information used when the first effect control means determines the effect mode of the first effect,
The command output by the second output means includes the specific information,
The second effect control means includes an aspect determining means for determining an effect aspect of the second effect using the specific information included in the command output by the second output means,
The command output by the first output means includes a plurality of commands including a command in which the specific information is set, and is a first effect command that determines an effect mode of the first effect,
The first output means includes a gaming situation command that reflects the gaming situation at the start timing of the first presentation, except for commands that constitute the first presentation command, the specific information being set. It comprises means for executing a process for determining another command, and outputs the first effect command including the command determined by the means based on the first start opportunity,
The first effect control means can change the effect mode of the first effect based on the specific information based on the game situation command,
The second output means derives a command in which the specific information is set by executing a process for determining at least a command in which the specific information is set based on the second start trigger, Output a command containing information,
Means for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player,
The first effect and the second effect are effects based on the grant determination.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to a game.

The front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. The perspective view which expand | deploys and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. The perspective view which expand | deploys and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. The front view which shows the structure of a game board. The block diagram which shows the electrical constitution of a pachinko machine. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a lottery lottery etc. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a success / failure table. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a distribution table. The flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in MPU of a main controller. The flowchart which shows the winning process for a working opening. The flowchart which shows an information acquisition process. The flowchart which shows a normal process. The flowchart which shows game times control processing. The flowchart which shows a data setting process. The flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation start process. The flowchart which shows a 1st game state transfer process. The flowchart which shows a big prize opening / closing process. The flowchart which shows the transfer process at the time of completion | finish of opening-and-closing execution mode. The flowchart which shows a 2nd game state transfer process. The block diagram which shows the electrical structure of an audio | voice lamp control apparatus and a display control apparatus. The flowchart which shows the confirmation process for 1st pending | holding notice. The flowchart which shows the confirmation process for 2nd pending | holding notice. The flowchart which shows the matching information reception process in MPU of a display control apparatus. The flowchart which shows a round display start process. The flowchart which shows the display process during the round for special effects. Explanatory drawing which shows a mode that a hold notice is performed. The timing chart which shows a mode in case a special effect is performed. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the allocation table in 2nd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the transfer process at the time of completion | finish of the opening / closing execution mode in 2nd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the confirmation process for the 1st reservation notice in 2nd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the confirmation process for the 2nd reservation notice in 2nd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the coincidence information reception process in 2nd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation display control process. The flowchart which shows the process for a fluctuation | variation start. The flowchart which shows a deviation variation aspect setting process. The flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation start process in 3rd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows special game times setting processing. The flowchart which shows the confirmation process for the 1st reservation notice in 3rd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display control process in 3rd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the process for a fluctuation | variation start in 3rd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the process for fluctuation | variation in 3rd Embodiment. Explanatory drawing which shows a mode that a special effect is performed. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the distribution table in 6th Embodiment. The flowchart which shows a normal process. The flowchart which shows a game state transfer process. The flowchart which shows the confirmation process for a hold notice. The flowchart which shows a round display start process. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating normal round production. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a reservation notice effect. The timing chart for demonstrating a round production. The flowchart which shows the round production | presentation determination process in 7th Embodiment. The flowchart which shows a round display start process. An explanatory view for explaining the 2nd reservation notice production. The timing chart for demonstrating a 2nd special round effect. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for the success or failure lottery etc. in 8th Embodiment. The flowchart which shows an information acquisition process. The flowchart which shows the confirmation process for a hold notice. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a production pattern table. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the pattern displayed on a hold display area. The flowchart which shows a round production execution process. The flowchart which shows a pending | holding notice effect determination process. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a 1st production lottery table, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a 2nd production lottery table. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production | presentation aspect of each holding notice effect. The flowchart which shows a pending | holding display area control process. The timing chart for demonstrating the mode of the hold notice effect when hold information is acquired during a round game. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the mode of special demotion notice relegation. The timing chart for demonstrating the period when the design for a hold notice result is displayed. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure which concerns on the content of the various counters in 9th Embodiment, and the memory | storage of the said various counters. The flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation start process. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between an effect pattern and classification information, and the setting aspect of classification information. The flowchart which shows classification information setting processing. (A) The flowchart which shows the fluctuation command decision processing, (b) Explanatory drawing for explaining the fluctuation command table. (A) Flow chart showing pending number correspondence command decision processing, (b) Explanatory drawing for explaining the pending number correspondence command table. The flowchart which shows the confirmation process for a hold notice. The flowchart which shows a pending | holding notice effect determination process. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a production table. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the picture Pb for pending | holding notice results. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content which concerns on the content of the various counters in 10th Embodiment, and the memory | storage of the said various counters. The flowchart which shows the confirmation process for a hold notice. The flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation start process. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content which concerns on the content of the various counters in 11th Embodiment, and the memory | storage of the said various counters. The flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation start process. 9 is a flowchart showing hold number correspondence failure classification information setting processing. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating various outliers. The flowchart which shows the confirmation process for a hold notice. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure which concerns on the content of the various counters in 12th Embodiment, and the memory | storage of the said various counters. The flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation start process. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the setting aspect of classification information. The flowchart which shows a low probability mode corresponding | compatible classification information setting process. The flowchart which shows a high probability mode corresponding | compatible classification information setting process. The flowchart which shows the confirmation process for a hold notice.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing an unfolded main configuration of the pachinko machine 10. In FIG. 2, the configuration in the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11. . The outer frame 11 is configured by connecting a wooden plate or the like to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility.

  The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in front view.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view. It is said that. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a backpack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and when viewed from the front, the left side is the rotation base end side and the right side is the rotation front end side. It is possible to move.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 16 at its rotating tip, and the gaming machine main body 12 is locked to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. And has a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that the front door frame 14 cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 that is exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

  The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed at the center of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and a game area formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

  Here, the structure of the game board 24 is demonstrated based on FIG. The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. Each opening has a general winning port 31, a variable winning device 32, an upper operating port (first starting ball entering portion or a non-priority starting entering ball portion) 33, a lower operating port (second starting ball entering portion or a priority starting ball) Part) 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a main display part 43, an accessory display part 44, and the like.

  On the back side of the game board 24, detection sensors (not shown) are provided in correspondence with the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper operating port 33, and the lower operating port 34. When a ball enters the variable winning device 32, the upper operating port 33, and the lower operating port 34, it is detected by a corresponding detection sensor, and a predetermined number of award balls are paid out based on the detection result. . In this case, 10 game balls are paid out when the general winning opening 31 is entered, and 15 game balls are paid out when the variable winning device 32 is entered. Is executed, three game balls are paid out when a ball enters the upper working port 33, and four game balls are paid out when a ball enters the lower working port 34. Is executed.

  In addition, an out port 37 is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area through the out port 37. The game board 24 is provided with a large number of nails 38 in order to disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball as appropriate, and various members (functions) such as a windmill.

  Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only a mode of being discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but is discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. Embodiments that are not included are also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 37, the game ball enters the variable winning device 32, the upper operation port 33, the lower operation port 34, or the through gate 35. Is also expressed as a prize.

  The upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and are installed in the game board 24. Both the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 are opened upward. Further, both the operation ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction, more specifically in the vertical direction, with the upper operation port 33 facing upward. The lower working port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a as a guide piece made up of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

  The electric accessory 34a will be described. The electric accessory 34a has a closed state (a non-supported state or a non-guided state) in which a game ball is difficult to win in the lower operating port 34, and an open state (a supported state or a guided state) in which a game ball is more likely to win than in the closed state. Can be switched to.

  The operating port case constituting the upper operating port 33 projects to the front side and has a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, and the upper side length <the lower side length. At this time, the upper side length of the operating port case (that is, the left and right width of the upper operating port 33) is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the lower side length is left and right when the electric accessory 34a is in the closed state. The length is larger than the distance between the electric accessories 34a. In addition, when the electric accessory 34a is in a closed state, the installation interval between both the operating ports 33 and 34 is set so that the distance between the operating port case and the upper end of the electric accessory 34a is slightly shorter than the diameter of the game ball. It has been adjusted.

  According to the above configuration, in the closed state of the electric accessory 34a, the game ball cannot win the lower operation port 34, and the electric operation item 34a is opened, so that the lower operation port 34 can be won. In particular, at this time, in the middle of the operation in which the electric accessory 34a shifts from the closed state to the open state, the operating port case of the upper operating port 33 has a substantially trapezoidal shape as described above. Until the object 34a is fully opened, it is impossible to win a game ball in the lower operating port 34, and it is possible to win only when the electric accessory 34a is almost fully open. That is, the game ball that has dropped from above hits the side surface of the operating port case 33a and is bounced outward, and does not win the lower operating port 34 directly. As a result, when the electric accessory 34a is opened in a very short time, it is extremely difficult to win the lower working port 34, and only when the open state of the electric accessory 34a is continued, the lower working port 34 is opened. Winning is easy.

  Furthermore, as described above, the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 are arranged side by side. More specifically, since they are arranged side by side in the vertical direction, when the electric accessory 34a is in an open state, the game balls flowing down toward the upper side of the operating port device are the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port. Any of the mouths 34 can be won. In other words, when the electric accessory 34a is in an open state, it is difficult to aim for winning in the upper working port 33 and winning in the lower working port 34 depending on the operation mode of the firing handle 54 described later. It has become.

  In addition to the configuration in which the operation port case of the upper operation port 33 is substantially trapezoidal as described above, the operation port case of the upper operation port 33 has a two-stage configuration having a narrow upper width and a lower width, A substantially C-shaped guide piece may be provided on each of the left and right sides, or an obstruction nail may be implanted obliquely below the operating port case.

  The variable winning device 32 includes a large winning opening 32a that leads to the back side of the game board 24, and an open / close door 32b that opens and closes the large winning opening 32a. The open / close door 32b is connected to a drive unit such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 24, and is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot be won or are difficult to win. When winning the (open / closed execution state), the game ball is switched to a predetermined open state in which it is easier to win than in the closed state.

  Here, the opening / closing execution mode is a mode to be shifted to when a big win is won. The opening / closing execution mode will be described in detail later. As an opening mode of the variable winning device 32, the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly opened with a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings as one round and a plurality of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) as an upper limit. There is an embodiment.

  The main display portion 43 and the accessory display portion 44 are provided on a decorative member 39 disposed along the outer edge on the lower side of the game area. The decorative member 39 extends from the board surface of the game board 24 to the front of the pachinko machine 10. More specifically, the front surface of the decorative member 39 faces the window panel 62 provided on the front door frame 14 so that the game area can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The distance between them is narrower than that of one game ball. This prevents the game ball from falling in front of the front surface of the decorative member 39.

  A main display unit 43 and an accessory display unit 44 are provided so as to be exposed from the front surface of the decorative member 39. That is, the main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 are visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 62 of the front door frame 14, and a game ball is in front of both the display units 43 and 44. It is prevented from falling.

  In the main display section 43, when the variable winning device 32 enters the opening / closing execution mode (or when the opening / closing execution mode is set) by winning the big win, the big winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode is displayed. The round display part RS for clearly indicating the number of times of opening, the first result display part AS for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the upper operating opening 33, and the lower operating opening 34 A second result display section BS is set for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning.

  In the round display section RS, the display of the number of times of opening is started at the start of the opening / closing execution mode, and the display is ended at the end of the opening / closing execution mode.

  In the first result display section AS, a variation display of the picture is performed with a winning at the upper working port 33 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variation display, an internal lottery performed based on the winning at the upper working port 33 is performed. The result is clearly indicated by the display. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the upper working port 33 is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the first result display section AS and displayed in a variable manner. After is stopped, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

  In the second result display section BS, the variation display of the picture is performed with the winning to the lower operation port 34 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the lower operation port 34 is performed. The result is clearly indicated by the display. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the lower working port 34 is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the second result display unit BS and displayed in a variable manner. After is stopped, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

  Here, on the basis of winning in one of the operation ports 33, 34, the variable display is started in the corresponding result display sections AS, BS, until a predetermined stop result is displayed and the above variable display is stopped. It corresponds to one game time. However, the number of game times is not limited to the above-mentioned contents. For example, a single result display unit is provided, and even if any one of the operation ports 33 and 34 is won, the single game display is provided. In the configuration in which the variable display is performed in the result display unit, the variable display is started in the single result display unit, and the above-mentioned variable display is stopped in a state where the predetermined stop result is displayed. 1 time.

  The accessory display unit 44 is a display unit for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on winning through the through gate 35. In this case, the accessory display unit 44 displays a variation of the picture triggered by the winning of the through gate 35, and the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 35 as a result of stopping the variation display. The result of is clearly displayed. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the through gate 35 is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the state where the electric role is opened, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the accessory display unit 44 and displayed in a variable manner. After is stopped, it shifts to the electric utility open state. In the electric combination open state, the electric combination 34a provided in the lower working port 34 is opened in a predetermined manner.

  The main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 are configured by a segment display device having a plurality of segments. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other display devices such as a liquid crystal display device are used. Also good.

  The variable display unit 36 is provided with a symbol display device 41 that performs variable display (or variable display or switching display) of symbols. The variable display unit 36 is provided with a center frame 42 so as to surround the symbol display device 41. The center frame 42 has an upper portion extending forward of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the game ball is prevented from dropping in front of the display screen of the symbol display device 41, and the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen is lowered due to the fall of the game ball does not occur. .

  The symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device described later. On the symbol display device 41, for example, symbols are displayed side by side in the top, middle and bottom, and these symbols are variably displayed as they are scrolled in the horizontal direction. In this case, the change display on the symbol display device 41 is started based on winning in the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34. That is, when the variable display is performed in the first result display unit AS, the variable display is performed in the symbol display device 41 accordingly, and when the variable display is performed in the second result display unit BS, In addition, the symbol display device 41 performs variable display. Then, for example, the symbol display device 41 is set in advance as a game time for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to 15 rounds, in which the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 is opened 15 times as the opening / closing execution mode. A predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the active line.

  A first holding lamp portion 45 corresponding to the first result display portion AS and the symbol display device 41 is provided in the upper left portion on the front side of the center frame 42. The maximum number of game balls won in the upper operation port 33 is reserved, and the number of reserved balls is displayed when the first reservation lamp unit 45 is turned on. Further, a second holding lamp portion 46 corresponding to the second result display portion BS and the symbol display device 41 is provided at the upper right portion on the front side of the center frame 42. A maximum of four game balls won in the lower operation port 34 are reserved, and the number of the reserved balls is displayed when the second reservation lamp unit 46 is turned on. As described above, since the upper portion of the center frame 42 extends forward of the pachinko machine 10, the visibility of the first holding ramp portion 45 and the second holding ramp portion 46 is not hindered by the fall of the game ball. ing.

  Below the center frame 42, a third holding lamp portion 47 corresponding to the accessory display portion 44 is provided. The number of times that the game ball has passed through the through gate 35 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by turning on the third holding lamp portion 47. In addition, the structure etc. by which each holding lamp | ramp parts 45-47 are displayed on a part of symbol display apparatus 41 may be sufficient.

  A special display device 48 is provided above the center frame. The special display device 48 is used for executing a special effect. Specifically, the special display device 48 is provided with an LED and a speaker. When the special effect is executed, the LED emits light or a sound is output from the speaker.

  An inner rail portion 51 and an outer rail portion 52 are attached to the game board 24, and a guide rail is constituted by the inner rail portion 51 and the outer rail portion 52, and a game launched from the game ball launching mechanism 53. A ball is guided to the upper part of the game area. As shown in FIG. 2, the game ball launching mechanism 53 is attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21. The game ball launching mechanism 53 is operated by operating a firing handle 54 provided on the front door frame 14. Operation is performed.

  A front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 61 so that almost the entire game area can be viewed from the front. The window portion 61 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 62 described above is fitted therein. Although the window panel 62 is colorless and transparent with glass, the window panel 62 is not limited to this and may be colorless and transparent with synthetic resin.

  Around the window portion 61, light emitting means such as various lamp portions are provided. A display lamp part 63 is provided above the window part 61 as a part of the various lamp parts. In addition, on both the left and right sides of the display lamp unit 63, speaker units 64 are provided for outputting sound effects corresponding to the gaming state.

  Below the window portion 61 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 65 and a lower bulging portion 66 that bulge to the near side are provided side by side. An upper pan 71 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 65, and a lower pan 72 that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 66. The upper plate 71 has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 53 side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 72 has a function of storing game balls that are surplus in the upper tray 71. The game balls paid out from the payout device 96 of the back pack unit 15 are discharged to the upper plate 71 and the lower plate 72 through a passage forming unit 73 provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14.

  Next, the configuration on the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a main controller 81 and an audio lamp controller 82 are mounted on the back of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24).

  The main control device 81 includes a main control board that controls the main control of the game and a power failure monitoring board that monitors the power source. The main control board and the power failure monitoring board are provided in a board box 83 made of a transparent resin material or the like. Contained and configured. The board box 83 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base (front case body) and a box cover (back case body) that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other in a non-separable manner by a box coupling portion 85 as a separation preventing means (or a coupling means), thereby sealing the substrate box 83. And by being connected inseparably by these box coupling | bond parts 85, when the internal space of the board | substrate box 83 is open | released, it has the structure which needs destruction of the said board | substrate box 83 or a part of excision. A plurality of box coupling portions 85 are provided on the long side portion of the substrate box 83, and at least one of them is used for the coupling process.

  The box coupling portion 85 can be applied to any configuration as long as the box base and the box cover are coupled so as not to be opened, but by inserting a locking claw into the long hole constituting the box coupling portion 85, The box cover is connected to the box cover so that it cannot be opened. The coupling process by the box coupling unit 85 prevents unauthorized opening after the coupling, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if unauthorized opening is performed. Even after the opening, it is possible to perform the opening process again. That is, the coupling process is performed by inserting a locking claw into at least one of the plurality of box coupling portions 85. When the board box 83 is opened, such as when a failure occurs in the accommodated main control board or when the main control board is inspected, the box coupling portion 85 into which the locking claw is inserted and the other box coupling portion 85 The connecting part of the box and the connecting part with the box body are cut. Thereby, the box base and the box cover of the board box 83 are separated, and the internal main control board can be taken out. Thereafter, when the coupling process is performed again, the locking claw is inserted into the long hole of the other box coupling portion 85. If the history of opening the board box 83 is left in the board box 83, it can be easily found that the illegal opening has been performed by looking at the board box 83.

  A plurality of coupling pieces 86 are provided on one short side of the substrate box 83 so as to protrude laterally. These coupling pieces 86 have a one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of coupled pieces 87 formed on the mounting base of the main control device 81, and the board box 83 and the mounting base are formed by the coupling pieces 86 and the coupled pieces 87. Between them.

  In addition, as a trace means for discovering unauthorized opening of the substrate box 83, a seal seal may be attached so as to straddle the boundary between the box base and the box cover. In this case, when the seal seal is peeled off from the pasted portion, the adhesive layer of the seal seal remains on the substrate box 83 side, and the trace remains. Further, an IC tag that transmits a response wave including identification information to the ringing wave having a predetermined frequency is provided on the seal sticker. When the seal sticker is peeled off, the antenna of the IC tag is cut and the response It is good also as a structure which cannot transmit a wave.

  The sound lamp control device 82 includes a sound lamp control board that controls sound and lamp display and control of a display control device (not shown) according to an instruction from the main control device 81. The sound lamp control board is made of a transparent resin material or the like. The board box 84 is configured to be accommodated.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 91, and a payout mechanism 92 and a control device assembly unit 93 are attached to the back pack 91. The back pack 91 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and has a protective cover portion 94 that protrudes rearward and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape so as to cover the main control device 81, the sound lamp control device 82, and the like from the rear. doing.

  The payout mechanism portion 92 is disposed so as to bypass the protective cover portion 94, and a tank 95 to which game balls supplied from island facilities in the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a game stored in the tank 95. A payout device 96 for paying out balls. The game balls paid out from the payout device 96 are discharged to the upper plate 71 or the lower plate 72 through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 96. Further, the payout mechanism 92 is mounted with a back pack substrate on which a main power supply of, for example, 24 volts AC is supplied and a power switch for turning on and off the power is provided.

  Further, the back pack 91 is provided with an external output terminal plate 99 on the rotation axis side of the back pack unit 15 and on the upper edge side. The external output terminal plate 99 has an output terminal for outputting a signal when there is a shortage of game balls in the tank 95 or the like, an output terminal for outputting a signal every time a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, and a predetermined number of game balls. State transition such as an output terminal for outputting a signal every time a loan is made, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the gaming machine body 12 is opened, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the front door frame 14 is opened, and an opening / closing execution mode At this time (or during the transition to the state), an output terminal for outputting a signal is provided. And the signal regarding the state of a frame side is output with respect to the management control apparatus of the game hall side through these output terminals. Note that an output terminal for outputting a signal every time a predetermined number of game balls are lent out is not necessary in a so-called cash machine.

  The control device assembly unit 93 includes a payout control device 97 and a power source and launch control device 98. The payout control device 97 and the power supply / launch control device 98 are arranged so as to overlap each other so that the payout control device 97 is located behind the pachinko machine 10.

  The payout control device 97 is configured such that a payout control board for controlling the payout device 96 is accommodated in a substrate box. In this case, fraud suppression means similar to the substrate box 83 of the main control device 81 may be applied to the substrate box of the payout control device 97.

  The power source and launch control device 98 is configured such that a power source and launch control board is accommodated in a board box, and predetermined power required by various control devices and the like is generated and output by the board, and further by the player Control of the launch of the game ball accompanying the operation of the firing handle 54 is performed. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a function for storing and storing various data, so that even if a power failure occurs, it can maintain the state at the time of the power failure and can return to the state at the time of the power failure when returning from the power failure. It is like that.

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG.

  An MPU 202 is mounted on the main control board 201 provided in the main control device 81. The MPU 202 includes a ROM 203 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 202 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 203 is executed. It is an element incorporating a RAM 204, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like. Note that a part of the functions of the MPU 202, for example, the function of the ROM 203 and the function of the RAM 204 may be provided as separate elements.

  The MPU 202 is provided with an input port and an output port. On the input side of the MPU 202, a power failure monitoring board 205 provided in the main control device 81, a payout control device 97, various detection sensors 211a to 211e, and the like are connected. In this case, a power supply and launch control device 98 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 205, and power is supplied to the MPU 202 via the power failure monitoring board 205. Also, as a part of the various detection sensors 211a to 211e, a winning winning entry portion (a payout corresponding entering portion) such as a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device 32, an upper operating opening 33, a lower operating opening 34, a through gate 35, etc. Are connected to each other, and the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 performs a winning determination (entering determination) for each entering part. In addition, the MPU 202 executes a lottery occurrence lottery based on winning at the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34, and also performs support generation lottery based on a winning at the through gate 35.

  On the output side of the MPU 202, a power failure monitoring board 205, a payout control device 97, and an audio lamp control device 82 are connected. For example, the payout control device 97 outputs a winning ball command based on the winning determination result to the winning corresponding winning portion. In this case, when outputting the prize ball command, the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203 is referred to. When a winning to the general winning opening 31 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to payout of 10 game balls is output, and when a winning to the variable winning device 32 is specified, 15 winning balls are output. When a winning ball command corresponding to paying out a game ball is output and a winning to the upper operating port 33 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to paying out three gaming balls is output and sent to the lower operating port 34. When a winning is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of four game balls is output.

  Various commands such as a change command, a type command, a change end command, an opening command, and an ending command are output to the sound lamp control device 82. In this case, the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203 is referred to when these various commands are output. Details of these various commands will be described later. Each command is configured as information of a predetermined number of bytes, and various information is included as information of the predetermined number of bytes.

  Further, on the output side of the MPU 202, a variable winning drive unit 32c that opens and closes the open / close door 32b of the variable winning device 32, an electric combination drive unit 34b that opens and closes the electric combination 34a of the lower working port 34, and a main display. The unit 43 is connected. The main control board 201 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 202 performs drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

  That is, in the opening / closing execution mode, drive control of the variable winning drive unit 32c is executed in the MPU 202 so that the special winning opening 32a is opened and closed. Further, when the electric combination 34a is won, the MPU 202 performs drive control of the electric combination drive unit 34b so that the electric combination 34a is opened and closed. In each game round, the display control of the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS in the main display section 43 is executed in the MPU 202, and the main display section is operated in the opening / closing execution mode of the variable winning device 32. Display control of the round display part RS in 43 is executed.

  The power failure monitoring board 205 relays between the main control board 201 and the power supply / launch control device 98, and monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply / launch control device 98. The payout control device 97 performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 96 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 81.

  The power source and launch control device 98 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. Based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, necessary operating power is generated for each of the main control board 201 and the payout control device 97, and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. To do. The power source and launch control device 98 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 53, and the game ball launch mechanism 53 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

  The sound lamp control device 82 is based on various commands input from the main control device 81, the holding lamp portions 45 to 47 provided in the variable display unit 36, the display lamp portion 63 provided in the front door frame 14, and a speaker. The unit 64 is driven and controlled, and the display control device 212 is controlled. The display control device 212 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on the command input from the sound lamp control device 82.

  Here, the display contents of the symbol display device 41 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

  As shown in FIG. 6 (a), on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper stage, a middle stage, and a lower stage are set. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 includes a main symbol and a sub symbol arranged in a predetermined order. Specifically, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers in the upper symbol row Z1, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between the main symbols. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and then between the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1”. In addition, a main symbol “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols by arranging 10 main symbols. On the display screen G, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. Further, as shown in FIG. 6B, the display screen G is configured such that three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It has come to be.

  The display screen G has five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right lowering line L4, and a right uppering line L5. Then, the variable display stops in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state in which a combination of symbols having the same number attached to any one of the effective lines is formed. When the variation display of .about.Z3 is completed, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the occurrence of a 6R probability variation jackpot result or a 16R probability variation jackpot result which will be described later.

  In this pachinko machine 10, when a 6R probability variation jackpot result or a 16R probability variation jackpot result occurs, the combination of the same specific symbols is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, the mode of the display of the symbol variation in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of the symbol variation display in the symbol sequence, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be appropriately changed.

  On the left side of the lower part of the display screen G, a hold display area Ga is set. The hold display area Ga is divided and displayed so that unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga8 of the same number as the maximum hold number when a game ball wins the upper operation opening 33 and the lower operation opening 34 are arranged in parallel in the left-right direction. Has been. Specifically, the maximum number of reserved balls when the game ball wins the upper working port 33 is four, and the maximum number of reserved balls when the game ball wins the lower working port 34 is four. Correspondingly, the hold display area Ga includes a first unit hold display area Ga1, a second unit hold display area Ga2, a third unit hold display area Ga3, a fourth unit hold display area Ga4, and a fifth unit hold display area. Ga5, sixth unit hold display area Ga6, seventh unit hold display area Ga7, and eighth unit hold display area Ga8 are set.

  For example, when the number of holds when the game ball wins the lower operation port 34 is 0, and the number of hold when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33 is 1, the first unit hold display area A predetermined hold image is displayed only by Ga1. When the number of holds when the game ball wins the lower operation port 34 is 0, and when the number of holds when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33 is 4, the first unit hold display area Ga1 to Ga1 A predetermined hold image is displayed in the fourth unit hold display area Ga4.

  Further, for example, when the number of holdings when a game ball wins the lower working port 34 and the number of holdings when a game ball wins the upper working port 33 are each one, the first unit hold display Predetermined hold images are displayed in the area Ga1 and the second unit hold display area Ga2. When a hold image is displayed in each hold display area, the upper operation is performed so that the player can distinguish which of the upper operation port 33 and the lower operation port 34 the game ball has won. When a game ball wins in the mouth 33, a red hold image is displayed, and when a game ball wins in the lower operation port 34, a blue hold image is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the hold images are displayed in the order in which the game balls win the respective operation ports 33 and 34. For example, when the game ball wins in the order of the upper operating port 33 → the lower operating port 34 → the upper operating port 33, a holding image corresponding to winning in the upper operating port 33 is displayed in the first unit hold display area Ga 1. In the second unit hold display area Ga2, a hold image corresponding to winning in the lower operation port 34 is displayed, and in the third unit hold display area Ga3, a hold image corresponding to winning in the upper operation port 33 is displayed. The

<About various counters>
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

  The MPU 202 uses lots of counter information in the game to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, display setting of the main display unit 43, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 41, setting of display of the accessory display unit 44, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7, when the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery occurrence lottery, the jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, and the symbol display device 41 are changed. Reach random number counter C3 used for reach lottery, random number initial value counter CINI used for initial value setting of jackpot random number counter C1, first result display section AS and second result display section BS of main display section 43, and design The variation type counter CS that determines the variation display time in the display device 41 is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory release counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the lower working port 34 is in the electric utility open state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the lottery counter area 231 of the RAM 204.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. The updated value is appropriately stored in the RAM 204 based on the game ball winning in each of the operation ports 33 and 34.

  The RAM 204 includes an acquisition information storage unit including a first result display area reservation area Ra, a second result display area reservation area Rb, an execution area AE, a reservation number storage area CR, and an order storage area OR. The reserved ball storage area 232 is provided. In the reserved ball storage area 232, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 are time-sequentially matched to the winning history of the game balls to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34. It is designed to be stored.

  For details of each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured such that 1 is sequentially added within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 99). The big hit random number counter C <b> 1 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34. More specifically, the game result is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33, and the second result display unit of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower operation port 34. Stored in the reserved area Rb.

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored as a success / failure table (availability information group) in a success / failure table storage area 221 as a success / failure information group storage means in the ROM 203. Here, the contents of the success / failure table will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the success / failure table, address information composed of binary number information and jackpot numerical value information composed of binary number information are set in a one-to-one correspondence. Specifically, ten types of address information expressed in decimal numbers “1” to “10” are set, and the jackpot value information is expressed in decimal numbers “7”, “11”, “23”. , “31”, “47”, “59”, “67”, “73”, “83”, “91” are set, and the address information and the jackpot value information are in a one-to-one relationship. It is associated. The numerical value of each jackpot numerical value information is included in “0” to “99”, which is the numerical range of the random number information that can be updated in the jackpot random number counter C1.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery modes in the success / failure lottery means. The number of jackpot numerical information referred to in the low probability mode is different from the number of jackpot numerical information referred to in the high probability mode, and the former is smaller than the latter. Specifically, in the low probability mode, only the jackpot value information whose address information is “1” is referred to in the lottery lottery, and in the high probability mode, the jackpot number information corresponding to all the address information is determined in the lottery lottery. Referenced. In other words, there is one piece of numerical information for winning the jackpot in the low probability mode, and there are ten pieces of numerical information in the high probability mode, which is more than in the low probability mode. As a result, the probability of winning a big hit in the low probability mode is 1/100, whereas the probability of winning a big hit in the high probability mode is 1/10, and the high probability mode is a big hit than the low probability mode. The probability of winning is increased. Note that the success / failure tables referred to in the high probability mode and the low probability mode may be different. In this case, a success / failure table referred to in the case of the high probability mode and a success / failure table referred to in the case of the low probability mode may be set in advance.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is configured so that 1 is added in order within a range of 0 to 29, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The big hit type counter C <b> 2 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when a game ball wins the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34. More specifically, the game result is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33, and the second result display unit of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower operation port 34. Stored in the reserved area Rb.

  Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of jackpot results are set. The plurality of jackpot results are set by providing a difference in the condition of the opening / closing control mode of the variable winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, the 16R probability variation jackpot result in which the open / close execution mode is opened and closed 16 times from the start to the end of the open / close execution mode and the open / close opening of the open / close execution mode is performed 6 times from the start to the end of the open / close execution mode. 6R probability variation jackpot result is set. In the opening / closing execution mode, one opening / closing of the big prize opening 32a is set as one round, and one opening of the big prize opening 32a is made until 30 seconds (high frequency time) elapses or to the big prize opening 32a. This is continued until the number of winnings reaches 10 (high frequency).

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the opening / closing execution mode ends, the high probability mode is set as the lottery mode until the predetermined number of games has elapsed. Specifically, when the opening / closing execution mode ends, the high probability mode is set as the lottery mode until five game times have elapsed, and the low probability mode is set thereafter.

  As a support mode for the electric combination 34a of the lower working port 34, the electric combination 34a of the lower working port 34 is compared when the game ball is continuously being fired in the same manner with respect to the game area. Low frequency support mode (low frequency support state or low frequency guide state) and high frequency support mode (high frequency support state or high frequency guide state) so that the frequency of the open state per unit time is relatively high or low. And are set.

  Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the power combination open state in the electric combination release lottery using the electric combination release counter C4 is the same (for example, both 4/5) However, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric accessory 34a is opened when the electrified open state is won is set more than in the low-frequency support mode, and one more release is performed. The time is set longer. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the electrified open state is selected and the open state of the electric accessory 34a occurs a plurality of times, the closure from the end of one open state until the start of the next open state is performed. The time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, the minimum secured time is set shorter when the next electric character opening lottery is performed after one electric character opening lottery is performed than in the low frequency support mode. Has been.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, there is a higher probability of winning a prize for the lower working port 34 than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability that a prize will be given to the upper working port 33 than to the lower working port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the lower working port 34 is connected to the lower working port 34. The probability of winning a prize increases. When a winning is made to the lower working port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of possessed balls so much. be able to.

  The configuration for increasing the frequency at which the high frequency support mode is set to the power release state per unit time as compared with the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above-described configuration, for example, the electric component release lottery It is good also as a structure which raises the probability of becoming electrified in the electric character open state in Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the minimum secured time is secured when the next electric character opening lottery is performed after one electric character releasing lottery is performed. By applying any one condition or any combination of conditions (that is, shortening the one-time variable display time in the display part 44 for an accessory) and increasing the winning probability, the low frequency support mode is applied. The advantage of the high frequency support mode may be increased.

  When the opening / closing execution mode ends, the high-frequency support mode is set until a predetermined number of games have elapsed. Specifically, when the opening / closing execution mode ends, the high-frequency support mode is set as the support mode until 50 game times have elapsed, and the low-frequency support mode is set thereafter.

  The game result distribution destination for the big hit type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in the distribution table storage area 222 as a distribution information group storage means in the ROM 203. The contents of the distribution table will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the distribution table, a 6R probability variation jackpot result and a 16R probability variation jackpot result are set as distribution destinations of game results. When each jackpot result is obtained, the open / close execution mode is set. Further, after the open / close execution mode ends, the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are set until the end reference count elapses. As described above, when the opening / closing execution mode ends, the high probability mode is set as the lottery mode until five game times less than the number of games for which the high frequency support mode is set elapses. For this reason, when the opening / closing execution mode ends, the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are set until 5 game times elapse, and the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode are set until 50 game times elapse thereafter. Thereafter, the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode are set.

  Note that the normal gaming state in relation to the above gaming states refers to a state in which the winning / losing lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode.

  In the distribution table, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 26” corresponds to the 6R probability variation jackpot result, and “27 to 29” corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot result. Yes. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the jackpot result is based on the winning to the upper working port 33 and the jackpot result is based on the winning to the lower working port 34 The distribution table is referenced. That is, even if any of the operation ports 33, 34 is won, the allocation of the jackpot result is the same.

  In addition, when it becomes a losing result in the success / failure lottery, the opening / closing execution mode is not shifted, and the change of the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode does not occur.

  For example, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value and then returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34. More specifically, the game result is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33, and the second result display unit of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower operation port 34. Stored in the reserved area Rb. Then, based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 203, it is determined whether to generate a reach. However, in the game times that shift to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 202 determines the occurrence of reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. The number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of reach display is the same in each gaming state, but may be set individually according to the gaming state. For example, when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of reach display may be set larger than that in the low frequency support mode.

  Here, the reach display (reach state) is provided with a symbol display device 41 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of symbols (pictures), and in the game times that are in the opening / closing execution mode, stop after the variable display. In the gaming machine in which the display result is the special display result, the special display result is obtained before the stop display result is derived and displayed after the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) in the symbol display device 41 is started. This means a display state for making the player think that it is a variable display state that is likely to become.

  In other words, the combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode is established by stopping the symbols for some of the symbol sequences displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41. This is a display state in which a combination of reach symbols that may be displayed is displayed, and in that state, the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows.

  More specifically, as a step before ending the variable display of symbols, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode is established on a preset active line in the display screen of the symbol display device 41. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a combination of reach symbols that may possibly be displayed, and a symbol change display is performed by a final stop symbol row in a situation where the reach line is formed.

  The display contents in FIG. 6 will be described in detail. In the state where the symbol variation display is first ended in the upper symbol row Z1 and the symbol variation display is further terminated in the lower symbol row Z3, any one of the effective items is displayed. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols having the same numbers on the lines L1 to L5, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, the symbol variation display is performed in the middle symbol row Z2. Reach display. When the high-frequency winning mode occurs, the main symbol with the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed on the reach line in the middle symbol row Z2. The symbol variation display is terminated.

  In the reach display, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation display of symbols is performed on the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen. There are those that produce an effect, and those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on almost the entire display screen after reducing or not displaying a combination of reach symbols. Further, when reach display is performed or before reach display, it is determined using the reach random number counter C3 or other counter whether or not to perform a notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character. May be.

  The variation type counter CS is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 202 to determine the variation display time in the first result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS of the main display unit 43 and the symbol variation display time in the symbol display device 41. . The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of variation display in the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS and at the variation start time of the symbol by the symbol display device 41.

  The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to increment one by one within a range of 0 to 249 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric combination holding area 233 of the RAM 204 at the timing when a game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state based on the value of the stored electric accessory release counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0 to 199, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to the open state, and if C4 = 200 to 249, the electric accessory 34a is not controlled to the open state.

  As already described, the MPU 202 uses at least the buffer value of the variation type counter CS to determine the variation display time in the first result display section AS and the second result display section BS. A variable display time table storage area 223 is used. Further, the MPU 202 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE to determine the stop results in the first result display section AS and the second result display section BS. However, the stop result table storage area 224 of the ROM 203 is used for the determination.

  Here, the configuration of the reserved ball storage area 232 will be described.

  The first result display section holding area Ra stores the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 in time series in accordance with the winning history of the game balls to the upper working port 33. Is a reserved area for In addition, the second result display section holding area Rb displays the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 in time series in accordance with the winning history of the game balls to the lower operating port 34. This is a reserved area for storing. Here, since the first result display area reservation area Ra and the second result display area reservation area Rb have the same configuration, the first result display area of the both reservation areas Ra and Rb will be described below. The configuration of the reserved area Ra will be described.

  The first result display area reservation area Ra includes four storage areas of a first area to a fourth area, and a reservation number storage area. Each storage area includes a storage area for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, a storage area for storing the value of the jackpot type counter C2, and a storage area for storing the value of the reach random number counter C3. It is configured. With the four storage areas of the first area to the fourth area, up to four game balls winning histories to the upper operation port 33 are stored on hold.

  In addition, in the reserved ball storage area 232, a reserved number storage for storing information on the sum of the number of holds in the first result display section holding area Ra and the number of holds in the second result display section holding area Rb. Area CR is provided.

  Further, the reserved ball storage area 232 is provided with an order storage area OR for storing the order in which the game balls are won in the respective operation ports 33 and 34. The order storage area OR is composed of 1 byte, and each bit is associated with eight storage areas from the first area to the eighth area. More specifically, they are associated with the first area, the second area,.

  The execution area AE shown in FIG. 7 is stored in the storage area of the first result display section reservation area Ra or the second result display section reservation area Rb when the variable display of each result display section AS, BS is started. This is an area for moving each value. The execution area AE has the same configuration as the storage area for one of the result display area reservation areas Ra and Rb. Furthermore, the execution area AE is provided with an area for storing information of the order storage area OR.

<Various processes executed by main controller 81>
Next, a timer interrupt process and a normal process that are executed when the MPU 202 in the main controller 81 advances the game in each game time will be described. In addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, the MPU 202 executes a main process that is activated when the power is turned on and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by the input of a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). Description of these processes is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. This process is started periodically by the MPU 202 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In step S101 in the timer interrupt process, a read process is executed. In the reading process, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 81 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  After executing the reading process in step S101, the process proceeds to step S102. In step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

  In subsequent step S103, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

  After that, in step S104, a winning process for the operating opening accompanying winning of each operating opening 33, 34 is executed. In subsequent step S105, after a through winning process for winning through the through gate 35 is executed, the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the through winning process, if a winning to the through gate 35 has occurred, the number of stored bonus items stored in the electronic role holding area is less than the upper limit number (for example, “4”). As a condition, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the electric utility reservation area. In addition, the voice lamp control device 82 executes a process for turning on the second holding lamp unit 46 corresponding to the number of stored item holdings.

  The winning process for the upper working port in step S104 will be described below.

<Winning process for working port>
First, the winning process for the working opening will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S <b> 201, it is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the upper operation port 33 whether or not the game ball has won a prize (start winning prize) in the upper operation port 33. If it is determined that the game ball has won the upper working port 33, in step S202, a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 97 to pay out three game balls is set. In the subsequent step S203, the value stored in the reserved number storage area of the first result display area reservation area Ra is read out, and the starting reserved ball storage number RaN stored in the first result display area reservation area Ra is stored. Set (hereinafter also referred to as the first starting reserved ball memory number RaN). Thereafter, in step S204, an information acquisition process for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is performed, and the main winning process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has not won the upper working port 33, in step S205, whether or not the game ball has won the lower working port 34 (starting winning) corresponds to the lower working port 34. The determination is made based on the detection state of the detection sensor. If it is determined that the game ball has won the lower operating port 34, a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 97 to pay out four game balls is set in step S206. In the subsequent step S207, the value stored in the reserved number storage area of the second result display area reservation area Rb is read, and the starting reserved ball storage number RbN stored in the second result display area reservation area Rb is determined. Set (hereinafter also referred to as second starting reserved ball memory number RbN). Thereafter, an information acquisition process is performed in step S204, and the main winning process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if both step S201 and step S205 are NO, that is, if the game ball has not won any of the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34, the main winning process is terminated as it is.

  The prize ball command set in steps S202 and S206 is transmitted to the payout control device 97 in step S401 of the external output process of the normal process described later.

  Here, the information acquisition process of step S204 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S301, it is determined whether or not the reserved storage number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S203 or step S207 described above is less than an upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). If the reserved memory number N is the upper limit value, the process is terminated. If the reserved memory number N is less than the upper limit value, the start reserved ball memory number N of the corresponding result display area reserved area is incremented by 1 in step S302. At the same time, the value stored in the reserved number storage area CR in step S303 (hereinafter also referred to as the reserved number CRN) is incremented by one.

  In a succeeding step S304, it is determined whether or not the current winning is a winning to the upper working port 33. Specifically, it is determined which of the first start reserved ball memory number RaN and the second start hold ball memory number RbN is set. When the ball storage number RaN is set, it is determined that the winning is to the upper working port 33.

  If it is determined in step S304 that the winning is not to the upper working port 33, that is, if the winning is to the lower working port 34, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, a hold flag is stored in the area of the order storage area OR corresponding to the value of the hold count storage area CR. Specifically, the hold flag is stored in the order storage area OR corresponding to the area corresponding to the value of the hold storage number CRN, and if the game ball has won the lower operating port 34, in step S303 A hold flag is stored in the order storage area OR corresponding to the hold storage number CRN incremented by one. The hold flag is for specifying that the current winning is a winning to the lower operation port 34.

  In the subsequent step S306, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 are used as the first storage area among the free storage area areas of the corresponding result display area reservation area. That is, the number is stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number incremented by 1 in step S302.

  In other words, when the first starting reserved ball storage number RaN is set, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 are displayed as the first result display unit. The first storage area among the empty storage areas of the reserved storage area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first starting reserved ball storage number RaN incremented by 1 in step S302.

  When the second starting reserved ball storage number RbN is set, the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in the step S103 are displayed in the second result display section. Of the reserved storage area Rb, the first storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second starting reserved ball storage number RbN incremented by 1 in step S302.

  In the subsequent step S307, a hold command is set. The hold command includes information on which of the upper operation port 33 and the lower operation port 34 the game ball has won. The hold command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in an external output process (step S401) of a normal process described later. When the voice lamp control device 82 receives the hold command transmitted based on the winning to the upper working port 33, the voice lamp control device 82 executes processing for turning on the first hold lamp unit 45. The first hold lamp unit 45 is sequentially turned on from the left side. For example, if the first start hold ball storage number RaN is 1, the first hold lamp unit 45 at the left end is turned on and the first start hold ball If the stored number RaN is 4, all the first holding lamp portions 45 are turned on. Further, when a hold command transmitted based on a winning to the lower working port 34 is received, a process for lighting the second hold lamp unit 46 is executed. The second holding lamp unit 46 is sequentially turned on from the left side. For example, if the second starting holding ball storage number RbN is 1, the leftmost second holding lamp unit 46 is turned on and the second starting holding ball is turned on. If the stored number RbN is 4, all the second holding lamp portions 46 are turned on.

  Further, the voice lamp control device 82 transmits the received hold command to the display control device 212. When receiving the hold command, the display control device 212 changes the display of the hold display area Ga in accordance with the increase in the number of holds.

  When the hold command is set in step S307, the information acquisition process is terminated.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an outline, the processing of steps S401 to S408 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S410 and S411 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the normal process, in step S401, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 97. If an effect command such as a hold command, a change command, a type command, or a change end command is set, the command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82.

  Next, in step S402, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

  In the subsequent step S403, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 97 are read. Thereafter, in step S404, a game time control process for controlling a game in each game time is executed. In the game times control process, jackpot determination, setting of symbol variation display by the symbol display device 41, display control of the result display sections AS and BS on the side performing variation display, and the like are performed. Details of the game times control process will be described later.

  Thereafter, in step S405, a first game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. Although details will be described later, by the first game state transition process, the gaming state is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, or when the opening / closing execution mode is ended, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like is set.

  In step S406, a second game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. Although the details will be described later, after the opening / closing execution mode is finished and the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are set by the second game state transition process, the low probability mode or the low frequency support mode is set. Or

  In the subsequent step S407, a confirmation process for the first pending notice is executed, and in a step S408, a confirmation process for the second pending notice is executed. As will be described in detail later, in the confirmation process for each hold notice, the jackpot result is handled when the hold information stored in the open / close execution mode becomes the target of the success / failure determination before being the target of the success / failure determination. It is determined whether or not

  In the normal process, an electric support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided in the lower working port 34 is also executed. In this electronic combination support process, it is determined whether or not the electric combination 34a is opened, display control of the combination display 44, and the like are performed. In this case, as already explained, since the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode are set in the pachinko machine 110, the currently set support mode is grasped, and the electric accessory is based on the grasped result. The drive control of 34a is performed.

  In the subsequent step S409, it is determined whether or not the next normal process execution timing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the next normal processing execution timing (steps S410 and S411). That is, in step S410, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204. In step S411, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S401 to S408 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next normal process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, it is possible to update the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1) at random by repeatedly executing the update of the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time. The variation type counter CS can also be updated at random.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game times control process of step S404 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

  In the game times control process shown in FIG. 14, first, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode flag (opening / closing execution state information) is stored in the opening / closing execution mode flag storage area (opening / closing execution state information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. The opening / closing execution mode flag is stored when the gaming state is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode in the gaming state transition process described later, and is erased when the opening / closing execution mode is ended in the gaming state transition process.

  When in the open / close execution mode, the game is executed without executing any of the processes after step S502, that is, the game times starting process in steps S502 to S505 and the game times progressing process in steps S506 to S510. End control processing. In other words, in the open / close execution mode, the game times are not started regardless of whether or not a winning for the operation ports 33 and 34 has occurred.

  If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, it is determined in step S502 whether the main display unit 43 is in a variable display. In this determination, it is determined whether or not the variable display flag (variable display information) is stored in the variable display flag storage area (variable display information storage unit) in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. To do. The variable display flag is stored when the main display unit 43 starts the variable display, and is deleted when the variable display ends.

  If the main display unit 43 is not in a variable display, the process proceeds to a game turn start process in steps S503 to S505. In the game turn starting process, first, in step S503, it is determined whether or not the reserved storage number CRN is “0”. The case where the reserved storage number CRN is “0” means that the hold information is not stored in the hold ball storage area 232. Accordingly, the game turn control process is terminated as it is.

  If the reserved storage number CRN is not “0”, a data setting process for setting the data stored in the holding area of the holding ball storage area 232 for variable display is executed in step S504, and further in step S505. The variation start process for starting the variation display on the main display unit 43 and the variation display on the symbol display device 41 is executed. When the variation start process is executed, the game times control process is terminated.

  Here, the data setting process in step S504 and the change start process in step S505 will be described in detail below.

  First, the data setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S601, the data in the order storage area OR is shifted. In this data shift process, the data stored in the first to eighth areas is shifted in order to the lower area side. The data in the first area is shifted to the execution area and the second area → the second area. Data in each area is shifted, such as 1 area, 3rd area → 2nd area, 4th area → 3rd area.

  In a succeeding step S602, it is determined whether or not a hold flag is stored in the data of the order storage area OR shifted to the execution area in the step S601. When the hold flag is not stored, the current game round is executed based on the winning to the upper operation port 33, and the data setting process for the first result display unit in steps S603 to S607 is executed. . When the hold flag is stored, the current game round is executed based on the winning to the lower operation port 34, and the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S608 to S612 is executed. .

  In the data setting process for the first result display section, first, in step S603, the first start-reserved ball storage number RaN of the first result display section reservation area Ra is decremented by one. In subsequent step S604, the reserved storage number CRN is decremented by one. Thereafter, in step S605, the data stored in the first area of the first result display area reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. In step S605, a process for shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first result display area reservation area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side, clearing the data in the first area, and from the second area to the first area, Data in each area is shifted, such as 3 area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on.

  In subsequent step S606, the second result display section flag (second result display section information) is stored in the second result display section flag storage area (second result display section information storage means) provided in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. If it is stored, it is erased, and if it is not stored, its state is maintained. The second result display unit flag is information for specifying whether the start of the current variation display is the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS.

  In the subsequent step S607, a shift command (shift occurrence information), which is information for causing the audio lamp control device 82, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted is set. In this case, from the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203, information indicating that the reserved area to which the data is shifted this time corresponds to the reserved area Ra for the first result display section, that is, the upper operating port 33. A shift time command including information indicating that it is compatible is selected, and the selected shift time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82. Thereafter, the data setting process is terminated.

  The shift command set in step S607 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 13). The voice lamp control device 82 executes a process for changing the display on the first hold lamp unit 45 of the variable display unit 36 in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold based on the received shift command. In addition, the sound lamp control device 82 outputs the received shift command to the display control device 212. Based on the received shift command, the display control device 212 updates the display of the hold display area Ga in correspondence with the decrease in the hold number.

  In the data setting process for the second result display section, first, in step S608, the second start reserved ball storage number RbN of the second result display section reservation area Rb is decremented by one. In subsequent step S609, the reserved storage number CRN is decremented by one.

  Thereafter, in step S610, the data stored in the first area of the second result display area reservation area Rb is moved to the execution area AE. In step S610, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second result display area reservation area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side, clearing the data in the first area, and from the second area to the first area, Data in each area is shifted, such as 3 area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on.

  In subsequent step S611, the second result display section flag (second result display section information) is stored in the second result display section flag storage area (second result display section information storage means) provided in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. If not stored, the second result display section flag is stored, and if stored, the state is maintained.

  In the subsequent step S612, a shift command (shift occurrence information) is set, which is information for causing the audio lamp control device 82, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203, it corresponds to the information indicating that the reserved area to which the current data is shifted corresponds to the reserved area Rb for the second result display section, that is, corresponds to the lower operation port 34. The command at the time of shift including the information indicating that the command is being performed is selected, and the selected command at the time of shift is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82. Thereafter, the data setting process is terminated.

  The shift command set in step S612 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 13). The voice lamp control device 82 executes a process for changing the display on the second holding lamp unit 46 of the variable display unit 36 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holdings based on the received shift command. In addition, the sound lamp control device 82 outputs the received shift command to the display control device 212. Based on the received shift command, the display control device 212 updates the display of the hold display area Ga in correspondence with the decrease in the hold number.

  Next, the fluctuation start process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the variation start process, first, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the winning / losing lottery mode is a high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a high probability mode flag (high probability state information) is stored in a high probability mode flag storage area (high probability state information storage means) provided in various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. To do. The high probability mode flag is stored at the end of the opening / closing execution mode related to the occurrence of the probability variation jackpot result, and is deleted when a predetermined number of games have elapsed without entering the opening / closing execution mode.

  If it is determined in step S701 that the mode is not the high probability mode, in step S702, determination processing corresponding to the low probability mode is executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value acquired from the one updated by the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the jackpot value information corresponding to the low probability mode shown in FIG. To do. On the other hand, if the mode is the high probability mode in step S701, the success / failure determination process corresponding to the high probability mode is executed in step S703. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value acquired from the one updated by the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the jackpot value information corresponding to the high probability mode shown in FIG. To do. If the process of step S702 or step S703 is executed, the process proceeds to step S704.

  In step S704, it is determined whether or not the result of the success / failure determination process in step S702 or step S703 is a big win. In the case of a big win, in steps S705 to S710, a process for setting a game result in the case of a big win and a process for setting a stop result are executed.

  In step S705, distribution determination is performed with reference to the distribution table (FIG. 9). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of the 6R probability variation jackpot result or the numerical range of the 16R probability variation jackpot result.

After the process of step S705, it is determined in step S706 whether or not the game result distributed in step S705 is a 6R probability variation jackpot result. If it is a 6R probability variation jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S707. In step S707, 6R jackpot stop result setting processing is executed. In the 6R jackpot stop result setting process, the stop result table corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is referred to the 6R jackpot stop result table in the stop result table storage area 224. The address information is acquired, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204. Thereafter, in step S708, the 6R jackpot flag is stored in the jackpot flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204.
On the other hand, if it is not the 6R probability variation jackpot result in step S706, the process proceeds to step S709. In step S709, referring to the stop result table for 16R jackpot in the stop result table storage area 224, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is acquired. The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204. Thereafter, in step S710, the 16R jackpot flag is stored in the jackpot flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204.

  If it is not a big win in step S704, the process proceeds to step S711. In step S711, for the out-of-game time for setting which stop result is displayed on the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS in the current game round that results in a detachment result. Execute the stop result setting process. In the outage stop result setting process, referring to the outage stop result table in the stop result table storage area 224, stop result data corresponding to the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE The address information is acquired, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204.

  If the process of step S708, step S710, or step S711 is executed, the process proceeds to step S712. In step S712, a variable display time setting process is executed. Specifically, the variable display time is set in the variable display time counter area of the RAM 204. The value of the variable display time counter area is subtracted every predetermined period, and when the value becomes “0”, the game round is ended.

  In the variation display time setting process, the value of the variation type counter CS is acquired, and the variation display time corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS is selected from the variation display time table stored in the ROM 203. . In the variable display time table, the one corresponding to the jackpot winning and the one corresponding to the losing result are set. Thereby, even if the value of the variation type counter CS is the same, the variation display time can be varied depending on the game result. As a result, it is possible to diversify the pattern of the variable display time that is set.

  After step S712, it is determined in step S713 whether or not the second result display unit flag is stored in the RAM 204. If the second result display section flag is not stored, the first variation command is set in step S714. The first change command includes information indicating that the current game time is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning to the upper working port 33, and information on whether or not reach has occurred, and Contains variable display time information. On the other hand, if the second result display section flag is stored, a second variation command is set in step S715. The second change command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning to the lower working port 34, and information on whether or not reach has occurred, and Contains variable display time information.

  After executing the process of step S714 or step S715, a type command is set in step S716. The type command includes game result information. That is, the type command includes information on 16R probability variation jackpot results, information on 6R probability variation jackpot results, and the like as game result information.

  The variation command and type command set in steps S714 to S716 are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 82 in the external output process (step S401) in the normal process (FIG. 13). The sound lamp control device 82 determines the light emission mode of the display lamp unit 63 and the sound output mode of the speaker unit 64 based on the received change command and type command, and performs various operations so that the determined contents are executed. Control the equipment. The voice lamp control device 82 transmits the received change command and type command to the display control device 212 as they are. The display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the symbol variation display corresponding to each game time is performed based on the variation command and the type command.

  After that, in step S717, the display of variation of the picture is started in the result display unit corresponding to the current game time out of the first result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS. In this case, when the second result display unit flag is not stored in the RAM 204, the result display unit corresponding to the current game time is specified as the first result display unit AS, and the second result display unit flag is set. If stored, the result display unit corresponding to the current game time is specified as the second result display unit BS.

  Returning to the description of the game times control process (FIG. 14), when the main display unit 43 is in a variable display, the game times progress process of steps S506 to S510 is executed. In the game time progression process, first, in step S506, it is determined whether or not the current game time variation display time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable display time information stored in the variable display time counter area of the RAM 204 is “0”. As described above, the value of the variable display time information is set in the variable display time setting process (step S712). The set value of the variable display time information is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10) is started.

  If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S507. In the process for variable display, the display mode in the result display section related to the current game time is changed. Thereafter, the game times control process is terminated.

  If the change display time has elapsed, change end processing is executed in step S508. In the change end process, the address information stored in the RAM 204 in any of the processes of step S707, step S709, or step S711 is specified, and the picture mode corresponding to the address information is the result display section related to the current game round. The result display section is controlled to be displayed at.

  In the subsequent step S509, a change end command is set. The change end command set in step S509 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in the external output process (step S401) in the normal process (FIG. 13). The sound lamp control device 82 ends the effect in the game round based on the received variation end command. Further, the change end command is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 82 to the display control device 212, and the display control device 212 receives the change end command, thereby confirming and displaying the combination of the final stop symbols in the game round ( Final stop display).

  Thereafter, in step S510, a game number counter subtraction process is executed. Specifically, each of the values of the high probability game number counter area and the high frequency game number counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 is decremented by one. The high probability game number counter area is used to determine whether or not it is time to end the high probability mode when the high probability mode is set. The high frequency game frequency counter area is used to determine whether or not it is the timing to end the high frequency support mode when the high frequency support mode is set. When the game number counter subtraction process is executed, the game number control process is terminated.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the first gaming state transition process of step S405 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

  In the first gaming state transition process shown in FIG. 17, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S802, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the variation display of the picture in the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS of one game time is finished. When it is not the timing when the variable display is finished, the first gaming state transition process is finished as it is.

  If it is the timing when the variable display is finished, it is determined in step S803 whether or not the game result of the current game time corresponds to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether either the 16R jackpot flag or the 6R jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 204. If none of the flags is stored, the first game state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If any of the above flags is stored, a round display start process for notifying the type of the current opening / closing execution mode is executed in step S804. In the round display start process, first, address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204 is confirmed. Then, stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 203, and the content of the number of rounds is confirmed from the specified stop result data. Thereafter, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display unit RS in the main display unit 43. As a result, the round display section RS displays information about the round related to the output.

  In a succeeding step S805, it is determined whether or not the current opening / closing execution mode corresponds to the 16R jackpot result. Specifically, it is determined whether either the 16R jackpot flag or the 6R jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 204. If the 16R jackpot flag is not stored, “6” is set in the round counter area RC provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in step S806. The round counter area RC is for counting the number of times that the big prize opening 32a is opened, and for specifying the number of rounds in the opening / closing execution mode for the opening of the big prize opening 32a this time. is there. On the other hand, if the 16R jackpot flag is stored, “16” is set in the round counter area RC in step S807.

  After executing the process of step S806 or step S807, an opening command is set in step S808. The set opening command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in the external output process (step S401) in the normal process (FIG. 13). This opening command includes information indicating whether the result is a 16R probability variation jackpot result or a 6R probability variation jackpot result. Based on the received opening command, the sound lamp control device 82 determines the contents of the effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed. In addition, the opening command is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 82 to the display control device 212, and the display control device 212 receives the opening command, thereby displaying corresponding to the current opening / closing execution mode (for example, moving image display). Display control of the symbol display device 41 is performed. After executing the process of step S808, the first gaming state transition process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is in the opening / closing execution mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S801, and a big prize opening opening / closing process is executed in step S809. The big prize opening / closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening 32a is being opened. Specifically, this determination is performed based on the driving state of the variable prize driving unit 32c. If the big prize opening 32a is not open, it is determined in step S902 whether the value of the round counter area RC is “0”, and whether the value of the timer area T is “0” in step S903. Determine.

  When the value of the round counter area RC is “0” or when the value of the timer area T is not “0”, the big prize winning opening / closing process is finished as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter area RC is not “0” and the value of the timer area T is “0”, the process proceeds to step S904, and the variable prize driving unit 32c is driven to open the big prize opening 32a. State.

  In the subsequent step S905, setting processing for each round is executed. Specifically, “15000” (that is, 30 sec) is set in the timer area T provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in order to measure the opening and closing timing for opening and closing the special winning opening 32a. The count value set here is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10) is started, that is, every 2 msec. In the setting process for each round, “10” is set in the winning counter area PC provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in order to count the number of winning game balls to the big winning opening 32a.

  In a succeeding step S906, a round specifying process is executed. The round specifying process specifies how many times the current big winning opening 32a is opened, and specifies how many rounds the opening of the current big winning opening 32a is in the opening / closing execution mode. is there. More specifically, the current round counter area RC value and whether a 16R jackpot flag or a six round jackpot flag is stored specify how many rounds this time is.

  Thereafter, in step S907, a release command including information on the number of rounds specified in step S906 is set. The set release command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in the external output process (step S401) in the normal process (FIG. 13). In addition, the release command includes information on which one of the 6R probability variation jackpot result and the 16R probability variation jackpot result is included, and the sound lamp control device 82 outputs the received release command to the display control device 212. . By receiving the opening command, the display control device 212 can identify the round number in the opening / closing execution mode and which jackpot result the current opening / closing execution mode is based on. When the process of step S907 is executed, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated.

  In step S901, if the big prize opening is open, the process proceeds to step S908, and it is determined whether or not the value of the timer area T is "0". If the value of the timer area T is not “0”, it is determined in step S909 whether or not a game ball has won the big winning opening 32a based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable winning device 32. If no winning has occurred, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if a winning has occurred, the value of the winning counter area PC is decremented by 1 in step S910, and then it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter area PC is “0” in step S911. If it is not “0”, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated.

  If the value of the timer area T is “0” in step S908, or if the value of the winning counter area PC is “0” in step S911, it means that the special winning opening closing condition is established. In such a case, in step S912, the variable winning drive unit 32c is set in a non-driven state to close the special winning opening 32a.

  In the subsequent step S913, the value of the round counter area RC is decremented by 1, and in step S914, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter area RC is “0”. When the value of the round counter area RC is “0”, the main prize winning opening / closing process is finished as it is.

  If the value of the round counter area RC is not “0” in step S914, the process proceeds to step S915. In step S915, “1000” (that is, 2 sec) is set in the timer area T. Thereafter, a closing command is set in step S916, and the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. The set closing command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in the external output process (step S401) in the normal process (FIG. 13). This close command includes information on whether it is a 6R probability variation jackpot result or a 16R probability variation jackpot result. Based on the received closing command, the sound lamp control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the high-frequency winning mode, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed.

  Returning to the description of the first game state transition process (FIG. 17), if the special winning opening / closing process is executed, the process proceeds to step S810. In step S810, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter area RC is “0”. If the value of the round counter area RC is not “0”, the first gaming state transition process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the round counter area RC is “0”, an ending command is set in step S811. The set ending command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in the external output process (step S401) in the normal process (FIG. 13). The sound lamp control device 82 ends the effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode based on receiving the ending command. In addition, the ending command is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 82 to the display control device 212, and the display control device 212 receives the ending command, thereby terminating the display corresponding to the current opening / closing execution mode. Thereafter, the display control device 212 starts the display after the opening / closing execution mode ends. In the pachinko machine 10, when the opening / closing execution mode ends, the high probability mode is set as the lottery mode and the high frequency support mode is set as the support mode. The display control device 212 controls the symbol display device 41 to start display corresponding to the state in which the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are set when the open / close execution mode ends.

  Thereafter, in step S812, a transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is executed. Here, the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1001, flag erasure processing is executed. Specifically, each of the opening / closing execution mode flag, the jackpot flag (6R jackpot flag or 16R jackpot flag), the high probability mode flag, and the high frequency support flag are deleted. Further, in the flag erasing process, the determined flag and the coincidence information flag stored in the confirmation process for each holding notice are erased. In this erasing process, a process for clearing the flag storage area in which each flag is stored is executed. If no flag is stored, the state is maintained.

  In the subsequent step S1002, the high probability mode flag is stored in the high probability mode flag storage area of the various flag storage areas 235. Thereafter, in step S1003, “5” is set in the high probability game number counter area of the various counter areas 234.

  In step S1004, the high frequency support flag is stored in the high frequency support flag storage area of the various flag storage areas 235. Thereafter, in step S1005, “50” is set in the high-frequency game number counter area of the various counter areas 234. When the process of step S1005 is executed, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode is ended.

  Returning to the description of the first gaming state transition process (FIG. 17), after the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode in step S812 is terminated, a round display termination process is performed in step S813. In this process, the display control of the round display unit RS is terminated so that the round display unit RS in the main display unit 43 is turned off.

  Thereafter, in step S814, after the completion processing of the opening / closing execution mode is executed, the gaming state transition processing is ended. In the opening / closing execution mode end processing, if the 6R jackpot flag and the 16R jackpot flag are stored, they are deleted, and if not already stored, the state is maintained.

<Second gaming state transition process>
Next, the second game state transition process in step S406 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the current lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag is stored in the high probability mode flag storage area of the various flag storage areas 235. If the high probability mode flag is stored, the high probability mode flag is stored. judge. If the high probability mode flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S1102. In step S1102, it is determined whether or not the value of the high probability game count counter area in the various counter areas 234 is “0”. When the value of the high probability game number counter area is not “0”, the second game state transition process is terminated.

  If the value of the high probability game number counter is “0” in step S1102, the process proceeds to step S1103. In step S1103, the high probability mode flag is deleted. In the subsequent step S1104, the low probability mode flag is stored in the low probability mode flag storage area of the various flag storage areas 235. Thereafter, a low probability command is set in step S1105, and the second gaming state transition process is terminated. The low probability command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in the external output process (step S401) of the normal process (FIG. 13). The sound lamp control device 82 transmits the low probability command to the display control device 212. When receiving a low probability command, the display control device 212 controls the symbol display device 41 to start display in the low probability mode.

  When the open / close execution mode ends, “5” is set in the high probability game number counter area. Further, the value of the high probability game number counter area is subtracted when one game number is completed in the game number control process. By executing the processing of step S1102 to step S1104, the high probability mode is ended and the low probability mode is set when five game times have elapsed after the opening / closing execution mode is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is not the high probability mode in step S1101, the process proceeds to step S1106. In step S1106, it is determined whether the high-frequency support mode is set. Specifically, it is determined whether the high frequency support flag is stored in the high frequency support flag storage area of the various flag storage areas 235, and the high frequency support mode is set when the high frequency support flag is stored. Is determined. If it is not the high frequency support mode, the second game state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If it is in the high frequency support mode in step S1106, the process proceeds to step S1107. In step S1107, it is determined whether or not the value of the high-frequency game number counter area in the various counter areas 234 is “0”. If the value of the high-frequency game number counter area is not “0”, the second game state transition process is terminated as it is.

  When the value of the high frequency game number counter area is “0” in step S1107, the process proceeds to step S1108. In step S1108, the high frequency support flag is deleted, and in step S1109, the low frequency support flag is stored in the low frequency support flag storage area of the various flag storage areas 235. In the subsequent step S1110, a low frequency command is set and the second gaming state transition process is terminated. The low frequency command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in the external output process (step S401) of the normal process (FIG. 13). The sound lamp control device 82 transmits the low frequency command to the display control device 212. When receiving a low frequency command, the display control device 212 controls the symbol display device 41 to start display in the low frequency support mode.

  When the opening / closing execution mode ends, “50” is set in the high probability game number counter area. Further, the value of the high probability game number counter area is subtracted when one game number is completed in the game number control process. By executing the processing from step S1107 to step S1109, the high frequency support mode is ended and the low frequency support mode is set when 50 game times have elapsed after the open / close execution mode has ended. .

  As described above, the high probability mode ends when five game times have elapsed after the opening / closing execution mode ends. For this reason, when the high frequency support mode ends and the low frequency support mode is set, the lottery mode is already in the low probability mode. For this reason, when the process of step S1108 and step S1109 is performed, a game state will be in a normal state. Moreover, the display control apparatus 212 controls the symbol display apparatus 41 to start the display in a normal state, when a low frequency command is received.

<About reservation notice>
Here, in this pachinko machine 10, the reservation notice suggesting the content of the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display portion and the hold area Rb for the second result display portion of the hold ball storage area 232, It is configured to be performed at a timing before the game times related to the hold information are started, specifically, in the opening / closing execution mode. Such a hold notice is performed by executing predetermined control in the display control device 212 based on a predetermined command transmitted from the main control device 81. The electrical configuration and processing configuration related to the reservation notice will be described below.

<Electrical configuration related to pending notice>
First, the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 82 and the display control device 212 will be described below with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

  An MPU 242 is mounted on an audio lamp control board 241 provided in the audio lamp control device 82. The MPU 242 is a ROM 243 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 242 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 243 is executed. A RAM 244, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are incorporated. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 243 and the RAM 244 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 242, and each may be made into a chip individually. The same applies to MPUs of other control devices.

  The MPU 242 is provided with an input port and an output port. A main controller 81 is connected to the input side of the MPU 242. From the main control device 81, the game time control commands (game time control information) such as the change command, the type command, and the change end command described above are received. Also, a hold display control command (hold display control information) such as a shift command and a hold command to be described later is received.

  As described above, the holding lamp portions 45 and 46 provided in the variable display unit 36 and the display lamp portion 63 and the speaker portion 64 provided in the front door frame 14 are connected to the output side of the MPU 242. In addition, a display control device 212 is connected. In this case, the various commands are transmitted to the display control device 212 while maintaining the information form as it is.

  The display control device 212 includes a display control board 251 on which an MPU 252 that is an element in which a program ROM 253 and a work RAM 254 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 255, a character ROM 256, and a video RAM 257 are mounted. It has. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 253 and the work RAM 254 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 252, but each may be made into a chip individually.

  The MPU 252 analyzes various commands received from the main control device 81 via the sound lamp control device 82 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 255 (specifically, internal commands for the VDP 255). Generation). In addition, the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 controls the special display device 48 in addition to the control of the VDP 255. Specifically, the MPU 252 controls the special display device 48 to execute the hold notice.

  The program ROM 253 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 252 and fixed value data, and JPEG format image data for a background image is also stored and held. A part of the fixed value data is stored in advance in the lottery table storage area 261 of the program ROM 253. The details of the area 261 will be described together with the description of the processing executed by the MPU 252.

  The work RAM 254 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 252. These work data, flags and the like are stored in the respective areas 262 to 263 of the work RAM 254. The details of these areas 262 to 263 will be described together with the description of the processing executed by the MPU 252.

  The VDP 255 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. Since the VDP 255 is an IC chip, it is also referred to as a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 255 should be said to be a microcomputer chip with a dedicated firmware for drawing processing. The VDP 255 adjusts the timings of the MPU 252, the video RAM 257, and the like to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the image data to be stored in the video RAM 257 from the character ROM 256 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

  The character ROM 256 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 256 holds bit map format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bit map image, and the like. In the character ROM 256, a holding image data storage area 269 in which image data to be displayed in the holding display areas Ga and Gb of the symbol display device 41 is set as a part of the data.

  It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 256 and store the image data and the like in a shared manner with each character ROM 256. Further, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the JPEG image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 253 is stored in the character ROM 256.

  The video RAM 257 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 257. In the video RAM 257, a hold display area 271 corresponding to the hold display area Ga is set, and the MPU 252 receives various commands (shift command and hold) received from the main control device 81 via the audio lamp control device 82. Various information is set in the hold display area 271 based on the command or the like.

  In the hold display area 271, the first unit area 272, the second unit area 273, the third unit area 274, the first unit area 272, and the unit hold display areas Ga 1 to Ga 8 in the hold display area Ga have a one-to-one correspondence. A four unit area 275, a fifth unit area 276, a sixth unit area 277, a seventh unit area 278, and an eighth unit area 279 are set. In the unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga8 corresponding to the hold display area Ga, images corresponding to the data written in the unit areas 272 to 279 are displayed. In the unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga8 corresponding to the unit areas 272 to 279 for which no data is set, no image is displayed or a background image on the display screen of the symbol display device 41 is displayed.

<Regarding the processing related to the hold notice executed by the main controller 81>
Next, processing related to the hold notice executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 will be described. As a process related to the hold notice in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81, a confirmation process for the first hold notice and a confirmation process for the second hold notice are set.

<Confirmation process for first hold notice>
First, the confirmation process for the first hold notice in step S407 of the normal process (FIG. 13) will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the confirmation process for the first hold notice.

  First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode flag is stored in the opening / closing execution mode flag storage area, and when the opening / closing execution mode flag is stored, it is determined that the opening / closing execution mode is being performed. If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the confirmation process for the first pending notice is terminated.

  If it is in the opening / closing execution mode in step S1201, the process proceeds to step S1202. In step S1202, it is determined whether or not the first match information flag is stored in the determined flag storage area. The determined flag storage area is an area for storing a determined flag and a first match information flag, which will be described later. The first match information flag is a flag that is stored when it is specified that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is stored in the confirmation process for the first hold notice. When the first coincidence information flag is stored, the confirmation process for the first hold notice is ended.

  If the first match information flag is not stored in step S1202, the process proceeds to step S1203. In step S1203, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, until the execution determination process in the fluctuation start process is executed five times, out of the hold information to be the target of the determination process, the determination process of the determination process in the confirmation process for the advance notice. Identify pending information that is not targeted. More specifically, after the open / close execution mode is completed based on the hold flag stored in the order storage area OR and the presence / absence of hold information in each of the hold areas Ra and Rb, the validity determination process in the change start process is executed five times. Until this is done, the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process is specified. Then, with reference to the determined flag storage area provided in the various flag storage areas 235, it is determined whether or not the hold information that is not the target of the determination process of the hold notice is stored.

  Here, a supplementary description will be given of the method for identifying the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the variation start process in the process of step S1203. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the order in which the hold information is the target of the success / failure determination process in the change start process is held regardless of which of the operating openings 33 and 34 is a winning prize. It is the order in which information was acquired. In the process of step S1203, first, the order in which the game balls win the respective operation ports 33 and 34 is specified from the presence or absence of the hold flag in the order storage area OR. From the presence / absence of the hold information in each hold area Ra, Rb and the number of each hold information, any hold information is determined until the current determination process in the change start process is executed five times after the current opening / closing execution mode is completed. Then, it is specified whether or not it is a target of the validity determination process.

  A supplementary explanation will be given for the determined flag storage area. The determined flag storage area stores various flags corresponding to the first area to the fourth area in the first result display area reservation area Ra and the first to fourth areas in the second result display area reservation area Rb. Each area 235 is provided. The determined flag is stored when the stored hold information is the target of the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for holding notice. For example, when the hold information stored in the first area in the second result display section hold area Rb is the target of the determination process in the confirmation process for hold notice, the determined flag corresponding to the first area is stored. The determined flag is stored in the area. In step S1203, whether or not the hold information that is not the target of the determination process of the hold notice in the hold notice confirmation process is stored by checking whether or not the hold information is stored and whether or not the determined flag is stored. Have confirmed. Note that the stored determined flag is deleted in step S1001 in the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, as described above. In addition, one area in the determined flag storage area is configured by a plurality of bits so that the determined flag and the first match information flag can be stored.

  In subsequent step S1204, as a result of the confirmation processing in step S1203, it is determined whether or not the hold information that is not the target of the determination process of the hold notice confirmation process is stored. If hold information that is not the target of the determination process is stored, the determination process in steps S1205 to S1208 is executed. If the hold information that is not the target of the determination process is not stored, the confirmation process for the first hold notice is ended as it is.

  In step S1205, the big hit determination information among the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the hold notice in this process, that is, the information acquired from the information updated by the big hit random number counter C1 is grasped. . The hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the hold notice is stored first among the hold information that is not the target of the determination process in the confirmation process for the hold notice confirmed in step S1203. It will be.

  After that, in step S1206, the determined flag is stored in the area corresponding to the hold information that is the target of the determination process of the hold notice in the hold notice confirmation process. For example, in the case where the hold information that is the target of the determination process of whether or not in the confirmation process for holding notice is stored in the second area, the determined flag is stored in the determined flag storage area corresponding to the second area. The

  In a succeeding step S1207, a success / failure determination process corresponding to the high probability mode is executed. In the confirmation process for the first hold notice, the hold notice for the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process until the success / failure determination process in the change start process is executed five times after the open / close execution mode is completed. This is the target of the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process. Here, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the high probability mode is set until five game times have passed. In other words, in the confirmation process for the first hold notice, after the open / close execution mode ends, the high probability after the open / close execution mode ends so as to target the hold information that is the object of the determination of success / failure in the high probability mode. The variation start process corresponding to the high probability mode is executed in the variation start process so as to target the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the variation start process until the upper limit number of games for which the mode is set elapses. The number of pending information is the same as the upper limit count. For this reason, in step S1207, the success / failure determination process corresponding to the high probability mode is executed.

  In a succeeding step S1208, it is determined whether or not the result of the success / failure determination process in the step S1207 corresponds to the big win. If it is not compatible with the big win, the confirmation process for the first hold notice is ended as it is.

  If it is determined in step S1208 that the jackpot is won, the process proceeds to step S1209. In step S1209, the first match information flag is stored in the determined flag storage area. Specifically, the first coincidence information flag is stored so as to overwrite the area in which the determined flag that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the current hold notice is overwritten. Further, by storing the first match information flag, an affirmative determination is made in step S1202 in the confirmation process for the first hold notice after this time, and the execution of the processes after step S1203 is restricted. By executing the process of step S1202, it is possible to prevent a plurality of first matching information flags from being stored in one opening / closing execution mode.

  If the process of step S1209 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1210. In step S1210, a first match information command is set. This first coincidence information command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in the external output process of the normal process (FIG. 13). The sound lamp control device 82 transmits the first coincidence information command to the display control device 212. The first match information command includes information indicating which hold information matches the jackpot information. Thereby, the display control apparatus 212 can grasp | ascertain how many game winning wins are after the opening / closing execution mode is complete | finished. When the first coincidence information command is set in step S1210, the confirmation process for the first hold notice is ended.

<Confirmation process for second hold notice>
Next, the confirmation process for the second hold notice in step S408 of the normal process (FIG. 13) will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a confirmation process for second hold notice.

  First, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode flag is stored in the opening / closing execution mode flag storage area, and when the opening / closing execution mode flag is stored, it is determined that the opening / closing execution mode is being performed. If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the confirmation process for the second reservation notice is ended.

  If it is determined in step S1301 that the open / close execution mode is in progress, the process advances to step S1302. In step S1302, it is determined whether or not the second match information flag is stored in the determined flag storage area. The second match information flag is a flag that is stored when it is specified that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is stored in the confirmation process for the second hold notice. If the second match information flag is stored, the confirmation process for the second hold notice is ended as it is.

  If the second match information flag is not stored in step S1302, the process proceeds to step S1303. In step S1303, it is determined whether or not the first match information flag is stored in the determined flag storage area. If the first match information flag is not stored, the confirmation process for the second pending notice is terminated without executing the processes after step S1304. By executing the process of step S1303, it is specified that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is stored in the confirmation process for the second hold notice in the second hold notice confirmation process. It will be executed when it is done.

  If the first match information flag is stored in step S1303, the process proceeds to step S1304. In step S1304, undecided hold among the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process until the success / failure determination process in the variation start process is executed five times in view of the hold information corresponding to the storage of the first match information flag. Execute information confirmation processing. Specifically, in the area corresponding to the target of the change start process until the change start process is executed five times from the area where the first match information flag is stored in the determined flag storage area. An area in which the determined flag is not stored is specified. Then, by grasping the presence or absence of the hold information corresponding to the area, it is grasped whether or not the hold information that is not the target of the determination process in the confirmation process for the hold notice is stored.

  In the subsequent step S1305, it is determined whether or not the hold information that is not the target of the determination process in the hold notice confirmation process is stored as a result of the check process in step S1304. When the hold information that is not the target of the determination process is stored, the determination process in steps S1306 to S1309 is executed. When the hold information that is not the target of the determination process is not stored, the confirmation process for the second hold notice is finished as it is. Note that the processing from step S1306 to step S1309 is the same as step S1205 to step S1208 in the confirmation processing for the first hold notice described above, and thus description thereof is omitted.

  If it is determined in step S1309 that the jackpot is won, the process proceeds to step S1310. In step S1310, the second match information flag is stored in the determined flag storage area. Specifically, the second coincidence information flag is stored so as to overwrite the area in which the determined flag that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the current hold notice is overwritten. In addition, by storing the second match information flag, an affirmative determination is made in step S1302 in the confirmation process for the second hold notice after this time, and execution of the processes after step S1303 is restricted.

  If the process of step S1310 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1311. In step S1311, a second match information command is set. This second coincidence information command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in the external output process (step S401) of the normal process (FIG. 13). The sound lamp control device 82 transmits the coincidence information command to the display control device 212. The second match information command includes information indicating which hold information matches the jackpot information. Thereby, the display control apparatus 212 can grasp | ascertain how many game winning wins are after the opening / closing execution mode is complete | finished. When the second coincidence information command is set in step S1311, the confirmation process for the second hold notice is ended.

  In step S1308 in the confirmation process for the second hold notice, a determination process corresponding to the high probability mode is executed as in step S1207 in the check process for the first hold notice. When the hold information corresponding to the area in which the first coincidence information flag is stored becomes the target of the success / failure determination process in the change start process, the opening / closing execution mode is entered. After the opening / closing execution mode ends, the high probability mode is set until five game times have passed. Therefore, in the confirmation process for the second hold notice, after the opening / closing execution mode that has been shifted based on the hold information corresponding to the area in which the first match information flag is stored has been determined to be true or false is ended. In addition, the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the variation start process in the high probability mode is the target of the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the hold notice.

<Regarding the processing related to the hold notice executed by the MPU 252 of the display control device 212>
Next, the processing related to the hold notice executed by the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 24 to 26 and the explanatory diagram showing how the hold notice of FIG. 27 is executed. In the pachinko machine 10, the special effect is executed as the hold notice in the opening / closing execution mode in which the coincidence information command is set by the main control device 81. Specifically, the timing at which the opening / closing execution mode is set again after the opening / closing execution mode ends and the timing at which the hold notice in the opening / closing execution mode is executed are associated with each other. Specifically, the round in which the special effect in the opening / closing execution mode is executed is associated with the game times that are again in the opening / closing execution mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. For example, when a special effect is executed in the third round in the opening / closing execution mode, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, a big win is won in the third game round. The player can grasp the timing when the opening / closing execution mode is entered again after the current opening / closing execution mode ends by grasping the timing when the special effect is executed.

<Match information reception process>
First, the coincidence information reception process executed by the display control device 212 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The coincidence information reception process is a process for determining whether or not the first coincidence information command or the second coincidence information command is received, and is executed at a cycle of 2 msec. In the display control device 212, the received command is stored in the command storage area of the work RAM 254 by the command storage process activated when the command is received. The command storage area is configured as a ring buffer that can store a plurality of commands individually and can be read from the previously stored commands. Even when a plurality of commands are received at the same time, they are stored in the command storage area. Processing corresponding to each command can be executed satisfactorily.

  In step S1401, it is determined whether a first match information command has been received. Specifically, it is determined whether the command stored in the command storage area and the current read target command is the first match information command.

  If the first match information command has been received, the process proceeds to step S1402. In step S1402, the first round information corresponding to the first match information is stored. As described above, the first match information command includes information indicating which hold information corresponds to the jackpot information. In step S1402, which holding information corresponds to the jackpot information from the first match information command, specifically, which game number of games will be the jackpot winning after the current opening / closing execution mode ends. Identify. Then, the first round information indicating which round should be executed in advance from the specified result is stored in the first round information storage area of the work RAM 254. When the process of step S1402 is executed, the match information reception process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1401 that the first match information command has not been received, the process advances to step S1403. In step S1403, it is determined whether a second match information command has been received. Specifically, it is determined whether the command stored in the command storage area and the current read target command is the second match information command. If the second match information command has not been received, the match information reception process ends.

  If the second coincidence information command is received in step S1403, the process proceeds to step S1404. In step S1404, the second round information corresponding to the second match information is stored. As described above, the second match information command includes information indicating which hold information corresponds to the jackpot information. In step S1404, which holding information corresponds to the jackpot information from the second match information command, specifically, which game number of games will be the jackpot winning after the current opening / closing execution mode ends. The identification is performed in the same manner as in step S1402. Then, the second round information indicating in which round the reservation notice should be executed is stored in the second round information storage area of the work RAM 254 from the specified result. When the process of step S1404 is executed, the match information receiving process is terminated.

  Note that the round information stored in step S1402 or step S1404 is deleted when the open / close execution mode ends.

<Round display start processing>
Next, a round display start process executed by the display control device 212 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This round display start process is a process for determining whether or not to execute a special effect as a hold notice when the special winning opening 32a is opened in the open / close execution mode, and when the matching information reception process is completed. Executed.

  In step S1501, it is determined whether an open command is received. Specifically, it is determined whether the command stored in the command storage area and the current read target command is an open command. If the release command has not been received, the round display start process is terminated.

  If the release command is received in step S1501, the process proceeds to step S1502. In step S1502, a round information grasping process is executed. In the round information grasping process, it is grasped whether each of the first round information and the second round information is memorized, and when any one of the round information is memorized, how many rounds the special effect is executed. Know if they are eyes.

  In the subsequent step S1503, it is determined whether or not the current round corresponds to the first round information. Specifically, as described above, the opening command includes information on how many rounds the opening / closing execution mode is. In step S1503, the round information grasped in step S1502 is compared with the information indicating the round number included in the release command, and it is determined whether or not the comparison result is the same.

  If the first round information is not stored, a negative determination is made in step S1503. More specifically, in the opening command, the value of “1” to “6” in the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 6R probability variation jackpot result is indicated in the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot result. Values “1” to “16” are included, respectively. On the other hand, when the first round information is not stored (that is, when the coincidence information command is not received), the value of the first round information storage area is “0”. For this reason, the comparison result of step S1503 does not match.

  If it is determined in step S1503 that the current round corresponds to the first round information, the process advances to step S1504. In step S1504, a special effect corresponding to the first round information is set. By executing the process of step S1504, a special effect is executed in the current round. When the process of step S1504 is executed, the round display start process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S1503 that the current round does not correspond to the first round information, the process advances to step S1505. In step S1505, it is determined whether or not the current opening / closing execution mode is an opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R probability big hit result. If it is not the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot result, that is, if the current opening / closing execution mode is one corresponding to the 6R probability variation jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S1506.

  In step S1506, whether or not the information corresponding to the second matching information is “6” or more, that is, the maximum number of hold information that can be stored from 6 game times to 6 games after the current opening / closing execution mode ends. In the 8th game corresponding to each, it is determined whether or not a big hit is won. If the information corresponding to the second matching information is “6” or more, the process proceeds to step S1507.

  In step S1507, it is determined whether or not the current round is the sixth round. Specifically, it is determined whether information corresponding to the sixth round is included in the received release command. If information corresponding to the sixth round is included, the process proceeds to step S1508. In step S1508, a pending notice execution lottery process is executed. In the pending notice execution lottery process, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to execute a special effect in the current round. Specifically, when a value is acquired from a random number counter for holding advance notice execution lottery provided in the lottery counter area 262 of the work RAM 254, and the acquired value corresponds to execution of the special effect, the holding notice execution lottery Judged to win.

  In a succeeding step S1509, it is determined whether or not the result of the pending notice execution lottery is winning. When the holding notice execution lottery is won, the process proceeds to step S1510. In step S1510, a special effect corresponding to the second round information is set. By executing the process of step S1510, a special effect is executed in the current round. When the process of step S1510 is executed, the round display start process is terminated.

  If it is not compatible with the sixth round in step S1507, or if the pending notice execution lottery is not won in step S1509, the process proceeds to step S1511. In step S1511, a normal effect is set. Thereby, a normal effect different from the special effect is executed in the current round. When the process of step S1511 is executed, the round display start process is terminated.

  If it is the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot result in step S1505, or if the information corresponding to the second match information is smaller than “6” in step S1506, the process proceeds to step S1512.

  In step S1512, it is determined whether or not the current round corresponds to the second round information. Specifically, the round information grasped in step S1502 is compared with the information on the round number included in the release command, and it is determined whether or not the comparison result is the same.

  If the current round is a round corresponding to the second round information in step S1512, the processes of steps S1513 to S1515 are executed. Since the processing from step S1513 to step S1515 is the same as the processing from step S1508 to step S1510, description thereof will be omitted. If it is determined in step S1512 that the current round is not a round corresponding to the second round information, the process proceeds to step S1516. In step S1516, a normal effect is set. When the normal effect is set, the round display start process is terminated.

  In this round display start process, the timing at which the special effect corresponding to the first round information is executed is the number of rounds in the current opening / closing execution mode and the number of games that will be a big win after the current opening / closing execution mode ends. Are associated on a one-to-one basis. Here, the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the first hold notice is performed on the hold information that is the target of the determination process until the success / failure determination process in the change start process is executed five times. In addition, the maximum number of rounds corresponding to the first round information is five. Therefore, in any of the opening / closing execution modes corresponding to the jackpot result of either the 6R probability variation jackpot result or the 16R probability variation jackpot result, there is a round associated with the first round information in a one-to-one manner. As a result, even if the number of rounds in the current opening / closing execution mode and the number of games resulting in the jackpot result after the current opening / closing execution mode are ended in a one-to-one correspondence, no problem occurs.

  In addition, when the information corresponding to the second matching information is smaller than 6 or in the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot result, the timing at which the special effect corresponding to the second round information is executed is the current opening / closing There is a one-to-one correspondence between the number of rounds in the execution mode and the number of games that will be a big hit after the current opening / closing execution mode ends. When the information corresponding to the second match information is smaller than 6, there is a round associated with the second match information on a one-to-one basis regardless of the jackpot result. In addition, since there are up to 16 rounds of opening / closing execution modes corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot result, there are rounds associated with the second match information on a one-to-one basis regardless of the value of the second match information. Become. As a result, there is no problem if the number of rounds in the current open / close execution mode and the number of games resulting in the jackpot result after the current open / close execution mode are terminated one-to-one.

  On the other hand, when the information corresponding to the second matching information is 6 or more and the switching execution mode is corresponding to the 6R probability variation jackpot result, the processing from step S1505 to step S1511 is executed, so that the second round information is supported. The timing at which the special effect is executed corresponds to a plurality of game times for one round. In the determination process of whether or not the confirmation process for the second hold notice is made, the target hold information differs depending on the result of the confirmation process for the first hold notice. Depending on the result of the confirmation process for the first hold notice, after the current opening / closing execution mode ends, the hold information that is the target of the determination process in the variation start process is the jackpot result at the seventh game time or the eighth game time. May be identified as corresponding to. Here, the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 6R probability variation jackpot result ends when the sixth round ends. For this reason, if the number of games and the number of rounds that result in the jackpot after the current opening / closing execution mode is associated with each other on a one-to-one basis, it becomes the target of the success / failure determination process in the variation start process at the seventh game time or the eighth game time. If the hold information corresponds to the jackpot result, the special effect cannot be executed. In this regard, in the present embodiment, the opening / closing execution mode corresponds to the 6R probability variation jackpot result, and when the information corresponding to the second matching information is 6 or more, the special effect is executed in the sixth round. . This is a device for increasing the frequency at which special effects are executed when a jackpot result (6R probability variation jackpot result) having a smaller number of rounds than the maximum number (8) of hold information that can be stored is set. .

  In the pachinko machine 10, in the round corresponding to the first round information, the special effect is executed as the hold notice without executing the hold notice execution lottery process. On the other hand, in the round corresponding to the second round information, the special effect is not executed unless the holding notice execution lottery is won. That is, the frequency at which the special effect corresponding to the first round information is executed is higher than the frequency at which the special effect corresponding to the second round information is executed. In the round corresponding to the first round information, the special performance is always executed, thereby preventing the frequency of the special performance from being excessively low. Also, in the round corresponding to the second round information, a case where a special effect is executed and a case where the special effect is not executed occur, and even if the special effect is not executed, the player can have a sense of expectation for the big win. it can.

  It should be noted that a hold notice execution lottery process for determining whether or not to make a hold notice in a round corresponding to the first round information may be executed. However, the probability of winning in the hold notice execution lottery process is made equal to the probability of winning in the hold notice execution lottery process whether or not to execute the hold notice in the round corresponding to the second round information. Alternatively, it may be higher than the probability.

<Display processing during round for special effects>
The special effect round display processing executed by the display control device 212 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that in describing this processing, an explanatory diagram showing a state in the case where the holding notice in FIG. 27 is executed is appropriately referred to.

  In the special effect round display process, when the round display is being executed, the special display device 48 and the symbol display device 41 are controlled so as to execute the special effect. This special effect round display process is executed when the above-described round display start process ends.

  In step S1601, it is determined whether or not a round is being displayed. Specifically, it is determined whether one of special effects and normal effects is set in the round display start process. If no effect is set, the display process during the special effect round is terminated.

  If any effect is set in step S1601, the process proceeds to step S1602. In step S1602, it is determined whether the set effect is a special effect. If the special effect is not set, the display process during the special effect round is terminated.

  When the effect set in step S1602 is a special effect, the process proceeds to step S1603. In step S1603, it is determined whether it is a light emission effect execution timing. Specifically, the work RAM 254 of the display control device 212 is provided with an elapsed counter area for measuring a period that has elapsed since the start of the round display. Then, after the effect is set in the round display start process, the value of the elapsed counter area is updated every time the special effect round display process is executed. When the value of the elapsed counter area becomes a predetermined value, it is determined that the light emission effect execution timing is reached. Specifically, the value of the elapsed counter area is incremented by 1 each time the special effect round display process is executed, and when the value of the elapsed counter area becomes “1000”, that is, the special effect. When about 2 seconds elapse after the setting of is set, it is determined that the light emission effect execution timing is reached.

  If it is determined that the light emission effect execution timing is reached, the process advances to step S1604. In step S1604, special light emission processing is executed. In the special light emission process, the special display device 48 is controlled to turn on the lamp. When the special light emission process is executed, the state in which the lamp in the special display device 48 shown in FIG. 27A is turned off is switched to the state in which the lamp in the special display device 48 shown in FIG. 27B is turned on. It becomes. When the special light emission process is executed, the display process during the special effect round is ended. The light emission mode in the special display device 48 is the same regardless of whether a special effect corresponding to the first round information or a special effect corresponding to the second round information is set.

  If it is not the light emission effect execution timing in step S1603, the process proceeds to step S1605. In step S1605, it is determined whether it is a special display execution timing. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the progress counter area is “1250”, and when it is “1250”, it is determined that it is the special display execution timing. That is, it is determined that it is the special display execution timing when about 2.5 seconds elapse after the special effect is set. If it is not the special display execution timing in step S1605, the display process during the special effect round is terminated.

  If it is the special display execution timing in step S1605, the process proceeds to step S1606. In step S1606, special display processing is executed. In the special display process, the symbol display device 41 is controlled so that special display is performed in the unit hold display area corresponding to the hold information of the jackpot information. Specifically, for example, when the current round number is the second round, as shown in FIG. 27C, the second unit hold display area Ga2 is displayed with “●” (specifically, winning in the upper working port 33). As shown in FIG. 27 (d), red “●” is displayed based on “,” and blue “●” is displayed based on winning in the lower working port 34. In the second unit hold display area Ga2, as shown in FIG. “○” is displayed. That is, the display mode in the hold display area corresponding to the hold information corresponding to the jackpot information is switched. When the special display process is executed, the display process during the special effect round is ended. Although not described in detail, the symbol display device 41 is controlled so that the same display as when the normal process is executed is executed when the special light emission process and the special display process are not executed. For this reason, the player can grasp that the current round is a special effect by executing the special light emission process or the special display process.

  By executing the special effect as the hold notice, the player can grasp that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot information is stored. In addition, by grasping the round in which the special light emission process is executed, the player can grasp which game number of times the player wins the big win. Furthermore, by switching the display mode corresponding to the hold information corresponding to the jackpot information, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp which hold information corresponds to the jackpot information.

  Here, the special light emission process and the special display process are respectively executed after about 2 seconds and 2.5 seconds have elapsed since the round display was set. As described above, when the grand prize opening 32a is opened, when 30 seconds elapses, or when 10 game balls are won in the big prize opening 32a, the big prize opening 32a is closed and one round is completed. To do. That is, the timing at which the special light emission process and the special display process are executed is included in 30 seconds from when the special winning opening 32a is opened until it is closed. Further, as described above, the game ball is launched at a period of 0.6 sec. Thus, in order to win ten game balls in the big prize opening 32a, it is considered that it takes about 6 seconds even if all the game balls flowing down the game area win the big prize opening 32a. That is, the special light emission process and the special display process are executed before the ten game balls are won after the special winning opening 32a is opened. As described above, the special prize opening 32a is closed without executing the special light emission process and the special display process after the special prize opening 32a is opened, despite the round in which the special effect is set. Can be prevented.

  Moreover, the timing at which the special light emission process and the special display process are executed is shifted. Specifically, the special display process is executed after the special light emission process is executed. By executing the special light emission process, it is possible to notify the player that the special effect is executed, and it is possible to obtain an effect of causing the player to pay attention to the special effect. Further, when the special display process is executed, the symbol display device 41 displays which is the hold information specifically corresponding to the jackpot result. By executing the special display process after the special light emission process is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the special effect executed by the symbol display device 41 when the special display process is executed. Here, when the special light emission process and the special display process are executed at the same time, the player's attention degree is distributed to each of the special display device 48 and the symbol display device 41, and the player determines the timing when the special effect is executed. There may be inconveniences that the player cannot grasp or that the player misses the display of the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result on the symbol display device 41. In this regard, in the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the above-described inconvenience from occurring due to the timings at which the special light emission process and the special display process are executed.

  Further, in the special display process, which of the holding information specifically corresponds to the jackpot result is displayed on the symbol display device 41. It is conceivable that some players cannot understand which holding information corresponds to the jackpot result only at the timing when the special performance is executed. In this regard, in the present embodiment, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand which hold information corresponds to the jackpot result from the display mode on the symbol display device 41.

<State when special performance is performed>
A state where the special effect is executed in the opening / closing execution mode will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  First, a description will be given with reference to FIG. At the timing of ta1, the game round corresponding to the jackpot winning game ends, and the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 6R probability variable jackpot result. In the current open / close execution mode, among the already stored hold information, after the current open / close execution mode ends, the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the variation start process is a big hit at the second game round and the fifth game round. It corresponds to the winning.

  At the timing of ta2, which is the second round in the opening / closing execution mode, a special effect (hereinafter also referred to as a predecessor special effect) corresponding to the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the change start process is executed at the second game round. The Then, at the timing of ta3, which is the fifth round in the current opening / closing execution mode, a special effect corresponding to the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the variation start process at the fifth game round (hereinafter also referred to as a rear special effect) ) Is executed. The current opening / closing execution mode is terminated at the subsequent timing ta4.

  Then, at the time ta5, the game times corresponding to the outage result are completed. Thereafter, when the game round corresponding to the big win is completed at the timing of ta6, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode (hereinafter also referred to as the rear opening / closing execution mode) corresponding to the special effect on the front side.

  Thereafter, the special effect is executed at the timing ta7 that is the third round in the opening / closing execution mode. This special effect has the same hold information as the special effect on the rear side in the opening / closing execution mode on the front side. Game times are executed from the front opening / closing execution mode to the rear opening / closing execution mode. For this reason, even when the rear side special effect is executed in the front side opening / closing execution mode, the number of games after which the opening / closing execution mode is entered in the rear opening / closing execution mode However, the front opening / closing execution mode and the rear opening / closing execution mode are different. Even if the rear special effect is executed in the front opening / closing execution mode, by executing again the special effect based on the hold information corresponding to the rear special effect in the rear opening / closing execution mode, It is easy for the player to grasp which hold information corresponds to the big win.

  The rear opening / closing execution mode ends at the timing ta8. Then, the game times corresponding to the result of losing are completed twice at the timing of ta9. Thereafter, when the game round corresponding to the big win is completed at the timing of ta10, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode. This opening / closing execution mode corresponds to the execution of the rear special effect in the above-mentioned opening / closing execution mode.

  Next, description will be made with reference to FIG. At the timing of tb1, the game round corresponding to the jackpot winning is completed, and the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R probability variable jackpot result. In the current open / close execution mode, among the already stored hold information, after the current open / close execution mode ends, the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the second game and the seventh game corresponds to the big win. ing.

  At the timing of tb2, which is the second round in the opening / closing execution mode, a special effect corresponding to the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the variation start process is executed at the second game round. After that, at the timing of tb3, a special effect corresponding to the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the variation start process is executed at the seventh game time. Thereafter, the current opening / closing execution mode ends at the timing of tb4. After the opening / closing execution mode ends at the timing of tb5, the operation mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode again at the timing when two game times have passed.

  Here, when the special effect is not executed in the first to fifth rounds, the special effect is not executed in the subsequent rounds. In other words, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, if the big win is not won by the fifth game, the special effect is not executed even if the big win is won by the sixth to eighth game. In the present embodiment, when the holding information that is the target of the success / failure determination processing in the variation start processing is included in the first to fifth game times after the opening / closing execution mode ends, In the execution mode, the number of hold information that is a target of the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the hold notice increases.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  A reservation notice is executed based on information stored in the first result display area reservation area Ra and the second result display area reservation area Rb. As a result, for a player, when a plurality of pieces of information are stored in each holding area, the result when the order that is the target of the success / failure determination process becomes the target of the success / failure determination process for the later information is retained. A game of confirming or predicting according to the content of the game is added, and the game is diversified. As a result, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

  The timing at which the hold notice is executed differs depending on the hold information that is the target of the determination of success or failure in the confirmation process for the hold notice. Thus, by grasping the timing when the hold notice is executed, the player can grasp which hold information corresponds to the jackpot result. As a result, when the hold notice is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from understanding which hold information the hold notice corresponds to.

  Here, there may be a case in which a holding notice is executed at a timing when a game ball is won in one of the operation ports 33 or 34, or a case in which a holding notice is executed at a timing when a variable display is started. In these cases, the timing at which the hold notice can be executed is short, and the period during which the player pays attention to whether or not the hold notice is executed becomes short. For this reason, a player's attention degree to a game cannot fully be raised. In this regard, in the present embodiment, the period during which the hold notice is executed becomes longer by changing the timing at which the hold notice is executed depending on which holding information is supported. Thereby, it is possible to lengthen the period during which the player is expected to execute the hold notice. As a result, it is possible to lengthen the period during which the player pays attention to the game. Therefore, it becomes possible to increase the degree of attention of the player to the game.

  The number of rounds in the open / close execution mode is associated with the order in which the hold information is subjected to the determination process in the variation start process. Thereby, the player can understand which holding information corresponds to the jackpot result by grasping the number of rounds in which the holding notice is executed in the opening / closing execution mode.

  In the sixth round in the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 6R probability variable jackpot result, after the opening / closing execution mode is ended, a holding notice is executed when the big win is won in the sixth to eighth game rounds. In this way, by executing a hold notice by associating one round with a plurality of game times, even if the set number of rounds is less than the number of hold information that can be stored, it is held well. A notice can be executed.

  Furthermore, in the 1st to 5th rounds, the game times associated with each round are made common even in the open / close execution mode corresponding to either the 6R probability variation jackpot result or the 16R probability variation jackpot result. This eliminates the need for the player to specify the type of jackpot result when the hold notice is executed in rounds 1 to 5.

  Further, in the opening / closing execution mode, the success / failure determination process by the change start process is not executed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the timing at which the variable display is started and the timing at which the hold notice is executed from occurring almost simultaneously. As a result, when the hold notice is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the number of pieces of hold information stored. Because, when the hold notice is executed and the start of the variable display occurs almost simultaneously, the variable notice is started and the hold notice is executed after the hold information is reduced, or the variable display is executed after the hold notice is executed. This is because the player cannot understand whether the game has started.

  In the opening / closing execution mode, the player only checks whether or not a game ball will win the big winning opening 32a, and the game tends to be monotonous. By executing the hold notice in the opening / closing execution mode, the player's attention to the game in the opening / closing execution mode can be increased.

  The hold information associated when the hold notice is executed is different for each round in the opening / closing execution mode. Thereby, the player can grasp which hold information corresponds to the hold notice by grasping the round when the hold notice is executed. Further, the rounds are divided by the closed state of the special winning opening 32a, and it is possible to prevent the player from being able to grasp which round is the current round. As described above, the player pays attention to the timing at which the hold notice is executed, and the player's degree of attention to the game can be further increased.

  The light emission mode of the special display device 48 is made to be a common mode regardless of the hold information. Thereby, when a program for controlling the special display device 48 is set, the amount of information related to the program can be reduced. Furthermore, since the player can be instructed to which hold information the hold notice is being executed at the timing when the hold notice is executed, even if the light emission pattern is set in a common manner, It is possible to prevent the player from becoming unable to understand whether the hold information is reserved for the hold information.

  In addition, when it is determined in the confirmation process for the first hold notice that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored, the determination process of the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the second hold notice is executed. . As a result, when it is specified that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored in the confirmation process for the first hold notice, the number of pieces of hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the check process for the hold notice Can be increased. As a result, it is possible to diversify the number of pieces of hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for hold notice. Therefore, the player pays attention to or predicts whether or not the hold determination process in the confirmation process for hold notice is executed for any hold information, so that the player's attention to the game can be increased. it can. In addition, by executing the hold notice corresponding to the confirmation process for the first hold notice, the player can grasp that the number of pieces of hold information that is the target of the determination processing in the confirmation process for the hold notice has increased.

  The success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for each hold notice is executed in the opening / closing execution mode. Thereby, it is possible to prevent execution of the success / failure determination process in the variation start process and the success / failure determination process in the holding notice confirmation process in one normal process. As a result, it is possible to prevent the processing time of one normal processing from becoming extremely long. Further, the success / failure determination process in each hold notice confirmation process is executed for one piece of hold information when one hold notice confirmation process is executed. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the number of processing times of the confirmation processing for one hold notice from being prolonged compared to the configuration in which the success / failure judgment process is executed for a plurality of pieces of hold information in the confirmation process for one hold notice. . As a result, it is possible to enhance the effect of preventing the processing time of one normal processing from becoming extremely long.

  The confirmation process for each hold notice is executed on the hold information that is the target of the determination process in the change start process in the state in which the high probability mode is set after the open / close execution mode ends. In the high probability mode, the expectation of winning a big hit is higher than in the low probability mode. Thereby, the frequency with which a hold notice is performed can be increased. In addition, the lottery mode when the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process when the confirmation process for the advance notice is the target of the determination process of the variation start process is the high probability mode or the low It is not necessary to determine whether the mode is the probability mode. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load required when the confirmation process for each holding notice is executed.

  Further, in the confirmation process for second hold notice, the success / failure determination process in the change start process is 5 in view of the hold information identified as corresponding to the jackpot result in the first hold notice confirmation process. It is executed for the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process until it is executed twice. Thereby, after the opening / closing execution mode based on the hold information identified as corresponding to the jackpot result in the confirmation process for the first hold notice, the change start process is performed in the state in which the high probability mode is set. The hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process can be the target of the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the second hold notice. In other words, by executing the confirmation process for the second hold notice based on the result of the confirmation process for the first hold notice, when the lottery mode is the high probability mode, it becomes a target of the success / failure determination process in the variation start process. There is an effect that the hold information can be easily specified by the confirmation process for the second hold notice.

  When it is specified that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is stored in the confirmation process for the first hold notice and the first match information flag is stored, the success / failure determination process in the variation start process after the hold information In this case, the determination process of the first hold notice confirmation process is not performed on the hold information to be subjected to the check. Thus, in the determination process for the second hold notice confirmation process, if the area where the first match information flag is stored is grasped, the determination process for the first hold notice confirmation process determines whether the hold information is stored. It becomes possible to grasp whether it was executed. As a result, it is possible to simplify the process for determining which hold information is the target of the determination of the success / failure in the confirmation process for the second hold notice.

  From the first to fifth rounds in the opening / closing execution mode, one hold information is associated with one round. After the opening / closing execution mode ends, the high probability mode is set until five game times have passed. Regarding the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process during the period in which the high probability mode is set, the player wants to know in detail which hold information corresponds to the big win. In this regard, in the present embodiment, one hold information is associated with one round until the first to fifth rounds. Thereby, after the opening / closing execution mode is finished, it becomes possible to make the player know in detail which holding information corresponds to the big hit winning, and information that the player wants to know can be well notified. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the game.

<Second Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the preset jackpot result is different from that of the first embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the 6R probability variation jackpot result and the 16R probability variation jackpot result, a 6R normal jackpot result (also referred to as a normal jackpot result) is set. When the 6R normal jackpot result is reached, the low probability mode is set as the lottery mode after the open / close execution mode ends, and the high frequency support mode is set as the support mode until the predetermined number of games (50 times) elapses. The When the 6R probability variation jackpot result and the 16R probability variation jackpot result are obtained, after the opening / closing execution mode is completed, the high probability mode is set as the lottery mode and the high frequency support mode is set as the support mode. In the present embodiment, when either the 6R probability variation jackpot result or the 16R probability variation jackpot result is reached, the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are maintained until the jackpot result is obtained again.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main symbol to which the odd number (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) is assigned corresponds to “specific symbol”, and a 6R probability variation jackpot result or a 16R probability variation jackpot result occurs. The same specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed. The main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to “non-specific symbols”. When a 6R normal jackpot result occurs, the combination of the same non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. Is done.

  Here, the distribution table in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the distribution table, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” corresponds to the 6R normal jackpot result, and “10 to 26” corresponds to the 6R probability variable jackpot result. "27-29" corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot result. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the jackpot result is based on the winning to the upper working port 33 and the jackpot result is based on the winning to the lower working port 34 The distribution table is referenced. That is, even if any of the operation ports 33, 34 is won, the allocation of the jackpot result is the same.

  In the variation start process according to the present embodiment, after the type of jackpot result is specified with reference to the distribution table, a stop result setting process corresponding to each jackpot result is executed. Further, as a jackpot flag corresponding to each jackpot result, when the 6R normal jackpot result is a 6R normal jackpot flag, when it is a 6R probability variable jackpot result, the 6R probability variable jackpot flag is a 16R probability jackpot result. Each stores a 16R probability variation jackpot flag. Each jackpot flag is deleted when the end process of the opening / closing execution mode in the first gaming state transition process is executed.

<Transition processing at the end of the open / close execution mode>
The transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1701, it is determined whether a probability variation jackpot flag is stored. Specifically, it is determined whether either a 6R probability variation jackpot flag or a 16R probability variation jackpot flag is stored. If any probability variation jackpot flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S1702. In step S1702, the flag erasing process described in the first embodiment is executed. Thereafter, in step S1703 and step S1704, the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag are stored, respectively. In the subsequent step S1705, a high probability command is set. The high probability command includes information indicating that the high probability mode is set. The high probability command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in the external output process (step S401) of the normal process (FIG. 13). The voice lamp control device 82 transmits the received high probability command to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 controls the symbol display device 41 to start display corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode based on the reception of the high probability command. When the high probability command is set, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode is terminated.

  If the probability variation jackpot flag is not stored in step S1701, that is, if the normal jackpot flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S1706. In step S1706, the above-described flag erasing process is executed. After that, the high frequency support flag is stored in step S1707, “50” is set in the high frequency game frequency counter area in step S1708, and the transition process at the end of the main opening / closing execution mode is ended.

  Here, in this embodiment, when it is determined in step S1101 in the second gaming state transition process that the high probability mode is set, the second gaming state transition process is performed without executing the processes in steps S1102 to S1105. finish. For this reason, when the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 6R-probability jackpot result or the 16R-probability jackpot result ends, the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are maintained until the jackpot is won again.

<Confirmation process for first hold notice>
The confirmation process for the first reservation notice in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S1801, it is determined whether either the high probability match information flag or the low probability match information flag is stored in the determined flag storage area. In the confirmation process for the first hold notice, when it is specified that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored, the jackpot winning is determined by the probability variation jackpot result (6R probability variation jackpot result and 16R probability variation jackpot result) or Which of the normal jackpot results (6R normal jackpot results) is specified is specified. The high probability coincidence information flag is stored when it is specified that the hold information corresponding to the probability change jackpot result is stored in the confirmation process for the first hold notice. The low probability coincidence information flag is stored when it is specified in the confirmation process for the first hold notice that the hold information corresponding to the normal jackpot result is stored.

  If either the high probability match information flag or the low probability match information flag is stored in step S1801, the hold information corresponding to the jackpot information has already been stored in the confirmation processing for the first hold notice so far. As a result, the confirmation process for the first pending notice is terminated. On the other hand, if neither the high probability coincidence information flag nor the low probability coincidence information flag is stored in step S1801, the processes after step S1802 are executed.

  Steps S1802 to S1805 of the confirmation process for the first hold notice in the present embodiment are the same as steps S1203 to S1206 of the check process for the first hold notice in the first embodiment, and thus description thereof is omitted. To do.

  If the process of step S1805 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1806. In step S1806, it is determined whether or not the current lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag is stored, and when the high probability mode flag is stored, it is determined that the mode is the high probability mode.

  In step S1806, if the current gaming state is in the opening / closing execution mode, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode is set when the current opening / closing execution mode ends. Specifically, when either the 6R probability variation jackpot flag or the 16R probability variation jackpot flag is stored, the high probability mode is determined.

  If it is determined in step S1806 that the mode is the high probability mode, the process proceeds to step S1807. In step S1807, the determination process corresponding to the high probability mode is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in 1806 that the mode is not the high probability mode, that is, if it is determined that the mode is the low probability mode, the process proceeds to step S1808. In step S1808, a determination process corresponding to the low probability mode is executed.

  If the success / failure determination process is executed in step S1807 or step S1808, the process proceeds to step S1809. In step S1809, it is determined whether or not the result of the success / failure determination process in step S1807 or step S1808 corresponds to a big win. If the jackpot winning is not supported, the confirmation process for the first pending notice is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S1809 that the jackpot is won, the process proceeds to step S1810. In step S1810, the information for determining the jackpot type, that is, the information acquired from the information updated by the jackpot type counter C2 among the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the hold notice this time is grasped. .

  In subsequent step S1811, it is determined whether or not the grasped information corresponds to a probability variation jackpot result, that is, a 6R probability variation jackpot result or a 16R probability variation jackpot result. Specifically, when the grasped information is included in the range of “10 to 29”, it is determined that it corresponds to the probability variation jackpot result.

  If the jackpot result corresponds to the probability variation jackpot result in step S1811, the process proceeds to step S1812. In step S1812, the high probability match information flag is stored in the determined flag storage area. Specifically, the high probability coincidence information flag is stored so as to overwrite the area in which the determined flag that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the current hold notice is overwritten. In a succeeding step S1813, a high probability coincidence information command is set. This coincidence information command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in the external output process (step S401) of the normal process (FIG. 13). The sound lamp control device 82 transmits the coincidence information command to the display control device 212. The coincidence information command includes information corresponding to the fact that the hold information corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result is stored. Thereby, the display control apparatus 212 can grasp | ascertain that the hold information corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result is stored. If the coincidence information command is set in step S1813, the confirmation process for the first hold notice is ended.

  If it is determined in step S1811 that the probability variation jackpot result is not supported, that is, if the 6R normal jackpot result is supported, the process proceeds to step S1814. In step S1814, the low probability match information flag is stored in the determined flag storage area. Specifically, the low-probability match information flag is stored so as to overwrite the area in which the determined flag that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the current confirmation process for holding notice is overwritten. In a succeeding step S1815, a low probability coincidence information command is set. This coincidence information command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in the external output process (step S401) of the normal process (FIG. 13). The sound lamp control device 82 transmits the coincidence information command to the display control device 212. The coincidence information command includes information corresponding to the fact that the hold information corresponding to the 6R normal jackpot result is stored. Thereby, the display control apparatus 212 can grasp | ascertain that the pending | holding information corresponding to 6R normal jackpot result is memorize | stored. When the coincidence information command is set in step S1815, the confirmation process for the first hold notice is ended. It should be noted that the determined flag and the coincidence information flag stored after the confirmation process for holding notice is deleted when the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode.

<Confirmation process for second hold notice>
Next, the confirmation process for second reservation notice in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that step S1901, step S1905, and step S1906 of the confirmation process for the second reservation notice in the present embodiment are steps S1302, S1306, and step S1306 of the confirmation process for the second reservation notice in the first embodiment. Since it is the same as S1307, the description is omitted.

  If the second match information flag is not stored in step S1901, the process proceeds to step S1902. In step S1902, it is determined whether either a high probability match information flag or a low probability match information flag is stored. If no match information flag is stored, the confirmation process for the second hold notice is terminated.

  If either the high probability coincidence information flag or the low probability coincidence information flag is stored in step S1902, the processes after step S1903 are executed. In step S1903, a process for confirming pending information that has not been determined as viewed from the area where the low probability or high probability match information flag is stored is executed. Specifically, judging from the area where the low probability or high probability coincidence information flag is stored in the judged flag storage area, the judgment is performed in the area corresponding to the hold information which is the target of the success / failure judgment processing in the variation start processing thereafter. The area where the completed flag is not stored is specified. Then, by checking the presence / absence of the hold information corresponding to the area and the presence / absence of the determined flag, whether or not the hold information that is not the target of the determination process in the confirmation process for the hold notice is stored. To figure out.

  In subsequent step S1904, it is determined whether or not pending determination information is stored as a result of the confirmation processing in step S1903. If the undetermined hold information is not stored, the confirmation process for the second hold notice is ended.

  If undetermined hold information is stored, the processing of step S1905 and step S1906 is executed. If the determined flag is stored in step S1906, the process proceeds to step S1907. In step S1907, it is determined whether or not the match information flag stored in the first hold notice confirmation process is a high probability match information flag. If the high probability match information flag is stored, the process advances to step S1908. In step S1908, the determination process corresponding to the high probability mode is executed. On the other hand, if the match information flag stored in step S1907 is not a high probability match information flag, that is, if a low probability match information flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S1909. In step S1909, the determination processing for the success / failure corresponding to the low probability mode is executed.

  If the process of step S1908 or step S1909 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1910. In step S1910, it is determined whether or not the result of the success / failure determination process in step S1908 or step S1909 corresponds to a big win. If the jackpot winning is not supported, the confirmation process for the second reservation notice is terminated.

  When it corresponds to the big win in step S1910, the process of step S1911 and step S1912 is performed. The processing in step S1911 and step S1912 is the same as that in step S1310 and step S1311 in the confirmation processing for second hold notice in the first embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the present embodiment, either the high probability match information flag or the low probability match information flag is stored in the confirmation process for the first hold notice, so that the hold information corresponding to the storage of the match information flag changes. When it is a target of the success / failure determination process in the start process, it can be grasped whether the probability variation jackpot result or the normal jackpot result is obtained. As a result, it is possible to execute the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the second reservation notice in the lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the jackpot result.

<Match information reception process>
The coincidence information reception process in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S2001, it is determined whether a high probability match information command is received. Specifically, it is determined whether the command stored in the command storage area and the current read target command is a high probability match information command. If a high probability match information command has been received, the process proceeds to step S2002.

  In step S2002, the high probability coincidence information flag is stored in the high probability coincidence information flag storage area provided in the work RAM 254. The high probability coincidence information flag is for specifying that the hold information corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result is stored. When the process of step S2002 is executed, the match information receiving process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2001 that a high probability match information command has not been received, the process advances to step S2003. In step S2003, it is determined whether a low probability match information command has been received. Specifically, it is determined whether the command stored in the command storage area and the current read target command is a low probability match information command. If the low probability coincidence information command has been received, the process proceeds to step S2004.

  In step S2004, the low probability coincidence information flag is stored in the low probability coincidence information flag storage area provided in the work RAM 254. The low probability coincidence information flag is for specifying that the hold information corresponding to the 6R normal jackpot result is stored. When the process of step S2004 is executed, the match information receiving process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if a low probability match information command has not been received in step S2003, it is determined in step S2005 whether a second match information command has been received. Specifically, it is determined whether the command stored in the command storage area and the current read target command is the second match information command. If the second match information command has not been received, the match information reception process ends.

  When the second coincidence information command is received in step S2005, the process proceeds to step S2006. In step S2006, the second match information flag is stored in a second match information flag storage area provided in the work RAM 254. The second coincidence information flag corresponds to the jackpot winning for the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the variation start process after the opening / closing execution mode based on the storage of the high probability coincidence information flag or the low probability coincidence information flag is completed. It is for specifying that the thing is memorized. When the process of step S2006 is executed, the match information receiving process is terminated.

<Special production performed as a hold notice>
Prior to explaining the control related to the display control device 212, a special effect as a hold notice executed in the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, as a special effect, the special light emission process described in the first embodiment is executed during game play. In addition, a first special effect and a second special effect are set as the special effects. The notification form by the special display device 48 when the special light emission process is executed is different between the first special effect and the second special effect.

  Specifically, when each special effect is executed, the lamp in the special display device 48 blinks. And when the special light emission process in a 1st special effect is performed, the blink period of the lamp in the special display apparatus 48 is shorter than the case where the special light emission process in a 2nd special effect is performed. By grasping the blinking cycle, the player can grasp which of the first special effects and the second special effects is being executed. A program for determining the blinking cycle is stored in the program ROM 253, and the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 controls the special display device 48 with reference to the program.

  Further, when the special light emission process is executed, a sound effect is output from the speaker of the special display device 48. The sound effect program is stored in the program ROM 253 of the MPU 252. Specifically, a first sound effect program for outputting the first sound effect and a second sound effect program for outputting the second sound effect are stored as the sound effect program. When the special light emission process in the first special effect is executed, the second sound effect is output after the output of the first sound effect is repeated a plurality of times. When the special light emission process in the second special effect is executed, the second sound effect is output after the first sound effect is output. That is, when the special light emission process in the first special effect is executed, the number of times the first sound effect is output is larger than when the special light emission process in the second special effect is executed. It is easy for the player to understand which of the first special effect and the second special effect is being executed depending on the number of times the first sound effect is output.

  As described above, the player executes any special effect by making the light emission mode of the lamp and the output mode of the speaker different from each other in the first special effect and the second special effect. It is easy to grasp what is being done.

  Moreover, when changing the output mode of a speaker, it was set as the structure which changes the frequency | count that a 1st sound effect is repeated. Thereby, MPU252 only needs to change the frequency | count of repeating a 1st sound effect program by a 1st special effect and a 2nd special effect, and can reduce the information content for making the output mode of a speaker differ. .

<Variable display control processing>
The variable display control process executed by the display control device 212 will be described below. In the variation display control process, when the variation command transmitted from the main control device 81 is received via the voice lamp control device 82, the symbol display device 41 performs a variation display of the symbol. To do.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 34, it is determined in step S2101 whether or not one game is being executed. If one game time is not being executed, it is determined in step S2102 whether a change command has been received. If the change command has not been received, the change display control process is terminated as it is. If the change command has been received, the change start control process is terminated after the change start process is executed in step S2103.

  On the other hand, when the change display of the symbols for one game is performed, whether or not the change end command transmitted from the main control device 81 is received via the sound lamp control device 82 in step S2104. Determine whether. If the variation end command has not been received, the variation display control processing is terminated after executing the variation processing in step S2105. In the changing process, the symbol display device 41 is controlled so that the symbols are displayed in a variable manner after the game is started.

  If the change end command has been received, the change display control process is terminated after the change end process is executed in step S2106. In the variation end process, the symbol display device 41 is controlled to terminate the symbol variation display and stop the final stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the main control device 81.

<Variation start processing>
The variation start process executed in step S2103 of the variation display control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S2201, the variation command received this time is read out, and information on game results such as information on probability variation jackpot results, information on normal jackpot results, or information on missed results, and information on variation display time are obtained from the commands. In step S2201, from the above identified information, information on the presence / absence of jackpot winning, information on the type of jackpot in the case of winning the jackpot, information on the presence / absence of reach in the case of not winning the jackpot, and the variable display time Is stored in the register of the MPU 252.

  In the subsequent step S2202, it is determined whether or not a big win is won in the current game round from the information stored in the register in step S2201. If it is not a big win, the process proceeds to step S2203. In step S2203, a deviation variation mode setting process is executed. When the deviation variation mode setting processing is executed, the variation start processing is terminated.

  The deviation variation mode setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the deviation variation mode setting process, when the high probability match information flag or the low probability match information flag is stored, it is determined whether or not to execute the special effect as the hold notice.

  In step S2301, it is determined whether a high probability match information flag or a low probability match information flag is stored. If any match information flag is stored, after the current game round, the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination processing in the variation start processing includes that corresponding to the big win Become.

  If either the high probability coincidence information flag or the low probability coincidence information flag is stored in step S2301, the process proceeds to step S2302. In step S2302, a pending notice execution lottery process is executed. In the pending notice execution lottery process, a lottery is performed as to whether or not a special effect is to be executed in the current game round. Specifically, when a value is acquired from a random number counter for holding advance notice execution lottery provided in the lottery counter area 262 of the work RAM 254, and the acquired value corresponds to execution of the special effect, the holding notice execution lottery Judged to win.

  In step S2303, it is determined whether the result of the pending notice execution lottery in step S2302 is winning. When the holding notice execution lottery is won, the process proceeds to step S2304. In step S2304, it is determined whether a high probability match information flag is stored. If the high probability match information flag is stored, the process advances to step S2305.

  In step S2305, a first effect execution lottery process is executed. In the first effect execution lottery process, whether or not to execute the first special effect is determined. Specifically, when a value is acquired from the random number counter for the first effect execution lottery provided in the lottery counter area 262 of the work RAM 254 and the acquired value corresponds to the execution of the first special effect. It is determined that one production execution lottery is won. Note that a random number counter for holding advance notice execution lottery can be used instead of the random number counter for first effect execution lottery. In this case, the capacity of the random number counter preset in the lottery counter area 262 can be reduced.

  When the first effect execution lottery process is executed, the process proceeds to step S2306. In step S2306, it is determined whether or not the first special effect lottery is won.

  If the first special effect lottery is won, the process proceeds to step S2307. In step S2307, a stop symbol setting process corresponding to the deviation is executed. In this process, the stop symbol corresponding to the disconnection result is set with reference to the stop symbol table corresponding to the disconnection stored in the stop symbol table storage area stored in the program ROM 253. Specifically, the stop symbol is set so that the symbol corresponding to the detachment result (the combination of symbols in which the same symbol combination does not stop on the same line) is finally stopped. Thereafter, in step S2308, the fluctuation display mode setting process corresponding to the execution of the first special effect is executed, and the outlier fluctuation mode setting process is terminated. In the variation display mode setting process corresponding to the execution of the first special effect, the variation display mode of the symbol is set according to the variation display time until the stop symbol set in step S2307 is stopped and displayed. The display mode of the special display device 48 is set so that the first special effect is executed at any timing from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display.

  When the high probability match information flag is not stored in step S2304 (when the low probability match information flag is stored), or when it is determined that the first special effect execution lottery is not won in step S2306, The process proceeds to step S2309.

  In step S2309, similarly to step S2307, a stop symbol setting process corresponding to the detachment is executed. Thereafter, in step S2310, the fluctuation display mode setting process corresponding to the execution of the second special effect is executed, and the outlier fluctuation mode setting process is terminated. In the variation display mode setting process corresponding to the execution of the second special effect, the variation display mode of the symbol is set according to the variation display time until the stop symbol set in step S2309 is stopped and displayed. The display mode of the special display device 48 is set so that the second special effect is executed at any timing from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display.

  On the other hand, if the coincidence information flag (high probability coincidence information flag, low probability coincidence information flag) is not stored in step S2301, or if the holding notice execution lottery is not won in step S2303, the process proceeds to step S2311. In step S2311, the stop symbol setting process corresponding to the disconnection is executed in the same manner as in step S2307. Thereafter, the fluctuation display mode setting process corresponding to the deviation is executed, and the outlier fluctuation aspect setting process is ended. In the variation display mode setting process corresponding to the deviation, the variation display mode of the symbol is set in accordance with the variation display time until the stop symbol set in step S2311 is stopped and displayed. When the variation display mode setting process corresponding to the actual deviation is executed, the special effect is not executed after the variation display of the symbol is started until the variation display ends.

  In the present embodiment, the special effect is executed at the game times corresponding to the result of losing based on storing the high probability matching information flag or the low probability matching information flag. By executing the special effect, the player can grasp that the hold information corresponding to the big win is stored. The first special effect is executed when the high probability coincidence information flag is stored. Thereby, when a 1st special effect is performed, the player can grasp | ascertain that the pending | holding information corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result is memorize | stored. Further, the second special effect is executed when a high probability match information flag or a low probability match information flag is stored. Thereby, when the 2nd special production is performed, the player can grasp that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is stored. In addition, the special performance is not executed unless the holding notice execution lottery is won. For this reason, even if the special performance is not executed, it is possible to make the player expect that the hold information corresponding to the big win is stored.

  Furthermore, when the high probability match information flag or the low probability match information flag is stored, the special effect can be generated at each game time corresponding to the result of the previous winning game times. This is a device for preventing an excessive increase in the frequency at which the special performance is not executed before winning the big win despite the high probability match information flag or the low probability match information flag being stored. .

  Returning to the description of the variation start processing (FIG. 35). If it is determined in step S2202 that the game is a big win, the process proceeds to step S2204. In step S2204, the high probability match information flag and the low probability match information flag are deleted. Note that the processing of step S2204 is to clear the high probability match information flag storage area and the low probability match information flag storage area, respectively, and when each match information flag is not stored, the state is maintained.

  In a succeeding step S2205, it is determined whether or not the second coincidence information flag is stored. If second match information is stored, the process advances to step S2206. In step S2206, the second match information is deleted.

  In the subsequent step S2207, a stop symbol setting process corresponding to the probability variation jackpot is executed. In this process, the stop symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result is set with reference to the stop symbol table corresponding to the probability variation jackpot stored in the stop symbol table storage area stored in the program ROM 253. Specifically, the stop symbol is set so that the specific symbol is finally stopped. Thereafter, in step S2208, a variable display mode setting process corresponding to the jackpot is executed. In this variation display mode setting process, the variation display mode of the symbol corresponding to the variation display time until the stop symbol set in step S2207 is stopped and displayed is set. When the process of step S2208 is executed, the fluctuation start process ends.

  On the other hand, if the second match information flag is not stored in step S2205, the process proceeds to step S2209. In step S2209, it is determined whether or not the information stored in the register in step S2201 is information on the probability variation jackpot result, thereby determining whether or not the probability variation jackpot winning is won in the current game round. When the information on the probability variation jackpot result is stored, the processing of step S2207 and step S2208 is executed, and this variation start processing is terminated.

  In step S2209, if it is not information on the probability variation jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S2210. In step S2210, a stop symbol setting process corresponding to a normal jackpot is executed. In this process, the stop symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot result is set with reference to the stop symbol table corresponding to the normal jackpot stored in the stop symbol table storage area stored in the program ROM 253. Specifically, the stop symbol is set so that the non-specific symbol is finally stopped. If the process of step S2210 is executed, in step S2208, the fluctuation display mode setting process corresponding to the jackpot is executed, and this fluctuation start process is terminated. In this variation display mode setting process, the variation display mode of the symbol is set according to the variation display time until the stop symbol set in step S2210 is stopped and displayed.

  In this variation start process, when setting a stop symbol in the case of a big win, it is determined whether or not the second match information flag is stored, and if the second match information flag is stored, Regardless of whether the current jackpot win is a probable jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, a stop symbol corresponding to the probable jackpot is set. When the second coincidence information flag is stored, when the game execution time enters the opening / closing execution mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, any of the stored information that is already stored becomes the target of the determination The mode again moves to the opening / closing execution mode. For this reason, after the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the normal jackpot result is ended, the mode is again shifted to the opening / closing execution mode before the high frequency support mode is ended. Thereby, even if it is a normal jackpot result, even if the stop symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result is set, the high-frequency support mode can be prevented from being terminated without winning the jackpot. From the player's point of view, when a stop symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot is stopped and displayed, a high probability mode is set after that, so it is superior to when a stop symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot is stopped and displayed. I can feel it. As a result, an effect of increasing the player's willingness to continue the game is expected.

  In the present embodiment, when the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the first hold notice is executed, and the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process corresponds to the jackpot result, the probability variation jackpot result or the normal jackpot Which of the results is supported is identified. As a result, in the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the second hold notice, the target hold information is the target of the success / failure determination in the high probability mode in the variation start process, or the target of the determination of success / failure in the low probability mode Can be identified. As a result, even if a plurality of lottery modes are set, the confirmation process for the second hold notice can be favorably executed according to the specific result in the confirmation process for the first hold notice.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the timing for executing the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for holding notice is different from those in the above embodiments.

<Variation start processing>
The variation start process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The processes of step S2401 to step S2412 and step S2414 to step S2418 of the variation start process in the present embodiment are the same as steps S701 to S712 and step S713 to step S717 of the variation start process in the first embodiment, respectively. Therefore, explanation is omitted.

  If the variable display time setting process is executed in step S2412, the process advances to step S2413. In step S2413, special game times setting processing is executed. In the special game number setting process, it is determined whether or not the current game number is a game number corresponding to the execution of the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for holding notice. When the special game times setting process is executed, the processes of steps S2414 to S2418 are executed, and this variation start process is terminated.

  The special game times setting process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S2501, it is determined whether or not the current game time corresponds to a big win. Specifically, it is determined whether either a 6R jackpot flag or a 16R jackpot flag is stored. If any jackpot flag is stored, the special game times setting process is terminated.

  If the jackpot flag is not stored in step S2501, the process proceeds to step S2502. In step S2502, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the low probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag is stored, and when the high probability mode flag is not stored, it is determined that the low probability mode is set. When the lottery mode is not the low probability mode, that is, when the lottery mode is the high probability mode, the special game times setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2502 that the lottery mode is the low probability mode, the process proceeds to step S2503. In step S2503, it is determined whether the variable display time is a predetermined time or more. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variable display time set in the variable display time setting process is a predetermined time or more. In the pachinko machine 10, a variable display time corresponding to the occurrence of reach and a variable display time corresponding to the non-occurrence of reach are set in advance. The variable display time corresponding to reach occurrence is set longer than the variable display time corresponding to non-reach occurrence, and one game time of 20 seconds or longer is selected. In step S2503, it is determined whether or not the variable display time in the current game time corresponds to the occurrence of reach. If the variable display time is 20 seconds or more, it is determined that the variable display time is a predetermined time or more. To do. If the variable display time is not longer than the predetermined time, the special game times setting process is terminated as it is.

  Here, in the present embodiment, a special effect as a hold notice is executed during the execution of one game. Executing the process of step S2503 is a device for determining whether or not the game times can execute the special effect.

  In step S2503, if the variable display time is equal to or longer than the predetermined time, the process proceeds to step S2504. In step S2504, special game times lottery execution processing is executed. The special game times lottery execution process is for performing a lottery to determine whether or not the current game time is a game time for executing the determination process of the confirmation process for holding notice. Specifically, when a value is acquired from the random number counter for special game times lottery provided in the lottery counter area 262 of the work RAM 254 and the acquired value corresponds to execution of the special effect, the special game time lottery Judged to win. If the special game times lottery is not won, the special game times setting process is terminated. In the present embodiment, the probability of winning the special game round execution lottery is about 1%.

  If it is determined in step S2505 that the special game times lottery has been won, the process proceeds to step S2506. In step S2506, the confirmation process execution flag is stored in the confirmation process execution flag storage area of the various flag storage areas 235. The confirmation process execution flag is used for grasping that the current game round is a special game round, and is used for grasping that the game round is to execute the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for holding notice. It is. The stored confirmation processing execution flag is deleted at the timing when the special game round is completed.

  In a succeeding step S2507, a special game times command is set. The set special game times command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in the external output process (step S401) in the normal process (FIG. 13). The sound lamp control device 82 transmits the received special game times command to the display control device 212. The special game times command includes information indicating that the current game time is a special game time. The display control device 212 can recognize that the current game time is the special game time by receiving the special game time command. When the process of step S2507 is executed, the special game times setting process is terminated.

  By executing the process of step S2501, the game times that are won by the big win will not become special game times. This is a contrivance to prevent the game times that are won by the big wins from being special game times, and the winning / incoming determination process in the confirmation process for the hold notice being executed at the game times that are won by the big win.

  Further, by executing the processing of step S2502, the special game times are not caused even in the high probability mode. The low probability mode is less likely to win a big hit than in the high probability mode, and the game times corresponding to the result of losing are likely to continue. For this reason, in the low probability mode, the game is likely to be monotonous as compared to the case of the high probability mode. By executing the special game times in the low probability mode, it is possible to prevent the game in the low probability mode from becoming monotonous. In the high probability mode, the probability of winning a big hit is higher than in the low probability mode, and it is considered that the player's attention to the game is high. In order to avoid special game times in the high probability mode and special game times in the low probability mode, there is an extreme difference in the player's attention to the game between the high probability mode and the low probability mode. It is prevented from occurring.

<Confirmation process for hold notice>
In the present embodiment, a confirmation process for a hold notice is executed instead of the confirmation process for the first hold notice and the confirmation process for the second hold notice in each of the above embodiments. The confirmation process for holding notice in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S2601, it is determined whether the confirmation process execution flag is stored in the confirmation process execution flag storage area. If the confirmation process execution flag is not stored, the confirmation process for the first hold notice is ended. When the confirmation process execution flag is stored, the processes after step S2602 are executed.

  In step S2602, it is determined whether undetermined hold information is stored among the hold information. The method for determining whether or not undetermined hold information is stored is the step in the first embodiment except that it is checked whether there is undetermined information for all the stored hold information. Since it is the same as S1203, the description is omitted.

  In a succeeding step S2603, it is determined whether or not pending determination information is stored. If the undetermined hold information is not stored, the confirmation process for the hold notice is ended. When undetermined hold information is stored, the processes of steps S2604 and S2605 are executed. The processing in step S2604 and step S2605 is the same as the processing in step S1205 and step S1206 in the confirmation process for the first hold notice in the first embodiment, and thus description thereof is omitted.

  In a succeeding step S2606, the determination processing corresponding to the low probability mode is executed. In the present embodiment, the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the first hold notice is executed in the low probability mode. For this reason, in the success / failure determination process of step S2606, the one corresponding to the low probability mode is set.

  Thereafter, in step S2607, it is determined whether or not the result of the process in step S2606 corresponds to a big win. If the jackpot winning is not supported, the confirmation process for the reservation notice is terminated.

  Then, the process of step S2607 to step S2609 is executed, and the confirmation process for the reservation notice is ended. The processing from step S2607 to step S2609 is performed for confirmation for the first hold notice in the first embodiment except that the coincidence information flag is stored in step S2608 and the coincidence information command is set in step S2609. Since it is the same as step S1208 to step S1210 in the process, description thereof is omitted. In this embodiment, there is no distinction between the confirmation process for the first pending notice and the confirmation process for the second pending notice, and which of the pending notice confirmation processes corresponds to the match information command and the match information command. There is no distinction.

  In the present embodiment, the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the hold notice is sequentially executed on the stored hold information. For this reason, the coincidence information command is set regardless of the number of stored hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning and the timing at which the hold information is the target of the success / failure determination process in the change start process.

  Note that each of the determined flag and the coincidence information flag stored in the confirmation process for the pending notice is deleted at the timing when the special game round is completed.

<Variable display control processing>
The variable display control process executed by the display control device 212 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S2701, it is determined whether or not one game is being executed. If one game is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S2702. In step S2702, it is determined whether a change command has been received. If the change command has not been received, the change display control process is terminated as it is. If the change command has been received, the change start control process is terminated after the change start process is executed in step S2703.

  The variation starting process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S2801, it is determined whether a special game times command has been received. If the special game times command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S2802. In step S2802, as in step S2201 of the change start process in the second embodiment, game result information and change display time information are grasped.

  In the subsequent step S2803, it is specified whether or not a big hit occurs in the current game round from the grasping result in step S2802. If it is a game game in which a big hit occurs, the process proceeds to step S2804, and a stop symbol setting process corresponding to the big hit is executed. In the stop symbol setting process corresponding to the jackpot, the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot result is set with reference to the stop symbol table corresponding to the jackpot stored in the stop symbol table storage area stored in the program ROM 253. Specifically, the stop symbols are set so that the combination of the same symbols is finally stopped on a straight line. Thereafter, in step S2805, a variable display mode setting process corresponding to the jackpot is executed. In this variation display mode setting process, the variation display mode of the symbol is set according to the variation display time until the stop symbol set in step S2804 is stopped and displayed. When the process of step S2805 is executed, the fluctuation start process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2803 that the game is not a big win, the process proceeds to step S2806. In step S2806, a stop symbol setting process corresponding to the deviation is executed. In subsequent step S2807, a variable display mode setting process corresponding to the deviation is executed. Note that the processing of step S2806 and step S2807 is the same as step S2311 and step S2312 of the variation start processing in the second embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  If it is determined in step S2801 that a special game times command has been received, the process advances to step S2808. In step S2808, information on the variable display time is grasped. Specifically, the fluctuation display time is grasped from the received fluctuation command.

  In the subsequent step S2809, a stop symbol setting process corresponding to the special game times is performed. Stop symbols corresponding to the special game times are set in advance. Specifically, one type of stop symbol corresponding to the special game times is set. In the stop symbol setting process, information on the preset stop symbol is read and the stop symbol is set. In subsequent step S2810, a variable display mode setting process in the special game times is executed. In this variation display mode setting process, the variation display mode of the symbol is set according to the variation display time until the stop symbol in the special game times is stopped and displayed. When the process of step S2810 is executed, the fluctuation start process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the variable display control process (FIG. 40), if one game is being executed in step S2701, the process proceeds to step S2704. In step S2704, it is determined whether a change end command has been received. If no change end command has been received, the process advances to step S2705. In step S2705, the mid-variation process is executed. When the processing for variation is executed, the variation display control processing is terminated.

  The changing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S2901, it is determined whether a match information command has been received. If a match information command has been received, the process advances to step S2902. In step S2902, the coincidence information is stored in the corresponding area. Here, the work RAM 254 of the display control device 212 is provided with an area for storing information indicating which hold information included in the match information command corresponds to the jackpot information. Specifically, the work RAM 254 is provided with storage areas from the first area to the eighth area according to the number of hold information that can be stored. In step S2902, which hold information corresponds to the jackpot information is identified from the match information command, and the match information is stored in an area corresponding to the specified hold information. When the process of step S2902 is executed, the mid-variation process is terminated.

  If a match information command has not been received in step S2901, the process advances to step S2903. In step S2903, it is determined whether or not all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. Specifically, in the display control device 212, the time during which symbols are variably displayed in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in the upper symbol row Z1 according to the variation display time of the current game time. In the middle and lower symbol rows Z2 and Z3, the time during which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3, the time during which the symbols are stopped and displayed, and in the middle symbol row Z2, the time during which symbols are displayed in a variable manner The time during which symbols in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed is determined in advance. The display control device 212 updates the elapsed counter area provided in the work RAM 254 every time the variable display control process is executed, and uses the value to grasp the period that has elapsed since the variable display was started. It is like that. In step S2903, it is determined whether or not it is a period from when the variable display is started until the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 are stopped and displayed.

  If all the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed in step S2903, the process proceeds to step S2904. In step S2904, it is determined whether coincidence information corresponding to the first area or the second area is stored. Specifically, in step S2902, it is determined whether the coincidence information is stored in the first area or the second area. When the coincidence information is not stored, the mid-variation process is terminated. If coincidence information is stored in the first area or the second area, the process advances to step S2905. In step S2905, special effect execution processing is executed. In the special effect execution process, the special display device 48 and the symbol display device 41 are each controlled so as to execute the special effect as a holding notice before the symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper symbol row Z1. When the process of step S2905 is executed, the mid-variation process is terminated. Players will be awarded a big hit in the first or second game round after the special game round is completed by executing special effects until the symbols are stopped and displayed in the upper symbol row Z1. Can be grasped.

  If it is determined in step S2903 that at least some of the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed, the process advances to step S2906.

  In step S2906, it is determined whether or not the symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 are variably displayed. Specifically, in step S2906, it is determined whether or not it is a period from when the change display of the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped until the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped and displayed. This determination is executed with reference to the value of the elapsed counter area, as in step S2903.

  If the lower symbol row Z3 is variably displayed in step S2906, the process proceeds to step S2907. In step S2907, it is determined whether matching information corresponding to the third area or the fourth area is stored. When the coincidence information is not stored, the mid-variation process is terminated. If coincidence information is stored in the third area or the fourth area, the process advances to step S2908. In step S2908, special effect execution processing is executed. In this special effect execution process, the special display device 48 and the symbol display device 41 are each controlled so as to execute the special effect as a holding notice before the symbol is stopped and displayed in the lower symbol row Z3. When the process of step S2908 is executed, the mid-variation process is terminated. Players will be awarded a big win at the 3rd game or 4th game after the special game is completed by executing special effects until the symbol is stopped and displayed in the lower symbol row Z3. Can be grasped.

  If the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped and displayed in step S2906, the process proceeds to step S2909. In step S2909, it is determined whether or not the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 are variably displayed. Specifically, in step S2909, it is determined whether or not it is a period from when the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped and displayed until the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed. This determination is executed with reference to the value of the elapsed counter area, as in step S2903. If the symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 is not being displayed in a varying manner, the mid-variation processing is terminated.

  If the middle symbol row Z2 is variably displayed in step S2909, the process proceeds to step S2910. In step S2910, it is determined whether coincidence information corresponding to the fifth area or the sixth area is stored. When the coincidence information is not stored, the mid-variation process is terminated. If coincidence information is stored in the fifth area or the sixth area, the process advances to step S2911. In step S2911, special effect execution processing is executed. In this special effect execution process, the special display device 48 and the symbol display device 41 are each controlled so as to execute the special effect as a holding notice before the symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2. When the process of step S2911 is executed, the mid-variation process is terminated. Players will receive a big win at the 5th or 6th game round after the special game round is completed by executing special effects until the symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2. Can be grasped.

  Returning to the description of the variable display control process (FIG. 40), if a variable end command is received in step S2704, the flow proceeds to step S2706. In step S2706, it is determined whether the coincidence information is stored in the seventh area or the eighth area. If coincidence information is stored, the process advances to step S2707. In step S2707, special effect execution processing is executed. In this special effect execution process, the special display device 48 and the symbol display device 41 are controlled so that the special effect is executed before the game round is ended. After the special display is executed from the end of the variable display of the middle symbol row Z3 until the end of the game round, after the special game round of this time is over, The player can grasp that.

  If it is determined in step S2706 that the coincidence information is not stored, the process proceeds to step S2708 if the process in step S2707 is executed. In step S2708, the coincidence information is deleted. Specifically, the process of clearing each area in the work RAM 254 is executed, and when the coincidence information is not stored, the state is maintained. In a succeeding step S2709, a variation end process is executed. When the variation end process is executed, the variation display control process is terminated.

<State when special performance is performed>
An example is given and demonstrated about the case where a special effect is performed. FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a situation when the special effect is executed. In this example, the coincidence information is stored in the fourth area of the work RAM 254.

  As shown in FIG. 43A, when the symbols are variably displayed in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the special effect is not executed. When the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 are stopped and displayed, the special display device 48 emits a lamp as shown in FIG. 43B, and the special display in which the display mode in the fourth unit hold display area Ga4 is changed. Is executed. Specifically, the special effect is executed after the symbol of the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and displayed until the symbol of the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped and displayed.

  By grasping either the timing at which the lamp in the special display device 48 emits light or the unit hold display area where the special display has been executed, it will be a big win at any timing after the end of the current game round. The player can grasp this. Specifically, after the special game is finished, the special effect is executed after the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 are stopped and displayed until the symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped. The player can grasp that the big win is won at the game round or the fourth game round. Then, after the symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 43 (c), the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 43 (d), and the special game round ends. To do.

  In this embodiment, one stop symbol corresponding to the special game times is set, but a plurality of stop symbols corresponding to the special game times may be set. Further, the stop symbol corresponding to the special game times may not be set, and the stop symbol setting process corresponding to the departure may be executed in the special game times. In this case, the stop pattern of the game times corresponding to the special game times result and the game times corresponding to the detachment are common.

  In the present embodiment, the timing at which the special effect is executed as the hold notice and the variable display mode in the symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 are associated with each other. For this reason, if the player pays attention to the display mode of the symbol display device 41 in order to grasp the game result, the player can understand the timing when the special effect is executed. Thus, by grasping the symbol sequence that is stopped and displayed when the special effect is executed, it is possible to grasp which holding information corresponds to the jackpot information, that is, the timing of winning the jackpot. . As a result, it is not necessary for the player to measure the timing at which the special effect is executed separately from the symbol variation display in order to understand which holding information corresponds to the jackpot winning.

  Even if the holding information corresponding to the big win is not stored, the special game times are generated. For this reason, even if special game times occur, a special effect does not always occur. As a result, in the special game times, it is possible to cause the player to play a game with the expectation that a special effect will be executed, and when the special effect is executed, the player is noted at that timing. be able to. As a result, the effect of increasing the player's attention to the game can be made remarkable.

<Fourth embodiment>
You may change the aspect in case a holding notice is performed. In this embodiment, in each opening and closing execution mode, the above-described embodiment is a holding notice mode executed when it is specified that a plurality of holding information corresponding to the jackpot result is stored. Is different.

  In the present embodiment, when the first hold information corresponding to jackpot and the second hold information corresponding to jackpot are stored in one opening / closing execution mode, the second hold in the one opening / closing execution mode is stored. An opening / closing execution mode (hereinafter referred to as a first opening / closing execution mode) when the first holding information is a target of the success / failure determination process in the variation start process after the one opening / closing execution mode is completed and the hold notice corresponding to the information is executed. In the open / close execution mode corresponding to the hold information), a hold notice corresponding to the second hold information is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, the contents of the hold notice corresponding to the second hold information executed in the one open / close execution mode are reflected, and the second hold information is supported in the open / close execution mode corresponding to the first hold information. The content of the pending notice is determined.

  In addition, the second hold information in the open / close execution mode corresponding to the first hold information is higher than the content of the hold notice corresponding to the second hold information executed in the one open / close execution mode. It is executed as a hold notice corresponding to. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of hold notices are set, and the degree of expectation that is hold information corresponding to the jackpot result differs depending on the executed hold notice. In the present embodiment, even if the hold information does not correspond to the jackpot winning lottery, the hold notice execution lottery process is executed, and when the hold notice execution lottery is won, the hold notice is executed.

  A plurality of types of modes in which special display processing is executed and special display is executed in the unit hold display area are set as hold notices with different expectations corresponding to the jackpot result. As a plurality of types of hold notices, the colors displayed in the unit hold display area when special display is executed are set to gold, silver, copper, and white. When gold is displayed, the hold information has the highest expectation level corresponding to the jackpot result, and when white is displayed, the hold information has the lowest expectation level corresponding to the jackpot result. . Specifically, the expectation level corresponding to the jackpot result decreases in the order of gold, silver, copper, and white. Note that the display mode corresponding to each color is stored in advance in the character ROM 256.

  Incidentally, the high degree of expectation corresponding to the jackpot result is determined by the selection rate when the hold notice is executed for the hold information not corresponding to the jackpot result. For example, the ratio of the gold color selected as the special display is high when the reservation notice corresponding to the jackpot result is high, and is low when the reservation notice is not corresponding to the jackpot result.

  In the present embodiment, when a hold notice corresponding to the second hold information is executed in one opening / closing execution mode, the contents are stored in the work RAM 254. Further, a special display table for determining the contents when executing the special display is stored in the program ROM 253. As the special display table, a table corresponding to the first round information and a table corresponding to the second round information are set.

  Multiple types of special display tables corresponding to the first round information are set according to the content of the hold notice corresponding to the second hold information stored in the work RAM 254. When the hold notice corresponding to the second hold information is executed again in the next open / close execution mode after the one open / close execution mode, the special display table corresponding to the first round information is referred to. In this case, the special display table corresponding to the first round information referred to in accordance with the content of the hold notice corresponding to the second hold information that has been executed once is different.

  In this case, according to the contents of the hold notice already being executed (according to the contents of the stored hold notice), a special with a lower expectation than the special display selected when the hold notice is executed. A special display table is selected for which no display is selected. For example, when it is stored that the hold notice corresponding to the copper color has been executed, the contents of this hold notice are determined with reference to a special display table in which white is not selected.

  In addition, when determining the content of the hold notice from the special display table, the random numbers for the effect lottery are in a certain range, and the distribution of the effects is different in each special display table. Specifically, a table in which white is not selected, a table in which white and copper are not selected, and a table in which white, copper and silver are not selected are provided. In other words, a plurality of tables are set in which the types of effects with low expectations are excluded so that the types of effects with low expectations are not selected.

  Further, each special display table that determines the content of the effect of the hold notice in the open / close execution mode is set in correspondence with the fact that a plurality of pieces of hold information corresponding to the jackpot are stored. Specifically, the special display table corresponding to the first round information is for the jackpot corresponding hold information that is first subject to the fluctuation start process regardless of whether or not a plurality of jackpot corresponding hold information is stored. Applied. In addition, the special display table corresponding to the second round information, when a plurality of pieces of hold information corresponding to the jackpot is stored, the success / failure determination process in the change start process at a timing later than the hold information that is the first jackpot winning winning It is applied to hold information corresponding to jackpot corresponding to the target.

  In the special display table corresponding to the first round information and the special display table corresponding to the second round information, the special display table corresponding to the first round information is selected to have higher expectation corresponding to the jackpot result. It is easy. In other words, the effect selection rate is set so that the special display table corresponding to the first round information is more likely to be selected for the player than the special display table corresponding to the second round information. ing.

  Further, the special display table corresponding to the first round information is determined according to the content of the hold notice corresponding to the stored second hold information. In the special display table corresponding to the second round information, it is easier to select an effect having a lower expectation level corresponding to the jackpot result than any of the special display tables corresponding to the plurality of first round information.

  As described above, when a hold notice is executed multiple times in one open / close execution mode, the content of the hold notice executed on the front side is changed to a jackpot result rather than the content of the hold notice executed on the back side. Increasing the corresponding degree of expectation is a device for causing the player to pay attention to the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the variation start process. According to the present embodiment, when a holding notice is executed a plurality of times in one opening / closing execution mode, when the player's attention is increased by the holding notice on the front side and the holding notice on the back side is executed. , It is possible to prevent the degree of attention with respect to the reservation notice on the destination side from decreasing.

  Further, with respect to the hold information corresponding to the hold notice executed on the rear side, there is an opportunity to execute the hold notice again in the later opening / closing execution mode. In other words, for the hold information corresponding to the hold notice executed on the rear side, there is an opportunity to execute the hold notice twice, and the hold notice executed for the second time according to the contents of the hold notice executed first. It is easier to select a content with a higher expectation level corresponding to the jackpot result than the content of the hold notice executed first. As a result, when the hold notice is executed multiple times in one opening and closing execution mode, the content of the hold notice executed on the back side corresponds to the jackpot result rather than the content of the hold notice executed on the front side. Even if the expected level is low, in the next opening / closing execution mode, the high level of expectation corresponding to the jackpot result is executed on the hold information corresponding to the above-described hold notice on the rear side. Therefore, when a holding notice is executed multiple times in one opening and closing execution mode, even if a low-priority outcome corresponding to the jackpot result is executed for the rear one, the holding information corresponding to the subsequent holding notice is executed. It is possible to prevent the player's attention level from becoming extremely low.

  In addition, when executing the hold notice multiple times in one open / close execution mode, the contents of the special display selected in the hold notice executed first are stored, and the special display in the hold notice executed later is It is also possible to select an item with a lower expectation level corresponding to the jackpot result than the special display selected in the hold notice executed first.

<Fifth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, when the hold notice is executed in the opening / closing execution mode, the degree of expectation in which the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is stored is notified. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the hold notice is executed when the ending display in the opening / closing execution mode is being executed. Whether or not to hold the hold notice is determined by lottery, and the hold notice can be executed even if the hold information corresponding to the jackpot is not stored. That is, in the hold notice in the present embodiment, the player is notified of the degree of expectation that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot is stored. By the way, there are multiple types of hold notice contents, and the high expectation level for jackpot is stored as the selection rate when the hold information for jackpot is stored and the hold information for jackpot is stored. And the selectivity when not.

  Note that when the hold notice is executed, the background color displayed on the symbol display device 41 in the ending display is different. Specifically, gold, silver, copper, and white are set as background colors displayed on the symbol display device 41. And the expectation degree in which the hold information corresponding to the jackpot is stored in the order of gold, silver, copper, and white decreases.

  In this embodiment, when a hold notice is executed in one opening / closing execution mode, the contents of the hold notice are stored. Hereinafter, a case will be described in which hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is stored in the open / close execution mode, and a hold notice corresponding to the hold information is executed.

  In one open / close execution mode, specific hold information corresponding to jackpot is stored, and when a hold notice corresponding to the hold information is executed, the contents of the hold notice selected at that time are stored in the work RAM 254. Is done.

  When the above opening / closing execution mode ends, and when the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the specific hold information is entered, the hold notice is executed in a situation where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is not stored. A hold notice different from the stored contents of the hold notice is selected. Specifically, a special display table for removal when no hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is stored is stored in the program ROM 253 in advance. A plurality of special removal display tables are set according to the contents of the stored advance notice, and are set so that the same contents as the stored advance notice are not selected.

  For this reason, when a holding notice is executed in a situation where the one opening / closing execution mode ends and then the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the specific holding information is entered, a holding notice similar to the stored holding notice is issued. When executed, the player can be informed that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot is stored. Here, the stored content of the hold notice is erased at the timing when all the hold information stored at the timing when the opening / closing execution mode ends is exhausted. As a result, when the hold notice is executed in one opening / closing execution mode, the hold information stored in the one opening / closing execution mode as a predetermined period is determined as the object of the determination process in the variation start process. By the way, when the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, the degree of expectation to deal with the jackpot can be varied according to the content of the pending notice.

  With this configuration, the player pays attention to the contents when the hold notice is executed. Further, when the hold information stored in the one opening / closing execution mode becomes a target of the success / failure determination process in the change start process and shifts to the opening / closing execution mode, the contents of the hold notice being executed and the current execution are executed. The player plays a game paying attention to the contents of the hold notice. Thereby, a player can be made to pay attention to the contents of the held reservation notice over a plurality of opening / closing execution modes. As a result, it is possible to lengthen the period during which the player's attention to the game is increased.

  In addition, after the hold notice is executed in the opening / closing execution mode, the opening / closing execution mode is entered again within the predetermined period, and the hold notice is stored in the situation where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot is stored in the opening / closing execution mode. Is executed, a hold notice having the same content as the contents of the hold notice that is always stored may be executed.

  Further, the predetermined period may be changed. For example, the predetermined period may be from when one opening / closing execution mode ends until a predetermined number of games elapses. In this case, in the configuration in which the high probability mode or the high frequency support mode ends when the predetermined number of games has elapsed, the number of games until the high probability mode or the high frequency support mode ends is set as the predetermined period. Also good. In this case, the held reservation notice is stored, and the timing for erasing the stored reservation notice is the timing when the predetermined period has elapsed. Then, the content of the hold notice to be executed may be determined according to the content of the stored hold notice.

  Moreover, you may change the timing which performs a hold notice. The hold notice in this configuration may be executed at the special game times in the third embodiment. In this case, the contents of the hold notice to be executed may be determined according to the contents of the hold notice stored when the special game times are reached before the predetermined period elapses. In this configuration, it is only necessary to notify whether or not hold information corresponding to jackpot is stored at a predetermined timing of special game times.

  In the fourth and fifth embodiments, the method of notifying the degree of expectation corresponding to the jackpot result when the hold notice is executed may be changed. For example, the player may be informed of the degree of expectation that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot is stored by the effect executed by the display lamp unit 63 and the speaker unit 64.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the jackpot result and the normal processing are different from those in the first embodiment. The different points will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a distribution table in the present embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, an 8R normal jackpot result (hereinafter also simply referred to as a normal jackpot result in this embodiment) and an 8R probability variable jackpot result (hereinafter also simply referred to as a probability variation jackpot result in this embodiment) are set. In the case of a normal jackpot result, the low probability mode is set as the lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode is completed, and the high frequency support mode is set as the support mode until the predetermined number of games (50) has elapsed. . Further, when the probable big hit result is reached, the high probability mode is set as the lottery mode and the high frequency support mode is set as the support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. The high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are maintained until a jackpot result is obtained again.

  In the distribution table, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” corresponds to the normal jackpot result, and “10 to 29” corresponds to the probability variation jackpot result. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the jackpot result is based on the winning to the upper working port 33 and the jackpot result is based on the winning to the lower working port 34 The distribution table is referenced. That is, even if any of the operation ports 33, 34 is won, the allocation of the jackpot result is the same.

  In the variation start process according to the present embodiment, after the type of jackpot result is specified with reference to the distribution table, a stop result setting process corresponding to each jackpot result is executed. In addition, as a jackpot flag corresponding to each jackpot result, a normal jackpot flag is stored in a corresponding flag storage area if the jackpot result is a normal jackpot result, and a probability variation jackpot flag is stored in a corresponding flag storage area if it is a probability variation jackpot result. Each jackpot flag is deleted when the end processing of the opening / closing execution mode in the game state transition processing is executed.

<Normal processing>
Normal processing in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In addition, description is abbreviate | omitted about the process structure (step S3001-step S3004, step S3007-step S3009) same as the normal process (FIG. 13) in 1st Embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, the second game state transition process (step S406) and the second hold notice confirmation process (step S408) in the normal process of the first embodiment are not executed. Then, the game state transition process (step S3005) is executed instead of the first game state transition process (step S405), and the hold notice confirmation process (step S407) is substituted for the first hold notice confirmation process (step S407). S3006) is executed. These processes will be described.

  First, the gaming state transition process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In addition, description is abbreviate | omitted about the process structure (step S3101-step S3104) same as the 1st game state transfer process (FIG. 17) in 1st Embodiment.

  In this gaming state transition process, after the start of the round display process in step S3104, the process proceeds to step S3105, and “8” is set in the round counter area RC. In steps S3106 to S3108, processing for determining a display effect performed in the current opening / closing execution mode is executed.

  Specifically, in this embodiment, as a round effect performed during the round in the opening / closing execution mode, a special round effect in which a hold notice effect corresponding to the hold notice is executed, and a normal round effect that does not correspond to the hold notice And are set. In step S3106 to step S3108, a display effect to be executed in the current opening / closing execution mode is selected in correspondence with the gaming state when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode.

  Specifically, it is determined in step S3106 whether the high frequency support flag is set. If the high frequency support flag is set, a special round effect is selected in step S3107. Specifically, specific information for specifying execution of the special round effect is set.

  On the other hand, if the high frequency support flag is not set, the process advances to step S3108 to select a normal round effect. Specifically, specific information for specifying execution of the normal round effect is set.

  That is, when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode during the high-frequency support mode, a special round effect for performing the holding notice effect is selected, and when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode during the low-frequency support mode, the holding notice effect is displayed. A normal round effect that is not performed is selected. As already described, since the high frequency support mode is a mode in which the expectation of entering the lower operation port 34 is higher than that of the low frequency support mode, the number of held information in the high frequency support mode is low frequency support mode. More than that of the mode.

  Note that the high frequency support flag setting or erasing process is executed in the transition process after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and when the high frequency support flag is set when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, The state where the high-frequency support flag is set is maintained until the transition process after the opening / closing execution mode is completed.

  Further, during the opening / closing execution mode, the low frequency support mode is set regardless of the presence or absence of the high frequency support flag.

  After executing the processing of step S3107 or step S3108, in step S3109, “100” is set in the timer area T as an effect period for opening. As described above, the numerical information set in the timer area T is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the timer interrupt process is started. Therefore, the opening production period is 0.2 sec.

  Thereafter, an opening command is set in step S3110, and the gaming state transition process is terminated. The opening command includes the specific information set in step S3107 or step S3108. When receiving the opening command, the display control device 212 executes a process for performing the opening, and also executes a process for storing the specific information in the work RAM 254 as a storage unit. This makes it possible to grasp which effect is to be performed in the display control device 212.

  The processes in steps S3111 to S3116 are the same as those in the first embodiment except for the transition process after the end of the opening / closing execution mode in step S3114, and the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode in step S3114 is the first. Since this is the same as the migration process (FIG. 30) of the second embodiment, description of these processes will be omitted.

  Next, the confirmation process for holding notice will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the confirmation process for the preliminary notice of hold, whether or not the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored is specified, and the process corresponding to the specified result is executed.

  First, in step S3201, it is determined whether or not it is an opening / closing execution mode. If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the confirmation process for the reservation notice is ended as it is, while if it is in the opening / closing execution mode, the process related to confirmation of the reservation notice in steps S3202 to S3210 is executed. In other words, in the present embodiment, processing related to confirmation of the pending notice is executed in a situation where the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode.

  Here, as already described, when the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, the opening is first performed. The opening production period is set to be longer than the period required to execute the process related to the confirmation of the hold notice for all the hold information stored in the hold areas Ra and Rb. Specifically, the opening effect period (0.2 sec) is set longer than the period (0.032 sec) required for the confirmation process for the reservation notice to be performed for the total number of pieces of reservation information (eight times). As a result, confirmation of the hold notice for each hold information is completed at a timing prior to the start of the first round.

  Specifically, first, in step S3202, the hold information that is not the target of the determination process in the hold notice confirmation process is specified from the stored hold information. Specifically, based on the presence / absence of the hold information in each hold area Ra, Rb, the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process is specified. Then, with reference to the determined flag storage area provided in the various flag storage areas 235, it is determined whether or not the hold information that is not the target of the determination process of the hold notice is stored.

  In the following step S3203, it is determined whether or not the hold information that is not the target of the determination process in the hold notice confirmation process is stored as a result of the check process in step S3202. If the hold information that is not the target of the success / failure determination process is not stored, the confirmation process for the previous hold notice is finished as it is, while the hold information that is not the target of the determination process is stored, The success / failure determination process of S3204 to S3208 is executed.

  Specifically, in step S3204, from the information for determining the big hit out of the hold information that is the target of the determination process in the confirmation process for holding notice in the current process, that is, the information updated by the big hit random number counter C1. Know the acquired information.

  After that, in step S3205, the determined flag is stored in the area corresponding to the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the hold notice confirmation process.

  In a succeeding step S3206, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode is set when the current opening / closing execution mode ends. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variation jackpot flag is stored, and when the probability variation jackpot flag is stored, it is determined that the mode is the high probability mode.

  If it is determined in step S3206 that the high probability mode is set, the process proceeds to step S3207. In step S3207, the determination process corresponding to the high probability mode is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3206 that the high probability mode is not set, that is, if it is determined that the low probability mode is set, the process proceeds to step S3208. In step S3208, the determination process corresponding to the low probability mode is executed.

  After execution of the process of step S3207 or step S3208, the process proceeds to step S3209. In step S3209, it is determined whether or not the result of the success / failure determination process in step S3207 or step S3208 corresponds to the big win. If the jackpot winning is not supported, the confirmation process for the reservation notice is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S3209 that the jackpot is won, the process proceeds to step S3210. In step S3210, a coincidence information command is set. This coincidence information command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82. The sound lamp control device 82 transmits the coincidence information command to the display control device 212. Thereby, the display control apparatus 212 can grasp | ascertain that the pending | holding information corresponding to the jackpot result is memorize | stored. If the coincidence information command is set in step S3210, the confirmation process for the reservation notice is ended.

  The match information command is received in a match information reception process executed in the display control device 212, as in the first embodiment. Then, the round information corresponding to the matching information is stored based on the reception of the matching information command in the matching information receiving process. As described in the first embodiment, the coincidence information command includes information indicating which hold information corresponds to the jackpot information, and the variation start process based on the hold information is performed. The game times to be performed can be specified. For this reason, in the coincidence information reception process, the work RAM 254 is provided with round information that specifies the number of games of the hold information corresponding to the jackpot information and specifies the round in which the hold notice is made based on the specified result. Store in the round information storage area.

  Here, in this embodiment, the number (8) of hold information that can be stored in each hold area Ra, Rb and the number of rounds (8 rounds) executed in the open / close execution mode are set to be the same. Each round is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the order in which the determination processing of the hold information stored in the hold areas Ra and Rb is performed. Specifically, the nth (n: natural number of 1 to 8) round is associated with the hold information related to the nth change start process after the opening / closing execution mode is completed. Thereby, for example, when the hold information related to the seventh variation start process corresponds to the jackpot information, the round information corresponding to the seventh round is stored in the round information storage area.

  Note that the determined flag that has been stored after the confirmation process for holding notice is deleted when the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode.

  In addition, the confirmation process for the hold notice is configured to confirm the hold notice for one hold information per process time, but is not limited to this. For example, the hold notice for a plurality of hold information per process time It is good also as a structure which confirms. Specifically, the process from step S3204 to step S3210 may be looped until there is no pending determination pending information. However, focusing on the point of avoiding the occurrence of so-called processing failure due to local increase in processing load in one processing time, the configuration in which the confirmation of the holding notice for one holding information per processing time is confirmed. preferable.

<Round display start processing>
Next, the round display start processing in the present embodiment will be described using the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S3301, it is determined whether or not the round effect related to the current opening / closing execution mode is a special round effect. Specifically, by referring to the specific information included in the opening command, it is determined whether the round effect related to the current opening / closing execution mode is a special round effect or a normal round effect. And determination processing is performed based on the said grasping result.

  When the round effect is a normal round effect, the normal round effect process in steps S3302 to S3305 is executed. Specifically, in step S3302, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the round effect. Specifically, the round effect is set to be performed from the start timing of the first round. For this reason, in step S3302, it is determined whether an open command corresponding to the first round is received. The release command includes information on how many rounds it is.

  When the release command corresponding to the first round is received, the process proceeds to step S3303, the normal round effect is set, and the round display start process is ended. The normal round effect is a series of effects performed from the start timing of the first round to the end timing of the final round (eighth round). In step S3303, a data table corresponding to the normal round effect is set.

  Here, the data table is an information group in which processing necessary for displaying a moving image (movie) on the display screen G is determined, and the moving image is displayed by updating the image based on the data table. The

  In the data table corresponding to the normal round effect, a movie is set for each round, and each movie is a continuous series of movies. Specifically, there is a common appearance character in each movie. The display mode of the movie end state corresponding to a predetermined round (excluding the fourth round) and the display mode of the movie start state corresponding to the next round with respect to the predetermined round are set to be the same. .

  In addition, the movie playback period for each round is longer than the combined period of the round period, which is a period required to digest one round, and the interval period, which is the closing period of the big prize opening 32a provided between the rounds. It is set short. When the movie ends during the round or interval, the display mode in the ended state is set to be maintained. As a result, the movie set for each round ends during the corresponding round or the interval after the round regardless of the fluctuation of the round period, and the subsequent display mode becomes the display mode of the movie end state. ing.

  In step S3303, a data table corresponding to the normal round effect is set, and a movie corresponding to the first round set in the data table is started. As a result, a movie corresponding to the first round flows.

  Further, when performing a normal round effect, the audio lamp control device 82 is set so that music corresponding to the normal round effect flows through the speaker unit 64.

  On the other hand, if it is not the start timing, a negative determination is made in step S3302, and the process proceeds to step S3304. In step S3304, it is determined whether it is a movie update timing. Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of each round (whether or not an open command has been received).

  If it is not the update timing, the round display start process is terminated as it is. If it is the update timing, the process proceeds to step S3305, the normal round effect update process is performed, and the round display start process is terminated. Specifically, the movie to be played is updated so that display of the next movie is started with respect to the previously set movie. As a result, a movie corresponding to each round is played back, and a series of movies are played back over a plurality of rounds (8 rounds).

  An effect mode of the normal round effect, specifically, a display mode displayed on the display screen G in the normal round effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a series of effect modes of a normal round effect, and FIGS. 49A to 49H are descriptions for explaining the display mode of the display screen G at the start timing of each round. FIG.

  In the normal round effect, a series of movies in which a girl character approaches as time passes is reproduced over 1 to 4 rounds. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49A, a girl character having a staff in the center of the display screen G is displayed small in the first round. In the upper left portion of the display screen G, “1R” is displayed as the current round number, and “8R” indicating the total round number is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 49 (b) to 49 (d), as the number of rounds is increased, the girl character is gradually displayed larger and the number of the current round is updated.

  Thereafter, the scene is switched, and a series of movies in which the tree fairy and the girl character gradually approach as time passes are reproduced over 5 to 8 rounds. Specifically, when the fifth round is started, a tree fairy character and a girl character in a sitting position are displayed at both ends of the display screen G as shown in FIG. In addition, the current round number is updated to “5”.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 49 (f) to FIG. 49 (h), as the number of rounds is increased, the tree fairy character and the girl character are gradually scrolled so that the number of rounds is changed. Updated.

  That is, in the normal land effect, a series of movies in which a common character (girl character) appears is reproduced over 1 to 8 rounds. In particular, in rounds 1 to 4 (or rounds 5 to 8), since the display mode is continuous between the rounds, it is easy to recognize that it is a series of movies.

  In the normal round effect, music corresponding to the normal round effect continues to flow over 1 to 8 rounds.

  Returning to the description of the round display start process (FIG. 48), if the current round effect is a special round effect, an affirmative decision is made in step S3301 and the process proceeds to step S3306. In step S3306, it is determined whether it is the start timing of each round. Specifically, it is determined whether an open command has been received. If the release command has not been received, the round display start process is terminated as it is, whereas if the release command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3307.

  In step S3307, a round information grasping process is executed. In the round information grasping process, it is grasped whether the round information is memorized, and when the round information is memorized, it is grasped how many rounds the special effect as the holding notice effect is executed. .

  In a succeeding step S3308, it is determined whether or not the current round corresponds to the round information. Specifically, the round information grasped in step S3307 is compared with the information on the number of rounds included in the release command, and it is determined whether or not the comparison results match.

  If the comparison results match, a data table corresponding to the special effect is set in step S3309, and the round display start process ends. On the other hand, if the comparison results do not match, it means that the hold information corresponding to this round does not correspond to the jackpot information, or the hold information corresponding to this round is not stored. In this case, the process proceeds to step S3310, a data table corresponding to the off effect is set as the hold notice effect, and the round display start process ends.

  The hold notice effect (special effect and off effect) is an effect performed in round units, unlike the normal round effect. Specifically, the data table corresponding to the hold notice effect is set corresponding to one round. In step S3309 and step S3310, a data table corresponding to the hold notice effect is set, and reproduction of a moving image (movie) prepared in advance in the set data table is started. Thereby, on the display screen G, the reproduction of the moving image (movie) corresponding to the special effect (or the off effect) is started.

  In addition, when performing the hold notice effect, the sound lamp control device 82 is set so that music corresponding to the special effect (or off effect) is played via the speaker unit 64 for each round.

  The display mode displayed on the display screen G in the hold notice effect will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a series of effect modes of each effect. FIG. 50A shows a display mode displayed on the display screen G at the start timing of the round in each effect. FIG. 50B shows a display mode displayed on the display screen G in the off effect, and FIG. 50C shows a display mode displayed on the display screen G in the special effect.

  First, when the round is started, as shown in FIG. 50 (a), it is displayed that the girl character holds up the wand while casting a spell for transforming, and the girl character is surrounded by dazzling light along with the spell. Is displayed. The dazzling light wraps not only the girl character but also the entire display screen G. The display mode from the start timing of the round until the dazzling light wraps the entire display screen G is common to both the special effect and the off effect.

  Thereafter, in the off-stage effect, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), the girl character that falls on the floor as the light stops and transforms is displayed, and the off-stage effect ends. Accordingly, it is possible to grasp that the hold information corresponding to the round in which the off-line effect is performed does not correspond to the jackpot information.

  On the other hand, in the special effect, as shown in FIG. 50 (c), the girl character that is enlarged as the light is settled and successfully transformed is displayed, and the special effect ends. Thereby, it is possible to grasp that the hold information corresponding to the round in which the special effect is performed corresponds to the jackpot information. That is, it can be said that the hold notice effect is an effect in which the subsequent display mode differs according to the branch of transformation.

  Here, the hold notice effect (special effect and off effect) is set to start from the start timing of each round, specifically, the timing at which the release command is received. And the result notification required period, which is a period from the start timing of the hold notice effect to the timing at which the result of the hold notice can be specified in the hold notice effect, in particular, the timing when the display mode specific to the special effect or the off effect is obtained. Is set shorter than the combined period of the round period and the interval period. Specifically, the result notification required period includes a minimum period of the round period, specifically, a period required for 10 game balls to be launched (0.6 × 10 = 6 sec) and an interval period (2 sec). The period is shorter than the combined period (8 sec) (for example, 5 sec). As a result, the result of the pending notice can be specified during the corresponding round or during the interval period after the round.

<Various effects performed in the opening / closing execution mode>
Next, various round effects performed in the opening / closing execution mode will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. The timing chart of FIG. 51 illustrates a situation in which the probability variation jackpot is won during the low frequency support mode, the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, and the probability variation jackpot is again won during the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. To do. In this case, the hold information related to the second and sixth change start processes after the opening / closing execution mode corresponds to the jackpot information among the hold information acquired when the probability change jackpot is again reached. Assume. In FIG. 51, for the convenience of explanation, the opening period and the ending period in the opening / closing execution mode are omitted.

  At the timing of t1, the game round corresponding to the probability variation jackpot winning is finished, and the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result. In this case, since the support mode at the time of transition to the opening / closing execution mode is the low-frequency support mode, the normal round effect is selected as the round effect. The normal round effect is executed until the timing t2 when the opening / closing execution mode ends after 8 rounds.

  Based on the end of the opening / closing execution mode at the timing of t2, the mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Thereby, the expectation degree of the ball entering the lower working port 34 is increased, and the number of pieces of reserved information to be acquired is increased.

  In addition, since the first result display area reservation area Ra and the second result display area reservation area Rb are provided separately, the high-frequency support mode is entered, and it is possible to enter the lower operation port 34. As a result, the storage area for storing the hold information is substantially increased. That is, in the low-frequency support mode, the hold information stored in the second result display holding area Rb is substantially 0, and thus there are substantially four storage areas in which the hold information is stored. Since the hold information can be stored in the second result display section hold area Rb, the number of storage areas for storing the hold information is substantially eight.

  Thereafter, after a plurality of game times, when the game times corresponding to the probability variation jackpot winning are again completed at the timing of t3, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result. In this case, since the support mode at the time of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode, the special round effect is selected as the round effect, and the hold notice effect is executed in each round.

  Here, since the hold information related to the second and sixth fluctuation start processing corresponds to the jackpot information after the end of the current opening / closing execution mode, first, in the first round, a release effect is performed as a hold notice effect. Is called. In this case, the result notification required period in the off-stage effect is set shorter than the combined period of the round period and the interval period, so the result of the hold notice is released at a timing before the start timing of the second round. It is notified that it is. As a result, it is possible to grasp that the determination result in the first fluctuation start process after the end of the current opening / closing execution mode is out of date.

  Then, the special effect is performed as the hold notice effect at the timing t4 which is the start timing of the second round. In this case, the notice required period as a result of the special effect is set to be shorter than the combined period of the round period and the interval period, as in the case of the off-effect, so at a timing before the start timing of the third round. It is notified that the result of the hold notice is a big hit. As a result, after the current opening / closing execution mode ends, it is possible to grasp that the determination result in the second variation start process is a big hit.

  Thereafter, the off effects are performed at the timings t5 to t7, which are the start timings of the third to fifth rounds, and the special effects are executed at the timing of t6, which is the start timing of the sixth round.

  Then, at the timing of t9 to t10, which is the start timing of the seventh to eighth rounds, the off effects are performed, respectively, and the opening / closing execution mode ends at the timing of t11.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  The round effect in the case of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode in the situation of the low frequency support mode is different from the round effect in the case of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode in the situation of the high frequency support mode. Specifically, when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode in the situation of the high-frequency support mode, a special round effect for performing the hold notice effect is selected as the round effect. Then, the order of the rounds in which the hold notice effect is executed is associated with the order in which the hold information is the target of the success / failure determination process in the change start process. As a result, it is possible to easily grasp which of the hold information the notification of the hold notice is informed by knowing which round the hold notice effect is executed in the opening / closing execution mode. Can do.

  In addition, when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode in the situation of the low frequency support mode, a normal round effect that does not perform the hold notice effect is performed as the round effect. This prevents the hold notice effect from being executed in a situation where the hold information is relatively small. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the repetition of substantially meaningless effects that may occur due to the small number of reserved information.

  In other words, in the round where there is no corresponding hold information, the off effect is performed. The off-line effect is not based on whether the hold information is appropriate or not, and is an effect corresponding to the absence of hold information, and can be said to be a substantially meaningless effect. If the effect is repeatedly executed, the player may be less interested in the game. However, if it is configured to perform another effect instead of the effect, there is a concern about an increase in the amount of data and an increase in processing load related to the other effect, and the other effect is a pending notice effect. There is a risk of misunderstanding.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the hold notice effect is not executed in a situation where the hold information is relatively small, and thus the substantially meaningless effect is not easily repeated. Thereby, the fall of attention to the game which may arise by repeating the said substantially meaningless effect can be suppressed.

  As a normal round production, a series of production executed across multiple rounds was set. Thereby, it is possible to perform an effect that continues for a long period of time that is not set in the individual effects for each round, and it is possible to diversify the round effects. In addition, when performing an effect that lasts for a long period of time, the effect spans a plurality of rounds, so the period required to digest each round becomes longer by extending the round period according to the effect. Does not cause any inconvenience.

  In particular, when selecting a special round effect that performs a hold notice effect in the situation of the low frequency support mode, an effect of playing a series of movies instead of a substantially meaningless hold notice effect in rounds 5 to 8 It is also possible to adopt a configuration that executes In this case, the period that can be secured for the effect is a period required to digest 5 to 8 rounds, and is shorter than the effect period of the normal round effect. For this reason, the freedom degree of a round production falls.

  On the other hand, according to this Embodiment, when it is the low frequency support mode, since it was set as the structure which does not perform a reservation notice effect, the production period which performs a series of effects can be ensured long. Thereby, the freedom degree of a round production can be raised and diversification of a round production can be aimed at.

  In particular, since the hold notice effect is not executed in the low frequency support mode, the hold notice effect effect period for the hold information corresponding to the upper limit number of hold expected in the low frequency support mode is set to the normal round effect. It can be set as the production period. As a result, it is possible to set the production period of a series of productions displayed in the normal round production longer than the production period of the hold notice production related to the hold information corresponding to the upper limit number of hold expected in the low frequency support mode. In general, the degree of freedom of the round production can be increased.

  Note that the upper limit number of holds expected in the low frequency support mode is the upper limit number of the total number of holds stored in the hold areas Ra and Rb in the low frequency support mode. This is the number (four) of storable information that can be stored based on the ball entering the upper working port 33 which is the ball entry portion on the side where the object 34a is not provided.

  The number of rounds in the open / close execution mode and the number of hold information that can be stored in each hold area Ra and Rb are set to be the same. Then, the hold information related to the hold notice and the number of rounds are set in a one-to-one correspondence. As a result, it is possible to clearly grasp what number of the hold information related to the hold notice is determined to be true or false by grasping the round number.

  In the above-described embodiment, the special round effect is configured to perform the hold notice effect (special effect or off effect) for each hold information. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, predetermined hold information ( For example, it is good also as a structure which performs a holding | maintenance notice effect in the round which concerns on the order in which the determination process is performed is the even-numbered holding information). In this case, since the effect period can be ensured for the effect period of the hold notice effect related to other hold information, a series of effects different from the hold notice effect can be executed in the secured effect period.

  In the above embodiment, when the hold information does not correspond to the jackpot information, it is configured to execute the off effect. However, even if the hold information does not correspond to the jackpot information, the lottery is selected. It is good also as a structure which performs special production when winning. In this case, it is preferable that the same special effect related to the hold information corresponding to one jackpot information is repeatedly executed a plurality of times. For example, when the hold information related to the first success / failure determination process after the end of the opening / closing execution mode corresponds to the jackpot information, the special effects are continuously performed in the first round, the second round, and the third round. It may be configured to be executed. Thereby, expectation to jackpot is raised by performing a special effect continuously. However, from the viewpoint of increasing the relevance between the order of the success / failure determination process and the round in which the special effect is executed, a configuration in which the execution is performed once is preferable.

  In this embodiment, a movie corresponding to each round is set in the data table corresponding to the normal round effect, and a plurality of series of movies are updated by updating the movie to be played based on the start timing of the round. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a movie that spans a plurality of specific rounds (for example, five rounds) is prepared in advance, and the movie is played in the eighth round from the start timing of the first round. It is good also as a structure which is made to loop and reproduce | regenerate until the end timing of. In this case, during the period of the movie per loop, the upper limit number of holdings expected to be stored in each holding area Ra, Rb in the low frequency support mode (the first result display area holding area related to the upper operation port 33) It is preferable to set the production period of the hold notice effect related to the hold information for the number of holds that can be stored in Ra, more specifically, the period required to digest only 1 to 4 rounds. Thereby, the freedom degree of a movie can be raised.

  In addition, although the scene change is set in the movie of the normal round effect, it may be a movie in which the scene change does not exist. Thereby, it can be made easy to recognize that it is a series of movies.

  In the normal round effect, a common character is displayed throughout each round. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a second character different from the predetermined first character may be displayed. In this case, in order to recognize that the movie is a series of movies, the movie may be set to a movie in which the second character fades in while the first character fades out.

  In the above embodiment, the same applies when the hold information corresponding to the predetermined round does not correspond to the jackpot information or when the hold information corresponding to the predetermined round is not stored in each hold area Ra, Rb. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the executed effects may be varied. In this case, it is possible to reduce monotonization of the game that can be caused by repeatedly performing the same performance.

  In this embodiment, the main control device 81 determines the round effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display control device 212 may determine the round effect. In this case, information for specifying the current support mode may be transmitted in accordance with the transmission of the opening command. And in the round display start process in the display control apparatus 212, it is good to perform the process of step S3106-step S3108.

  Moreover, in this Embodiment, although the notification required period was set the same as a result of a special effect and a deviant effect, it is not restricted to this, You may make both differ.

  In addition, the notification required period as a result of the hold notice effect is set to be shorter than the combined period of the round period and the interval period, but is not limited to this, and the round period and details are set to be shorter than the shortest period of the round period. May be.

  Furthermore, the notification required period as a result of the hold notice effect may be set to be the same as the round period. In this case, a common movie having a display mode common to both the special effect and the off-effect and a separate movie having a display mode individually set for both effects are prepared separately. The display control device 212 may start the reproduction of the common movie when the release command is received, and start the playback of the individual movie corresponding to the current round when the close command is received.

  Furthermore, although the production start timing of both the special production and the off production is set to be the same as the round start timing, the production start timing is not limited to this, and may be configured to start from a mid-round timing. Moreover, it is good also as a structure from which an effect start timing differs with a special effect and a removal effect. The point is that the notification of the result of the hold notice in the special effect and the off effect may be performed during the round corresponding to the hold information or during the interval after that round.

  In addition, the number of rounds in the open / close execution mode and the total number of hold information (total number of holds) that can be stored in each hold area Ra and Rb are set to be the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may set more. In this case, since the effect period of the normal round effect executed in the low frequency support mode can be secured longer, the degree of freedom of the normal round effect can be further increased.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of rounds is set to be larger than the expected upper limit number in the low-frequency support mode. . In this case, the number of the hold information that is the target of the hold notice effect may be set as the above hold upper limit number, and the hold notice effect related to other hold information may not be executed, and a plurality of pieces of hold information are associated with one round. It is good also as a structure. However, if attention is paid to the fact that the effect period of the normal round effect can be secured for a long time, a configuration in which the number of rounds is set to be larger than the expected reduction on hold in the low frequency support mode is preferable.

  Further, the number of rounds may be set equal to or less than the number of reserved storages that can be substantially stored in the low frequency support mode. In this case, the round effect set when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode in the situation of the low frequency support mode may be the special round effect. Even in this case, a meaningless effect corresponding to the absence of the hold information is difficult to be executed.

  On the other hand, the number of rounds may be set to be larger than the number of reserved memories that can be substantially stored in the low frequency support mode. In this case, it is good also as a structure which performs a pending | holding announcement effect when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode in the situation of the low frequency support mode. As a result, a round that does not correspond to the hold information may occur. Therefore, a series of effects may be performed using a period in which the round is performed.

  In addition, in the case where the hold information of one of the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 is preferentially digested, specifically, the hold information related to the priority working port is stored, the storage is stored. Even if the hold information related to the non-priority side operation port acquired at a timing earlier than the hold information being stored is stored, the hold information related to the priority side operation port may be the target of the determination process. Good. In this case, the lower operation port 34 is set as the priority side operation port, and the upper operation port 33 is set as the non-priority side operation port, so that there is no discrepancy between the hold notice effect and the corresponding round. be able to.

  That is, if the hold information related to the priority side operation port is acquired after the hold notification effect corresponding to the hold information related to the non-priority side operation port is executed, the hold information related to the hold notification effect is determined Since the order in which the determination process is performed is changed, the hold notice effect corresponding to the hold information related to the non-priority side operation opening does not correspond to the round in which the hold notice effect is performed.

  On the other hand, when the lower operation port 34 is set as the priority-side operation port, the game balls are not practically entered into the lower operation port 34 during the opening / closing execution mode, so the order is changed. Absent. Thereby, the occurrence of the mismatch can be avoided.

  Further, in the configuration in which the upper working port 33 is set as the priority side working port and the lower working port 34 is set as the non-priority side working port, the hold notice corresponding to the hold information related to the priority side working port is provided. It may be configured to perform only the production. Thereby, the inconsistency can be avoided.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the first result display area reservation area Ra and the second result display area reservation area Rb are separately provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is good also as a structure which provides the 1 hold area which can memorize | store, and memorize | stores the hold information which concerns on each operation port 33,34 in the said 1 hold area without distinguishing. Even in this case, the number of hold information expected to be stored in one hold area is different between the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode.

  Even in such a configuration, since the high frequency support mode has a higher expectation for entering the lower operation port 34 than the low frequency support mode, the hold information is easily acquired. For this reason, it can be said that the high-frequency support mode has a relatively large amount of pending information than the low-frequency support mode.

  In the present embodiment, it is configured to determine whether the round effect is a normal round effect or a special round effect according to the support mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, depending on the type of jackpot It is good also as a structure which determines a round production. Specifically, a special round effect may be performed in the case of a promiscuous jackpot, while a normal round effect may be performed in the case of a normal jackpot.

  Here, in the case of a probable big hit, a determination process corresponding to the high probability mode is executed in the confirmation process for holding notice (FIG. 47) (step S3207). Thereby, the probability that the hold information stored in each hold area Ra, Rb corresponds to the jackpot information is high. Therefore, it is difficult for the off-stage effect to be repeatedly executed. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the degree of attention to the game that may be caused by repeatedly executing the off-line effect when performing the hold notice effect.

  On the other hand, in the case of a normal jackpot, a determination process corresponding to the low probability mode is executed in the confirmation process for holding notice (FIG. 47) (step S3208). Thereby, the probability that the hold information stored in each hold area Ra, Rb corresponds to the jackpot information is low. Therefore, if the holding notice effect is executed in the case of a normal jackpot, there is a high possibility that the disapproval effect will be performed continuously. On the other hand, in the case of a normal jackpot, by executing the normal round effect, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the off effect is continuously performed.

  In addition, even when a normal round effect is performed, the process related to the confirmation for the hold notice is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when performing the normal round effect, the process related to the confirmation for the hold notice is performed. It is good also as a structure which does not perform a process. Thereby, the processing load can be reduced.

  Moreover, in the opening / closing execution mode, one opening / closing of the big winning opening 32a is set as one round, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the opening / closing operation of the big winning opening 32a may be performed multiple times. Good. In this case, the end condition of one round is that the total opening period in the plurality of opening / closing operations is 30 sec (high frequency time), or the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening 32a based on the plurality of opening / closing operations is 10 It may be set to be the number (high frequency number).

  In the present embodiment, the hold notice effect is performed during the round game. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the hold notice effect may be provided during the opening or ending. For example, when the mode is the low-frequency support mode and the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, a hold notice effect may be performed by opening or ending. In this case, the mode of the hold notice effect may be a mode in which the period is not divided for each hold information.

  Furthermore, it is good also as a structure which performs a reservation notice effect in the state which is not an opening / closing execution mode.

  Further, in this embodiment, a probabilistic jackpot and a normal jackpot are provided, and it is configured to determine which jackpot is a lottery by lottery. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is a high-probability mode that has a high probability that the hold information acquired is jackpot information until the game is played for a predetermined number of times after the mode ends, and the hold that is acquired after the game is performed only for the predetermined game times It is good also as a structure which is a low probability mode with a low probability that information is jackpot information.

  Further, a plurality of types of jackpots with different predetermined game times may be set. In this case, it is good also as a structure which varies a round production according to predetermined game times. Specifically, a normal round effect may be executed when a predetermined game number is equal to or less than a predetermined specific game time, and a special round effect may be executed when the predetermined game time is greater than the specific game time. As a result, a special round effect is performed when the degree of expectation that the hold information is relatively big hit information is high, and the normal round effect is executed when the expectation that the hold information is relatively big hit information is relatively low. The effect of the form can be produced.

  In addition, in the configuration in which the high probability mode is performed from the end of the opening / closing execution mode until the predetermined number of games are played, and the low probability mode is performed after the predetermined number of games are performed, the predetermined game times are reduced. You may set more than the holding | maintenance upper limit expected to be acquired in frequency support mode. In this case, the jackpot information is included in the acquired hold information in the case of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode in the situation of the high frequency support mode and in the case of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode in the situation of the low frequency support mode. The difference in expectations included is greater.

<Seventh embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the aspect of determining the round effect and the aspect of the hold notice effect are different from those of the sixth embodiment. The different points will be described below.

  In the present embodiment, the content of the round effect is determined according to the number of holding information (holding number), not the presence / absence of the high-frequency support flag in the situation of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode.

  Specifically, a round effect determination process is executed instead of the processes of steps S3106 to S3108 in the gaming state transition process (FIG. 46) in the sixth embodiment. The round effect determination process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S3401, the total number of hold information (total number of holds) stored in each hold area Ra and Rb is grasped. Specifically, the value stored in the reserved number storage area CR is acquired. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3402, and it is determined whether or not the total number of holds is zero.

  When the total number of holds is 0, it means that there is no hold information currently stored in each hold area Ra, Rb. In this case, the process proceeds to step S3403, a process of selecting a normal round effect is executed, and the round effect determining process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the total number of holds is not 0, it means that at least 1 hold information is stored in each hold area Ra, Rb. In this case, in steps S3404 to S3406, processing for selecting a special round effect according to the number of holds is executed.

  Specifically, in the present embodiment, as the special round effect, a first special round effect that performs the first reserved notice effect and a second special round effect that performs the second reserved notice effect are set. . The first hold notice effect corresponds to the hold notice effect in the sixth embodiment, and is a hold notice effect in which one round is associated with one piece of hold information. In contrast, the second hold notice effect is a hold notice effect in which a plurality of rounds (specifically, two rounds) are associated with one piece of hold information.

  The second hold notice effect will be described in detail. In the second hold notice effect, with respect to the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination in the n (n: natural number of 1 to 4) variation start process after the opening / closing execution mode ends. The 2n-1 round and the 2n round are associated with each other. For example, the first round and the second round are associated with the hold information that is the target of the determination of success / failure in the first variation start process. The production period of the second hold notice effect is set so that the second hold notice effect is performed over two rounds.

  According to such a configuration, in the n-th change start process after the opening / closing execution mode ends, when the hold information that is the object of the determination is corresponding to the jackpot information, the 2nd-1 round and the 2n round are crossed. 2 A special effect as a reserved notice effect is executed. On the other hand, in the n-th fluctuation start process after the opening / closing execution mode ends, if the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination does not correspond to the jackpot information, the second hold notice effect straddling the 2n-1 round and the 2n round The off-direction production is executed.

  In order to distinguish between the special effect and the off effect as the first hold notice effect, and the special effect and the off effect as the second hold notice effect, in the following description, the special effect as the first hold notice effect and Outage effects (special effects and outlier effects executed in the first special round effect) are referred to as first special effects and first off effects, and special effects and outlier effects (second special round effects as second hold notice effects). The special effect and the off-effect produced in step 2 are referred to as the second special effect and the second off-effect.

  In the present embodiment, one hold notice effect is selected from the two hold notice effects according to the number of holds determined in step S3401.

  Specifically, in step S3404, it is determined whether or not the total number of holds is larger than the specific number of holds (specifically 4). If the total number of reservations is greater than 4, specifically, if the total number of reservations is 5 to 8, the process proceeds to step S3405, the first special round effect is selected, and the round effect determination process ends. Specifically, specific information for specifying execution of the first special round effect is set.

  On the other hand, if the total number of holds is 1 to 4, the second special round effect is selected in step S3406, and the round effect determining process is terminated. Specifically, specific information for specifying execution of the second special round effect is set.

  By executing the above processing, the current round effect is determined, and specific information for specifying the determined round effect is transmitted to the display control device 212. Thereby, it is possible to specify which round effect is to be performed in the display control device 212, and the process corresponding to the specified round effect is executed in the round display start process.

  Here, as described in the sixth embodiment, since the number of holds in the situation of the low frequency support mode is substantially four, the case where the number of holds is 1 to 4 is the low frequency support mode. In the situation where at least one hold information is stored, it can be said that the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, or the high-frequency support mode and the number of holds when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode is 1 to 4. . Further, the case where the number of holds is 5 to 8 is based on the assumption that the high frequency support mode is set.

  Note that the support mode in the open / close execution mode is the low frequency support mode, and the upper limit number of holds expected in the low frequency support mode is 4. For this reason, when the number of suspensions is 4 or less at the timing of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, the number of suspensions is rarely 5 or more during the opening / closing execution mode. For this reason, the number of holds becomes 5 or more during the opening / closing execution mode, and it is difficult for the hold information that is not the subject of the hold notice effect to occur.

  Next, in each special round effect, the correspondence between the round in which the hold notice effect is performed and the order in which the determination is made will be described. The association is performed in a process executed when a match information command is received in the match information reception process in the display control device 212. Specifically, when a match information command is received, the game number of the hold information corresponding to the jackpot information is specified based on the information included in the match information command. Then, the round effect in the current opening / closing execution mode is specified.

  When the round effect in the current opening / closing execution mode is the first special round effect, a storage process of round information in which one hold information is associated with one round is executed. Specifically, if the hold information corresponding to the jackpot information is executed in the m-th (m: 1 to 8) variation start process, the round information corresponding to the m-th round is stored in the round information storage area. Remember me.

  On the other hand, when the round effect is the second special round effect, a process of storing round information in which two pieces of hold information are associated with one round is executed. Specifically, if the hold information corresponding to the jackpot information is executed in the n-th change start process, the round information corresponding to the 2n-1 round (odd round) is stored in the round information storage area. Remember me. In this case, the hold information related to the fifth and subsequent change start processes is not subject to the second hold notice effect.

  Here, in the second special round effect, since the hold information related to the change starting process after the fifth time after the opening / closing execution mode ends is not the target of the hold notice effect, when the total number of holds is 5 or more, There is a possibility that the hold information that is not the target of the hold notice effect is generated.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the total number of holds is 5 to 8, all the hold information stored in the hold areas Ra and Rb is the target of the hold notice effect. While the special round effect is selected, when the total number of holds is 1 to 4, since the four hold information selects the second special round effect that is the target of the hold notice effect, it is not the target of the hold notice effect. Pending information is unlikely to occur. In other words, whether or not the total number of holds is larger than the specific number of holds is determined by determining whether or not the total number of holds is larger than the number of holds that are the target of the second hold notice effect in the second special round effect. It can also be said that the second special round effect is performed when the number is the same as or less than the number of holds that is the target of the second hold notice effect. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the hold information that is not the target of the hold notice effect to occur.

<Round display start processing>
The round display start process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S3501, it is determined whether or not the current round effect is a normal round effect. If it is a normal round effect, a normal round effect process for performing a normal round effect is executed in step S3502, and the round display start process is terminated. The normal round effect processing is the same as the processing in steps S3302 to S3305 in the round display start processing (FIG. 48) of the sixth embodiment.

  On the other hand, if the current round effect is not a normal round effect, the process advances to step S3503 to determine whether the current round effect is a first special round effect.

  If it is the first special round effect, the processing of step S3504 to step S3508 is executed. Since this process is the same as the process of steps S3306 to S3310 in the round display start process (FIG. 48) of the sixth embodiment, a description thereof will be omitted.

  If it is not the first special round effect, it means that the current round effect is the first special round effect. In this case, it is determined in step S3509 whether an open command has been received.

  If the release command has not been received, the round display start process is terminated as it is, while if the release command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3510, during the second holding notice effect (during the second special effect or the second special effect). It is determined whether or not 2)

  As described above, the release command reception timing corresponds to the start timing of each round. The second hold notice effect (second special effect and second off effect) is set to be performed over two rounds. For this reason, depending on the reception timing of the release command, the second hold notice effect may be in progress. Specifically, at the start timing of the even-numbered rounds (the second, fourth, sixth, and eighth rounds) of the first to eighth rounds, the second hold notice effect is being performed.

  If it is not during the second hold notice effect, a round information grasping process is executed in step S3511. Specifically, it is ascertained whether the round information is stored, and if the round information is stored, the number of rounds in which the second special effect as the hold notice effect is executed is determined. To do.

  Thereafter, in step S3512, it is determined whether or not the current round is a round corresponding to the round information based on the grasping result grasped in step S3511.

  When affirmative determination is made in step S3512, a data table corresponding to the second special effect is set in step S3513, and this round display start process is terminated. On the other hand, when negative determination is made in step S3512, the second deviation is detected in step S3514. The data table corresponding to the performance is set and the round display start process is ended.

  Here, the data table corresponding to the second hold notice effect (second special effect and second off effect) is set such that the second hold notice effect is executed over two rounds. Specifically, a movie executed in the first round and a movie executed in the next round are set in the data table corresponding to the second hold notice effect. The movie executed in the first round is set to be common to both the second special effect and the second off effect. On the other hand, the movie executed in the next round is set so that the content differs between the second special effect and the second off-effect.

  In steps S3513 and S3514, processing for setting a corresponding data table is executed, and processing for starting playback of a movie corresponding to the first round is executed.

  If it is determined that the second hold notice effect is being performed, the second hold notice effect update process is executed in step S3515. Specifically, processing for starting playback of a movie corresponding to the next round is executed in the data table corresponding to the second pending notice effect. Then, the round display start process is terminated.

<Direction aspect of second hold notice effect>
Next, the second reservation notice effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second hold notice effect. FIG. 54 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display mode of the display screen G at the start timing of the first round, and FIG. 54 (b). ) Is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display mode of the display screen G in the first round, and FIG. 54 (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display mode of the display screen G in the second round in the second off stage effect. FIG. 54D is an explanatory diagram for explaining a display mode of the display screen G in the second round in the second special effect. For convenience of explanation, it is assumed that both the second special effect and the second off effect are performed in the first round and the second round.

  First, when the first round (odd round) is started, a girl character with a cane is displayed in the center of the display screen G as a movie corresponding to the first round, as shown in FIG. The In the upper left part of the display screen G, the current round information (1 round) and the fact that the total number of rounds is 8 are displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), a state is displayed in which the girl character casts a spell while holding the wand over the sky, and a state in which the girl character is surrounded by bright light along with the spell is displayed. The dazzling light wraps not only the girl character but also the entire display screen G, and the first round ends. Then, during the interval between the first round and the second round, the state in which the bright light wraps the entire display screen G is maintained. The display mode so far is common to the second special effect and the second off effect.

  When the second round (even-numbered round) is started, the display of the movie corresponding to the next round is started. Specifically, in the second off stage effect, after the dazzling light is settled, as shown in FIG. 54 (c-1), a girl character that fails to transform and falls to the floor is displayed. In this case, the current round information displayed in the upper left part of the display screen G has been updated. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 54 (c-2), a character indicating that it is off is displayed, and the second off effect is finished.

  In such a configuration, the period from the start of the second round to the display of the girl character that fails to transform and falls to the floor is set to be shorter than the combined period of the round period and the interval period. In other words, the result notification required period from the start timing of the second off effect to the timing at which it is possible to specify that it is out is greater than the unit period of one round period and one interval period, and It is set smaller than the period obtained by doubling the unit period. Thus, it is notified that the result of the hold notice is out of sync between the start timing of the second round and the start timing of the third round.

  On the other hand, in the second special effect, after the dazzling light is settled, as shown in FIG. 54 (d-1), the girl character that has been successfully transformed is displayed on the entire display screen G. In this case, the current round information displayed in the upper left part of the display screen G has been updated. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 54 (d-2), a character indicating that the next jackpot has been confirmed is displayed, and the second special effect is ended.

  In such a configuration, the period from the start of the second round to the display of the girl character that has been successfully transformed is set to be shorter than the combined period of the round period and the interval period. That is, the result notification required period from the start timing of the second special effect to the timing at which it is possible to specify that it is a big hit is set to be larger than the unit period and smaller than the period obtained by doubling the unit period. ing. Thereby, it is notified that the result of the hold notice is a big hit between the start timing of the second round and the start timing of the third round.

  That is, the movie executed in the first round set in the data table corresponding to the second hold notice effect and the movie executed in the next round are continuous so that the story progresses. . In addition, it can be said that the second hold notice effect is an effect that is set so that the subsequent display mode differs according to the branch of transformation.

<State of the second special round production>
Next, the state of the second special round effect executed in the opening / closing execution mode will be described using the timing chart of FIG. In FIG. 55, for convenience of explanation, the opening period, the ending period, and the interval period (closed period) between the rounds in the opening / closing execution mode are omitted. It is assumed that the number of hold information (holding number) stored in each holding area Ra, Rb at the timing of t1 is 3, and of the three holding information, after the opening / closing execution mode ends. It is assumed that the hold information related to the second fluctuation start process corresponds to jackpot information, and the other hold information does not correspond to jackpot information.

  At the timing of t1, the game round corresponding to the big win is completed, and the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode. In this case, as already described, since the number of holds is 3, the second special round effect is selected.

  Here, since the hold information related to the first fluctuation start process after the end of the open / close mode does not correspond to the jackpot information, the second off effect is executed as the second hold notice effect in the first and second rounds. . In this case, a notification that there is a deviation is made between the start timing of the second round and the start timing of the third round.

  Thereafter, at the timing t2, which is the start timing of the third round, the second special effect is executed as the second hold notice effect corresponding to the hold information related to the second change start process after the end of the open / close mode. In this case, a notification of a big hit is made between the start timing of the fourth round and the start timing of the fifth round.

  Then, at the timing t3 which is the start timing of the fifth round, the second off-stage effect is executed as the second hold notice effect corresponding to the hold information related to the third variation start process after the opening / closing mode ends.

  Subsequently, at the timing t4 which is the start timing of the seventh round, there is no holding information corresponding to the round. In this case, the second off effect is executed. Thereafter, the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  When the fourth hold information is acquired from the timing t1 to the timing t4, the second hold notice effect (second special effect or second) related to the fourth hold information at the timing t4. Off-direction production) is started.

  That is, when the number of holds stored at the timing of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode is 1 to 3, the number of holds can be increased. In this case, if the timing at which the hold information is acquired is a timing before the start timing of the round corresponding to the newly acquired hold information, the second hold notice effect related to the newly acquired hold information. Is to be executed.

  After that, at the timing of t6 when the second game round is completed, the mode is again shifted to the opening / closing execution mode.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  As a hold notice effect, each hold information and each round correspond to each other in a one-on-one correspondence, and a second hold notice effect that two rounds correspond to one hold information is provided. One of the effects is selected according to the number. Specifically, when the total number of holds when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode is 1 to 4, the second special round effect for executing the second hold notice effect is selected, and the total number of holds is 5 to 8 In some cases, the first special round effect for executing the first hold notice effect is selected. As a result, it is possible to suppress repeated meaningless off-stage effects in situations where the total number of holds is relatively small, and in the situation where the total number of holds is relatively high, each hold information is subject to a hold notice effect. It can be. Therefore, the hold notice effect can be suitably performed.

  In other words, if the first hold notice effect is selected in a situation where the total number of holds is small, a substantially meaningless effect (an off effect corresponding to the absence of hold information) is repeatedly executed, and substantially no effect. There may be a situation where the meaningful performance period becomes long. On the other hand, if the second hold notice effect is selected in a situation where the total number of holds is large, the hold notice effect (special effect or off effect) for all hold information cannot be performed during the opening / closing execution mode, and the hold The start timing of the notice effect may be later than the fluctuation start process, and the original effect of the hold notice effect may not be ensured. However, if the number of the hold information that is the target of the hold notice effect is limited, the hold information that is not the target of the hold notice effect may be generated, and a situation in which the hold notice effect cannot be suitably performed may occur.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, in a situation where the total number of holds is equal to or less than the specific number of holds (specifically 4), the second hold notice effect is selected, and the total number of holds is more than the specific number of holds. In many situations, the occurrence of the above situation can be suppressed by selecting the first hold notice effect.

  In particular, there may be a case where the total number of reservations is small even in the high frequency support mode. For this reason, if the distribution is performed in the support mode, there may be a case where the first special round effect is executed in spite of the situation where the total number of reservations is small. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the above-described inconvenience can be avoided because it is configured to determine the mode of the hold notice effect by the total number of holds. That is, it is possible to distribute the round effects more appropriately in the configuration in which the round effect is determined based on the total number of reservations rather than in the support mode, compared to the configuration in which the round effect is allocated in the support mode.

  Further, as the specific number of holds, a value obtained by dividing the number of holds that can be the target of the hold notice effect in the second hold notice effect, specifically, the total number of rounds (8) divided by the number of rounds (2) required for the second hold notice effect. It was set. Thereby, at least in the situation of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, the number of holds that is not the target of the hold notice effect does not occur. Therefore, the hold notice effect can be suitably performed.

  Further, when the total number of holds is 0, the normal round effect is selected. Thereby, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that a meaningless effect is performed by executing the hold notice effect even though there is no hold information.

  In the present embodiment, the second hold notice effect is configured to be performed over two rounds, but is not limited thereto, and may be configured to be performed over, for example, three rounds, four rounds,. In this case, the specific number of holds may be changed in accordance with the number of pieces of hold information that can be set as the target of the hold notice effect. Specifically, when executing a hold notice effect in which four rounds are associated with one hold information, 2 may be set as the specific hold number. As a result, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the hold information that is not the target of the hold notice effect is generated.

  In the present embodiment, the specific number of reservations is set to 4, but is not limited to this, and may be 2 or 3. In short, the specific number of holds only needs to be equal to or smaller than 4, which is the number of hold information that can be the target of hold notice in the second hold notice effect.

  Although the production start timings of both the second special production and the second off production are set to be the same as the round start timing, the production start timing is not limited to this, and may be configured to start from the midway of the round. Moreover, it is good also as a structure from which production start timing differs with a 2nd special production and a 2nd off production.

  Further, the support mode in the opening / closing execution mode may be set to the high frequency support mode. In this case, during the open / close execution mode, the number of holds can shift from 4 or less to 5 or more. In such a configuration, the round effect may be shifted from the first special round effect to the second special round effect in accordance with the transition, and thereby there is no hold information that is not a target of the hold notice effect. Can do.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure which performs a normal round effect when the total number of pending | holdings is below a specific number of pending | holdings, ie, when the total number of pending | holdings is 0-4. In this case, since the expected number of holds in the low frequency support mode is 4, the determination process for determining whether or not the total number of holds is larger than the specific number of holds is substantially the support mode in the case of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode. Can be said to determine whether or not is in the low frequency support mode. In addition, as described in the sixth embodiment, the normal round effect production period is set longer than the period for performing the hold notice effect related to the hold information for the specific number of reservations, so that the normal round effect is free. The degree can be increased.

  In the present embodiment, the main control device 81 determines the round effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display control device 212 may determine the round effect. In this case, the total number of holds at the timing of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode is transmitted to the display control device 212, and processing for determining a round effect based on the transmitted total number of holds is executed.

  Further, the first special round effect and the second special round effect may be combined. For example, when the total number of suspensions in the case of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode is 6, the first special round effect is provided for the suspension information related to the first to fourth variation start processing after the opening / closing execution mode ends in the first to fourth rounds. It is good also as a structure which performs a 2nd special round effect about the pending | holding information which concerns on the 5th-6th change start process in the 5-8 round after completion | finish of opening / closing execution mode. As a result, it is possible to perform a meaningful hold notice effect in all rounds.

  Moreover, you may apply combining the modification shown in 6th Embodiment timely.

<Eighth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the game state after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the configuration relating to the acquisition of various counters, the confirmation process for holding notice and the execution mode of the round effect are different from the sixth embodiment. The different points will be described.

  First, the gaming state after the opening / closing execution mode ends will be described. In the present embodiment, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the high probability mode is set as the priority mode. The high probability mode is continued until a predetermined number of times, specifically, eight game times are performed. That is, the probability of winning a big hit is set high until eight game times are consumed after the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  Note that the success / failure table in the present embodiment is configured in the same manner as in the first embodiment. Specifically, “7” is set as jackpot value information common to each probability mode, and “11”, “23”,..., “91” are set as jackpot value information corresponding to only the high probability mode. Nine are set. For this reason, the winning probability in the high probability mode is about 1/10.

  Next, a configuration related to acquisition of various counters will be described with reference to an explanatory diagram of FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the holding ball storage area 301 includes a first result display area reservation area Ra corresponding to the winning of the upper working port 33 and a second result display area holding area Rb corresponding to the winning of the lower operating hole 34. And. Each holding area Ra, Rb is provided with a plurality of storage areas.

  Each storage area has a storage area for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, a storage area for storing the value of the jackpot type counter C2, a storage area for storing the value of the reach random number counter C3, And a storage area for storing the value of the variation type counter CS. Thus, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS can be stored in each storage area. And it is comprised so that the value of each counter C1-C3, CS may be acquired in the information acquisition process in the winning process for a working opening, and each said counter C1-C3, CS may be memorize | stored in a corresponding storage area, respectively.

  Information acquisition processing in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the processes in steps S3601 to S3605 and S3607 are the same as the processes in steps S301 to S305 and S307 in the information acquisition process of the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In step S3606, in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, each value of the variation type counter CS is acquired, and the acquired value is stored in the corresponding result display area reserved area. Store in the first storage area.

  It is assumed that the variation type counter CS in this embodiment is a loop random number that is updated within a range of 0 to 240.

<Confirmation process for hold notice>
Next, the confirmation process for holding notice in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the processing in steps S3701 to S3705 is the same as the processing in steps S3201 to S3205 in the sixth embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  As already explained, the total number of holds that can be stored in each holding area Ra, Rb is 8, and the lottery mode is set to the high probability mode until 8 game times are consumed after the opening / closing execution mode ends. The As described in the sixth embodiment, the confirmation process for holding notice is executed during the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, all the hold information stored in the hold areas Ra and Rb in the situation where the confirmation process for hold notice is executed is digested during the high probability mode. Therefore, in step S3706, the determination process corresponding to the high probability mode is executed. This process is the same as the process of step S3207 in the sixth embodiment.

  Thereafter, in step S3707, a process of temporarily storing determination result information on the determination of success / failure in a determination result storage area provided in the RAM 204 is executed. By grasping the determination result information stored in the determination result storage area, it is possible to grasp the determination result of the current determination. In this case, when the determination result is a jackpot, the jackpot random number counter C1 is also stored in accordance with the determination result storage area.

  Thereafter, in step S3708, the information for effect determination is grasped from the target hold information. Specifically, in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1, the values of the reach random number counter C3 and the variation type counter CS are grasped.

  In the subsequent step S3709, an effect pattern that is executed when the variation start process related to the target hold information is executed based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS. The effect pattern determination process to be determined is executed.

  Here, in the present embodiment, a large number of effect patterns are set, and the many effect patterns are roughly divided into a plurality of types (specifically, seven types) of effect patterns to be associated with the pending notice effect. . By referring to the effect pattern table TD1 provided in the ROM 203, the effect pattern is distributed to one effect pattern among the above-mentioned plurality of effect patterns according to the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS. It is configured as follows.

  The effect pattern table TD1 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 59, effects A to G are set in the effect pattern table TD1. Production A to production C are production patterns that are executed in the case of a jackpot, and production D to production G are production patterns that are executed in the case of a loss. Further, effects A to F are effects where reach display is performed, and effects G are effects where reach display is not performed.

  Each production will be specifically described. The effects D to F are the same as the effects A to C except that the stop results are different, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  Effect A is an effect pattern in which a combination of jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed after execution of the first super reach display. The effect B is an effect pattern in which the combination of jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed after execution of the second super reach display different from the first super reach.

  Here, the super reach display is a reach display in which the degree of expectation of winning a big hit is set higher than that in the normal reach display. In the super reach display, a plurality of types having different variable display times are set in advance, and when executing the super reach display, one super reach display is selected based on the value of the variable type counter CS. It is configured to select a reach display. Thereby, diversification of super reach display can be achieved.

  In addition, the production contents of the first super reach display and the production contents of the second super reach display are different. Specifically, in the first super reach display, an animation movie is set to be played, In the second super reach display, a live-action movie is set to be played back.

  The effect C is an effect set so that the combination of jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed after execution of the normal reach display. Here, in the present embodiment, the variable display time when executing normal reach display is set as a predetermined fixed time. The fixed time is set shorter than the variable display time when super reach is executed. Specifically, the fluctuation display time of normal reach display is set to be shorter than the shortest fluctuation display time among the fluctuation display times corresponding to super reach display. Thereby, the fluctuation display time of the normal reach display is always shorter than that of the super reach display.

  In addition, as a display mode in the case of executing reach display, first, high-speed fluctuation display is started for all symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In this case, it is difficult or difficult to recognize which symbol is displayed. Thereafter, the variation display mode of the upper symbol row Z1 is switched from the high-speed variation display to the low-speed variation display in which the player can recognize the symbol displayed. Then, the variable display of the upper symbol row Z1 ends. Thereafter, the fluctuation display mode of the lower symbol row Z3 is switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display, and the fluctuation display of the lower symbol row Z3 is finished. In this case, a combination of reach patterns is displayed and a reach line is formed. Then, the fluctuation display of the middle symbol row Z2 is switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display, and then the process ends. It should be noted that the variable symbol display of the middle symbol row Z2 may be switched to the low-speed fluctuation display and then switched to the high-speed fluctuation display again.

  In such a configuration, in the normal reach display, the time (reach display time) from when the combination of reach symbols is stopped to the end of the variable symbol display in the middle symbol row Z2 is set shorter than in the super reach display. Has been. For this reason, the fluctuation display time is shorter in the normal reach display than in the super reach display. Note that the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the period until the combination of reach symbols is stopped and displayed may be shortened, or both may be shortened.

  Each of the effects A to G is distributed according to the determination result information, the jackpot random number counter C1, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS. In this case, in the effect pattern table TD1, when the determination result information stored in the determination result storage area is jackpot information, it is associated so that effects A to C are selected as effects corresponding to the jackpot, When the determination result information is outlier information, the effects D to G are associated so that the effects corresponding to the outage are selected.

  The distribution of effects corresponding to the jackpot will be described in detail. In the effect pattern table TD1, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 related to the current hold information is the jackpot value information common to the high probability mode and the low probability mode (in detail In the case of “7”), production A is associated.

  On the other hand, in the effect pattern table TD1, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 related to the current hold information is dedicated jackpot numerical value information corresponding only to the high probability mode, the effect B or the effect C is set to be selected. Has been. The distribution of effect B and effect C is executed based on the value of the variation type counter CS. Specifically, in the effect pattern table TD1, “0 to 200” among the values of the variation type counter CS is associated with the effect B, and “201 to 240” is associated with the effect C. That is, the distribution of effects corresponding to the jackpot is executed based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the variation type counter CS.

  Here, since the number of jackpot numerical information dedicated to the high probability mode (9) is larger than the number of common jackpot numerical information (one), the probability that the stage B or the stage C is selected rather than the stage A Is higher. The probability of winning the effect C is set smaller than the effect B. For this reason, the appearance frequency of the effect pattern set in the jackpot is effect B> effect C> effect A.

  Next, the distribution of the production corresponding to the deviation will be described in detail. In the production pattern table TD1, “234 to 238” of the reach random number counter C3 is associated with the production D or the production E. The distribution of the effects D and E is executed based on the variation type counter CS. Specifically, in the effect pattern table TD1, “0 to 91” of the value of the variation type counter CS is associated with the effect D, and “92 to 240” is associated with the effect E.

  In the effect pattern table TD1, “0 to 4” of the value of the reach random number counter C3 is associated with the effect F, and “5 to 233” is associated with the effect G. That is, the distribution of effects corresponding to the deviation is executed based on the values of the reach random number counter C3 and the variation type counter CS.

  Returning to the description of the confirmation process for holding notice (FIG. 58), after performing the effect pattern determination process, the process proceeds to step S3710. In step S3710, the command information for holding advance notice is set, and the confirmation process for the present holding notice is ended. The reservation notice command information is set by referring to the effect pattern table TD1.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59, in the effect pattern table TD1, a plurality of pending notice command information A (1), A (2),. (7) (hereinafter simply referred to as A (x) for convenience of explanation) is set. A (x) is set to correspond to each performance pattern on a one-to-one basis. In the process of step S3710, by referring to the effect pattern table TD1, the hold notice command information A (x) corresponding to the effect pattern determined in step S3708 is specified, and the specified hold notice command is specified. Information A (x) is set.

  Incidentally, the command information A (x) for holding advance notice is used to specify the number of times the change start process is executed to determine whether or not the hold information related to the hold information targeted in the current hold notice confirmation process is executed. Information is included. Thereby, the display control apparatus 212 can identify the order in which the hold information related to the current hold notice command information A (x) is the target of the determination of the success / failure by grasping the above information.

  The hold notice command information A (x) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in the external output process of the normal process. The sound lamp control device 82 transmits the hold notice command information A (x) to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 stores the hold notice command information A (x) in the hold notice effect storage area provided in the work RAM 254.

  Here, the storage area for the hold notice effect has eight storage areas, a first storage area, a second storage area,..., An eighth storage area, corresponding to the total number of holds. Each storage area is configured to be capable of storing the hold notice command information A (x) and other various information used for the hold notice effect.

  In addition, each storage area is associated with different pending notice command information A (x) depending on the order in which the determination is performed in the variation start process. Specifically, the command information A (x) for holding advance notice related to the holding information to be executed in the n-th (n: natural number of 1 to 8) success / failure determination is set to be stored in the nth storage area. ing.

  The display control device 212 shifts the data in each storage area based on the reception of the shift command. Specifically, the information stored in the first storage area is deleted, and the second storage area → the first storage area, the third storage area → the second storage area,..., The eighth storage area → the seventh storage. Various information stored in each storage area is shifted to the area.

  As described in the first embodiment, the shift command is set when a process for shifting the hold information stored in the hold area in the data setting process (FIG. 15) of the main controller 81 is executed. Command. Thereby, even when the hold information stored in the hold ball storage area 301 is sequentially digested, the information stored in the hold notice effect storage area provided in the display control device 212 and the main control Correspondence with information stored in the storage ball storage area 301 provided in the device 81 is maintained.

  Note that the command information and the amount of information are different between the hold notice command information A (x) and the change command set in the change start process. Specifically, the pending advance command information A (x) is simple command information in which the content of the command and the amount of stored information are set smaller than the change command, and The number of types is less than the number of types of commands for change.

  As described in the first embodiment, in the variation start process, a dedicated table is referred to when the variation display time is determined, but the table is more than the effect pattern table TD1. A plurality of specific performance patterns are set and subdivided. Then, in accordance with the subdivision, the distribution of the numerical range of the variation type counter CS is subdivided. As a result, in the variation start process, the variation type counter CS is used to determine a more specific production pattern than the production pattern set in the current reservation confirmation process. Thereby, when setting both commands, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the confirmation process for holding notice while keeping the same tendency of the effect pattern.

  Whether the jackpot type counter C2 is a jackpot result with support that becomes a high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode or a jackpot result without support that becomes the low-frequency support mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode in the fluctuation start process Used to determine whether or not.

<About the display mode of the hold display area Ga>
Next, the hold display area Ga displayed on the display screen G will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the hold display area Ga and the pictures displayed in the hold display area Ga.

  As described in the first embodiment, the hold display area Ga includes the first unit hold display area Ga1, the second unit hold display area Ga2, the third unit hold display area Ga3, the fourth unit hold display area Ga4, A fifth unit reserved display area Ga5, a sixth unit reserved display area Ga6, a seventh unit reserved display area Ga7, and an eighth unit reserved display area Ga8 are defined. Each of the unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga8 is associated with different hold information in association with the order in which the hold information is to be determined. Specifically, the n-th unit hold display area is associated with hold information that is the object of determination in the n-th change start process from the current time.

  In each of the unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga8, a hold picture Pa indicating that the hold information is acquired can be displayed, and the hold information is acquired by winning each of the operation ports 33 and 34. In such a case, the holding picture Pa is displayed on the unit holding display area corresponding to the acquired holding information. For example, in a situation where the number of reserves is 0, when a game ball wins one of the operation ports 33 and 34, a reserve picture Pa is displayed in the first unit hold display area Ga1, for example, the number of holds When the game ball is won in either one of the operation ports 33 and 34 in a situation where there are five, the holding picture Pa is displayed in the sixth unit holding display area Ga6. That is, when the hold information is newly acquired, the hold patterns Pa are displayed in ascending order of the numbers in the empty areas of the unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga8. In this case, since the unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga8 are arranged in order from the left, the hold information related to the hold picture Pa on the left of the display screen G is sequentially digested.

  Here, as the holding pattern Pa, a first holding pattern Pa1 corresponding to winning in the upper working port 33 and a second holding pattern Pa2 corresponding to winning in the lower working port 34 are set in advance. Yes. Specifically, the character ROM 256 stores in advance image data of the first holding picture Pa1 and the second holding picture Pa2 as the holding picture Pa. The hold command includes information on which of the upper operation port 33 and the lower operation port 34 the game ball has won, and when the hold command is received, based on the information, A corresponding holding picture is displayed.

  Each picture is configured to be visually identifiable. Specifically, the first reservation picture Pa1 has a red sphere shape, while the second reservation picture Pa2 has a blue sphere shape. . For the sake of illustration, the first holding pattern Pa1 and the second holding pattern Pa2 are displayed with the hatching directions different.

  Here, when the hold notice effect is executed, the unit hold display area corresponding to the hold information that is the target of the hold notice effect is for notifying the result of the hold notice in addition to the holding picture Pa. The pending notice result pattern Pb is displayed. The holding notice result picture Pb has a star shape and is displayed so as to overlap with the corresponding holding picture Pa.

  There are a plurality of types of holding notice result patterns Pb, and each is expected to be a big hit (when the holding notice result picture Pb is displayed, the holding information corresponding to the holding notice result picture Pb is a big win. Certain probabilities) are set differently. Specifically, as the reserved notice result pattern Pb, the golden special result pattern Pb0, the red first result pattern Pb1, the green second result pattern Pb2, and the blue third result pattern Pb3. And a white fourth result pattern Pb4. The special result pattern Pb0 is set when it is determined that a big hit will be won. And the expectation degree of jackpot winning is set low as it goes to 1st result picture Pb1-> 2nd result picture Pb2-> ...-> 4th result picture Pb4. As a result, by grasping the pending notice result picture Pb, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation as to whether or not the pending information corresponding to the pending notice result pattern Pb is a big hit.

  In particular, as shown in FIG. 60, the on-hold notice result pattern Pb is displayed so as to overlap the on-hold picture Pa that is the execution target of the on-hold notice effect. As a result, since the holding notice result picture Pb and the holding picture Pa are associated with each other, it is possible to easily grasp which holding information corresponds to the holding notice result picture Pb. It should be noted that the result patterns Pb0 to Pb3 are distinguished from each other by changing the dot hatching density for the purpose of the drawings.

  Note that the reserved notice result pattern Pb is displayed so as to overlap the reserved pattern Pa, but is not limited thereto, and may be arranged above the reserved pattern Pa. In short, the specific arrangement position is arbitrary as long as it knows which holding picture Pa corresponds to the holding notice result picture Pb.

  Needless to say, the specific shapes of the holding pattern Pa and the holding notice result pattern Pb are arbitrary. Furthermore, if the first holding pattern Pa1 and the second holding pattern Pa2 can be identified visually, and the result patterns Pb0 to Pb4 can be visually identified, their specific shapes and patterns Needless to say, any color may be used.

<About round production execution processing>
Next, the round effect execution process executed by the display control device 212 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The round effect execution process is a process for executing the hold notice effect during the round game in the opening / closing execution mode.

  First, in step S3801, it is determined whether it is a round start timing. Specifically, it is determined whether an open command has been received.

  If it is the round start timing, the process advances to step S3802 to execute the hold notice effect determination process. The hold notice effect determination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S3901, it is determined whether or not there is pending information (holding advance notice command information A (x)) that has not been executed. Specifically, first, the first storage area is set as the search target in the storage area for the hold notice effect. The first storage area is a storage area in which the hold notice command information A (x) corresponding to the hold information that is the target of the determination of the success / failure is first stored after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Then, it is determined whether or not the pending notice command information A (x) is stored in the first storage area. When the pending notice command information A (x) is stored, it is determined whether or not the executed flag is set in the executed flag storage area provided in the first storage area.

  Here, an executed flag storage area is provided in each storage area, and the executed flag can be stored in the executed flag storage area. The executed flag is the executed flag storage area of the storage area when the hold advance command information A (x) stored in the storage area of the hold advance effect storage area is the target of the hold advance effect. This flag is set when the current open / close execution mode ends. That is, it can be said that the process for determining whether or not the executed flag is set is a process for determining whether or not the hold notice command information A (x) related to the executed flag is the target of the hold notice effect. .

  When the command information A (x) for holding notice is stored in the first storage area and the executed flag is not set in the executed flag storage area of the first storage area, the holding notice effect is not executed. Means there is pending information. In this case, the process proceeds to step S3902. On the other hand, when the executed flag is set in the first storage area, the search target is set to the next storage area (second storage area). Then, it is determined whether or not the hold notice command information A (x) is stored again, and if the hold notice command information A (x) is stored, whether or not the executed flag is set. The determination process is executed. These processes are performed until a storage area in which the pending notice command information A (x) is stored and the executed flag is not set is searched, or the pending notice command information A (x) does not exist. Until the area is searched, it loops while sequentially updating the search target.

  If a storage area in which the pending notice command information A (x) is stored and the executed flag is not set is searched, the process advances to step S3902. In step S3902, the executed flag is set in the executed flag storage area of the storage area in which the hold notice command information A (x) to be executed for the current hold notice effect is stored in the hold notice effect storage area. To do. Thereby, it is avoided that the command information A (x) for hold notice used this time in the hold notice effect is used redundantly.

  Thereafter, in step S3903, the hold notice command information A (x) selected as an execution target of the current hold notice effect is grasped. In a succeeding step S3904, it is determined whether or not the special hold notice effect setting completed flag is set in the special hold notice effect setting completed flag storage area provided in the work RAM 254. The special hold notice effect set flag is set when executing the special hold notice effect in the current opening / closing execution mode, and is erased when the opening / closing execution mode ends. For this reason, it can be said that the determination process of step S3904 is a process of determining whether or not the special hold notice effect has already been executed in the current opening / closing execution mode.

  If the special hold notice effect has not yet been executed, a negative determination is made in step S3904, and the process proceeds to step S3905. In step S3905, a first effect lottery process is executed. Specifically, by referring to the first effect lottery table TD2 provided in the ROM 243, the current pending notice effect is lottery.

  On the other hand, if the special hold notice effect has already been executed, an affirmative decision is made in step S3904 and the flow proceeds to step S3906. In step S3906, a second effect lottery process is executed. Specifically, by referring to the second effect lottery table TD3 provided in the ROM 243, the current pending notice effect is selected and the process proceeds to step S3910.

  Here, each effect lottery table TD2, TD3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first effect lottery table TD2, and FIG. 63B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second effect lottery table TD3.

  As shown in FIG. 63, in the present embodiment, as the hold notice effect, the special hold notice effect, the first hold notice effect, the second hold notice effect, the third hold notice effect, the fourth hold notice effect, and the fifth The hold notice effect is set. In addition, in the first effect lottery table TD2 and the second effect lottery table TD3, the hold notice command information A (x) is set, and each hold notice effect corresponds to the hold notice command information A (x). The winning probabilities are set differently.

  Specifically, for example, when the command information A (x) for holding notice is A (1) in the first effect lottery table TD2, the probability of winning the special hold notice effect is 40%, and the first hold notice is given. The probability of winning the effect is set to 30%, the probability of winning the second hold notice effect is 25%, and the probability of winning the third hold notice effect is set to 5%. On the other hand, for example, if the command information A (x) for holding advance notice is A (4) in the first effect lottery table TD2, the probability of winning the first hold notice effect is 60%, and the second hold notice effect is given. The probability of winning is set to 30%, and the probability of winning the third hold notice effect is set to 10%.

  Note that, in detail, for example, a lottery counter area for the effect lottery is provided in the work RAM 254, and the value of the counter for the effect lottery that is periodically updated in the counter lottery area for the effect is considered. . In this case, the counter values are distributed so that the winning probabilities set in correspondence with the respective hold notice command information A (x) in each production lottery table TD2, TD3. Note that the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and the specific configuration thereof is arbitrary as long as the winning probability can be individually set for each holding notice effect.

  Here, each hold notice effect is set such that the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot (the probability of winning the jackpot when the hold notice effect is displayed) is different. Specifically, the special hold notice effect is set to be executed only when a big win is won (expectation 100%). Then, as the first hold notice effect → the second hold notice effect → the third hold notice effect, the expectation of winning the big hit is set so as to decrease sequentially. The fourth hold notice effect and the fifth hold notice effect are set so as not to be a big win (expectation 0%). However, the fourth hold notice effect and the fifth hold notice effect are set so that the fourth hold notice effect has a higher expectation.

  In the first effect lottery table TD2, special hold notice effects are associated with the hold notice command information A (1) to A (3) corresponding to the jackpot. For this reason, when referring to the first effect lottery table TD2, the special reservation notice effect can be selected.

  In particular, the first effect lottery table TD2 is set so that the special reservation notice effect is selected with a probability of 100% for A (3). That is, when the first notice lottery table TD2 is referred to in the situation where the hold notice command information A (x) to be executed for the current hold notice effect is A (3), the special hold notice effect is always selected. It has become.

  As already described, A (3) is the effect C in which the effect pattern in the game times related to the hold information is set. The effect C is an effect of performing a reach display with a relatively short variation display time. For this reason, the reach display in which the variable display time is relatively short is the hold information in which the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponds to the jackpot value information, and the hold information in which the hold notice effect other than the special hold notice effect is executed. The jackpot random number counter C1 is the hold information corresponding to the jackpot value information, and is easily executed for the hold information for which the special hold notice effect is executed as the hold notice effect.

  In the second effect lottery table TD3, no special hold notice effect is associated with any hold notice command information A (x). For this reason, when referring to the second effect lottery table TD3, the special reservation notice effect is not selected.

  That is, the first effect lottery process (step S3905) referring to the first effect lottery table TD2 is a lottery process of the hold notice effect that can select the special hold notice effect, and the second effect lottery table TD3 is referred to. It can be said that the effect lottery process (step S3906) is a lottery process of the hold notice effect in which the special hold notice effect cannot be selected.

  Returning to the description of the hold notice effect determination process (FIG. 62), after the execution of the first effect lottery process, the process proceeds to step S3907 to determine whether or not the special hold notice effect has been won in the first effect lottery process. . If the special hold notice effect has not been won, the process proceeds to step S3910. If the special hold notice effect has been won, the special hold notice effect set flag is set in step S3908, and the process proceeds to step S3910. . As a result, the execution of the first effect lottery process is restricted, and the execution of the special hold notice effect is restricted in the main opening / closing execution mode. That is, the special reservation notice effect is executed only once in one opening / closing execution mode. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from scolding the gambling feeling of the player too much.

  It should be noted that the number of times that the special hold notice effect is executed during one opening / closing execution mode is not limited to one, but may be two times, three times, and so on. However, if it pays attention to the viewpoint which suppresses euphoria, it is good to set it once.

  If there is no hold information that has not been put on hold notice effect (step S3901: NO), the process proceeds to step S3909, the fifth hold notice effect is selected as the hold notice effect, and the process proceeds to step S3910. That is, when there is no hold information to be executed as a hold notice effect, the fifth hold notice effect is selected uniformly.

  In step S3910, information corresponding to the currently selected hold notice effect is set for the effect execution area provided in work RAM 254, and the process proceeds to step S3911. The effect execution area is used to execute the hold notice effect, and specifically, the hold notice effect corresponding to the information set in the effect execution area is executed as the current round effect. Has been.

  In steps S3911 to S3915, the currently selected hold notice effect is compared with the currently held execution effect selected with respect to the current open / close execution mode in the previous open / close execution mode, and the hold notice effect based on the comparison result. Execute the process to determine.

  Specifically, each memory area of the storage area for the hold notice effect stores information for specifying the hold notice effect executed in the previous opening / closing execution mode (hereinafter simply referred to as the previous hold notice effect). A comparison storage area that can be kept open is provided. In step S3911, the previous hold advance notice is obtained by grasping the storage area for comparison in the storage area storing the hold advance notice command information A (x) set as the execution target in the hold advance notice effect storage area. Understand the production.

  In a succeeding step S3912, it is determined whether or not the previous hold notice effect was a special hold notice effect. If it is not a special hold notice effect, the process advances to step S3913 to execute a process for determining whether or not the previous hold notice effect has a higher expectation than the currently selected hold notice effect.

  As already described, the degree of expectation is set to be lower in accordance with the first hold notice effect → the second hold notice effect →... → the fifth hold notice effect. For this reason, for example, when the previous hold notice effect is the first hold notice effect and the currently selected hold notice effect is the third hold notice effect, an affirmative determination is made in step S3913. On the other hand, for example, if the previous hold notice effect is the fourth hold notice effect and the currently selected hold notice effect is the third hold notice effect, a negative determination is made in step S3913.

  When the determination in step S3913 is affirmative, it means that the hold notice effect selected this time has a lower expectation than the previous hold notice effect. In this case, in step S3914, information corresponding to the previous hold notice effect is set in the effect execution storage area, and the hold notice effect determination process is terminated. As a result, the information in the effect execution storage area is rewritten from the information corresponding to the currently selected hold notice effect to the information corresponding to the previous hold notice effect. Therefore, the previous hold notice effect is executed.

  On the other hand, when the previous hold notice effect is the special hold notice effect (step S3912: YES), or the previous hold notice effect is not the special hold notice effect, and the currently selected hold notice effect is the previous hold notice effect. If the degree of expectation is higher (step S3912: NO, step S3913: NO), the process proceeds to step S3915. In step S3915, a process of switching the comparison target is executed without rewriting the information in the effect execution storage area.

  Specifically, among the storage areas for the reserved advance notice effect, this time is selected for the storage area for comparison of the storage area storing the command information A (x) for the reserved advance notice set as the execution target this time. A process of rewriting information corresponding to the hold notice effect is executed. Thereby, in the next opening / closing execution mode with respect to the current opening / closing execution mode, the holding notice effect to be compared becomes the holding notice effect selected this time.

  According to this processing, if the hold notice effect selected this time has a higher expectation than the previous hold notice effect, the hold notice effect selected this time is executed as it is. Thereby, the hold notice effect is promoted, and the degree of attention to the player's hold notice effect can be increased.

  On the other hand, in the situation where the previous hold notice effect is not the special hold notice effect, when the hold notice effect selected this time has a lower degree of expectation than the previous hold notice effect, the previous hold notice effect is executed. Thereby, the fall of the attention degree to the game which may arise when a holding notice effect is demoted can be suppressed.

  Here, when the previous hold notice effect is the special hold notice effect, the currently selected hold notice effect is executed. Thereby, the hold information in which the special hold notice effect is executed can be changed, and the hold notice effect can be diversified.

  In other words, as described above, the number of executions of the special hold notice effect that can be executed during one opening / closing execution mode is determined in advance as one. For this reason, if the special hold notice effect is maintained in a situation where the previous hold notice effect is the special hold notice effect, the opportunity to select the special hold notice effect for other hold information decreases.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the previous hold notice effect is the special hold notice effect, the hold notice effect may be demoted to execute the currently selected hold notice effect. Accordingly, it is possible to increase the frequency at which the hold notice effect corresponding to the hold information other than the hold information related to the previous special hold notice effect becomes the special hold notice effect, and to diversify the hold notice effect.

  In this case, the hold notice effect may be demoted. However, since the special hold notice effect is a hold notice effect that is set only when the jackpot is won, even if the hold notice effect is demoted, the hold information corresponding to the hold notice effect is a jackpot winner. You can recognize that there is. For this reason, even if the hold notice effect is demoted, the player does not lose interest in the game. Therefore, inconvenience caused by demoting the special hold notice effect is unlikely to occur.

  Note that the information stored in the comparison storage area is erased by the erasure processing of the first storage area of the holding notice effect storage area that is executed when the shift command is received.

  Returning to the description of the round effect execution process (FIG. 61), after executing the hold notice effect determination process, the hold notice effect is started in step S3803. Specifically, a data table for executing a hold notice effect corresponding to the information set in the effect execution storage area is read from the program ROM 253, and the hold notice effect is started according to the read data table. Let

  Here, a series of moving images corresponding to the time at which the round game is consumed is set in the data table, and the reproduction of the moving images is started by reading the data table. When the end timing of the moving image comes, the final stop image of the moving image is displayed. The final stop image is maintained until the next round game is started or until the ending effect is started.

  In the subsequent step S3804, control is performed so that the holding picture Pa corresponding to the holding information set as the execution target this time (holding advance notice command information A (x)) swings up and down, and this round effect execution processing is ended. To do. As a result, it is possible to identify which hold information is the execution target of the current hold notice effect.

  As already described, the holding picture Pa indicates that the holding information has been acquired, and indicates how many times the change starting process is to be determined as to whether or not the holding information is determined. . Therefore, by grasping the hold information that is the execution target of the current hold notice effect, the hold notice effect that is executed this time is expected for the hold information related to the number of fluctuation start processes after the opening / closing execution mode ends. It is possible to grasp whether it is a degree.

  When there is no hold information set as the execution target of the hold notice effect at this time, that is, in step S3901 of the hold notice effect determining process (FIG. 62), it is determined that there is no hold information that has not been executed. Thus, when the fifth hold notice effect is selected, the round effect execution process is terminated without causing any hold picture Pa to swing.

  If it is not the round start timing, a negative determination is made in step S3801 and the process proceeds to step S3805. In step S3805, it is determined whether it is a production result confirmation timing.

  Here, each hold notice effect has the same mode from the effect start timing to the effect result determination timing when a predetermined time has passed, except for the fifth hold notice effect. For this reason, it is difficult for the player to specify which of the current hold notice effects is based on the aspect from the effect start timing to the effect result determination timing. And the production aspect after the production result decision timing in each holding notice effect (except for the fifth holding notice effect) is different for each holding notice effect. Thereby, a player can grasp | ascertain which is this hold notice effect at the timing after the effect result confirmation timing.

  If it is not the effect result determination timing, the round effect execution process is terminated as it is, whereas if it is the effect result determination timing, the process of step S3806 is performed, and the round effect execution process is ended. In step S3806, the hold notice result pattern Pb corresponding to the current hold notice effect is displayed in the unit hold display area corresponding to the hold information that is the execution target of the current hold notice effect.

  Here, the type of the hold notice effect and the result pictures Pb0 to Pb4 of the hold notice result picture Pb are set in association with each other. Specifically, the special result pattern Pb0 for the special reservation notice effect, the first result pattern Pb1 for the first reservation notice effect, and the second result pattern Pb2 for the second reservation notice effect. The third result picture Pb3 is set in association with the third hold notice effect, and the fourth result picture Pb4 is set in correspondence with the fourth hold notice effect. In step S3806, the result pattern corresponding to the hold notice effect executed this time is displayed so as to overlap the swinging hold picture Pa (the hold picture Pa corresponding to the hold information that is the current execution target). Let

  The specific processing for displaying the holding notice result pattern Pb will be described in detail. As described in the first embodiment, the video RAM 257 is provided with the holding display area 271, and the holding display area 271 has unit areas 272 to 279 corresponding to the unit holding display areas Ga1 to Ga8, respectively. Each of the unit areas 272 to 279 is provided with a specific area for displaying the reserved notice result pattern Pb. In step S3806, information for specifying the result pattern corresponding to the current hold notice effect is set for the specific area of the unit area corresponding to the current hold notice effect. The display control device 212 draws the pending notice result pattern Pb based on the information. As a result, a result pattern corresponding to the hold notice effect is displayed in the unit hold display area corresponding to the hold notice effect executed this time.

  Note that the fifth reserved notice effect is not associated with the reserved notice result pattern Pb. For this reason, when the fifth hold notice effect is executed, the hold notice result pattern Pb is not displayed in the hold display area Ga related to the fifth hold notice effect.

  In step S3806, a process for stopping the swing of the holding pattern Pa is executed.

<About the direction of each hold notice effect>
Next, an effect mode of each hold notice effect, in detail, a display mode displayed on the display screen G will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the production mode of each hold notice effect, and FIG. 64 (a) shows the display mode displayed on the display screen G at the production start timing of each hold notice effect. FIG. 64B shows a display mode displayed on the display screen G at the midpoint of each hold notice effect except for the fifth hold notice effect, and FIG. 64C shows the display screen at the effect result determination timing of the fourth hold notice effect. FIG. 64D shows a display mode displayed on the display screen G at the timing for determining the effect result of the special hold notice effect. Note that the hold notice effect of this time is related to the round game of the third round, and further, it is related to hold information to be executed in the third variation start process after the opening / closing execution mode ends. In addition, it is assumed that the total number of holds acquired is 8, and the fifth hold notice effect is executed in the first and second round games.

  First, when the round is started, a girl character with a cane is displayed at the center of the display screen G as shown in FIG. In each of the unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga8, the first hold picture Pa1 or the second hold picture Pa2 is displayed as the hold picture Pa. Then, the first hold pattern Pa1 displayed in the third unit hold display area Ga3 corresponding to the hold information that is the execution target of this hold notice effect swings up and down. In the fifth hold notice effect, the display mode is maintained until the next round game is started.

  In the upper left portion of the display screen G, “3R” is displayed as the current round number, and “8R” indicating the total round number is displayed.

  In addition, in the case where the current hold notice effect is the fifth hold notice effect corresponding to the absence of hold information indicating that the hold notice effect has not been executed, none of the holding pictures Pa is swung.

  In each holding notice effect other than the fifth holding notice effect, as shown in FIG. 64 (b), a state in which a girl character casts a spell for transforming is displayed and the spell is displayed. At the same time, it is displayed that the girl character is surrounded by bright light. The dazzling light wraps not only the girl character but also the entire display screen G. The display mode from the start timing of the round until the dazzling light wraps the entire display screen G is common to each hold notice effect excluding the fifth hold notice effect.

  Thereafter, in the fourth hold notice effect, as shown in FIG. 64 (c), the girl character that falls and falls on the floor due to the failure of the transformation is displayed, and the fourth hold notice effect ends. In this case, the swing of the first holding pattern Pa1 in the third unit holding display area Ga3 stops and the fourth result pattern Pb4 is displayed so as to overlap the first holding pattern Pa1. The fourth result picture Pb4 is also displayed after the next round game. The fourth result picture Pb4 is once erased during the execution of the ending effect, but is displayed again after the opening / closing execution mode is completed.

  The ending effect will be described in detail. In the ending effect, a period corresponding to an ending movie in which a series of moving images are reproduced and a predetermined waiting period after the end of the ending movie are set. When receiving an ending command, the display control device 212 reproduces the ending movie, displays a still image over a standby period after the end of the ending movie, and then executes the game times.

  On the other hand, in the special hold notice effect and the first to third hold notice effects, as shown in FIG. 64 (d), a girl character whose light has stopped and has been transformed successfully is displayed. Ends.

  Here, in the special hold notice effect and the first to third hold notice effects, the colors of the clothes of the girl character after the transformation are different. Specifically, in the special hold notice effect, the color of the girl character's clothes after the transformation is set to gold, and in the first hold notice effect, the color of the girl character's clothes after the change is set to red. In the second hold notice effect, the color of the girl character's clothes after transformation is set to green, and in the third hold notice effect, the color of the girl character's clothes after change is set to blue. For this reason, by grasping the color of the girl character's clothes after transformation, it is possible to identify the current hold notice effect and grasp the expectation of the hold information set as the execution target of this hold notice effect. be able to.

  In addition, the display mode after the production result determination timing in each holding notice effect may be configured to change a transformation pose, for example. In short, the specific mode is arbitrary as long as it is possible to identify which holding notice effect the player is.

  In addition, the result pattern corresponding to the current reservation notice effect is displayed so that the swing of the first holding pattern Pa1 in the third unit holding display area Ga3 stops and overlaps the first holding pattern Pa1. Is displayed. In FIG. 64D, a special result pattern Pb0 is displayed. The result pattern is also displayed after the next round, and is temporarily deleted during the execution of the ending effect, but is displayed again after the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  That is, once displayed, the pending notice result pattern Pb is continuously displayed until ending is started. And it is displayed again after the ending. Note that, as a configuration for hiding the pending notice result pattern Pb during ending, for example, it is determined whether or not an ending command has been received, and when it is determined that an ending command has been received, the pending notice result pattern is displayed. Information related to Pb is temporarily stored, and the pending notice result pattern Pb is not displayed. On the other hand, if an ending command has not been received, it is determined whether it is the ending end timing. When it is the ending end timing, the pending notice result pattern Pb is displayed again based on the temporarily stored information.

  In the special hold notice effect and the first to third hold notice effects, the color of the girl character's clothes after transformation and the color of the reserved notice result pattern Pb are set to be the same. Thereby, the hold notice effect and the hold notice result pattern Pb can be closely associated with each other.

<On hold display area control processing>
Next, the hold display area control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The hold display area control process is periodically executed in the display control device 212, and executes display control of the hold display area Ga based on the digestion or acquisition of the hold information.

  Specifically, first, in step S4001, it is determined whether a shift command has been received. If a shift command is received, the process advances to step S4002 to execute a pattern shift process.

  In the pattern shift process, the hold pattern Pa displayed in the first unit hold display area Ga1 is erased, and if the hold notice result pattern Pb is displayed in the first unit hold display area Ga1, The pending notice result pattern Pb is deleted.

  Further, the holding picture Pa and the holding notice result picture Pb displayed in each of the unit hold display areas Ga2 to Ga8 are sequentially shifted to the unit hold display area in the previous stage. For example, when the first hold picture Pa1 and the second result picture Pb2 are displayed in the second unit hold display area Ga2 at the current stage, the first hold picture Pa1 and the second hold picture Pa1 and the second result picture Pb2 are displayed in the first unit hold display area Ga1. 2 The result pattern Pb2 is displayed.

  As already described, the on-hold notice result pattern Pb is displayed at the effect confirmation timing of the on-hold notice effect. The pending notice result pattern Pb is once hidden during execution of the ending effect, but is then displayed again. That is, when the hold notice effect is executed during the open / close execution mode and the hold notice result pattern Pb is displayed, the hold notice result pattern Pb changes in accordance with the corresponding hold information after the opening / closing execution mode ends. It is displayed over a period until the start process is executed. Thereby, the game times after the end of the opening / closing execution mode can be digested in a state where the result of the hold notice effect is grasped.

  The specific process of step S4002 will be described. In step S4002, a process of shifting information stored in each of the unit areas 272 to 279 is executed. Specifically, the information set in the kth unit area (k: natural number of 2 to 8) is shifted to the (k-1) th unit area. As a result, the holding picture Pa (and the holding notice result picture Pb) displayed in the first unit holding display area Ga1 is erased, and the holding picture Pa and the holding notice result picture Pb are displayed. Will shift.

  If a shift command has not been received, the process advances to step S4003 to determine whether a hold command has been received. As described in the first embodiment, the hold command is a command that is set when a game ball is won in each of the operation ports 33 and 34. If a hold command has been received, the process advances to step S4004 to execute a process of displaying the hold picture Pa in the unit hold display area corresponding to the hold command received this time among the unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga8.

  Specifically, as already described, the n-th unit hold display area is associated with the hold information that is the target of the determination in the n-th change start process from the current time. The pending command includes number information for specifying the number of fluctuation start processes from the current time to be the target of the determination. For this reason, by grasping the number information, the corresponding unit hold display area is grasped. Then, a process of displaying the holding picture Pa in the corresponding unit holding display area is executed. Thereafter, the hold display area control process is terminated.

  Note that the configuration for displaying the holding pattern Pa is not limited to the above-described configuration. For example, in the unit holding display areas Ga1 to Ga8, the first unit holding display area is used for the holding in the first unit holding display area. It is good also as a structure which displays the pattern Pa. Even in this case, the display results are the same.

  On the other hand, if no hold command has been received, the process advances to step S4005 to determine whether an opening command has been received. If the opening command has not been received, the on-hold display area control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the opening command has been received, the process advances to step S4006 to check whether the on-hold notice result pattern Pb is being displayed. Determine whether or not. If the reserved notice result pattern Pb is not displayed, the reserved display area control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the holding notice result design Pb is being displayed, the effect result of the holding notice effect related to the previous opening / closing execution mode is displayed with respect to the opening / closing execution mode related to the opening command received in step S4005. Means. In this case, the process proceeds to step S4007, and the currently displayed pending notice result pattern Pb is not displayed. Thereby, the player can grasp that the holding notice effect is newly executed in the current opening / closing execution mode, and the degree of attention to the holding notice effect in the current opening / closing execution mode can be increased.

<Regarding the notice of hold notice when hold information is acquired during a round game>
Next, the state of the hold notice effect when the hold information is acquired during the round game will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. FIG. 66 (a) shows the round timing, and FIGS. 66 (b) to 66 (f) are explanatory views showing display modes of the hold display area Ga in each round. For convenience of explanation, at the timing when the first round game is started, four pieces of hold information based on winnings in the lower operation port 34 are acquired, and further to the upper operation port 33 in the sixth round game. It is assumed that four pieces of hold information based on the winnings are newly acquired.

  Since four pieces of hold information based on winning in the lower working port 34 are acquired at the timing when the first round game is started, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), the first unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga1 In the fourth unit hold display area Ga4, the second hold pattern Pa2 is displayed. Then, in the first round game, the hold notice effect (for example, the first hold notice effect) related to the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process is executed in the first change start process after the opening / closing execution mode ends. On the first unit hold display area Ga1 corresponding to the information, the hold notice result design pattern Pb (for example, the first result design pattern Pb1) is displayed.

  Thereafter, in the second round game, the hold notice effect (for example, the second hold notice effect) related to the hold information that is the object of the determination of success or failure is executed in the second change start process after the opening / closing execution mode ends. In this case, as shown in FIG. 66 (c), the hold notice result pattern Pb (for example, the second result pattern Pb2) is displayed in the second unit hold display area Ga2 corresponding to the hold information.

  And at the start timing of the sixth round game, there is no hold information that is not the target of the hold notice effect. For this reason, the fifth hold notice effect is executed.

  In addition, during the sixth round game, four pieces of hold information based on winning in the upper working port 33 are acquired. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 66 (d), the first reserved picture Pa1 is displayed in each of the fifth unit reserved display area Ga5 to the eighth unit reserved display area Ga8.

  In the subsequent round game of the seventh round, the hold notice effect related to the hold information acquired during the round game of the sixth round is executed. In this case, among the newly acquired hold information, the hold information acquired first, that is, the hold notice effect related to the hold information that is the target of the determination in the fifth variation start process after the opening / closing execution mode ends (for example, the first 2 hold notice effect) is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (e), the reserved notice result pattern Pb (for example, the second result pattern Pb2) is displayed in the fifth unit hold display area Ga5 corresponding to the hold information.

  Then, in the round game of the eighth round, the hold information acquired secondly among the hold information acquired during the round game of the sixth round, that is, the determination of success / failure in the sixth variation start process after the opening / closing execution mode ends. A hold notice effect (for example, a third hold notice effect) related to the target hold information is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (f), the reserved notice result pattern Pb (for example, the third result pattern Pb 3) is displayed in the sixth unit hold display area Ga 6 corresponding to the hold information.

  In other words, when the hold information is newly acquired during a predetermined round game in the situation where there is no hold information (holding advance command information A (x)) that can be the execution target of the hold notice effect, the predetermined round A hold notice effect related to the newly acquired hold information in the next round game is executed for the game. When there are a plurality of newly acquired hold information, the hold information set as the execution target of the hold notice effect in the next round game is not the hold information corresponding to the next round game, but newly Among the acquired hold information, the hold information acquired first, that is, the order of the determination of the success / failure in the change start process is earlier.

  In the present embodiment, a hold notice effect relating to one hold information is executed in one round game. For this reason, among the hold information acquired during the sixth round game, the hold information acquired third and fourth is not an execution target of the hold notice effect.

<About the demotion of special hold notice effect>
Next, the state of demoting the special hold notice effect will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. FIG. 67 (a-1) is an explanatory diagram showing a display mode of the hold display area Ga in the predetermined opening / closing execution mode, and FIG. 67 (a-2) shows the hold information acquired in the predetermined opening / closing execution mode. It shows the result of the success / failure. FIG. 67 (b-1) is an explanatory diagram showing the display mode of the hold display area Ga in the next opening / closing execution mode with respect to the predetermined opening / closing execution mode, and FIG. 67 (b-2) shows the predetermined opening / closing execution mode. The result of the hold information acquired in the next opening / closing execution mode with respect to the mode is shown.

  67 (a-2) and 67 (b-2), for convenience of explanation, the region Dm (m: a natural number of 1 to 8) is a target of whether or not it is determined in the m-th variation start process after the opening / closing execution mode ends. The result of whether or not the hold information is correct is shown. For example, it is assumed that the region D3 indicates the result of the hold information that is the target of the determination in the third variation start process after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Note that “T” indicates that the result is a jackpot, and “Out” indicates that the result is not. In addition, detailed description of the hold information for which the result of the determination is out of date and the picture Pb for the hold notice result relating to the hold information is omitted.

  First, the case of a predetermined opening / closing execution mode will be described. As shown in FIG. 67 (a-2), as shown in FIG. 67 (a-2), the hold information that is determined to be true or false in the first, third, and fifth variation start processing after the opening / closing execution mode ends. It corresponds to the jackpot winning. For this reason, the hold notice effect corresponding to the hold information with a relatively high expectation is executed. The first unit hold display area Ga1, the third unit hold display area Ga3, and the fifth unit hold display area Ga5, which are unit hold display areas corresponding to these hold information, have a degree of expectation that is a relatively big win. A high reservation notice result pattern Pb is displayed. Specifically, the first result pattern Pb1 is displayed in the first unit hold display area Ga1, the special result pattern Pb0 is displayed in the third unit hold display area Ga3, and the fifth unit hold display area Ga5. Displays the second result pattern Pb2.

  Here, as already described, the special hold notice effect is executed only once in one opening / closing execution mode. For this reason, when the special hold notice effect is executed for the hold information corresponding to the third unit hold display area Ga3, the hold notice effect related to the other hold information does not become the special hold notice effect. Only one special result pattern Pb0 corresponding to the special hold notice effect is displayed.

  Thereafter, the next opening / closing execution mode is started based on the holding information in the region D1, specifically, the holding information that is the target of the determination of whether or not the first change start process has been performed after the end of the predetermined opening / closing execution mode. In this case, as shown in FIG. 67 (b-2), the order in which the hold information is determined to be true or false is shifted one by one. Specifically, for example, in the predetermined opening / closing execution mode, the hold information (holding information in the region D2) that is the object of the determination of the success / failure in the second variation start process after the end of the predetermined opening / closing execution mode is set in the next opening / closing execution mode. This is the holding information (holding information in the region D1) that is the object of the determination of the success / failure in the first fluctuation start process after the end of the next opening / closing execution mode. In this case, after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the hold information that is determined to be successful in the second and fourth variation start processing corresponds to the big win.

  Correspondingly, the hold notice effect related to the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is executed with a relatively high expectation, and the second unit hold display area Ga2 and the fourth unit hold display area Ga4 are relatively free. The pending notice result pattern Pb having a high expectation is displayed. Specifically, the first hold notice effect is executed as the hold notice effect related to the hold information that is determined to be true or false in the second fluctuation start process after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and in the fourth change start process after the opening / closing execution mode ends. A special hold notice effect is executed as the hold notice effect related to the hold information that is determined to be true or false. The first result pattern Pb1 is displayed in the second unit hold display area Ga2, and the special result pattern Pb0 is displayed in the fourth unit hold display area Ga4. Accordingly, it is possible to grasp that the hold information that is the target of the determination in the second and fourth fluctuation start processing after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is jackpot information.

  That is, it can be grasped that there are two pieces of hold information corresponding to the big win in the currently acquired hold information. In this case, the hold notice effect related to the hold information in which the special hold notice effect is executed in the predetermined opening / closing execution mode is demoted to the first hold notice effect.

<About the display of the pending notice result pattern Pb>
Next, display of the holding notice result pattern Pb will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 68 (a) shows the period of the opening / closing execution mode, FIG. 68 (b) shows the opening period, FIG. 68 (c) shows the period during which the round game is performed, and FIG. 68 (d) shows the ending movie. 68 (e) shows a waiting period after the ending movie, and FIG. 68 (f) shows a period during which the pending notice result pattern Pb is displayed.

  When the opening / closing execution mode is started at the timing t1, an opening effect is first started. The hold notice confirmation process is executed for the hold information acquired at the current stage during the opening effect, and the hold notice command information A (x) is sequentially stored in the hold notice effect storage area.

  Thereafter, the opening effect ends at the timing of t2, the round game is started, and the hold notice effect is executed. Then, the pending notice result pattern Pb is displayed at the timing of t3.

  When the eighth round game ends at the timing t4, an ending effect, specifically an ending movie, is started. In this case, the pending notice result pattern Pb is temporarily hidden. Thereafter, the ending movie ends at the timing of t5, and a standby period starts. A still image is displayed during the waiting period. Specifically, a still image displaying the model name, manufacturer name, etc. of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed.

  The opening / closing execution mode ends at the timing of t6 when the standby period has elapsed from the timing of t5, and the game times are started. The pending notice result pattern Pb is displayed again at the timing of t6.

  That is, when the pending notice result pattern Pb is displayed during a round game, it is continuously displayed during the round game. The pending notice result pattern Pb is temporarily hidden during the ending effect (during the period from the timing t4 to the timing t6), but is displayed again when the opening / closing execution mode ends, and the pending notice result pattern is displayed. It is displayed until the game time of the hold information related to Pb is started. Thereby, when the game times are digested, the game can be digested while grasping the degree of expectation of the suspension information by grasping the reserved notice result pattern Pb.

  In particular, during the opening / closing execution mode, the processing related to the digestion of the game times (the processing of steps S502 to S510 in the game times control processing) is not performed, and the game times are digested after the opening / closing execution mode ends. For this reason, if the hold notice effect is executed during the opening / closing execution mode, the interval between the execution timing of the hold notice effect and the start timing of the game times related to the hold information that is the target of the hold notice effect tends to increase. Therefore, when the game round is started, it may be forgotten which hold notice effect has been executed for the hold information targeted in the game round.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the on-hold notice result pattern Pb is displayed until the game time of the on-hold information related to the on-hold notice result picture Pb is started, thus avoiding the above inconvenience. It is possible to closely associate the hold notice effect and the effect executed in the game round.

  In the present embodiment, the pending notice result pattern Pb is not displayed during the period in which the ending effect is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the pending notice result pattern Pb is displayed during the ending. A configuration may be adopted. In other words, the pending notice result pattern Pb may be continuously displayed until the pending information corresponding to the pending notice result pattern Pb is digested.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure which does not display the image Pb for holding | maintenance preliminary announcement results only during the waiting period in an ending effect, and it is good also as a structure which does not display only the period when the ending movie is reproduced | regenerated. In short, the pending notice result pattern Pb only needs to be configured to be displayed again at the timing at which digestion of game times is started even if it is once hidden during the opening / closing execution mode.

  Next, processing executed by the display control device 212 when a power failure occurs during a round game will be described.

  When a power failure occurs during the round game, the display control device 212 executes a process corresponding to the power failure and stops. And the display control apparatus 212 performs the process for a reset based on having returned from the power failure, and returns to the state at the time of a power failure. In the return process, a process for initializing the work RAM 254 is executed, so that each information stored in the storage area for the hold notice effect is also deleted.

  In this situation, when a game ball wins one of the operation ports 33 and 34 and new hold information is acquired, the hold advance command information A (x) related to the newly acquired hold information is displayed. It is transmitted to the control device 212. The display control device 212 stores the hold notice command information A (x) in the corresponding storage area of the hold notice effect storage area based on the receipt of the hold notice command information A (x). Error-preserving notice information A (x) corresponding to an error is set for each storage area prior to the storage area storing the notice information for holding notice A (x). For example, when a power failure occurs in a situation where three pieces of pending notice command information A (x) are stored and then recovered, the three pending notice command information A (x) is deleted. After that, when a new hold notice command is received, the hold notice command information A (x) is stored in the fourth storage area, and the error corresponding hold is stored in the first to third storage areas. Preliminary command information A (x) is stored.

  Thereafter, the hold notice effect determination process is executed based on the start timing of the round. In this case, if the hold notice command information A (x) corresponding to the error is grasped as the hold notice command information A (x) for which the hold notice effect has not been executed, it is executed in the executed flag storage area of the corresponding storage area. The completed flag is set and the fifth hold notice effect is executed.

  That is, when new hold notice command information A (x) is acquired in a situation where hold notice command information A (x) is lost due to a power failure, the lost hold notice command information A (x) The fifth hold notice effect is executed as the hold notice effect. Then, after the fifth hold notice effect is executed for the number of lost holds, the hold notice effect related to the newly acquired hold notice command information A (x) is executed.

  In the above configuration, if new hold information (holding notice command information A (x)) is acquired after recovery from a power failure, before the holding notice effect is performed on the newly acquired hold information. In addition, although the fifth hold notice effect is executed for the special information acquired before the newly acquired hold information, that is, the hold information erased from the work RAM 254 due to a power failure, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, in the next round game at the timing when the new hold information is acquired, the hold notice related to the newly acquired hold information without performing the hold notice effect on the hold information erased due to the power failure It is good also as a structure which performs production. In this case, for example, there may be a case in which the hold notice effect related to the hold information that is the target in the determination of whether or not the fifth fluctuation start process is performed after the opening / closing execution mode is executed in a round before the fifth round.

  Next, the display mode of the hold display area Ga when returning from a power outage will be described. When a power outage occurs, information for specifying the hold picture Pa displayed in the hold display area Ga until then, specifically, The information set in the hold display area 271 is deleted (initialized). For this reason, at the time of return, it cannot be specified which pattern is displayed in which unit hold display area. For this reason, nothing is displayed in the hold display area Ga.

  Thereafter, based on the fact that the hold command is received by newly acquiring hold information, the hold picture Pa is displayed in the unit hold display area corresponding to the hold command. In this case, either the first holding picture Pa1 or the second holding picture Pa2 is displayed according to the winning operation opening. Then, an error-corresponding holding pattern is displayed in the unit holding display area before the unit holding display area where the holding picture Pa is displayed. The error-corresponding holding picture has a different appearance from the above-described holding pictures Pa1 and Pa2, and specifically has a purple spherical shape. By displaying the hold pattern corresponding to the error, it is possible to grasp the currently stored number of holds.

  In other words, when a hold command is received after recovery from a power failure, the normal hold picture is displayed for the hold information corresponding to the hold command, while the hold information acquired before the hold information is displayed. For, a reserved picture corresponding to an error is displayed.

  Here, when a power failure occurs, the display control device 212 is based on winning to any one of the operation ports 33 and 34 for the hold information acquired so far due to the power failure. I can't specify.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, a holding pattern corresponding to an error is separately provided, and when it is unclear which of the operating ports is the holding information based on a prize, the holding pattern corresponding to the error is displayed. It was set as the structure made to do. Thereby, it is possible to notify the number of holds while preventing the player from being confused.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  The hold notice effect determining process is executed at the start timing of each round. Further, in the hold notice effect determining process, the hold information (hold notice command information A (x)) that is not the execution target of the hold notice effect is obtained. In addition to searching, when the hold information exists, a hold notice effect related to the hold information is executed. Thus, if the hold information is newly acquired by winning a game ball in each of the operation ports 33 and 34 during the opening / closing execution mode, the hold notice effect may be executed for the newly acquired hold information. It is possible to increase the execution frequency of the hold notice effect.

  In particular, when the total number of holds is small at the start timing of the opening / closing execution mode, it is expected that the fifth hold notice effect corresponding to the absence of hold information is continuously executed. In this case, the hold notice effect is monotonous, and the degree of attention to the hold notice effect may be reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the hold information is newly acquired during the opening / closing execution mode, the hold notice effect related to the newly acquired hold information is executed in the subsequent round game. Is done. Thereby, the said inconvenience can be avoided.

  Moreover, it was set as the structure which performs a pending | holding notice effect according to the digestion order used as the object of a success / failure determination after completion | finish of opening / closing execution mode. Thereby, the digestion order and the order in which the hold notice effect is executed can be associated with each other. Therefore, by grasping the order in which the hold notice effect is executed, the digestion order can be specified, and what is the degree of expectation about the hold information that is the target of the determination of success / failure after the opening / closing execution mode ends? Can be specified.

  Further, since the hold notice effect is sequentially executed from the hold information ahead of the digestion order, even if there is hold information that was not the target of the hold notice effect in the predetermined opening / closing execution mode, the hold information Is likely to be subject to a hold notice effect in the next opening / closing execution mode. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the frequency at which the hold information is digested without being a target of the hold notice effect, and to increase the execution frequency of the substantial hold notice effect. Note that the substantial execution frequency of the hold notice effect is the execution frequency of the hold notice effect excluding the fifth hold notice effect corresponding to the absence of the hold information.

  In the case of the above configuration, the round in which the hold notice effect is executed may not coincide with the order that is the target of the success / failure determination after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Specifically, for example, in a situation where three pieces of hold information have been acquired by the start timing of the sixth round game, new hold information is added during the sixth round game. When the hold information (execution target) is acquired in the determination, the hold notice effect related to the newly acquired hold information is executed in the seventh round game. For this reason, it may be difficult to specify the number of rounds of the current round game based on the information on the number of rounds of the current game, and whether or not it is a hold notice effect for the hold information to be executed. is there.

  On the other hand, when the hold notice effect is executed, the hold picture Pa corresponding to the hold information set as the execution target of the hold notice effect is swung. Thereby, a player can grasp | ascertain which holding information the holding notice effect of this time concerns, and the said inconvenience can be avoided.

  Furthermore, at the presentation result determination timing of the hold notice effect, the hold notice result pattern Pb is displayed on the unit hold display area corresponding to the hold information set as the execution target of the hold notice effect. Then, the hold notice result pattern Pb is displayed during the period during which the round game is performed and until the hold information related to the hold notice result pattern Pb is digested after the open / close execution mode ends. Thereby, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the game can be digested while grasping the result of the on-hold notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to suitably associate the hold notice effect with the game time.

  Further, when there is no hold information (holding notice command information A (x)) that can be executed as a holding notice effect, the fifth holding notice effect is executed, and then holding information that can be the object of the holding notice effect is acquired. In the case where the hold notice effect is executed for the newly acquired hold information, this time, instead of the display form corresponding to the fifth hold notice effect (display form in which the picture Pb for hold notice result is not displayed), The configuration is such that the hold notice result pattern Pb corresponding to the hold notice effect for the newly obtained hold information is displayed. For this reason, when the hold notice effect is executed for the hold information newly acquired during the round game, the result of the hold notice effect can be grasped.

  In this case, the degree of expectation is relatively low as an unacquired hold notice effect corresponding to a case where there is no hold information (hold notice command information A (x)) that can be the execution target of the hold notice effect (specifically, The 5th hold notice effect was selected. As a result, the hold notice effect for the newly acquired hold information is less likely to have a lower degree of expectation than the unacquired hold notice effect, so that the impression that the hold notice effect is demoted is not given.

  In addition, if new hold information is acquired during the round game, and there is still hold information that is not subject to the hold notice effect in the eighth round game, the remaining hold information Is configured not to execute the hold notice effect. Thereby, a hold notice effect can be associated with one hold information in each round. In addition, since the hold information that was not the subject of the hold notice effect is the one behind the digest order, the opportunity that can be the subject of the hold notice effect in the subsequent opening / closing execution mode is the hold information on the front side of the digest order. Higher than. For this reason, the opportunity to perform the hold notice effect for the hold information that is not the target of the hold notice effect is secured.

  As the hold notice effect, a plurality of hold notice effects having different expectations for winning a big hit are set, and one hold notice effect is selected from the plurality of hold notice effects. In such a configuration, when the degree of expectation of the hold notice effect selected this time is higher than that of the previous notice of hold notice effect, the degree of expectation of the hold notice effect selected this time is executed while the hold notice effect selected this time is executed as it is. Is lower than the previous hold notice effect, the previous hold notice effect is executed. Thereby, the fall of the willingness to the game which may arise when a holding notice effect is demoted can be suppressed.

  As a hold notice effect, a special hold notice effect that is set only when the hold information to be executed is a jackpot win is provided, and the special hold notice effect is performed a specific number of times (one time) in one opening / closing execution mode. The number of executions of special hold notice effect was limited. Specifically, when the special hold notice effect is selected, the table used in the subsequent lottery of the hold notice effect is switched to a table in which the special hold notice effect is not selected. Thereby, a game can be performed without excessively scolding the gambling feeling of the player.

  In this configuration, when the previous hold notice effect is the special hold notice effect, the current hold notice effect can be demoted from the special hold notice effect. Accordingly, it is possible to increase the frequency at which the hold notice effect related to other hold information becomes the special hold notice effect, and to diversify the hold notice effect.

  Furthermore, the hold notice effect related to the hold information is associated with the game pattern effect pattern related to the hold information. Specifically, the reach display with a relatively short variation display time is the jackpot winning hold information and the holding information of the jackpot winning than the holding information in which the hold notice effect other than the special hold notice effect is executed. The hold information for which the special hold notice effect is executed as the hold notice effect is configured to be easily executed. As a result, it is possible to perform reach display with relatively long variable display time for the hold information related to the jackpot winning and the hold information in which the hold notice effect other than the special hold notice effect is executed. Therefore, the attention degree of the game times of the hold information can be increased.

  That is, in the configuration in which a plurality of effect patterns having different display times are provided for the purpose of diversifying the effect patterns performed in the game times, and one effect pattern is selected from the plurality of effect patterns, the game is performed by the pending notice effect. Rather than holding information that can grasp the game result at the time (holding information subject to special hold notice effect), the variable information is displayed for the hold information that can not grasp the game result at the game time due to the hold notice effect. By associating an effect pattern with a long time, it can be expected that the game will be a big win. Thereby, the attention degree to game times can be raised.

  On the other hand, when the special hold notice effect is executed, reach display with a short variation display time can be performed. Thereby, the fall of the attention degree to the game which may arise by performing special reservation notice effect can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the degree of attention to the game that may be caused by executing the special reservation notice effect.

  That is, when the special hold notice effect is executed, it is determined that the hold information corresponding to the special hold notice effect is a big win. In this case, since the player can grasp the game result of the hold information, when a long effect is executed in the game times related to the hold information, an impression that the effect is forcibly shown is given, There is a risk that the degree of attention will be reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the game times related to the hold information for which the special hold notice effect has been executed can be completed in a relatively short period of time, so the game result is known even though the game result is known. It is possible to avoid giving the impression that the production is being forcibly shown.

  In the above-described embodiment, the configuration is such that the jackpot random number counter C1, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS are used when the pending notice command is set in the confirmation notice for the pending notice. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only the jackpot random number counter C1 and the reach random number counter C3 may be used. Specifically, the numerical range of the reach random number counter C3 may be divided into a plurality of ranges, and various effects may be distributed to each numerical range. In this case, it is preferable that the effect pattern set by the pending notice command corresponds to the effect pattern set by the change start process. For example, a table in which a plurality of detail patterns are set and the value of the variation type counter CS is associated with each detail pattern is provided for each effect pattern. In the variation start process, the table corresponding to the current production pattern is selected using the acquired jackpot random number counter C1 and reach random number counter C3. A detailed pattern corresponding to the current value of the variation type counter CS may be selected by referring to the selected table. In this case, while the plurality of detailed patterns set in the table corresponding to the effect A or the effect B have different variable display times, the variation of the plurality of detailed patterns set in the table corresponding to the effect C The display time may be set shorter than the shortest variation display time among the variation display times of the plurality of detailed patterns set in the table corresponding to the effect A or the effect B. Accordingly, it is possible to diversify the hold notice effect without using the variation type counter CS while suitably associating the hold notice effect with the effect executed in the game. In addition, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the confirmation process for the hold notice. Furthermore, since it is not necessary to acquire the variation type counter CS when winning a game ball to each of the operation ports 33 and 34, the processing load of the information acquisition process is reduced and the storage capacity of each of the reserved areas Ra and Rb is reduced. Can do.

  In the present embodiment, the special hold notice effect can be executed for the hold information in which the super reach display with a relatively long variable display time is set as the effect pattern executed in the game times. For example, the special hold notice effect may be executed only for hold information for which normal reach display with a short variable display time is executed. However, in view of the decrease in the execution frequency of the special hold notice effect, it is better to configure the special hold notice effect for the hold information for which the super reach display is set.

  In this embodiment, it is configured to execute the hold notice effect related to one hold information in one round game, but is not limited to this, for example, execute the hold notice effect related to a plurality of hold information in one round game. It is good also as composition to do. For example, when three pieces of hold information are newly acquired in the round game of the sixth round, the hold notice effect is obtained with respect to the hold information first acquired among the three pieces of hold information newly acquired in the round game of the seventh round. It is good also as a structure which performs holding notice effect about the remaining two hold information in the 8th round game. In this case, it may be configured to execute the shortening hold notice effect with a short effect time so that the hold notice effect can be executed for the two pieces of hold information during the eighth round game. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the hold information that is not the execution target of the hold notice effect from occurring.

  In the present embodiment, when the previous hold notice effect is a special hold notice effect, the special hold notice effect can be demoted to another hold notice effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. Also good. However, if attention is paid to the diversification of the hold notice effect, the configuration that can be demoted is superior.

  In addition, when a special hold notice effect is executed in a predetermined open / close execution mode, the hold notice effect related to the hold information that is the execution target of the special hold notice effect in the next open / close execution mode can be demoted. Good. For example, the special hold notice effect is executed in the predetermined opening / closing execution mode for the same hold information, the first hold notice effect is executed in the next opening / closing execution mode with respect to the predetermined opening / closing execution mode, and the next opening / closing is executed. It is good also as a structure which performs a 2nd reservation notice effect in execution mode.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the special hold notice effect can be executed for the same hold information in a plurality of opening / closing execution modes. However, the present embodiment is not limited to this, and may be configured to be demoted without fail. Accordingly, it is possible to further increase the degree of expectation that special information for which a special hold notice effect is performed is distributed.

  In this embodiment, when determining the production pattern, the jackpot random number counter C1, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS are used. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the jackpot type counter C2 may be used. Good. Thereby, even if it is a case where the number of patterns of an effect pattern is increased in order to diversify an effect pattern, the said effect pattern can be distributed suitably.

  In the above embodiment, when the degree of expectation of the hold notice effect selected this time is lower than the previous hold notice effect, the previous hold notice effect is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is good also as a structure which grasps | ascertains the last hold notice effect in the previous stage which draws an effect, and selects one hold notice effect from the hold notice effects whose expectation is higher than the said hold notice effect.

  In the present embodiment, when the hold notice effect is executed, the hold picture Pa corresponding to the hold information set as the execution target of the hold notice effect is rocked. For example, it may be configured to blink. In short, the specific display mode is arbitrary as long as it can be distinguished from the other reserved picture Pa.

  Each hold notice effect (except for the fifth hold notice effect) has the same form from the effect start timing to the effect result confirmation timing, but is not limited to this, for example, from the effect start timing to the effect result confirmation timing. The aspect may be irregular. In short, it is not necessary to specify which of the on-hold announcement effects is determined by the aspect from the production start timing to the production result determination timing.

  In the present embodiment, the hold notice command information A (x) and the change command have different configurations, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration in which part of the command information is shared may be used. Good. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the program capacity and the processing load related to command setting.

  Specifically, the pending notice command information A (x) and the change command each have, for example, a 2-byte data area. Then, in the data area, the data area in which information for determining the production pattern is set and the data area for specifying the type of command, specifically, which command is the command to be set this time are specified. And a data area. Then, in the confirmation process for holding notice, a detailed effect pattern is determined by executing the same process as the change start process. Then, the determined detailed effect pattern is set in a data area in which information for determining the effect pattern of the pending notice command information is set.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to divert part of the change command as part of the pending notice command information A (x) by changing the data area for specifying the type of command. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity and the processing load associated with the setting of the hold notice command information A (x) compared to a configuration in which the hold notice command information A (x) is newly prepared separately. it can.

  In the present embodiment, six types of pending notice effects are set, but the present invention is not limited to this and is arbitrary. Further, the number of games set as the high probability mode is not limited to eight, and is arbitrary.

  Further, the type of the hold notice effect may be one type. In this case, when a hold notice effect is executed for predetermined hold information in the previous opening / closing execution mode, the hold notice effect is executed in the current opening / closing execution mode. Thereby, it can suppress giving the impression that the reservation notice effect was demoted because the reservation notice effect was not performed. That is, in a situation where there is only one type of hold advance notice effect, the hold notice effect is executed for the predetermined hold information in the predetermined open / close execution mode, and the next open / close execution is performed for the predetermined open / close execution mode. In the mode, the hold notice effect is executed for the predetermined hold information.

  In the present embodiment, the processing related to the setting of the hold notice command information A (x) is executed during the opening / closing execution mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a normal gaming state (a state in which game times are consumed) It is good also as a structure performed in this. However, in the normal gaming state, the change start process, which is a process related to the start of the game times, can be executed. Therefore, the change start process and the confirmation process for holding notice can be executed in the same normal process time. Then, the processing load related to one processing time increases locally, and so-called processing failure may occur. In particular, in the present embodiment, not only the determination of success / failure but also the effect pattern is determined, so that the above processing loss is more likely to occur.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the process drop by executing the holding notice confirmation process during the opening / closing execution mode in which the change start process is not executed. In view of this point, it is preferable to perform the processing related to the setting of the hold notice command information A (x) during the opening / closing execution mode.

  In this embodiment, the various on-hold notice effects are configured to start from the start timing of the round game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to start, for example, in the middle of the round game. In short, the hold notice effect is started during the period in which the round game is being performed, and the result of the hold notice effect may be displayed until the next round game is started for the round game.

  In the present embodiment, the first holding picture Pa1 and the second holding picture Pa2 so that the holding information based on the winning to the upper working port 33 and the holding information based on the winning to the lower working port 34 can be visually distinguished. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one holding pattern may be used. However, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the hold information based on the winning at the upper operating port 33 and the hold information based on the winning at the lower operating port 34 have different degrees of advantage for the player.

  In the present embodiment, the hold notice effect is executed for each hold information. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the lottery process for determining whether or not to execute the hold notice effect is executed and the lottery process is won, It is good also as a structure which performs a reservation notice effect.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the reach display with a relatively short variation display time is a jackpot winning and special holding notice in advance of the holding information in which a holding notice effect other than the special holding notice effect is executed. Although the configuration is such that the hold information for which the effect is executed is easy to be executed, the present invention is not limited to this. However, a short reach display may be easily executed. Accordingly, the game times related to the hold information for which the special hold notice effect is executed can be ended relatively quickly, and the impression that the effect is being forcibly shown can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, the hold notice effect is executed during the opening / closing execution mode (during round game), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the hold notice effect may be executed during the game. Specifically, for example, a period may be divided for each period in which one or a plurality of game times are performed, and a holding notice effect may be performed for one or a plurality of holding information for each period. Further, for example, a period in which one game round is performed may be divided into a plurality of periods, and a hold notice effect may be executed for one or a plurality of hold information for each period.

  In the present embodiment, the hold information that is the target of the hold notice effect is selected according to the digestion order that is the target of determination of success / failure after the opening / closing execution mode ends. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is good also as a structure which selects in the reverse order to the digestion order used as the object of determination. In this case, at the start timing of the round game, a search is performed from the reverse order to determine whether or not there is hold information that is not yet the execution target of the hold notice effect. As a result, if new hold information is acquired during a round game, it is sequentially selected from the newly acquired hold information as the target of the hold notice effect. However, in this case, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the hold information that is difficult to be selected as the target of the hold notice effect is sequentially digested, so it is assumed that the execution frequency of the hold notice effect is lowered. If attention is paid to this point, a configuration in which the selection is made according to the digestion order is preferable.

  In addition, for example, after the opening / closing execution mode is finished, only the hold information that is the target of the determination of the odd number and the hold information that is the target of the determination of the even number may be the target of the hold notice effect. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the confirmation process for the hold notice and the hold notice effect determining process, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a process failure.

  In the present embodiment, the pending notice result pattern Pb is configured to be hidden at the start of the next opening / closing execution mode with respect to the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the display of the pending notice result pattern Pb. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In this case, the next opening / closing execution mode may be configured to perform the hold notice effect only for the hold information that is not the target of the hold notice effect in the previous opening / closing execution mode. Thereby, the hold notice effect is performed for the hold information newly acquired in a state reflecting the contents of the hold notice effect executed in the previous opening / closing execution mode.

  Further, based on the fact that the hold information is acquired during the game round, the confirmation process for the hold notice, the process related to the execution of the hold notice effect, and the process related to the display of the hold picture Pa and the hold notice result picture Pb It is good also as a structure which performs. In this case, every time a new game is started, the hold notice result pattern Pb is reset, and a hold notice effect is newly executed for each hold information again, and the newly executed hold notice effect is supported. It is good also as a structure which displays the pattern Pb for pending | holding advance notice results.

  In the present embodiment, the hold notice effect in which the number of times that can be executed during one opening / closing execution mode is specified is the special hold notice effect, but is not limited to this, and the first to fifth special hold notice effects are provided. Either may be selected. In this case, since it is limited that the predetermined hold notice effect is executed more than a predetermined number of times in one opening and closing execution mode, the same hold notice effect is executed more than necessary during one opening and closing execution mode. It is possible to suppress the hold notice effect from being uniform.

  Furthermore, a plurality of hold notice effects may be provided in which the number of times that can be executed during one opening / closing execution mode is defined.

<Ninth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration relating to the determination of the effect pattern performed on the display screen G, the change start process, and the confirmation process for the hold notice are different from those in the eighth embodiment. The different points will be described.

  First, the configuration of various counters will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

  In the lottery counter area 401 in the present embodiment, three variation type counters CS1 to CS3 are provided as counters used when determining the effect pattern (the variation pattern of the main display unit 43). Each variation type counter CS1 to CS3 is a command to be transmitted to the display control device 212, and determines an effect pattern command in which an effect pattern of the game times effect executed in the current game time is set and the effect pattern command. It is a counter for setting the classification information used to do. The classification information is information for determining one effect pattern among a plurality of types of effect effects having different degrees of expectation. The rough performance pattern determines the expectation level of the game times effect (the probability of winning a big hit when the game times effect is performed). In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of rough production patterns having different expectations are set. Thereby, the player grasps whether or not the hold information related to the current game round effect is likely to correspond to the jackpot winning by grasping the effect pattern of the game round effect. be able to. In other words, it can be said that the classification information is information that determines the expectation level of the game times effect executed in the current game time.

  The game times effect is an effect performed by the symbol display device 41 during the variable display of the main display unit 43, and the variable display of the symbols in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is performed over the variable display time. This is an effect in which each of the symbols is stopped and displayed in a stop mode corresponding to the determination result of the determination of success or failure. In this case, the above-described reach display or character display other than symbols may be performed according to the variable display time.

  The first variation type counter CS1 is used to determine the classification information, and the second variation type counter CS2 is used to determine a more specific effect mode such as the effect time of the game times effect. The third variation type counter CS3 is used to determine whether to perform slipping or re-variation.

  Here, “slip” means that a specific symbol row or each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is shifted by one symbol portion or a plurality of symbols after the change display of symbols in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is stopped (temporarily stopped). That is, the symbol display is performed. The re-variation means that the symbol variation display is started again after the symbol variation display in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is temporarily stopped.

  Each variation type counter CS1 to CS3 is a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in, for example, step S3002 and step S3009 in normal processing (FIG. 45), and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Specifically, the first variation type counter CS1 is incremented and updated by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 240 every time a predetermined update timing is reached. As with the variation type counter CS of the eighth embodiment, the first variation type counter CS1 is acquired in the information acquisition process in the winning process for the operating opening, and is stored in the corresponding storage area. Then, using the acquired first variation type counter CS1 and the jackpot random number counter C1 and the reach random number counter C3 acquired in the same information acquisition process, classification information for determining a rough effect pattern (variation pattern) is obtained. It is determined.

  The second variation type counter CS2 is incremented and updated one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 112 every time a predetermined update timing is reached. Similar to the first variation type counter CS1, the second variation type counter CS2 is acquired in the information acquisition process in the winning process for the operation opening and stored in the corresponding storage area. Then, based on the acquired second variation type counter CS2 and the classification information, the variation command included in the effect pattern command is determined. The change command is a command for determining a detailed effect pattern in the game times effect, and the display control device 212 grasps the detailed effect pattern of the game times effect based on the change command, and the game times based on the effect pattern. Perform the production.

  The third variation type counter CS3 is incremented and updated one by one within a range of 0 to 99, for example, every time a predetermined update timing is reached. The third variation type counter CS3 is acquired when an extension command is determined in the variation start process. Based on the acquired third variation type counter CS3 and the classification information, the extension command included in the effect pattern command is obtained. It is determined. The extension command is a command for designating whether to perform sliding or re-variation, and the display control device 212 corresponds to the extension command performing sliding or re-variation when receiving the extension command. It is determined whether or not there is, and if it corresponds to the sliding or re-variation, processing corresponding to that is executed.

  In addition, each of the holding areas Ra and Rb in the holding ball storage area 402 of the present embodiment stores a storage area for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a value of the jackpot type counter C2. A storage area, a storage area for storing the value of the reach random number counter C3, a storage area for storing the value of the first variation type counter CS1, and a storage for storing the value of the second variation type counter CS2 And the area. Thus, the values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1, and CS2 can be stored for each area. And it is comprised so that the value of each counter C1-C3, CS1, CS2 may be acquired in the information acquisition process in the winning process for a working opening, and each said counter C1-C3, CS1, CS2 may be memorize | stored in a corresponding storage area, respectively. ing.

<Variation start processing>
Next, the variation start process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the change start process is performed in the game times control process (step S3004) of the normal process (FIG. 45). Specifically, the situation is not in the opening / closing execution mode and the main display unit 43 is not in the change display. Is executed when the hold information is stored (CRN> 0) (see FIG. 14).

  In the fluctuation start process of the present embodiment, first, in step S4101, the hold information to be subjected to the current fluctuation start process, that is, the big hit random number counter C1 and the reach random number counter C3 among the hold information stored in the execution area AE. The first variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 are grasped.

  Thereafter, in step S4102, a classification information setting process for setting classification information for determining a rough effect pattern of game times is executed. The classification information setting process is a subroutine and can be read out as appropriate. In step S4102, the program related to the classification information setting process is read, and among the various counters grasped in step S4101, the big hit random number counter C1, the reach random number counter C3, and the first variation type counter CS1 are passed as arguments. Then, classification information corresponding to the values of the various counters is derived, and processing for temporarily storing the classification information is executed.

  Thereafter, in step S4103 to step S4107, the staged determination configuration is such that a detailed effect pattern is determined based on the classification information.

  Specifically, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types (seven types) of production patterns are set as rough production patterns, and a plurality of types (specifically, six types) are provided corresponding to these rough production patterns. Classification information is set. In the classification information setting process, one classification information is selected from the plurality of types of classification information. Then, in steps S4103 to S4106, based on the classification information, a process for determining a variation command, a hold number correspondence command, an extension command, a symbol command, etc. included in the effect pattern command is executed, and these commands are determined. After that, the process of setting the production pattern command is executed.

  The relationship between the effect pattern and the classification information and the setting mode of the classification information will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the effect pattern and the classification information and the setting mode of the classification information.

  As shown in FIG. 71, in the present embodiment, effects A to G are set as rough effect patterns. Production A to production G are set such that production times (production periods) are different, specifically, production A (and production D) → production B (and production E) → production C (and production F). → In the order of production G, the production time is set to be shorter. Specifically, the shortest production time of production A is set longer than the longest production time of production B, the shortest production time of production B is set longer than the longest production time of production C, and the shortest production C The production time is set longer than the longest production time of production G.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to the above-described configuration, and for example, the average production time of each production may be configured such that production A → production B → production C → production G is shortened in this order.

  Since the detailed patterns of the effects A to G are as described in the eighth embodiment, the detailed description is omitted.

  Corresponding to the effects A to G, six types of classification information B (1), B (2), ..., B (6) are set. For convenience of explanation, these classification information B (1) to B (6) are also simply referred to as B (x) in the following explanation.

  B (1) to B (6) are associated with the determination result. Specifically, B (1) to B (3) are set as the classification information B (x) corresponding to the success / failure determination result being a big hit, and the classification corresponding to the failure / failure determination result being out of place. B (4) to B (6) are set as information B (x).

  While B (1) to B (5) are associated with each effect A to effect E on a one-to-one basis, B (6) is associated with both effect F and effect G effect patterns.

  B (1) to B (6) are configured to be associated with three counters, specifically, combinations of the jackpot random number counter C1, the reach random number counter C3, and the first variation type counter CS1 related to the current hold information. ing. Specifically, in the classification information setting process, one of the plurality of types of classification information B (1) to B (6) is selected and selected using the above three counters. A process of storing the classification information B (x) in a reference area provided in the RAM 204 is executed. The MPU 202 can grasp the classification information B (x) selected this time by referring to the data stored in the reference area.

  The classification information setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S4201, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 matches the jackpot value information common to the high probability mode and the low probability mode (specifically, “7”).

  If it is the common jackpot value information, the process proceeds to step S4202, where B (1) is stored in the reference area of the RAM 204 as the classification information B (x) related to the current game round, and this process ends. B (1) corresponds to the effect pattern in which the combination of jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed after the execution of the effect A, specifically the first super reach display.

  On the other hand, if it is not common jackpot value information, the process proceeds to step S4203, where it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 related to the current hold information matches the dedicated jackpot value information corresponding only to the high probability mode. judge.

  Specifically, as already described, in this pachinko machine 10, nine pieces are set as dedicated jackpot value information corresponding to only the high probability mode. In step S4203, one jackpot value information is acquired from the nine jackpot value information, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot value information matches the value of the current jackpot random number counter C1.

  If they match, affirmative determination is made in step S4203. If they do not match, another jackpot value information is acquired, and the other jackpot value information matches the value of the jackpot random number counter C1. A comparison process of whether or not there is is executed. Then, the above process is repeatedly executed until the jackpot random number counter C1 matches the jackpot value information or until the comparison process is completed for all nine jackpot value information. If it is determined that the current jackpot random number counter C1 does not correspond to any jackpot value information as a result of executing the comparison processing for all nine jackpot value information, a negative determination is made in step S4203. .

  If the jackpot random number counter C1 related to the current hold information is dedicated jackpot numerical value information corresponding only to the high probability mode, the process proceeds to step S4204, and whether or not the first variation type counter CS1 is less than “201”. Determine. If the first variation type counter CS1 is less than “201”, B (2) is stored in the reference area of the RAM 204 as the classification information B (x) related to the current game time in step S4205, The process ends. B (2) corresponds to the effect pattern in which the combination of jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed after the execution of the effect B, specifically the second super reach display.

  If the first variation type counter CS1 is “201” or more, in step S4206, B (3) is stored in the reference area of the RAM 204 as the classification information B (x) related to the current game round, The process ends. B (3) corresponds to the effect pattern in which the combination of jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed after the execution of the effect C, specifically the normal reach display.

  Through the above processing, the classification information B (x) related to the jackpot winning is selected. In this case, the processing of step S4201 and step S4203 corresponds to the success / failure determination processing.

  On the other hand, if the jackpot random number counter C1 related to the current hold information is not dedicated jackpot numerical value information corresponding only to the high probability mode, it is determined that the determination result of the hold information related to the current game round is not appropriate. means. In this case, in steps S4207 to S4211, processing for storing any one of B (4) to B (6) as the classification information B (x) using the reach random number counter C3 and the first variation type counter CS1. Run.

  In this case, in each production, the expectation level (probability of winning a big win when the production is performed) is reduced in the order of first super reach display → second super reach display → normal reach display. The reach random number counter C3 and the first variation type counter CS1 are set.

  Specifically, first, in step S4207, it is determined whether or not the reach random number counter C3 is larger than “233”.

  If the reach random number counter C3 is larger than “233”, it means that the super reach display is won. In this case, the process proceeds to step S4208, and it is determined whether or not the first variation type counter CS1 is less than “92”.

  If the first variation type counter CS1 is less than “92”, the process advances to step S4209, B (4) is stored in the reference area of the RAM 204 as the classification information B (x), and this process ends. B (4) corresponds to the effect pattern in which the combination of outlier symbols is stopped and displayed after execution of the effect D, specifically the first super reach display.

  On the other hand, if the first variation type counter CS1 is not less than “92”, the process advances to step S4210 to store B (5) in the reference area of the RAM 204 as the classification information B (x), and this process ends. . B (5) corresponds to the effect pattern in which the combination of outlier symbols is stopped and displayed after the execution of the effect E, specifically the second super reach display.

  If the reach random number counter C3 is smaller than “233”, the process proceeds to step S4211, where B (6) is stored in the reference area of the RAM 204 as the classification information B (x), and this process ends. B (6) is the effect F, in detail, the effect pattern in which the combination of out symbols is stopped after execution of the normal reach display, or the effect G, in detail, the combination of out symbols is stopped without performing the reach display. This corresponds to the effect pattern to be displayed.

  According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 71, according to the combination of the jackpot random number counter C1, the reach random number counter C3, and the first variation type counter CS1 related to the hold information that is the subject of the current variation start process, Of the classification information B (1) to B (6), one classification information B (x) is uniquely selected.

  As for the numerical ranges of the reach random number counter C3 and the first variation type counter CS1, the expectation of winning a big hit is reduced in the order of first super reach display → second super reach display → normal reach display in each production. If it is set to, the specific numerical value is arbitrary.

  Returning to the description of the variation start process (FIG. 70), when the classification information B (x) is determined in step S4102, the process proceeds to step S4103, and the variation command determination process for determining the variation command is executed. The variable command determination process is made into a subroutine and can be read out as appropriate. In step S4103, the program related to the variation command determination process is read, and the second variation type counter CS2 among the various counters grasped in step S4101 is passed as an argument. Then, a variation command corresponding to the value of the second variation type counter CS2 is derived, and processing for temporarily storing the variation command is executed.

  The variable command determination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S4301, the fluctuation command table TD11 stored in the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203 is referred to.

  The fluctuation command table TD11 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the variable command table TD11.

  In the variation command table TD11, a plurality of types of variation commands C (1), C (2),... C (136) (hereinafter also simply referred to as C (y) for convenience of explanation) are set. Each variation command C (y) is a command transmitted to the display control device 212, and for each variation command C (y), the specific content and the production time of the production performed on the display screen G and the like, respectively. Is different.

  The variation command C (y) is set in correspondence with the classification information B (x) and the second variation type counter CS2. Specifically, a plurality of types of variation commands C (y) are associated with one classification information B (x), and the second variation type counter is associated with the plurality of types of variation commands C (y). CS2 is associated in a numerical range of 0 to 111. For example, C (1) to C (56) are associated with B (1), and each of these C (1) to C (56) has a second variation type counter CS2 for each of two numerical values. Is associated with. Thereby, the variation command C (y) corresponding to the classification information B (x) and the second variation type counter CS2 is uniquely determined.

  Here, a plurality of types of variation commands C (y) corresponding to one classification information B (x) are variation information of effect patterns corresponding to the classification information B (x). For example, C (1) to C (56) are common in that they are variable commands C (y) corresponding to the production A, but the production times are different. That is, a plurality of types of variations (effect times) are associated with one classification information B (x), and setting the variation command C (y) is the classification information B (determined in step S4102). It can also be said that it is to determine one of a plurality of types of variations of the production pattern corresponding to x). In other words, in the effect mode performed in the game times, first, the classification information B (x) is determined based on the lottery, and the lottery is further performed based on the classification information B (x) determined based on the lottery. It can be said that it is determined by this.

  The difference in performance time will be described in detail. For the effects (effects A to F) in which reach display is first performed, the reach display ends after the reach display is started, that is, the final stop symbol sequence. The production time is different until the variable display of the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 is completed. In this case, for example, when the design of the middle symbol row Z2 at the start timing of reach display is set to be the same regardless of the production time, the stop mode of the symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is determined according to the production time. For this reason, the stop mode of the symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 can be determined by the production time.

  On the other hand, for the effect G in which the reach display is not performed, the middle symbol sequence which is the final stop symbol sequence in the configuration in which the symbol variation display mode in each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 is sequentially switched from the high-speed variation display to the low-speed variation display. The production time is made different because the low-speed fluctuation display time of Z2 is different. Note that the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and for example, a configuration in which the high-speed fluctuation display time is different may be used, or a configuration in which both are different may be used.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure from which production time differs according to execution or non-execution of an auxiliary production. As an auxiliary effect, an effect in which a predetermined character appears can be considered.

  B (6) is associated with C (123) to C (136), of which C (123) to C (129) corresponds to the effect F, and C (130). C (136) corresponds to the effect G.

  In step S4301, by referring to the variation command table TD11, the classification information B (x) related to the current game round and the variation command C (y) corresponding to the acquired second variation type counter CS2 are grasped. In step S4302, the fluctuation command C (y) grasped in step S4301 is stored in the storage area for the fluctuation command C (y) provided in the RAM 204. Then, the variable command determination process is terminated.

  Note that the number of types of the variation command C (y) corresponding to the classification information B (x) differs for each classification information B (x), but is not limited to this, and the variation command corresponding to the classification information B (x). The number of types of C (y) may be set to be the same regardless of the classification information B (x). However, if attention is paid to the diversity of performance patterns in the case of jackpot, the number of types of variation commands C (y) corresponding to B (1) to B (3) set in the case of jackpot is out of place. More than B (4) to B (6) set in the case.

  Returning to the description of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 70), after the execution of the fluctuation command determination process, the pending number correspondence command determination process is executed in step S4104. In this process, a pending number corresponding command for changing the effect time corresponding to the variation command C (y) is set based on the current pending stored number CRN.

  The pending number correspondence command determination processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S4401, the classification information B (x) determined this time is grasped. Thereafter, in step S4402, the reserved storage number CRN is determined.

  In the subsequent step S4403, by referring to the pending number correspondence command table TD12 stored in the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203, a pending number correspondence command corresponding to the current classification information B (x) and the pending storage number CRN is obtained. To grasp. Then, in step S4404, the grasped number-of-holds corresponding command is stored in a storage area for the number-of-holds-corresponding command provided in the RAM 204, and this process is terminated.

  The pending number correspondence command table TD12 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. FIG. 74B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the pending number correspondence command table TD12.

  In the hold number corresponding command table TD12, a plurality of types (specifically three types) of hold number corresponding commands D (1) to D (3) (corresponding to the classification information B (x) and the hold storage number CRN) Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, it is also simply referred to as D (z).

  D (1) is set as an effect pattern corresponding to the classification information B (x), specifically, a command that does not change the effect time corresponding to the change command C (y), while D (2) and D (2 3) is set as a command for changing the production time so that the production pattern corresponding to the classification information B (x) is changed. Specifically, D (2) is a command for changing to an effect time corresponding to the effect F, and D (3) is a command for changing to an effect time corresponding to the effect G. In a situation where D (2) is received in a situation where the variable command C (y) corresponding to the effect G is received, the display control device 212 executes a process for executing the effect F instead of the effect G. When D (3) is received in a situation where the command corresponding to the effect F is received as the variation command C (y), a process for executing the effect G instead of the effect F is executed.

  Among D (1) to D (3), D (1) is a pending number corresponding command corresponding to B (1) to B (5), and D (2) and D (3) are B (6). This command corresponds to the number of holds corresponding to. If the pending number correspondence command table TD12 is B (6), either D (2) or D (3) is selected according to the value of the pending storage number CRN and the reach random number counter C3. It is configured. Specifically, D (2) or D (3) is associated with each reserved storage number CRN in correspondence with the numerical range of the reach random number counter C3. As a result, by referring to the reserved number correspondence command table TD12, the D (2) and D (3) corresponding to the reserved storage number CRN and the reach random number counter C3 are selected.

  In this case, the configuration is such that D (2) is more easily selected as the reserved storage number CRN decreases. Specifically, the numerical range of the reach random number counter C3 associated with D (2) is “0 to 4” when the reserved storage number CRN is “4 to 8”, and the reserved storage number CRN. Is "0-8" when the value is "3", "0-12" when the reserved memory number CRN is "2", and when the reserved memory number CRN is "1" Is “0 to 16”, and “0 to 20” when the reserved storage number CRN is “0”. Thus, the hold information can be quickly digested in a situation where the number of reserved memories CRN is large, and the time during which no game play effect is performed can be shortened in a situation where the number of reserved memories CRN is low.

  In other words, in a situation where the number of reserved memories CRN is small, an interval is likely to occur between one game time effect and the next game time effect. On the other hand, in the situation where the reserved memory number CRN is small, the effect F is easily selected compared to the situation where the reserved memory number CRN is large. Since the effect F is set longer than the effect G by the reach display, the effect time of one game round effect is likely to be longer. As a result, the hold information is easily acquired during the game time effect, so that an event in which an interval is generated between one game time effect and the next game time effect can be avoided.

  On the other hand, in the situation where the reserved memory number CRN is large, the production G is more easily selected than in the situation where the reserved memory number CRN is small. Thereby, since the production time of the game round effect is likely to be shortened, the digestion rate of the hold information can be increased.

  Returning to the description of the variation start process (FIG. 70), after executing the pending number correspondence command determination process, the extension command determination process is executed in step S4105. In this process, based on the classification information B (x) relating to the current game round and the current third variation type counter CS3, an extension command for determining whether or not to perform an extension effect such as slipping or re-variation is issued. The process to determine is executed.

  Specifically, an extended command table storage area is provided in the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203, and an extended command table is stored in the storage area. A plurality of types of extension commands are set in the extension command table. Different time information is set for each extension command as the time related to the extension effect.

  Each extension command is set in association with the classification information B (x) and the third variation type counter CS3, and one extension command is uniquely determined according to the classification information B (x) and the third variation type counter CS3. It is configured to be determined.

  In the extended command determination process, the current third variation type counter CS3 is acquired, and by referring to the extended command table, the acquired third variation type counter CS3 and the classification information B (x) of the current game time Know the extension command corresponding to. The grasped extension command is stored in the extension command storage area. Based on the reception of the effect pattern command, the display control device 212 analyzes the extension command included in the effect pattern command, and executes a process of adding the time information set in the extension command to the effect time. At the same time, it is determined to execute an extension effect corresponding to the time information.

  Note that the extension command includes a command in which “0” is set as time information. When this extension command is received, “0” is added and the process for performing the extension effect is not executed. Thereby, it is not necessary to execute a special process for not performing the extended effect in the process related to the setting of the effect pattern command performed in the main control device 81.

  After execution of the extension command determination process, the process advances to step S4106 to execute the symbol command determination process. In this process, a stop symbol is determined based on the classification information B (x) relating to the current game round and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE, and a symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol is obtained. decide. The specific configuration of this process is the same as the above-described variable command determination process and extension command determination process, except that the counter used is different, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  After execution of the symbol command determination process, the process proceeds to step S4107 to execute a process for setting an effect pattern command. Specifically, various commands stored in the storage area for various commands, that is, the variation command C (y), the pending number corresponding command D (z), the extension command determined in each of the above steps S4103 to S4106. And the design command are read out, and they are combined and set as an effect pattern command. The effect pattern command is transmitted to the display control device 212 via the sound lamp control device 82 in the external output processing of the normal processing. By receiving the effect pattern command, the display control device 212 recognizes that the game time is started and the effect mode of the game time effect related to the game time, and executes the game time effect based on the effect mode. To do. In this case, the variable display time determined by the various commands included in the effect pattern command is the effect time of the game times effect performed in the game times. By varying the production time, the production mode of the game times production is diversified.

  According to such a configuration, the number of types of effect pattern commands can be increased by changing the combination of various commands. That is, if the number of command types of the variation command C (y), the pending number corresponding command D (z), the extension command, and the symbol command are m, n, k, and l, respectively, the number of types of effect pattern commands is m × n. × k × l. Thereby, a large number of effect patterns can be realized with a small number of command types.

  Here, the detailed configuration of the variation command C (y), the pending number correspondence command D (z), the extension command, and the symbol command will be described. Each command is a 2-byte command, the upper byte (the byte on the front side in the transmission order) is used as command identification information, and various information included in the command is set in the lower byte. Specifically, for example, two hexadecimal numbers are set in the upper byte, and various commands are identified using the two numbers.

  When various commands are received, the display control device 212 grasps what the received command is based on the information of the upper byte, and executes a corresponding process corresponding to the command. In this case, in the corresponding process, the lower byte information of the command is used as necessary.

  In addition, it is not restricted to the said structure, For example, you may delete the hold number corresponding | compatible command D (z), the extension command, and the identification information of a symbol command. In this case, the information is transmitted in the order of the variable command C (y), the lower byte information of the pending number correspondence command D (z), the lower byte information of the extension command, and the lower byte information of the symbol command. When the display control device 212 receives the identification information of the fluctuation command C (y), the information received after the identification information is sequentially changed to the information of the fluctuation command and the information of the pending number corresponding command D (z). , Handle as extended command information and symbol command information. Thereby, the command capacity of the effect pattern command can be reduced. Further, the amount of data included in the pending number correspondence command D (z), the extension command, and the symbol command can be increased by the amount of the identification information.

  After execution of step S4107, in step S4108, the effect time corresponding to the effect pattern command is grasped as the change display time of the main display unit 43, the change display of the main display unit 43 is started, and this change start process is ended.

  In step S4108, a process for storing the determination result of the validity determination performed when the classification information B (x) is set is executed. Specifically, in the case of winning a big hit, a flag corresponding to that is set in a predetermined storage area. In the game state transition process, it is determined whether or not the flag is set. If it is determined that the flag is set, the process is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode.

  Note that, when the variable display time has elapsed, the main display unit 43 displays a stop result corresponding to the determination result of the current determination. In this case, when the determination result of the success / failure determination corresponds to the jackpot winning selection, the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped, and the stop result corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to the above process, and for example, the variable display time of the main display unit 43 may be set in each command determination process. In this case, the variable display time may be changed every time a command for changing the effect time is set. In short, the variable display time of the main display unit 43 and the effect time performed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 need only be synchronized.

<Confirmation process for hold notice>
Next, the confirmation process for holding notice in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In addition, since the process of step S4501-step S4504 is the same as the process of step S3201-step S3203 and step S3205 in 6th Embodiment, description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the confirmation process for the hold notice in this embodiment, it is used to determine the classification information B (x) and the variation command C (y) among the hold information that is the setting target of the current hold notice command in step S4505. Various counters, specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the reach random number counter C3, the first variation type counter CS1, and the second variation type counter CS2.

  Thereafter, in step S4506, classification information setting processing is executed for the hold information that is the setting target of the current hold notice command, and variable command determination processing is executed in step S4507. These processes are read out and executed as subroutines, similarly to steps S4102 and S4103 of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 70). For this reason, these processes are the same, and in the same hold information, the argument values, that is, the values of various counters used in these processes are also the same. Therefore, in the same hold information, the same classification information B (x) is selected in the process of step S4506 and the process of step S4102 of the change start process, and the process of step S4507 and the process of step S4103 of the change start process are performed. Thus, the same variation command C (y) is set.

  Thereafter, a hold notice command is set in step S4508, and the confirmation process for the hold notice is ended. The hold notice command in the present embodiment is a command in which a specific command including information for specifying the current hold information and a change command C (y) are combined. Specifically, the change command C This is a command in which a specific command of 1 byte is added to the upper side of (y). The specific command includes, in order from the upper side, identification information for identifying that the command is a holding notice command, winning history information for each of the operation ports 33 and 34, specifically, a holding area for the first result display section. Information for specifying the number of holds stored in the Ra and information for specifying the number of holds stored in the second result display section holding area Rb are set.

  The display control device 212 recognizes that the hold notice command is received based on the identification information (set at the highest level) that is received first among the hold notice commands. And the information which concerns on each holding | maintenance number is memorize | stored in a corresponding storage area.

  Thereafter, based on the fact that the fluctuation command C (y) is received in succession to the hold notice command, the change command C (y) is not a presentation pattern command but a change command C as a hold notice command. Recognize that (y). Then, the change command C (y) is stored in the corresponding unit area among the unit areas 272 to 279 as the pending notice command information A (x).

  Note that the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and for example, the identification information for specifying the variable command C (y) may be rewritten to the identification information of the pending notice command. In this case, the amount of information transmitted by 1 byte can be reduced.

  Incidentally, as already described, the pending notice command is set when the open / close execution mode is in effect, and the variation start process is not executed in the open / close execution mode. For this reason, during the execution of the change start process, the processes of steps S4506 and S4507 are performed as part of the timer interrupt process, and the event that the classification information B (x) and the change command C (y) are rewritten does not occur.

<Holding notice effect determination process>
Next, the hold notice effect determining process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In addition, since the process of step S4601 to step S4603 is the same as the process corresponding to the reservation notice effect determination process (FIG. 62) of 8th Embodiment, description is abbreviate | omitted. As already described, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation command C (y) is stored as the pending notice command information A (x). Therefore, in step S4603, the variation command C (y) is grasped.

  In the present embodiment, in step S4604 instead of steps S3904 to S3915 in the hold notice effect determination process of the eighth embodiment, a process of selecting a hold notice effect corresponding to the change command C (y) is executed. To do. Specifically, the ROM 243 is provided with an effect table storage area, and the effect table storage area stores an effect table TD13 in which a game turn effect and a hold notice effect are set.

  As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 77, the effect table TD13 corresponds to the change command C (y), and the game times effect detailed patterns X (1,1), X (1,2),..., X (7, 7) (hereinafter also simply referred to as X (a, b)) and the hold notice effect pattern Y (1), Y (2),..., Y (123) (hereinafter also simply referred to as Y (c)). Has been. The game round effect detailed pattern X (a, b) is set to correspond to the variation command C (y) on a one-to-one basis. Specifically, the variation command C (y) has 136 types of variation commands C (y). There are 136 types of game round effect detailed patterns X (a, b).

  Here, the game round effect detailed pattern X (a, b) is set in correspondence with the effect pattern. Specifically, the game round effect detailed pattern X (a, b) is classified into a plurality of types (seven types) corresponding to the seven types of effect patterns, and is set as a plurality of types of variations in each category. ing. In this case, among the game round effect detailed patterns X (a, b), “a” indicates an effect pattern based on the classification information B (x), and “b” indicates a variation of the effect pattern. is there. Specifically, for example, X (1, 1) is set as an effect pattern corresponding to the effect A, and is set as one of the variations.

  When an effect pattern command is received, the game round effect detailed pattern X (a, b) is grasped based on the change command C (y) included in the effect pattern command. Further, the game round effect detailed pattern X (a, b) is changed based on the hold number correspondence command D (z) included in the effect pattern command. Specifically, when D (2) is grasped in a situation where the game round effect detailed pattern X (a, b) corresponding to the variation command C (y) is X (7, b) corresponding to the effect G In this case, any one of X (6,1) to X (6,7) corresponding to the effect F is selected, and the game time effect detailed pattern X (a, b) corresponding to the change command C (y) is selected. When D (3) is grasped in the situation where X is X (6, b) corresponding to the effect F, one of X (7,1) to X (7,7) corresponding to the effect G Select 1. Then, various information corresponding to the extension command and the symbol command is set for the selected game round effect detailed pattern X (a, b), and the symbol display device 41 is set so that the effect corresponding to the effect pattern command is performed. Control.

  In addition, as a structure which concerns on selection when D (2) or D (3) is grasped | ascertained, it is arbitrary, for example in the game round effect detailed pattern X (a, b) corresponding to the fluctuation command C (y) The value corresponding to the classification information B (x) may be changed. Specifically, for example, when D (3) is grasped in a situation where the game round effect detailed pattern X (a, b) corresponding to the change command C (y) is X (6, 3), the game X (7, 3) is selected as the detailed performance pattern X (a, b).

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure which provides a lottery counter and selects by lottery separately.

  In the hold notice effect pattern Y (c), hold notice effects of different effect modes are set. Specifically, Y (123) is an effect in which the girl character fails to transform, as in the fourth reserved notice effect described in the eighth embodiment. On the other hand, Y (1) to Y (122) are effects in which the girl character succeeds in transformation as in the first to third reserved notice effects described in the eighth embodiment.

  Here, in this embodiment, for each hold notice effect pattern Y (c), the pattern applied as a pattern to the girl character's clothes (skirt) after success or failure of the transformation is set to be different, The pattern is set so as to be displayed as the pending notice result pattern Pb.

  The pending notice result pattern Pb will be described with reference to FIG. 78 (a) to 78 (d) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the pattern used in the hold notice effect and the picture Pb for the hold notice result.

  As shown in FIGS. 78 (a) to 78 (d), in this embodiment, a plurality of types of holding notice result patterns Pb are prepared corresponding to the number of types of holding notice effect patterns Y (c). Specifically, the pending notice result pattern Pb is set with 32 types of patterns having different shapes and numbers of shapes.

  Specifically, as eight different patterns, the first pattern Pb11 in which one star-shaped figure is drawn, the second pattern Pb12 in which one circle is drawn, and the third pattern in which one square is drawn Pb13, a fourth picture Pb14 in which one rhombus is drawn, and a fifth picture Pb15 to an eighth picture Pb18 in which one equilateral triangle having a different orientation is drawn are set. Also, a ninth picture Pb19 to a thirty-second picture Pb42 in which one to a plurality (four) of figures smaller than each of the first picture Pb11 to the sixth picture Pb16 are set. Each of these patterns Pb11 to Pb42 is set so as not to protrude from the unit holding display areas Ga1 to Ga8. Thereby, even if it is a case where any one of each pattern Pb11-Pb42 is displayed side by side on each unit hold | maintain display area Ga1-Ga8, the inconvenience that both overlap and become difficult to see can be avoided.

  Each of the patterns Pb11 to Pb42 is provided with color variations. Specifically, for the first pattern Pb11, five types of gold, red, green, blue, and white are prepared. For the patterns Pb11 to Pb42, four types of gold, red, green, and blue are prepared. As a result, a total of 129 (32 × 4 + 1) types are prepared as variations of the pending notice result pattern Pb. The number of types is set to be larger than 123, which is the number of types of the pending notice effect pattern Y (c).

  Each hold notice effect pattern Y (c) is set in association with any one of the plurality of kinds of hold notice result patterns Pb, and the picture of the girl character after the success or failure of the transformation is set. The hold notice effect attached to clothes is set. For example, Y (123) is set in association with the first white pattern Pb11, and the first character Pb11 is added to the clothes of the girl character after the transformation has failed. Is set to

  According to such a configuration, when any one of Y (1) to Y (122) is executed, the effect that the girl character succeeds in transformation is performed, and the hold corresponding to the current Y (c) is performed. The girl character with the notice result pattern Pb is displayed. Then, the hold notice result pattern Pb corresponding to the current hold notice effect pattern Y (c) is displayed so as to overlap the hold picture Pa corresponding to the hold information that is the target of the hold notice effect of this time. .

  On the other hand, when Y (123) is executed, an effect that the girl character fails to transform is performed, and the reserved notice result pattern Pb (white first pattern Pb11) corresponding to the current Y (c) is displayed. The attached girl character is displayed. Then, the hold notice result pattern Pb corresponding to the current hold notice effect pattern Y (c) is displayed so as to overlap the hold picture Pa corresponding to the hold information that is the target of the hold notice effect of this time. . Thereby, diversification of the hold notice effect is achieved.

  Here, returning to the description of FIG. 77, the same pending notice effect pattern Y (123) is associated with the change commands C (123) to C (136) corresponding to the effects F and G. For this reason, it is possible to suitably cope with a case where an effect pattern different from the variation command C (y) is performed according to the reserved storage number CRN.

  In other words, as described above, in the variation start process, when B (6) is selected, an effect based on the variation command C (y) is substituted according to the current stored memory number CRN and reach random number counter C3. Then, a process for executing the effect F or the effect G is executed. For this reason, the game times effect corresponding to the change command C (y) may be different from the game times effect actually performed. In particular, even if the hold notice effect corresponding to the effect F is performed, if the game times effect related to the hold information that is the target of the hold notice effect is the effect G, the effect is demoted as a player. There is a risk that the player will have an impression and his willingness to play will be significantly reduced.

  In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the pending notice effect pattern corresponding to the effect before change (one of effect F and effect G) and the effect after change (the other of effect F and effect G) are used. The corresponding hold notice effect pattern is set to be the same. Thereby, the discrepancy between the hold notice effect and the game times effect related to the hold information that is the target of the hold notice effect can be avoided.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  A part of the pending notice command is shared with the variable command C (y). Thereby, it is possible to reduce the data amount of the hold notice command for executing the hold notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity that may be caused by executing the hold notice effect.

  Specifically, the change command C (y) is transmitted as the hold notice command, and the effect of the hold notice effect is changed according to the change command C (y). Thereby, it is possible to diversify the production mode of the hold notice effect in correspondence with the number of types of the variation command C (y). Therefore, it is possible to diversify the production mode of the hold notice effect while suppressing the increase in the data amount.

  Here, if attention is focused on diversifying the production mode of the hold notice effect, a configuration in which the number of types of the hold notice command is increased can be considered. In this case, the data amount of the pending notice command increases, and there is a concern about an increase in storage capacity. However, if the display control device 212 is configured to execute a process of lottering the effect mode of the hold notice effect, the processing load on the display control device 212 side may be increased.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the variation command C (y) is transmitted, and the presentation mode of the hold notice effect is changed according to the variation command C (y). While avoiding concerns, it is possible to diversify the hold notice effect.

  In addition, when setting the hold notice command in the confirmation process for the hold notice, the same subroutine process as the change start process, more specifically, the classification information setting process and the change command determining process are executed. Thereby, it is not necessary to prepare a separate program for executing the processing related to the setting of the pending notice command. Therefore, the program capacity can be reduced, and the increase in storage capacity that can occur due to the holding notice effect can be suppressed.

  When the variation start process is executed, a hold number corresponding command determination process for determining a hold number corresponding command D (z) that can change the effect pattern according to the hold storage number CRN at that time is executed. Thereby, according to the game situation at the time, digestion of holding information can be accelerated or delayed.

  In this case, the execution timing of the confirmation process for holding notice performed based on the acquisition of the predetermined hold information is different from the execution timing of the variation start process performed for the predetermined hold information. For this reason, depending on the game situation, the number of reserved storages CRN at each execution timing may be different. In this case, if the classification information B (x) and the variation command C (y) are configured differently depending on the number of reserved storages CRN, the variation command C (y) selected in the confirmation process for the reservation notice is held and stored. It will vary depending on the number CRN, and it will not be possible to share the processing for the confirmation notice for holding notice and the variation starting process.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, in the classification information setting process and the variable command determination process, the classification information B (x) and the variable command C (y) are not different according to the reserved storage number CRN. did. As a result, the classification information setting process and the variable command determination process can be preferably shared.

  Further, in the configuration in which the effect mode of the game turn effect is changed by the command D (z) corresponding to the number of holds, the hold notice effect corresponding to both the effect pattern of the game time effect of the change source and the effect pattern of the game time effect of the change destination Are the same. Thereby, even if the stage pattern of the game round effect varies depending on the execution timing of the change start process, the pending notice effect and the game time effect related to the hold information that is the target of the pending notice effect Can be avoided.

  In addition, the game pattern effect pattern of the change source and the game pattern effect pattern of the change destination are those having relatively low expectations. As a result, even if the expectation varies due to the effect pattern switching between the two depending on the game situation, the expectation variation is less noticeable. Therefore, inconveniences that may occur due to the switching of the effect patterns can be avoided.

  Furthermore, the effect pattern of the game time effect of the change source and the effect pattern of the game time effect of the change destination are a combination that minimizes the difference in expectation. As a result, the range of the expectation that varies depending on the game situation can be reduced, the expectation that is preset in the design can be maintained as much as possible, and the balance of the effect mode of the effect for game times can be secured. Can do.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot random number counter C1 is common numerical information, B (1) is uniquely selected. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, B (1) to B ( It is good also as a structure which selects either of 3). In this case, B (1) to B (3) may be distributed using at least one of the reach random number counter C3 and the first variation type counter CS1.

  In the present embodiment, in B (1) to B (5), the effect pattern is not changed according to the reserved storage number CRN. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be changed. In this case, when the reserved storage number CRN is large, the effect time is likely to be shortened, and when the reserved memory number CRN is small, the effect time is likely to be increased. In detail, for example, in the situation where the reserved memory number CRN is small, the effect A or the effect D is easily selected and the effect B or the effect E is difficult to be selected, while in the situation where the reserved memory number CRN is large, the effect A or the effect D is selected. You may be comprised so that it may become difficult to select. In this case, the hold notice effect may be set to be the same effect mode in each effect pattern that can be selected. Thereby, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a demotion of expectation occurs between the hold notice effect and the game times effect.

  An effect pattern having a relatively short effect time is easily selected in a situation where the number of reserved storage numbers CRN is large, and an effect pattern having a relatively long effect time is easily selected in a situation where the number of reserved memory numbers CRN is low. Instead, it may be configured such that one or a plurality of effect patterns are easily selected from a plurality of types of effect patterns according to the reserved storage number CRN. For example, it may be configured such that an effect having a relatively short presentation time is easily selected in a situation where the number of reserved storage numbers CRN is large, and an effect having a relatively long presentation time is easily selected in a situation where the number of reserved storage numbers CRN is small. This makes it possible to associate the reserved storage number CRN with the effect pattern.

  In the case of the above configuration, the pending notice effect may be set to be the same effect mode in each effect pattern that can be selected. Thereby, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a demotion of expectation occurs between the hold notice effect and the game times effect.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure which switches an effect pattern between the effect patterns (for example, between effect D and effect G) from which the difference of expectation becomes large, and between the effect patterns (for example, effect D and the expectation level) with a relatively high expectation degree. It is good also as a structure which switches an effect pattern by between production E).

  In addition, the probability of switching the effect pattern is changed according to the reserved storage number CRN. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the probability of changing the effect pattern according to the support mode may be changed. In this case, in view of the fact that the hold information is more easily acquired in the high frequency support mode, it is preferable that the effect in the high frequency support mode is easily selected.

  Moreover, in this Embodiment, although the production | presentation aspect of the reservation notice effect corresponding to the production F and the production G was set identically, it is not restricted to this, For example, it is good also as a structure which does not perform a reservation notice effect. In this case, since the hold notice effect is not executed in the first place, the expectation cannot be demoted between the hold notice effect and the game times effect.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the hold notice result pattern Pb and the girl character's clothing pattern are different for each hold notice effect pattern Y (c). However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is good. In short, any configuration may be used as long as the pending notice effect pattern is set in each of the change commands C (1) to C (122).

  In the present embodiment, one Y (123) is set in correspondence with each of C (123) to C (136). It is good also as a structure which provides (123) -Y (136). However, if attention is paid to suppressing the discrepancy between the hold notice effect and the game times effect related to the hold information that is the target of the hold notice effect, a configuration in which 1 Y (123) is associated is preferable.

  In the configuration in which the above Y (1) to Y (123) are provided, the Y (1) to Y (123) may be divided into a plurality of sections, and the degree of expectation may be different for each of the sections. Specifically, the first pattern to the fifth pattern, which are roughly different in the production mode, are provided as the divisions, and Y (1) to Y () corresponding to the variation commands C (1) to C (90) corresponding to the big win. 90), each segment is set so that the number corresponding to each pattern decreases in the order of the first pattern → the second pattern → the fifth pattern, and the variation commands C (91) to C ( For 122), divisions are set so that the number corresponding to each pattern increases in the order of the first pattern → the second pattern →... The fifth pattern. Thereby, the number of variations can be secured for each pattern while decreasing the expectation in the order of the first pattern → the second pattern →... → the fifth pattern.

  In the above configuration, Y (c) corresponding to B (6), specifically, Y (123) to Y (136) are all set to be divided into the same pattern (for example, the fifth pattern). Good. Thereby, the hold notice effect related to the game times for which B (6) is set has the same expectation. Therefore, even if the effect pattern is changed in the variation start process, the change can be dealt with.

  In addition, about each pattern, the girl character may differ for every pattern, for example, and the girl character is good also as a structure which performs various operation | movement. In short, it is only necessary that the rough production mode (the character to appear, the flow of the production to be executed, etc.) is of the same type.

  Moreover, when providing the division | segmentation from which an expectation degree differs, it is good also as a structure which matches the pattern Pb for holding | maintenance warning results to the said division | segmentation. For example, it may be configured to associate a gold reservation notice result pattern Pb with a high expectation degree, or the expectation degree increases as the number of figures included in one reservation notice result pattern Pb increases. Also good.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure which performs the pending | holding notice effect of the same effect aspect in the case of a jackpot winning case and the case of losing. As a result, it becomes difficult to specify whether or not the hold information that is the subject of the hold notice effect corresponds to the jackpot based on the hold notice effect. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the degree of attention to the game times effect that can be caused by specifying whether or not.

  Further, in the case where the degree of expectation is set, the process of step S4604 is executed and, for example, the process of steps S3910 to S3915 of the hold notice effect determination process (FIG. 62) in the eighth embodiment is executed. Also good. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the demotion of the hold notice effect for the same hold information.

  In addition, although the configuration is such that the pending number corresponding command determination process for changing the production pattern according to the reserved stored number CRN is performed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pending number corresponding command determining process may not be performed. In this case, the variable command determination process may be configured to determine a different variable command C (y) according to the reserved memory number CRN. The classification information setting process may be configured to have a different classification according to the reserved memory number CRN. The information B (x) may be determined. In any case, it is only necessary that the effect mode is set to be indistinguishable between each of the pending notice effects corresponding to the change command C (y) that can be selected.

  In the present embodiment, the classification information B (x) is set and the variation command C (y) is determined based on the classification information B (x). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variation command C (y) may be directly determined based on the jackpot random number counter C1, the reach random number counter C3, and the first variation type counter CS1. In this case, it may be configured to determine the pending number correspondence command D (z), the extension command, and the symbol command based on the variation command C (y). However, since the number of types of the variation command C (y) is larger than the classification information B (x), there is a concern about an increase in processing load and an increase in program capacity when determining the various commands. Focusing on this point, it is better to determine the classification information B (x) and determine the various commands based on the classification information B (x).

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure which performs again in the opening / closing execution mode the winning game time effect performed in the game time which concerns on a jackpot winning. Thereby, it is assumed that the player is immersed in the afterglow. In this case, it is preferable that an effect pattern command in which the effect mode of the winning game times effect is determined is transmitted at a predetermined effect start timing in the opening / closing execution mode. Thereby, it is possible to share the effect pattern command of the game times effect performed in the game times and the effect pattern command to be executed again in the opening / closing execution mode.

  In the present embodiment, when the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 transmits the change command C (y) and the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 receives the change command C (y) in the change start process. The game turn effect corresponding to the variation command C (y) is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the specific command including the classification information B (x) and various counter value information is transmitted. Also good. In this case, when the specific command is received, the display control device 212 performs various lottery processes to determine the effect mode of the game times effect and execute the game times effect in the effect mode. The specific command is transmitted as the pending notice command. Thereby, the specific command used for the game turn effect can be used when the hold notice effect is performed, and an increase in the number of commands related to the hold notice effect can be suppressed.

  Note that a plurality of types of variation commands C (y) are set in association with one classification information B (x), and each variation command C (y) is set to have a different production time. Although it was set as the structure, it is not restricted to this, For example, it is good also as a structure set so that the specific content of production may differ. Specifically, according to the change command C (y), the character appearing in the game round effect may be different, or the type of moving image to be reproduced may be different.

  The classification criteria based on the classification information B (x) is the expectation level of the game times effect, but is not limited to this. For example, the type of characters that appear in the game times effect or the type of video to be played back. May be.

  In addition, although the degree of expectation is different for each category, it is not limited to this, for example, the degree of expectation differs between processing categories, and the degree of expectation is set the same between other categories. Also good. In this case, the types of characters appearing in the game times effect, the types of variation display modes, the types of moving images to be reproduced, and the like may be different between the other sections.

  Further, as the game times effect related to the specific hold information, a plurality of types of game times effects may be provided, which have the same degree of expectation but differ in the types of characters and videos that appear. In this case, basically, the game turn effect determined using the specific hold information is executed, but depending on the number and situation of the hold information at the start timing of the specific game turn effect, the specific hold information is used. Instead of the determined game time effect, another game time effect may be executed. In addition, the hold notice effect related to the specific hold information may not be executed or may be a common effect. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a discrepancy between the contents of the hold notice effect and the game times effect.

<Tenth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration relating to the acquisition of various counters, the confirmation process for holding notice and the process of the change start process are different from those in the ninth embodiment. The different points will be described below.

  First, a configuration related to acquisition of various counters in the present embodiment will be described with reference to an explanatory diagram of FIG.

  The reserved ball storage area 501 in the present embodiment includes a first result display area reservation area Ra corresponding to the winning of the upper working port 33 and a second result display area holding area Rb corresponding to the winning of the lower operating hole 34. And. The first result display section reservation area Ra is provided with a first area Ra1 to a fourth area Ra4 as a plurality of storage areas, and the second result display section reservation area Rb includes a plurality of storage areas. A first area Rb1 to a fourth area Rb4 are provided.

  The first result display area reservation area Ra will be described in detail. Since the first result display area reservation area Ra and the second result display area reservation area Rb have the same configuration, detailed description of the second result display area reservation area Rb will be omitted.

  Each area Ra1 to Ra4 has a storage area for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, a storage area for storing the value of the jackpot type counter C2, and a storage area for storing the value of the reach random number counter C3. And a storage area for storing the value of the first variation type counter CS1. As a result, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 can be stored in the areas Ra1 to Ra4. And it is comprised so that the value of each counter C1-C3, CS1 may be acquired in the information acquisition process in the winning process for a working opening, and each said counter C1-C3, CS1 may be memorize | stored in a corresponding storage area, respectively.

  Furthermore, each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 is provided with classification information storage areas Ka1 to Ka4 that can temporarily store the classification information B (x). Each classification information storage area Ka1 to Ka4 has a storage area in which the classification information B (x) can be temporarily stored.

  In the present embodiment, when the classification information B (x) is determined in the confirmation process for the hold notice, the determined classification information B (x) is stored in the classification information storage areas Ka1 to Ka4. The information corresponding to the area in which the hold information that triggers the determination of the classification information B (x) is stored is stored. In the data shift process, when data is shifted, the data stored in the classification information storage areas Ka1 to Ka4 is shifted. In this case, when the data of the first area Ra1 is shifted to the execution area AE, the information stored in the classification information storage area Ka1 of the first area Ra1 is also stored in the predetermined storage area of the execution area AE. In the variation start process, the classification information B (x) is read based on the information in the classification information storage area Ka1 stored in the execution area AE, and various commands are determined based on the classification information B (x). It is configured.

  Note that the classification information storage areas Ka1 to Ka4 have a 3-bit data area in correspondence with the six types of classification information B (x). Thereby, it can be specified which classification information B (x).

  The confirmation process for holding notice in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the processing from step S4701 to step S4704 is the same as the processing corresponding to the confirmation processing for holding notice (FIG. 58) in the sixth embodiment, and thus description thereof is omitted.

  In step S4705, the counter value related to the setting of the classification information B (x) among the hold information to be set for the current hold notice command, specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the reach random number counter C3, the first variation type. The counter values of the counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 are grasped. In step S4706, the classification information setting process is read, and each counter value is passed as an argument. Since this process is the same as the process in step S4506 of the reservation notice confirmation process (FIG. 75) of the ninth embodiment, the description thereof is omitted.

  In step S4707, a process of temporarily storing the classification information B (x) determined in the process of step S4706 is executed. Specifically, among the classification information storage areas Ka1 to Ka4 and Kb1 to Kb4, the classification information for the classification information storage area of the area in which the hold information that is the target of confirmation of the current hold notice is stored. B (x) is stored.

  Thereafter, in step S4708, a hold notice command is set, and the confirmation process for the hold notice is ended.

  Here, the classification information B (x) is set instead of the variation command C (y) in the pending notice command in the present embodiment. Specifically, the hold notice command has a data amount of 2 bytes, and in the upper bytes of them, the identification information for specifying that the command is a hold notice command and the hold of each of the operation ports 33 and 34 are stored. Information for specifying the number is set. Then, classification information B (x) is set in the lower byte. The display control device 212 grasps the classification information B (x) related to the hold information acquired this time based on receiving the hold notice command, and uses the classification information B (x) for each unit area 272 to 279. Are stored in the corresponding unit area. In the hold notice effect determination process, one of the first hold notice effects to the fifth hold notice effect is selected and executed based on the stored classification information B (x). The specific configuration on the display control device 212 side is basically the same as that of the eighth embodiment, and thus description thereof is omitted.

  In step S3903 of the hold notice effect determination process (FIG. 62), the classification information B (x) is grasped as the hold notice command information A (x). Further, in each of the effect lottery tables TD2 and TD3, classification information B (x) is set instead of A (x), and there are six types of classification information B (x). There is no configuration according to 7).

  Next, the variation start process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the variation start process according to the present embodiment, various types of commands are set using the classification information B (x) for the hold information in which the classification information B (x) is temporarily stored in the confirmation process for holding notice (FIG. 80). Execute the process.

  As already explained, the total number of holds that can be stored in each result display area hold area Ra, Rb is 8, and the lottery mode is highly probable until 8 game times are consumed after the open / close execution mode ends. Set to mode. The confirmation process for holding notice is executed during the opening / closing execution mode. For this reason, all the hold information stored in the hold areas Ra and Rb for each result display section in the opening / closing execution mode is digested during the high probability mode. Yes, classification information B (x) is stored for the pending information digested during the high probability mode. On the other hand, for the hold information relating to other game times, the processing related to the setting of the hold notice command is not performed, and therefore the classification information B (x) is not stored in the confirmation process for the hold notice. Therefore, first, in step S4801, it is determined whether or not the classification information B (x) exists in the execution area AE.

  If the classification information B (x) does not exist, in step S4802, various counters related to the setting of the classification information B (x) among the hold information to be subjected to the current variation start processing, specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the counter values of the reach random number counter C3 and the first variation type counter CS1 are grasped.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4803, and low probability mode correspondence classification information setting processing corresponding to the low probability mode is executed. In the low probability mode corresponding classification information setting processing, the processing corresponding to the high probability mode from the classification information setting processing described in the ninth embodiment, specifically, the processing in steps S4203 to S4206 is omitted. is there.

  On the other hand, if the classification information B (x) exists in the execution area AE, the classification information B (x) is specified based on the information in step S4804, and the classification information B (x) is referred to the RAM 204. Set the area.

  After execution of the process of step S4803 or step S4804, a variable command determination process is executed in step S4805. In this process, the second variation type counter CS2 related to the hold information that is the subject of the current variation start process is grasped, and the variation command C (y) corresponding to the second variation type counter CS2 and the classification information B (x) is obtained. ) Is selected.

  The subsequent processing in steps S4806 to S4810 is the same as the processing corresponding to the variation start processing (FIG. 70) in the ninth embodiment, and thus description thereof is omitted.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the classification information B (x) is determined and the classification information B (x) is set for the pending notice command in the confirmation process for the pending notice. The display control device 212 is configured to select one of the first hold notice effect to the fifth hold notice effect based on the classification information B (x). In this case, the classification information B (x) is stored, and in the variation start process, the stored classification information B (x) is read out and used to determine various commands. Thereby, a change start process can be performed suitably.

  That is, as described in the ninth embodiment, in the high probability mode, the jackpot value information to be checked for success / failure determination is larger than that in the low probability mode, so the processing load of the processing related to the success / failure determination has a low probability. Larger than the mode. For this reason, when the comparison process between the dedicated jackpot value information corresponding to only the high probability mode and the jackpot random number counter C1 is executed in the fluctuation start process, the processing load of the fluctuation start process increases, and a so-called process drop may occur. .

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the classification information B (x) is specified in the processing related to the setting of the hold notice command for the hold information that triggers the execution of the game times in the high probability mode. It was. The setting process includes a comparison process between dedicated jackpot value information corresponding to only the high probability mode and the jackpot random number counter C1. In the variation start process performed in the high probability mode, the comparison process is performed in the variation start process by reading the classification information B (x) specified in the setting process related to the pending notice command. There is no need to execute. Thereby, the processing load of the fluctuation start process can be reduced.

  Further, when temporarily storing the classification information B (x), a temporary storage of the classification information B (x) and a determination flag indicating the determination result of the holding information related to the classification information B (x) are temporarily stored. In addition, it may be configured to determine whether or not to shift to the opening / closing execution mode in the gaming state transition processing using the temporary determination flag that has been temporarily stored. In this case, in order to illegally generate a big win, an illegal act of temporarily changing the success / failure flag stored can be considered. The fraudulent act is easier to identify the information to be changed than the fraudulent act that identifies the area of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the reserved area where a plurality of pieces of information are stored and changes the value thereof. Since the amount of information to be changed is likely to be smaller than an illegal act of changing the processing configuration, it can be performed relatively easily.

  The same applies to the case where the game state transition process is configured to determine whether or not the current game round is related to a big win based on the temporarily stored classification information B (x). In addition, there is a risk that an unauthorized act of changing the classification information B (x) may be performed relatively easily.

  And the said fraudulent act is easy to be performed when it is a low probability mode with a relatively low probability of winning a jackpot.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the classification information B (x) is derived again without temporarily storing the classification information B (x) in the situation of the low probability mode. Accordingly, in the configuration for determining whether or not to shift to the opening / closing execution mode based on the above-described success / failure flag or the classification information B (x), it is possible to suppress an illegal act of changing information stored temporarily in the low probability mode. Can do. Therefore, it is possible to avoid inconvenience that may occur due to temporary storage.

  Further, as already described, the process related to the setting of the pending notice command is performed during the opening / closing execution mode, and the variation start process is not executed during the opening / closing execution mode. For this reason, the success / failure determination process for the high probability mode is not executed at the timing when the fluctuation start process is executed. As a result, the processing load is distributed, and an increase in local processing load can be suppressed.

  In the variation start process, a stepwise effect pattern determination configuration is adopted in which a detailed effect pattern (variation command C (y)) is determined based on the classification information B (x) for determining a rough effect pattern. Thereby, even if it does not specify even a detailed production pattern when setting a command for advance notice, it is possible to closely associate the advance notice effect and the game time effect corresponding to the relevant advance notice effect. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load required to set the pending notice command while diversifying the effect pattern of the game times effect.

  Furthermore, since the number of types of classification information B (x) is smaller than the number of types of variable command C (y), the data capacity of the pending notice command can be reduced. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the transmission of the pending notice command.

  In addition, the classification information storage areas Ka1 to Ka4 and Kb1 to Kb4 are provided in the areas Ra1 to Ra4 and Rb1 to Rb4, respectively. This is performed for each of the storage areas Ka1 to Ka4 and Kb1 to Kb4. Thereby, it is possible to grasp the classification information B (x) corresponding to the hold information related to the game times executed this time.

  In this embodiment, the process related to the setting of the hold notice command is performed only during the opening / closing execution mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be performed every time hold information is acquired. In this case, it is preferable to use the classification information B (x) that is always temporarily stored in the variation start process (FIG. 81). Thereby, the determination process of step S4801 becomes unnecessary in the fluctuation start process (FIG. 81).

  In the present embodiment, the process of step S4803 executed in the change start process and the process of step S4706 of the confirmation process for holding notice are different subroutine processes. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Some may be shared. Specifically, for example, the configuration may be such that the high probability mode support processing is executed after the low probability mode support classification information setting processing is executed in the confirmation processing for holding notice. In the high probability mode handling process, the process of steps S4203 to S4206 is executed, and when B (2) or B (3) is grasped in the process, the B (2) or B (3) Is overwritten on the current reference area. This makes it possible to share a part of the process between the change start process and the confirmation process for the hold notice.

<Eleventh embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration relating to various counters, the classification information setting process, and the confirmation process for holding notice are different from those in the ninth embodiment. The different points will be described below.

  First, a configuration related to acquisition of various counters in the present embodiment will be described with reference to an explanatory diagram of FIG.

  Each area provided in each holding area Ra, Rb of the holding ball storage area 601 in the present embodiment stores a storage area for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2. Storage area, a storage area for storing the value of the reach random number counter C3, and a storage area for storing the value of the first variation type counter CS1. Thus, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 can be stored for each area. And it is comprised so that the value of each counter C1-C3, CS1 may be acquired in the information acquisition process in the winning process for a working opening, and each said counter C1-C3, CS1 may be memorize | stored in a corresponding storage area, respectively.

  Next, the variation start process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S4901, various counters used for setting the classification information B (x) among the hold information that is the subject of the current variation start process, specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the reach random number counter C3, The counter value of the 1 variation type counter CS1 is grasped.

  Thereafter, in step S4902, the number-of-holds corresponding classification information setting process for selecting different classification information B (x) according to the number of stored storages CRN is executed. Then, based on the classification information B (x) set in the process of step S4902, the processes of step S4903 to step S4906 are executed, the variable display is started in step S4907, and this process ends.

  The holding number correspondence classification information setting process will be described.

  In the present embodiment, when determining the classification information B (x) related to the hold information when the result of the determination is wrong, the classification information is different even for the same hold information according to the hold storage number CRN. The setting mode of the classification information B (x) is different depending on the reserved storage number CRN so that B (x) can be set.

  Specifically, in place of the processing of step S4207 to step S4211 in the classification information setting process (FIG. 72) in the ninth embodiment, the retention number non-corresponding classification information setting process is executed. The retention number non-corresponding classification information setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S5001, the current reserved memory number CRN is grasped, and it is determined whether or not the reserved memory number CRN is “4” or more. When the reserved storage number CRN is “4” or more, the process proceeds to step S5002, the first out-of-class classification information setting process is executed, and this process ends. In the first outlier classification information setting process, by referring to the first outlier table TD21 provided in the ROM 203, the classification information B corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 and the first variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area AE. (X) is grasped and set as a reference area.

  If the reserved storage number CRN is less than 4, the process advances to step S5003 to determine whether or not the reserved storage number CRN is “3”. If the reserved storage number CRN is “3”, the process advances to step S5004 to execute the second outlier classification information setting process, and the process is terminated. In the second outlier classification information setting process, by referring to the second outlier table TD22 provided in the ROM 203, the classification information B corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 and the first variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area AE. (X) is grasped and set as a reference area.

  If the reserved memory number CRN is not “3”, the process advances to step S5005 to determine whether or not the reserved memory number CRN is “2”. If the reserved storage number CRN is “2”, the process advances to step S5006 to execute the third out-of-class classification information setting process, and the process ends. In the third outlier classification information setting process, by referring to the third outlier table TD23 provided in the ROM 203, the classification information B corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 and the first variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area AE. (X) is grasped and set as a reference area.

  If the reserved storage number CRN is not “2”, the process advances to step S5007 to execute the fourth out-of-class classification information setting process, and the process ends. In the fourth outlier classification information setting process, by referring to the fourth outbreak table TD24 provided in the ROM 203, the classification information B corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 and the first variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area AE. (X) is grasped and set as a reference area.

  Each outlier TD21 to TD24 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the outliers TD21 to TD24. FIG. 85 (a) shows the first outlier TD21 and FIG. 85 (b) shows the second outtable TD22 in detail. 85 (c) shows the third outlier table TD23, and FIG. 85 (d) shows the fourth outtable table TD24.

  In each outlier table TD21 to TD24, as shown in FIG. 85, classification information B (6) is set corresponding to the effect F, and classification information B (7) is set corresponding to the effect G. Yes. Based on the reach random number counter C3 and the first variation type counter CS1, B (4) to B (7) are selected so that any one of B (4) to B (7) is uniquely selected. The reach random number counter C3 and the first variation type counter CS1 are associated with each other.

  Here, when the classification information B (x) is set based on the same hold information (the reach random number counter C3 and the first variation type counter CS1), it corresponds to an effect pattern with a longer effect time as the reserved memory number CRN decreases. The classified information B (x) is selected. Specifically, the smaller the reserved storage number CRN, the lower the probability that B (7) will be selected, and the higher the probability that B (4) to B (6) will be selected. The numerical range of is set.

  Specifically, in the first outlier table TD21 that is referred to when the reserved storage number CRN is “4” or more, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 is “5 to 233”, it corresponds to the effect G When B (7) is selected and has a value other than that, any one of B (4) to B (6) is selected.

  In the second outlier table TD22 that is referred to when the reserved storage number CRN is “3”, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 is “9 to 229”, B (7) corresponding to the effect G is If it is selected and the value is other than that, one of B (4) to B (6) is set to be selected.

  In the third outlier table TD23 referred to when the reserved storage number CRN is “2”, if the value of the reach random number counter C3 is “13 to 225”, B (7) corresponding to the effect G is If it is selected and the value is other than that, one of B (4) to B (6) is set to be selected.

  In the fourth outlier table TD24 that is referred to when the reserved storage number CRN is less than “2”, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 is “17 to 221”, B (7) corresponding to the effect G Is selected and any other value is set so that one of B (4) to B (6) is selected.

  From the above, the reach display is more easily performed as the reserved memory number CRN is reduced, and complete detachment is more easily performed as the reserved memory number CRN is increased. For example, in the situation where the reach random number counter C3 is “5”, when the reserved storage number CRN is “4”, B (7) corresponding to complete detachment is selected, and the reserved storage number CRN is “3”. In some cases, B (6) corresponding to normal reach display is selected. As a result, in the situation where the number of reserved memories CRN is large, the rate of digestion of the reservation information is high, and in the situation where the number of reserved memories CRN is small, a period in which no game play effect is performed is less likely to occur.

  Incidentally, the pending number correspondence command determination process is omitted in the variation start process according to the present embodiment, corresponding to the configuration in which the classification information B (x) is determined corresponding to the pending storage number CRN.

  Next, the confirmation process for holding notice in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the processing in steps S5101 to S5104 is the same as the corresponding processing in the confirmation processing for holding notice (FIG. 58) in the sixth embodiment, and thus description thereof is omitted.

  In steps S5105 to S5110, classification information setting processing is executed. Specifically, in step S5105, various counter values used for setting the classification information B (x) among the hold information related to the setting of the current hold notice command are grasped.

  Thereafter, in step S5106 to step S5109, the classification information B (x) corresponding to the big win is set. Since these processes are the same as the corresponding processes in the classification information setting process (FIG. 72) of the ninth embodiment, a description thereof will be omitted. Note that the distribution processing in step S5109 corresponds to the processing in steps S4204 to S4206.

  If the jackpot random number counter C1 acquired this time does not match the winning value, negative determination is made in step S5106 and step S5108, and in step S5110, the first out-of-class classification information setting process is executed. The first outlier classification information setting process is a process that is performed when the reserved storage number CRN is “4” or more in the classification information setting process of the variation start process, and compared with the other outlier classification information setting processes. Classification information B (x) corresponding to reach display is difficult to select. By executing the first outlier classification information setting process, the classification information B (x) corresponding to the hold information acquired this time is selected.

  After execution of the processing in step S5107, step S5109, or step S5110, a hold notice command is set in step S5111, and this processing ends. In the pending notice command, the classification information B (x) selected in steps S5107 to S5110 is set. The display control device 212 grasps the classification information B (x) based on the reception of the pending notice command, and stores the classification information B (x) in the corresponding unit area among the unit areas 272 to 279. Remember me. In the hold notice effect determination process, one of the first hold notice effects to the fifth hold notice effect is selected and executed based on the stored classification information B (x). As for the specific configuration on the display control device 212 side, the command information A (x) for holding advance notice in each of the effect lottery tables TD2 and TD3 is replaced with classification information B (x) (for example, A (1) is replaced with B (1). Except for the point (replaced by), the description is omitted because it is the same as the eighth embodiment.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, when setting an effect pattern based on the same hold information, according to the reserved memory number CRN, a different effect pattern can be selected according to the hold memory number CRN. The setting mode of the classification information B (x) is different. Specifically, the smaller the reserved memory number CRN, the easier it is to select B (4) to B (6) corresponding to the reach display that has a longer production time than complete losing, and the reserved memory number CRN increases. As shown, B (7) corresponding to complete detachment is easily selected. As a result, in the situation where the reserved memory number CRN is small, the interval between one game time effect and the next game time effect is less likely to occur, and in the situation where the reserved memory number CRN is large, the game rate effect is increased. be able to.

  In such a configuration, in the confirmation process for the hold notice, the classification information B (x) is set in a setting mode in which the classification information B (x) that tends to be an effect pattern with low expectation is easily selected, and the classification information B (x) Based on the above, it is configured to execute the hold notice effect. Thus, when two types of effects (holding notice effect and game times effect) are executed for the same hold information, the rear effect (game times effect) has a higher degree of expectation than the front effect (hold notice effect). Lowering can be avoided.

  Specifically, the hold notice effect relating to the classification information B (4) to B (6) corresponding to reach display has a higher expectation than the hold notice effect relating to the classification information B (7) corresponding to complete losing. It tends to be a thing. For this reason, if the classification information B (x) is set in a setting mode in which the classification information B (x) that is likely to be displayed is easily selected in the confirmation process for the hold notice, the hold notice effect with high expectation is generated. Easy to be done. If the number of reserved storages CRN is small at the execution timing of the change start process, it is easy to completely miss the game times effect. For this reason, in the hold notice effect and the game time effect based on the same hold information, an event may occur in which the expectation level of the game time effect is lower than the hold notice effect.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, in the confirmation process for holding notice, the classification information B (x) is set in a setting mode in which reach display is difficult to be performed, and thus the above-described event does not occur. Thereby, the fall of the attention degree to the game which may arise when the said event generate | occur | produces can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the first detachment correspondence classification information setting process is executed in the confirmation process for holding notice, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the second detachment correspondence classification information setting process is executed. It is good also as a structure. However, if attention is paid to reducing the frequency of occurrence of an event in which the expectation level of the game round effect is lower than the hold notice effect, the probability that the classification information B (x) corresponding to the reach display is selected is minimized. The configuration for executing the first detachment correspondence classification information setting process is better.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the classification information B (x) corresponding to the jackpot winning is configured not to vary according to the reserved storage number CRN, but is not limited thereto, and may be configured to vary.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that each of B (4) to B (6) corresponding to each reach display is easily selected as the reserved storage number CRN is reduced. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is good also as a structure which becomes easy to select only B (6) corresponding to a display. In this case, fluctuations in the degree of expectation of super reach display can be suppressed.

  That is, the expectation level of super reach display is set relatively high compared to the expectation level of normal reach display. In such a configuration, if the expectation level of the super reach display is lowered, the occurrence frequency of the event resulting in the losing result is increased despite the super reach display being performed, and there may be a disadvantage that the attention degree to the game is remarkably lowered. .

  On the other hand, the above inconvenience can be avoided by adopting a configuration in which only the expectation level of the normal reach display is lowered as the reserved storage number CRN is reduced. In this case, the expectation level of the normal reach display is lowered. However, the normal reach display is originally lower in the expectation than the super reach display. Thereby, the fall of a player's willingness can be reduced.

  However, focusing on the point that a longer production time can be secured, a configuration in which B (4) and B (5) corresponding to super reach display are more easily selected as the reserved storage number CRN decreases. Is good.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure which makes the setting aspect of classification information B (x) differ by holding | maintenance storage number CRN with "0" and "1". In this case, setting is made such that B (4) to B (6) are more easily selected when the reserved storage number CRN is “0” than when the reserved storage number CRN is “1”. Good.

<Twelfth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration relating to the acquisition of various counters, the change start process, and the confirmation process for the hold notice are different from those in the ninth embodiment. The different points will be described below.

  First, a configuration related to acquisition of various counters will be described with reference to an explanatory diagram of FIG.

  Unlike the lottery counter area 401 in the ninth embodiment, the lottery counter area 701 in the present embodiment is not provided with the second variation type counter CS2.

  In addition, as described in the first embodiment, the reserved ball storage area 232 in the present embodiment includes the first result display area reservation area Ra corresponding to the winning of the upper operation port 33 and the lower operation port 34. And a second result display area reservation area Rb corresponding to the winning of the first prize. Each holding area Ra, Rb is provided with a plurality of storage areas.

  Each storage area includes a storage area for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, a storage area for storing the value of the jackpot type counter C2, and a storage area for storing the value of the reach random number counter C3. I have. As a result, the values of the counters C1 to C3 can be stored in each storage area. And it is comprised so that the value of each counter C1-C3 may be acquired in the information acquisition process in the winning process for a working opening, and each said counter C1-C3 may be memorize | stored in a corresponding storage area, respectively. Note that, unlike the ninth embodiment, the first variation type counter CS1 is not acquired when a game ball wins the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34.

  Next, the variation start processing in the present embodiment will be described using the flowchart of FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the setting mode of the classification information B (x) is different between the low probability mode and the high probability mode. Therefore, first, in step S5201, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode is set.

  As described in the eighth embodiment, the high probability mode is continued until eight game times are performed after the opening / closing execution mode is completed. For this reason, it can be said that the process of step S5201 is a process of determining whether or not it is the game game up to the eighth time after the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  When the mode is not the high probability mode, it means the low probability mode. In this case, in step S5202, various counter values of the big hit random number counter C1, the reach random number counter C3, and the first variation type counter CS1 are grasped as various counter values used for setting the classification information B (x). The jackpot random number counter C1 and the reach random number counter C3 are information included in the hold information (hold information stored in the execution area AE) to be subjected to the current fluctuation start process, and the first fluctuation type counter CS1 The information is stored in the lottery counter area 401 and is grasped separately from the hold information. The first variation type counter CS1 differs according to the start timing of the variation start process.

  After that, low probability mode compatible classification information setting processing for setting classification information B (x) using the above three counter values is executed in step S5203. In step S5204, the classification information set in step S5203 is set. A low-probability mode-compatible variable command determination process for determining a variable command C (y) using B (x) and the first variation type counter CS1 is executed.

  On the other hand, in the case of the high probability mode, in step S5205, as the various counter values used for setting the classification information B (x), the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the hold information that is the target of the current variation start process. And the various counter values of the reach random number counter C3. Thereafter, in step S5206, the high probability mode correspondence classification information setting process set as a subroutine process is read, and the two counter values grasped in step S5205 are passed as arguments. In the high probability mode compatible classification information setting process, the classification information B (x) is set using the two counters. In step S5207, a high-probability mode-compatible variable command determination process for determining the variable command C (y) using the classification information B (x) set in step S5206 is executed.

  The setting mode of the classification information B (x) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the setting mode of the classification information B (x). Specifically, FIG. 89 (a) illustrates the setting mode of the classification information B (x) corresponding to the low probability mode. 89 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a setting mode of the classification information B (x) corresponding to the high probability mode.

  B (1) and B (4) to B (7) are, in the low probability mode, as shown in FIG. 89 (a), three counters, specifically, hold information to be subjected to the current variation start processing Are associated with a combination of a jackpot random number counter C1 and a reach random number counter C3, and a first variation type counter CS1 having different values depending on the execution timing of the variation start process. Specifically, in the low-probability mode-compatible classification information setting process, a process of selecting one of B (1) and B (4) to B (7) is executed using the three counters.

  The low probability mode compatible classification information setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S5301, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is jackpot value information common to the high probability mode and the low probability mode (specifically, “7”).

  If it is the common jackpot value information, the process proceeds to step S5302, where B (1) is stored in the reference area of the RAM 204 as the classification information B (x) related to the current game round, and this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is not common jackpot numerical value information, it means that the determination result of the hold information related to the current game round is out of place. In this case, in steps S5303 to S5309, the process of storing any one of B (4) to B (7) as the classification information B (x) using the reach random number counter C3 and the first variation type counter CS1. Run.

  Specifically, first, in step S5303, it is determined whether or not the reach random number counter C3 is larger than “233”.

  If the reach random number counter C3 is larger than “233”, it means that the super reach display is won. In this case, the process proceeds to step S5304, and it is determined whether or not the first variation type counter CS1 is less than “92”.

  If the first variation type counter CS1 is less than “92”, the process proceeds to step S5305, B (4) is stored in the reference area of the RAM 204 as the classification information B (x), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if the first variation type counter CS1 is not less than “92”, the process advances to step S5306 to store B (5) in the reference area of the RAM 204 as the classification information B (x), and this process ends. .

  If the reach random number counter C3 is smaller than “233”, the process advances to step S5307 to determine whether or not the reach random number counter C3 is smaller than “5”. When the reach random number counter C3 is smaller than “5”, it means that the normal reach display is won. In this case, the process proceeds to step S5308, B (6) is stored as the classification information B (x) in the reference area of the RAM 204, and the present process is terminated. B (6) corresponds to the production F only.

  If the reach random number counter C3 is larger than “5”, B (7) is stored as the classification information B (x) in the reference area of the RAM 204 in step S5309, and this process is terminated. B (7) corresponds to the effect G only.

  According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 89 (a), classification information B (1) to B (7) according to the combination of the jackpot random number counter C1, the reach random number counter C3, and the first variation type counter CS1. 1 of the classification information B (x) is uniquely selected.

  On the other hand, in the high probability mode, B (1) to B (7) have two counters stored in the execution area AE of the reserved ball storage area 232 as shown in FIG. 89 (b). That is, it is configured to be associated with a combination of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the reach random number counter C3 related to the current hold information. Specifically, in the high-probability mode-compatible classification information setting process, a process of selecting one classification information among a plurality of types of classification information B (1) to B (7) is executed using the two counters. . In this case, unlike the low probability mode compatible classification information setting process, the first variation type counter CS1 stored in the current lottery counter area 701 is not used.

  The high probability mode compatible classification information setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S5401, it is determined whether or not the jackpot random number counter C1 matches the common jackpot value information. If it is common jackpot numerical value information, B (1) is stored in the reference area as classification information B (x) in step S5402, and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is not common jackpot value information, the process advances to step S5403 to determine whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 matches the jackpot value information dedicated to the high probability mode.

  If the jackpot value information is dedicated to the high probability mode, the process advances to step S5404 to determine whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 is less than “201”. If the reach random number counter C3 is less than “201”, B (2) is stored in the reference area of the RAM 204 as the current classification information B (x) in step S5405, and this process ends.

  If the reach random number counter C3 is equal to or greater than “201”, B (3) is stored in the reference area of the RAM 204 as the current classification information B (x) in step S5406, and this process ends.

  When the jackpot random number counter C1 is not the jackpot numerical value information dedicated to the high probability mode, in steps S5407 to S5413, processing for storing any one of B (4) to B (7) as the classification information B (x) is performed. Run.

  Specifically, in step S5407, it is determined whether or not the reach random number counter C3 is larger than “233”. When the reach random number counter C3 is larger than “233”, the distribution process of B (4) and B (5) is executed according to the reach random number counter C3 instead of the first variation type counter CS1.

  Specifically, in step S5408, it is determined whether or not the reach random number counter C3 is less than “236”. If the reach random number counter C3 is less than “236”, B (4) is stored in the reference area of the RAM 204 in step S5409, and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the reach random number counter C3 is “236” or more, B (5) is stored in the reference area of the RAM 204 in step S5410, and this process is terminated.

  The processing in steps S5411 to S5413 is the same as steps S5307 to S5309 in the low-probability mode correspondence classification information setting processing (FIG. 90), and thus description thereof is omitted.

  According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 89 (b), according to the combination of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the reach random number counter C3, one of the classification information B (1) to B (7) is classified. x) is uniquely selected.

  Here, as already described, in the high probability mode correspondence classification information setting process, unlike the low probability mode correspondence classification information setting process, the processing in step S5403, specifically, the jackpot that is the target of the current success / failure determination. A comparison process between the random number counter C1 and the jackpot value information dedicated to the high probability mode is executed. For this reason, the processing load becomes larger than the low probability mode correspondence classification information setting process by the amount of the comparison process. In particular, when a large number (9) of jackpot value information dedicated to the high probability mode is set and the current jackpot random number counter C1 does not match the jackpot value information, the jackpot value set for the high probability mode is set. Since it is compared whether or not all information matches, the processing load increases.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the process of setting the classification information B (x) in the high probability mode, the number of counters used for setting the classification information B (x) is the same as that in the low probability mode. Less than. As a result, the processing load required to set the classification information B (x) can be reduced.

  In this case, if the numerical range of the reach random number counter C3 is changed, the probability that the outlier reach display (effects D to F) is changed. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the numerical range of the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to the outlier reach display is the same in both the low probability mode and the high probability mode, the probability that the outlier reach display is performed. Is not fluctuating. As a result, the probability that the out-of-reach display is performed in the low probability mode and the high probability mode varies, so that the expectation for reach display varies, and the inconvenience of giving the player a sense of incongruity can be avoided.

  In addition, although it was set as the structure which distributes the classification | category information B (x) in the case of a deviation only by the reach random number counter C3, it is not restricted to this, For example, it is good also as a structure using big hit random number counter C1. Specifically, instead of the process of step S5408, for example, a process of determining whether or not the big hit random number counter C1 is less than “30” may be executed. In this case, the jackpot random number counter C1 includes the jackpot value information, but since the processing of step S5401 and step S5403 is performed before the processing of step S5408, the jackpot random number counter C1 in the processing of step S5408 is performed. Excludes those corresponding to the jackpot information.

  Next, various variable command determination processes (step S5204 and step S5207) for determining the variable command C (y) will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the determination mode of the variation command C (y) is different between the low probability mode and the high probability mode. First, for convenience of explanation, the variable command determination process corresponding to the high probability mode (step S5207) will be described. In the ROM 203, the classification information B (x) and the variation command C (y) are one-to-one as the variation command table TD11. A table for high probability mode set correspondingly is provided. In step S5207, the variation command C (y) corresponding to the classification information B (x) set this time is grasped by referring to the high probability mode table, and the grasped variation command C (y) is predetermined. To the storage area.

  Next, the variable command determination process corresponding to the low probability mode (step S5203) will be described. In the low-probability mode compatible change command determination process, the change command C (y) is determined using the classification information B (x) determined in step S5203 and the first change type counter CS1 determined in step S5202. decide. Specifically, the ROM 203 is provided with a low-probability mode table in which a plurality of types of variation commands C (y) having different presentation times are associated with each classification information B (x) as the variation command table TD11. ing. In the low probability mode table, a first variation type counter CS1 is assigned in a predetermined numerical range to each of the plurality of types of variation commands C (y). In step S5203, the current classification information B (x) and the variation command C (y) corresponding to the first variation type counter CS1 are grasped by referring to the low probability mode table. Thereby, it is possible to execute a greater number of types of game times effects than the number of types of classification information B (x), and to diversify the game times effects in the low probability mode.

  That is, it can be said that the first variation type counter CS1 is used to select one of a plurality of effect modes obtained by further subdividing the effect pattern corresponding to the classification information B (x). In other words, in the low-probability mode, the distribution of the play mode effect mode is subdivided by the number of types of lottery information that determines the effect mode compared to the high probability mode. It can be said that.

  In addition, although it was set as the structure by which multiple types of fluctuation | variation command C (y) was matched and set with respect to each classification information B (x), it is not restricted to this, For example, it is specific classification information B (x). Only a plurality of types of variation commands C (y) may be set in association with each other. In short, a configuration in which a plurality of types of variation commands C (y) are associated with at least one classification information B (x) may be used.

  Then, the process of step S5208-step S5211 is performed and this fluctuation | variation start process is complete | finished. Since the processing in steps S5208 to S5211 is as described in the ninth embodiment, the description thereof is omitted. In this case, since the pending number corresponding command determination process is not executed, an effect pattern command including a plurality of commands excluding the retained number corresponding command D (z) is set.

  Next, the confirmation process for holding notice in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the processing in steps S5501 to S5504 is the same as the processing corresponding to the confirmation processing for holding notice (FIG. 58) in the sixth embodiment, and thus description thereof is omitted.

  Here, as already explained, the total number of holds that can be stored in each result display section hold area Ra, Rb is 8, and lottery mode until the end of the open / close execution mode until 8 game times are consumed. Is set to high probability mode. The confirmation process for holding notice is executed during the opening / closing execution mode. For this reason, all the hold information stored in the hold areas Ra and Rb for each result display unit during the opening / closing execution mode is digested during the high probability mode. It is. Therefore, the classification information B (x) related to the hold information that is the execution target of the hold notice effect is determined by the high probability mode compatible classification information setting process.

  Specifically, first, in step S5505, the big hit random number counter C1 and the reach random number counter C3 of the hold information to be subjected to the current fluctuation start process are grasped.

  Thereafter, in step S5506, the high probability mode compatible classification information setting process is read, and the above two counter values are passed as arguments, so that the classification information B (x) is grasped with respect to the hold information to be checked for the current hold notice. To do. The high probability mode corresponding classification information setting process is the same as the process of step S5205 of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 88).

  Thereafter, in step S5507, a pending notice command including the classification information B (x) grasped in step S5506 is set, and this process is terminated. The hold notice command is transmitted to the display control device 212 via the audio lamp control device 82 in the external output processing of the normal processing (FIG. 45). When the display control device 212 receives the pending notice command, the display control device 212 grasps the classification information B (x) included in the pending notice command, and uses the classification information B (x) as the unit areas 272 to 279. Are stored in the corresponding unit area. In the hold notice effect determination process, one of the first hold notice effect to the fifth hold notice effect is selected and executed based on the classification information B (x). Since these processing configurations are the same as those in the eighth embodiment, description thereof will be omitted.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment described in detail, when setting the hold notice command, the classification information B (x) is grasped based on the hold information that triggered the confirmation for this hold notice. The grasped classification information B (x) is set as a pending notice command, and the display control device 212 uses a plurality of types based on the classified information B (x) set in the pending notice command. One hold notice effect is selected from the hold notice effects. This makes it possible to associate the hold notice effect with the game times effect related to the hold information that is the execution target of the hold notice effect.

  Here, as already described, in the high probability mode correspondence classification information setting processing, processing dedicated to the high probability mode (steps S5403 to S5406) is executed, so the processing load of the variation start processing increases by the processing load. .

  In particular, the program design needs to be designed assuming the maximum load. For this reason, in the situation where the low probability mode-compatible classification information setting process or the high probability mode-compatible classification information setting process is executed, it is assumed that the high probability mode-compatible classification information setting process with a high processing load is executed. The program configuration needs to be designed. For this reason, the processing load of the high probability mode-compatible classification information setting process affects the program configuration in the variation start process.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, in the process of setting the classification information B (x) in the high probability mode, the number of counters used for setting the classification information B (x) is changed to the low probability mode. Less than that. As a result, the processing load required to set the classification information B (x) can be reduced, and the processing load in the variation start process can be reduced.

  In the high probability mode compatible classification information setting process, the classification information B (x) is set using only the holding information stored in the holding ball storage area 232. As a result, the numerical information used to set the classification information B (x) is the same between the case where the pending notice command is set and the case where the change start process is executed. Thereby, the inconvenience that the relationship between the hold notice effect and the game times effect is lost can be avoided.

  In the situation of the low probability mode, after the classification information B (x) is determined in step S5203, in step S5204, the variation command C set in association with a plurality of types of the classification information B (x) is set. By employing a lottery to select one variation command C (y) in (y), it is possible to diversify the game mode effects in the low probability mode.

  On the other hand, in the case of the high probability mode, the classification information B (x) and the variation command C (y) are associated with each other on a one-to-one basis, so the processing load of the variation command determination processing corresponding to the high probability mode is low. It is smaller than the processing load of the probability mode compatible variable command determination processing. Thereby, increase of the processing load of the fluctuation | variation start process in high probability mode can be suppressed.

  In the low probability mode, the classification information B (x) is determined using the first variation type counter CS1 in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1 and the reach random number counter C3. As a result, the degree of freedom of the classification information B (x) in the low probability mode can be improved, and it is possible to suitably cope with diversification of the effect pattern of the game times effect.

  In addition, since the first variation type counter CS1 differs depending on the start timing of the variation start process, it is possible to make the selection of the effect pattern of the game times effect more random.

  Further, the same process (high probability mode compatible classification information setting process) is executed in the change start process and the confirmation process for the hold notice. As a result, an increase in the program capacity of the ROM 203 that can occur in order to suitably perform the hold notice effect can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, when the classification information B (x) is selected in the high probability mode, the classification information B (x) is selected using the jackpot random number counter C1 and the reach random number counter C3. Not limited to this, at least a part of the hold information (big hit random number counter C1, big hit type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3) acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34 If the classification information B (x) is selected (distributed) by using it, the setting mode is arbitrary. For example, the classification information B (x) may be selected using only the jackpot random number counter C1, or the classification information B (x) may be selected using all the counters C1 to C3.

  In the present embodiment, in each classification information setting process, the probability that each classification information B (x) is selected is set to be substantially the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to be different, for example. In this case, for example, in the high probability mode compatible classification information setting process, it may be configured such that specific classification information B (x) is easily selected. Thereby, since it becomes easy to perform the game turn effect corresponding to specific classification information B (x), it can grasp that a player is in high probability mode.

  Further, instead of the low probability mode compatible classification information setting process, a high probability mode compatible classification information setting process may be executed. As a result, the process can be shared, and the program capacity can be reduced. Even in this case, the configuration is such that the low-probability mode-compatible variable command determination process for selecting the variable command C (y) using the first variation type counter CS1 and the classification information B (x) is executed. The variety of game times during the low probability mode is ensured.

  Moreover, although the determination mode of the variation command C (y) is different between the high probability mode and the low probability mode, the present invention is not limited to this. The determination mode may be different. Specifically, during the high frequency support mode, the processing of the determination mode in which the number of counters used is relatively small, specifically, the processing of steps S5205 to S5207 is executed, while the counter used during the low frequency support mode. It is good to set it as the structure which performs the process of the determination aspect with many numbers, specifically the process of step S5202-step S5204. During the high frequency support mode, the processing load related to the drive control of the electric accessory 34a is likely to be relatively high, and thus the processing load of the electric role support processing is likely to be relatively high. For this reason, during the high frequency support mode, it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load of the entire normal processing by determining the variable command C (y) with processing having a relatively small processing load.

  In addition, the processing related to the setting of the pending notice command can be executed only in the opening / closing execution mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be executed in cases other than the opening / closing execution mode. In this case, the change start process and the process related to the setting of the hold notice command may be performed in the same process time of the normal process. In the above configuration, in the change start process, it is determined whether or not the process related to the setting of the hold notice command has been executed by the execution timing of the change start process, and the process related to the setting of the hold notice command is executed. In such a case, the variable command C (y) is determined in a mode with a relatively small processing load. The command C (y) may be determined. Thereby, it is possible to reduce a local increase in processing load in one processing time of the normal processing.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, A various deformation | transformation improvement is possible within the range which does not deviate from the meaning of this invention. For example, you may change as follows. Incidentally, the configurations of the following different modes may be applied individually or in combination to the configurations of the above embodiments.

  (1) In the first embodiment, the first hold notice confirmation process and the second hold notice confirmation process are set, and the hold notice is executed twice in one opening / closing execution mode. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, in addition to the confirmation process for the first and second hold notices, the confirmation process for the third to eighth hold notices may be set. That is, the number of times that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is stored in one opening / closing execution mode may be three or more. For example, by setting the same number of hold notice confirmation processes as “8”, which is the number of hold information that can be stored, even if all of the stored hold information corresponds to jackpot information, A hold notice can be executed for hold information corresponding to jackpot information.

  Further, for example, in the opening / closing execution mode, the confirmation process for holding notice described in the third embodiment may be repeatedly executed. Even in this case, the special effect is executed a maximum of 8 times in one opening / closing execution mode.

  (2) Although the success / failure determination process in the change start process is performed in the order in which the hold information is stored, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. Hold information that is preferentially set as a target of the success / failure determination process in the change start process may be set.

  For example, the hold information acquired based on the winning of one game ball out of the upper operation port 33 and the lower operation port 34 may be preferentially subjected to the success / failure determination process in the variation start process. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, the frequency with which the game ball wins the lower operation port 34 is increased, and therefore the hold information stored based on the winning of the lower operation port 34 is preferentially determined in the variation start process. A configuration that is a target of the determination process may be used.

  As described above, when the hold information is stored, and the operation port that is the determination result in the change start process is preferentially set, the information is stored based on the winning of the priority operation port. The reserved hold information may be a target of the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the hold notice. This is because, if a game ball wins a prize on the priority side after executing a hold notice for the hold information based on the winning to the non-priority side action opening, it corresponds to the execution timing of the hold notice and the jackpot information This is because the case where the hold information is different from the timing of the game times that are the targets of the success / failure determination process in the variation start process may occur.

  In addition, in the configuration in which the hold information acquired based on the winning of one game ball among the upper operation port 33 and the lower operation port 34 is preferentially subjected to the success / failure determination process in the variation start process, Regardless of whether or not the hold information is acquired based on the winning in the mouth, it may be a target of the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the hold notice. In this configuration, the determination processing for success / failure in the confirmation process for reservation notice is sequentially executed on the stored reservation information. If the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is executed according to the stored hold information state (number), the hold notice is executed at a timing corresponding to the order of the success / failure determination process in the variation start process. Good. In this configuration, with respect to the hold information whose priority is the non-priority side in the variation start process, even if the hold notice is executed, the hold information on the priority side is acquired after that Based on this, the timing that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the change start process may be changed. For this reason, in this configuration, when the hold information is newly stored, the timing of winning the big win can be changed for the hold information on the non-priority side, or when the status of the stored hold information is supported It is preferable to notify the player that the timing of winning the jackpot is announced.

  In each of the above embodiments, when the special display is executed, the player is notified of which holding information the holding notice is executed for. For this reason, the hold information is newly acquired thereafter, and it is easy for the player to grasp at what timing the hold information for winning the jackpot is the target of the success / failure determination process in the change start process.

  (3) The timing at which the hold notice is executed may be changed.

  For example, an operation switch (operation means) operated by a player may be provided, and when the operation switch is operated, the mode may be shifted to a mode in which a hold advance notice can be executed. In this configuration, the player can set a mode in which the hold notice can be executed at an arbitrary timing. For example, when this configuration is applied to the third embodiment, a special game number may be set when an operation switch is operated.

  In addition, for example, when a game ball wins in an operation port provided in the game area, the mode may be shifted to a mode in which a holding notice can be executed. For example, the mode may be shifted to a mode in which a hold notice can be executed based on a game ball winning in the general winning opening 31.

  In addition, the hold notice is not executed in the game times in the low frequency support mode, and may be executed in the game times in the high frequency support mode.

  (4) The execution mode of the hold notice may be arbitrarily changed, and the hold notice may be executed by a device different from the symbol display device 41 or the special display device 48. For example, there may be a case where the hold notice is executed in the display mode of the display lamp unit 63.

  Further, the effect to be executed may be different between the hold notice based on the winning of the game ball to the upper working port 33 and the hold notice based on the winning of the game ball to the lower working port 34.

  Further, the execution effect may be different between the hold notice based on the first match information command and the hold notice based on the second match information command.

  (5) Reach display may not be generated in the game times based on the hold information that is identified as not corresponding to the jackpot information in the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the hold notice.

  For example, it is conceivable that a variable display time table is set for the case where the hold information that is the target of the determination process in the confirmation process for the hold notice is the target of the determination process in the change start process. In this case, the game times based on the hold information that does not correspond to the jackpot may be set as a target of the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the hold notice. This is because if the hold notice is not executed at a predetermined timing (for example, the opening / closing execution mode in the first embodiment), the hold information stored until the predetermined timing corresponds to the jackpot information. It will not be. In this case, the player understands that the jackpot is not won before the game result is displayed. For this reason, it is desirable to shorten the variable display time for game times based on the hold information that does not correspond to the jackpot information and is the target of the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the hold notice.

  (6) In the first embodiment, when it is specified that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot information is stored in the confirmation process for the first hold notice, the hold notice is always executed. However, the hold notice need not always be executed, and for example, the hold notice may be executed when a lottery for holding notice is won.

  (7) The timing at which the hold information is acquired may be arbitrarily changed. For example, the hold information is acquired when the game ball passes through a predetermined area or when the game ball contacts a predetermined location. May be.

  (8) In the confirmation process for each holding notice in the first embodiment, the validity determination process in the confirmation process for holding notice is executed for a maximum of five pieces of holding information. The number of information may be arbitrarily changed. For example, in each confirmation process for the hold notice, the determination process of whether or not the confirmation process for the hold notice is performed may be executed for all of the stored hold information.

  (9) The hold information associated with the timing when the hold notice is executed may be changed. For example, a plurality of hold information may correspond to one round in the opening / closing execution mode. For example, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, if any of the holding information that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the variation start process in the first to third game times corresponds to the big win, the opening / closing execution mode The hold notice may be executed in the first round. In addition, when a plurality of hold information is associated with one round, the number of hold information corresponding to each round among the set rounds may be the same or different. It may be. Similarly, when the advance notice is executed at a game time (special game time), if the game time is divided into a plurality of sections (periods), the hold information corresponding to the section is singular. There may be more than one. Furthermore, the number of hold information corresponding to each section may be different.

  In addition, in a configuration in which a plurality of sections in which a hold notice can be executed are set, and a plurality of pieces of hold information are associated with the one section, one game ball of the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 is further provided. It is conceivable that the hold information acquired on the basis of the winnings is a target of the success / failure determination process in the change start process. In this case, with respect to the hold information whose priority is the non-priority side in the fluctuation start process, on the basis of the fact that the priority side hold information is acquired thereafter, the object of the determination process in the fluctuation start process The timing of becoming may change. For this reason, in this configuration, when the hold information is newly stored, the timing of winning the big win can be changed for the hold information on the non-priority side, or when the status of the stored hold information is supported It is preferable to notify the player that the timing of winning the jackpot is announced.

  In addition, for example, the timing at which the hold notice is executed may be set so that the winning operation port can be distinguished. The even-numbered round in the opening / closing execution mode may correspond to the hold information based on the winning to the lower operation port 34. In this case, by grasping the timing at which the hold notice is executed, the hold information is based on the winning of the game ball to any of the operation ports, and what is obtained among the hold information corresponding to the operation ports However, it is possible for the player to grasp whether or not a big hit is won when it is a target of the success / failure determination process in the variation start process. In this case, it is assumed that the hold information acquired based on the winning of one game ball out of the upper operation port 33 and the lower operation port 34 is a configuration that is preferentially subjected to the success / failure determination process in the variation start process. However, even if the priority side hold information is acquired after the hold notice is executed, there is no problem.

  (10) You may change the timing at which the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for holding notice is executed. For example, the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the hold notice may be executed at the timing when the game ball wins the operation opening. For example, in the first embodiment, the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the pending notice is performed in a period in which the big winning opening 32a is closed until the end of one round and the start of the next round. It is possible to execute the determination processing for the hold notice in the confirmation process for the hold notice for the hold information for which the hold notice is executed in the next round.

  (11) Which hold information corresponds to the hold information in the number of rounds in the opening / closing execution mode in the first embodiment, and in the state of the symbol row that is stopped in the third embodiment However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. Depending on the opening / closing execution mode in the first embodiment and the time from when the special game times in the third embodiment are started until the holding notice is executed, the holding notice corresponds to any holding information. The player may be made aware of whether or not.

  (12) Although the light emission mode in the special display device 48 is not intended to notify which hold information it is, the hold notice corresponds to any hold information depending on the light emission mode in the special display device 48. You may make it alert | report whether it is.

  (13) Number of games (5 game times) in which the high probability mode is set after the opening / closing execution mode is ended, number of games (8 game times) corresponding to the maximum number of hold information that can be stored, and opening / closing execution mode The relationship with the number of rounds may be arbitrarily changed.

  For example, a configuration is conceivable in which the number of games in which the high probability mode is set is smaller than the number of pieces of hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for hold notice. In this configuration, if it is determined whether or not the number of games corresponding to the high probability mode or the number of games corresponding to the low probability mode is determined in the success / failure determination processing in the confirmation processing for holding notice. Good. Specifically, after the opening / closing execution mode is finished, the high probability mode is set up to the third game time, and the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the first hold notice is changed to the success / failure determination process in the change start process by the fifth game time. What is executed with respect to the target hold information can be considered. In this case, in the determination process in the confirmation process for the first hold notice, the determination process corresponding to the high probability mode is executed for those corresponding to the third game round, and corresponding to the 4th and 5th game rounds. For the above, it is sufficient to execute the determination processing corresponding to the low probability mode.

  In addition, in the above configuration, when the number of hold information that is the target of the determination process for the hold notice is larger than the number of rounds in the opening / closing execution mode, the hold information that is the target of the determination process in the high probability mode As for one hold information corresponding to one round, a plurality of hold information corresponds to one round for the hold information that is the target of the determination process in the low probability mode. It is good to. In the high probability mode, it is assumed that the probability of winning a big hit is high and the player's attention to the game is high. In this configuration, with regard to the special notification corresponding to the period when the player's attention level is high, it is possible to make the player know in detail which special information the special notification corresponds to. As a result, the player's attention level regarding whether or not the special notification is executed, and if the special notification is executed, the player's attention level regarding which special information the special notification corresponds to, respectively. Can be increased.

  In addition, for example, a configuration in which the number of rounds in the opening / closing execution mode is smaller than the number of pieces of hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the first hold notice confirmation process is conceivable. In this configuration, a plurality of pieces of hold information may correspond to one round in the opening / closing execution mode.

  In addition, the timing at which the hold notice is executed is different from that in each of the above-described embodiments, and a configuration is considered in which the hold information is reduced in the change start process in a predetermined state where the hold notice can be executed, and the hold information is reduced. It is done. In this configuration, there may be a configuration in which the number of hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the hold notice is larger than the maximum number of hold information that can be stored. In this case, the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the hold notice may be executed for a predetermined number of pieces of hold information.

  (14) In the first embodiment, the holding notice is executed when the special winning opening 32a is open in the opening / closing execution mode. However, the timing for executing the holding notice can be arbitrarily changed. . That is, in a configuration in which a predetermined section that is divided at a predetermined timing is set, when a hold notice is executed in the preceding section and the rear section, the hold information corresponding to the hold notice is displayed. It only has to be different.

  For example, the advance notice may be executed when the special winning opening 32a is closed. In this case, a hold notice is executed between rounds in the opening / closing execution mode. Furthermore, in this configuration, the hold information acquired based on the winning of one of the game balls of the upper operation port 33 and the lower operation port 34 is preferentially subjected to the determination process in the variation start process. You may apply. In this case, when the hold information is newly stored, the timing for winning the jackpot for the non-priority hold information can be changed, or the jackpot winning in the case of corresponding to the state of the stored hold information. It is preferable to notify the player that the timing is being notified.

  Further, for example, the hold notice may be executed in each of the case where the special winning opening 32a is closed and the case where the special winning opening 32a is open. Furthermore, in this configuration, the hold information acquired based on the winning of one of the game balls of the upper operation port 33 and the lower operation port 34 is preferentially subjected to the determination process in the variation start process. You may apply. In this case, the hold notice executed in the closed state of the big prize opening 32a corresponds to one operation opening, and the hold notice executed in the open state of the big prize opening 32a corresponds to the other operation opening. It is good to do so. In this case, even if the hold information on the priority side is acquired after the hold notice is executed, the timing at which the hold notice is executed and the timing at which the hold information is the target of the success / failure determination process in the change start process are changed. Can be prevented.

  (15) In the first embodiment, the success / failure determination process in the second hold notice confirmation process is determined to be the hold information corresponding to the jackpot information in the first hold notice confirmation process. By the way, although the target of the determination process in the variation start process up to the fifth game is targeted, it is not limited to such a configuration. With respect to the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the change start process, as seen from the hold information identified as corresponding to the jackpot information in the confirmation process for the first hold notice, the second hold notice What is necessary is just to perform the validity determination process in a confirmation process.

  For example, when the confirmation process for the second hold notice confirms that the success / failure determination process is the hold information corresponding to the jackpot information in the first hold notice confirmation process, the variation starts by the third game. It is also possible to target an object that is a target of the determination process.

  Further, for example, the third to fifth points in view of what is determined as the hold information corresponding to the jackpot information in the first hold notice confirmation process in the second hold notice confirmation process. In addition, an object that is a target of the success / failure determination process in the variation start process may be the target.

  (16) In the second embodiment, in the confirmation process for the second hold notice, depending on whether one of the high probability match information and the low probability match information is set in the first hold notice confirmation process, Although it is determined whether to execute the determination processing corresponding to either the high probability mode or the low probability mode, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. For example, in the confirmation process for the second hold notice, whether or not the hold information corresponding to the jackpot information common to each mode which is a jackpot winning is stored regardless of whether the mode is a high probability mode or a low probability mode. You may make it determine.

  (17) In the third embodiment, the special game times are set when the lottery is won, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration. For example, special game times may be set at a predetermined cycle.

  In addition, when the holding information corresponding to the big win is not stored, the special game times may not be made. In this configuration, the special game times can be made based on the fact that the hold information corresponding to the big win is stored.

  (18) Although the upper working port 33 as the first starting ball entering part and the lower working port 34 as the second starting ball entering part are arranged in parallel vertically, the present invention is not limited to this. The positional relationship between the two may be reversed, and the two may be separated from each other on the left and right.

  In addition, when the firing handle 54 is operated in the same manner (the same amount of rotation) for the first start ball entrance portion and the second start ball entrance portion, each of the first start ball entrance portion and the second start ball entrance portion Although the first start ball entering part and the second start ball entering part are arranged side by side so that the game ball can win a prize, it is not limited to this, and even if the firing handle 54 is operated in the same manner, The positional relationship between the first start ball entering portion and the second start ball entering portion may be set so that it is difficult for the game balls to win in each of the first start ball entering portion and the second start ball entering portion. In this case, a first launch operation aimed at winning a game ball to the first start pitching portion and a second launch operation aiming at winning a game ball to the second start pitching portion are individually set, For the player, the launch handle 54 can be operated with the aim of winning the game ball in the first starting pitching portion, and the launch handle 54 can be operated with the aim of winning the game ball in the second starting pitching portion. can do.

  Moreover, the number of starting ball entering parts is not limited to two, and may be three or more, for example.

  (19) The number of reservations is not limited to the configuration in which the number of first result display area reservation areas Ra is four and the number of second result display area reservation areas Rb is four, but one to three. Or it may be 5 or more each, and it is good also as a structure from which both hold numbers differ.

  Further, the second result display area reservation area Rb may not be provided. In this case, the hold information is stored in the first result display holding area Ra regardless of which of the operation holes 33 and 34 wins the game ball. In this case, one of the operation ports 33 and 34 may not be provided.

  (20) The configuration of giving a game ball to the winning of a game ball to the variable winning device 32 or the like is not limited to the configuration of paying out the game ball directly. In the configuration having a function of storing virtual game media, It is good also as a structure which provides the said virtual game medium.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the symbol display device 41 may be omitted, and a lottery result such as a success / failure lottery may be taught by a movable decorative member.

  (21) A different arrangement may be used for the big hit random number counter and the big hit type counter for the hold information related to winning in the upper working port 33 and the holding information related to winning in the lower working port 34.

  (22) It goes without saying that the number of jackpot numerical information set for the high probability mode may be other than ten, and the number of jackpot numerical information set for the low probability mode is the jackpot set for the high probability mode. It goes without saying that the number can be arbitrarily changed as long as it is smaller than the number of numerical information.

  (23) A game result different from the jackpot result may be set. For example, although a transition is made to the opening / closing execution mode, a special losing result is set in which the lottery mode and support mode state before the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is maintained after the transition to the opening / closing execution mode (after completion). It may be. As an aspect of the opening / closing execution mode based on this special losing result, it is conceivable that the opening / closing execution mode is ended when the special winning opening 32a is opened a predetermined number of times or when a predetermined number of game balls are won in the special winning opening 32a. . In this configuration, the hold notice may be executed in the opening / closing execution mode based on the special loss result.

  (24) The main control device 81 transmits the information acquired from the jackpot random number counter C1 as it is to a sub-side control device such as the sound lamp control device 82 or the display control device 212, and the sub-side control device performs confirmation processing for holding notice. It is good also as a structure which performs.

  (25) In each of the above embodiments, the jackpot value information in the low probability mode is included in the jackpot value information in the high probability mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot value information in the low probability mode is It is good also as a structure which is not contained in the jackpot numerical value information in high probability mode.

  (26) It is possible to adopt a configuration in which only a single success / failure lottery mode is set, and a plurality of types of jackpot value information are set for the success / failure lottery mode, instead of a plurality of stages of the success / failure lottery mode. .

  (27) Reservation information is not acquired based on a game ball flowing down the game area entering a predetermined entry part, but is retained based on an operation part that is manually operated by a player. The information may be acquired.

  (28) In each of the above-described embodiments, one game turn in the main display unit 43 is started based on whether or not the main controller 81 determines whether or not, but the present invention is not limited to this. On the other hand, when the condition for determining whether or not the main control device 81 is satisfied is satisfied, the game times are started at a timing before the timing when the determination is actually made, and the determination is made after that. The subsequent variation display pattern, variation display time, and stop result in the game time may be determined. In this case, the main control device 81 first transmits a change command when the game turn start timing is reached, and then determines whether or not the game is correct, determines the change display time, and determines the type. The type command may be transmitted, and the transmission timing of the variable time command and the type command may be shifted. However, the timing at which the variation time command and the type command are transmitted needs to be the timing until the symbol variation display is switched from the high-speed variation to the low-speed variation in the symbol display device 41.

  (29) When the hold notice is executed in the opening / closing execution mode, in the opening / closing execution mode based on the 16R probability variation jackpot result, the opening / closing execution mode is based on the 16R probability variation jackpot result in a predetermined round among the first to fifth rounds. May be notified. In this case, it is preferable that the round in which the notification is performed is a round in which the hold notice is not executed.

  Further, in the opening / closing execution mode based on the 16R probability variation jackpot result, it may be notified in the fifth round that the mode is the opening / closing execution mode based on the 16R probability variation jackpot result. In this case, in the first to fourth rounds, the player cannot grasp whether the result is the 6R probability variation jackpot result or the 16R probability variation jackpot result, and the player is expected to be in the opening / closing execution mode based on the 16R probability variation jackpot result. To play games. In this configuration, when notifying that the opening / closing execution mode is based on the 16R probability variation jackpot result in the sixth round, it is only necessary not to execute the hold notice.

  (30) When one open / close execution mode ends and the next open / close execution mode is entered, the hold information that is the target of the determination process in the confirmation process for hold notice in the one open / close execution mode Thus, it is possible that the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the hold notice is not executed in the next opening / closing execution mode. In this case, the history may be stored when it is a target of the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the hold notice. In this configuration, it is possible to prevent execution of the determination process in the confirmation process for holding notice multiple times for one piece of holding information. As a result, it is possible to prevent an excessive processing load from being applied in executing the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for holding notice.

  (31) You may change the timing at which the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for holding notice is executed. For example, when the hold information is stored, when the game state is the normal state (when it is not a special game time or when it is not in the opening / closing execution mode), the determination process of the confirmation process for the hold notice is executed. Good.

  For example, in the case of special game times or the opening / closing execution mode, a command reflecting the result of the determination process in the confirmation process for holding notice is output from the main controller 81 to the sound lamp controller 82. Also good.

  Further, for example, when the result of the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for holding notice is output from the main control device 81 to the sound lamp control device 82, the result of the determination process is included in the change start command and the type command. You may be made to do. That is, the command may be output from the main control device 81 to the sound lamp control device 82 in a state where the result of the success / failure determination processing in the confirmation processing for holding notice is included in any command. In this case, the number of commands output from the main control device 81 to the sound lamp control device 82 can be reduced.

  (32) In the first embodiment, the hold notice is executed when a predetermined time has elapsed after the round in which the hold notice is executed is determined. However, the present invention is limited to this configuration. Not. After the round in which the hold notice is executed is determined, the hold notice may be executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the round.

  For example, the hold notice may be executed when a predetermined number of game balls have won the big prize opening 32a in the round in which the hold notice is executed. Here, when 10 game balls win the big winning opening 32a, the round is ended. For this reason, a number smaller than 10 may be set as the predetermined number. In this configuration, the timing for executing the hold notice is determined not by the passage of time but by the number of game balls won in the big winning opening 32a. This makes it possible to execute a hold notice before the end of one round.

  (33) For the hold information identified as corresponding to the jackpot result in the second hold notice confirmation process in the first embodiment, the open / close execution mode in that case and the next open / close execution mode However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration.

  For example, when the hold notice based on the hold information identified as corresponding to the jackpot result is executed in the confirmation process for the second hold notice, the hold notice based on the hold information in the next opening / closing execution mode. May not be executed.

  Further, for example, when a hold notice based on hold information identified as corresponding to the jackpot result in the confirmation process for the second hold notice is being executed, based on the hold information in the next opening / closing execution mode When the hold notice is executed, one of the special light emission process and the special display process may not be executed.

  (34) In the first embodiment, in the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 6R probability variation jackpot result, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the target of the determination process in the variation start process is the sixth to eighth game times. The timing to execute the hold notice when it is determined that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is specified may be changed.

  For example, when the hold notice is executed in the sixth round, the timing at which the hold notice is executed in the first round may be different depending on the hold information corresponding to any of the sixth game to the eighth game. Good. For example, the game corresponding to the sixth game round when 2 seconds have passed since the start of the sixth round is the one corresponding to the seventh game round when 4 seconds have passed, and the game corresponding to the seventh game round is 8 games when 6 seconds have passed. The one corresponding to the second time may be executed.

  For example, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, if the hold information that is the target of the determination process in the variation start process corresponds to the jackpot result at the 7th game or the 8th game, the hold corresponding to the hold information The advance notice may be executed when the ending display in the opening / closing execution mode is executed.

  (35) In the second embodiment described above, the upper limit number of the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the hold notice confirmation process is the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result in the first hold notice confirmation process. Regardless of whether or not it is specified that is stored, it may be set in advance. For example, it is conceivable that the total number of pieces of hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the first hold notice and the confirmation process for the second hold notice is “5”. In this case, when it is determined in the determination process of the first hold notice confirmation process that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is stored, the hold subject to the hold notice determination process for the hold notice There is no increase in information. Then, in the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the second hold notice executed after the specific, depending on the result of the success / failure judgment process in the confirmation process for the first hold notice (ordinary jackpot result or probable change jackpot result) Thus, whether or not the determination process corresponding to any of the high probability mode and the low probability mode is executed is different.

  (36) In each of the above embodiments, the display control device 212 is controlled by the sound lamp control device 82 based on the command output from the main control device 81. Instead, the main control device is used. The display control device 212 may be configured to control the sound lamp control device 82 based on the command output from 81. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound lamp control device 82 and the display control device 212 are separately provided, the control devices 82 and 212 may be provided as a single sub-side control device. The functions of the sound lamp control device 82 or the display control device 212 may be integrated into the main control device 81, and the functions of both the sound lamp control device 82 and the display control device 212 are integrated into the main control device 81. It is good also as a structure.

  (37) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines that release a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or games in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a big hit when a ball enters, a pachinko machine equipped with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and the like.

  (38) Non-ballistic gaming machines, for example, equipped with a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, start rotation of the reels by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body that is supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a take-in device. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused to start the rotation of the reel.

  In the gaming machine configured as described above, when information for determining a game result is acquired in advance and a game result based on the information is notified in advance, the timing of the notification and a game based on the information What is necessary is just to match | combine with the timing which becomes a result. In this configuration, the player can understand that the timing at which the game result is obtained grasps the timing at which the notification is executed.

  Further, when a plurality of pieces of information for determining a game result are stored, when a game result based on one information is specified, a subsequent game result is specified based on the specified result. It is advisable to make the processing different. For example, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is set, and after the bonus game ends, the specific gaming state in which the probability of winning a specific role is changed, the winning role, and the winning of the role A gaming machine in which a specific gaming state is taught that teaches a method for establishing a game. In this case, when it is specified that the bonus game is won before the game result corresponding to the occurrence of the bonus game is determined, the game result indicating whether or not the specific game state occurs after the bonus game is ended. Should be specified.

<Invention Group Extracted from the Embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

Feature A1. Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (entrance to each operation port 33, 34) (function of executing information acquisition processing in MPU 202 of main controller 81) When,
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
A determination is made as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to preset provision information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means In such a case, a grant determination unit (a function for executing the determination process in the variation start process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that sequentially performs the grant determination on the plurality of special information,
A privilege granting unit (main control) that grants a privilege to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit being the grant response result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. A function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the device 81),
Information reflecting the determination result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means is the target of the determination of grant at a timing prior to the predetermined special information being the target of the determination of grant. A destination specifying means for specifying (a function of executing confirmation processing for the first and second hold notices by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
The special notification reflecting the result of specification by the destination specifying means is performed by the notification means (symbol display device 41) at a timing before the predetermined special information that has been specified by the destination specifying means becomes the target of the grant determination. The special notification control means to be executed by the special display device 48) (round display start processing and special effect during round display processing in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 of the first embodiment, second implementation) A function of executing the variable display control process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 in the form of the above, and the mid-change process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 of the third embodiment),
With
When the special notification control unit performs the special notification about the predetermined special information, the special notification control unit executes the special notification according to a timing at which the predetermined special information is a target of the determination of application by the application determination unit. A gaming machine characterized by having different timings.

  According to the feature A1, the special notification according to the predetermined special information that is not the subject of the grant determination is executed by the notifying unit at a timing before the special information is the subject of the grant determination. is there. As a result, for the player, when special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result when the special information that is the target of the grant determination later becomes the target of the grant determination is determined according to the content of the special notification. The game of confirming or predicting the game is added and the game is diversified. As a result, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

  The timing at which the special notification is executed is different depending on the timing at which the special information that is specified by the first specifying means is the target of the determination of grant. Thereby, by grasping the timing at which the special notification is executed, it is possible to grasp which special information for the special information is notified by which specific information. As a result, when the special notification is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from understanding which special information the special notification is for.

  In addition, by varying the timing at which the special notification is executed, it is possible to lengthen the period during which the player pays attention to whether or not the special notification is executed. That is, the period during which the player's attention to the game is increased can be lengthened. As a result, the player's attention to the game can be increased.

Feature A2. When the plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage unit, the grant determination unit performs grant determination in a predetermined order with respect to the plurality of special information.
The special notification control unit causes the special notification to be executed at a timing in which the predetermined special information that is specified by the destination specifying unit is associated with the order that is determined by the determination unit. The gaming machine according to Feature A1, which is characterized in that

  According to the feature A2, the order in which the special information that is the specific target is the target of the determination to be given is associated with the timing at which the special notification is executed. Thus, by grasping the timing at which the special notification is executed, it is possible to obtain an effect that makes it easier for the player to understand how much the special notification is for the special information that is the subject of the grant determination. .

  In addition, after one piece of special information is subject to grant determination, the time until the special information different from the one special information is subject to grant judgment may be irregular. . In this regard, in this feature, the timing at which the special notification is executed is associated with the order in which the special information is to be determined. As a result, even if the time from when one grant determination is made until the next grant determination is irregular, when special notification is executed, which special information is the special notification Can be understood well by the player.

Feature A3. There is a limited period during which the execution of the grant determination by the privilege granting unit is limited (a period when the game is being transferred to the opening / closing execution mode, a period when the game is being executed),
The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, wherein the special notification control means executes the special notification during the restriction period.

  According to the feature A3, the special notification is executed in the limited period in which the grant determination is not performed by the grant determination unit. Even if the execution timing of the special notification and the execution timing of the grant determination are associated with each other, if the grant determination and the special notification are executed at the same time, it is determined which special information the player is the special alert for. The occurrence of inconvenience that cannot be understood is considered. Because, when the grant determination and the special notification are executed at the same time, the special notification is for the special information that is the target of the grant determination in the predetermined order from the previous grant determination, or from the present grant determination This is because it is conceivable that it is difficult for the player to determine whether the information is for the special information that is subject to the grant determination in a predetermined order. In this regard, in this feature, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the inconvenience due to the special notification being executed in the limited period.

  Feature A4. The special notification control means executes the special notification in a predetermined game period (opening / closing execution mode in the first embodiment, special game times in the third embodiment) and the predetermined special Any of the features A1 to A3, wherein the timing of executing the special notification is changed in the predetermined game period in correspondence with the timing at which the information is subject to the grant determination by the grant determining means. The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature A4, the timing at which the special notification is executed corresponds to the timing at which the hold information is determined to be given. The special notification is executed during a predetermined game period. When the special notification is executed by executing the special notification in a predetermined game period, the player only needs to know when the special notification is executed in the predetermined game period. As a result, it becomes easier for the player to know when the special notification is executed, and when the special notification is executed, the player knows which is the special information corresponding to the special notification. The effect which becomes easy to do.

Feature A5. In the game period, the operation mode in the notifying unit or the game operation execution unit (big prize opening 32a) different from the notification means is the first on the front side of the specific mode across the execution of the specific mode (closed state of the big prize port 32a). 1 period (round in the opening and closing execution mode) and a second period on the rear side (round after the round corresponding to the first period in the opening and closing execution mode),
The special notification control means executes the special notification in the first period when the timing at which the predetermined special information is subject to the grant determination by the grant determination means is the first timing, and The feature A4 is characterized in that the special notification is executed in the second period when the timing at which the predetermined special information is subject to the grant determination by the grant determination means is the second timing. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature A5, when the player grasps the timing at which the special notification is executed, the operation mode of the notification unit or the game operation execution unit may be determined. Thereby, when the special notification is executed, it becomes easy for the player to know in which game period the special notification is executed. As a result, it is possible to increase the effect of making it easier for the player to know which special information the special notification corresponds to.

Feature A6. A variable entrance ball that is provided in the game area and has an opening (large winning opening 32a) that is sized to allow a game ball to enter, and that the opening can be switched between an open state and a closed state. Means (variable winning device 32);
Variable entry control means (a function for executing a large winning opening opening / closing process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for executing variable entry control for switching to the closed state after the variable entry means is in the open state;
Privilege granting means (payout device 77 and payout control device 78) for granting a privilege to a player based on the game ball entering the opening of the variable pitching means;
With
The specific mode is at least one of switching from the open state to the closed state and switching from the closed state to the open state, and the switching is interposed between the first period and the second period. The gaming machine according to Feature A5, wherein

  According to the feature A6, a privilege is given to the player based on the game ball entering the variable pitching portion. For this reason, it is considered that the player is playing a game paying attention to the state of the variable pitching portion. In addition, the first period and the second period are separated by switching the state of the variable pitching portion. By separating the first period and the second period according to the state of the variable pitching portion where the player's attention is high, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the first period and the second period. Therefore, the effect of making it easy for the player to grasp the current period can be enhanced.

  Feature A7. The first period and the second period are one of the open state and the closed state, and the other state is interposed between the first period and the second period. A gaming machine according to Feature A6.

  According to the feature A7, the special notification is executed in one of the open state and the closed state of the variable pitching portion. Thereby, when a 1st period and a 2nd period are divided | segmented, it will be divided | segmented on both sides of one state of an open state and a closed state. By dividing the first period and the second period across one state, the division of each period can be clarified. As a result, when the special notification is executed, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp in which period the special notification is executed.

Feature A8. The predetermined game period includes a plurality of periods including the first period and the second period, and the number of periods included is smaller than the number of the special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage unit. Is,
A part of the plurality of periods included in the predetermined game period is characterized in that the number of the special information associated with the execution timing of the special notification is different from the other periods. The gaming machine according to any one of A5 to A7.

  According to the feature A8, the number of the plurality of periods included in the predetermined game period is smaller than the number of special information that can be stored. Here, when one piece of special information is associated with one piece of time, it is conceivable that a problem may occur in which special information that is not a target of special notification is generated. In this regard, in this feature, by providing periods with different numbers of corresponding special information, a plurality of special information can be associated with one period. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above problems.

  In addition, when the number of special information corresponding to the period differs, and when it is desired to provide detailed notification of the timing at which the special information is subject to determination, the number of special information corresponding to the period is reduced and the special information is added. When it is not necessary to report the timing to be determined in detail, the number of special information corresponding to the period may be increased. As a result, it is possible to provide special information that allows the player to clearly grasp the timing that is the subject of the grant determination while making a plurality of special information correspond to one period.

Feature A9. The destination specifying means performs a first process (first hold by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for executing the specific process on the special information that is smaller than the number of the plurality of periods included in the predetermined game period. When the special information corresponds to the given information, the total of the special information that is the target of the specific process is Executing the second process for executing the specific process so as to be greater than the number of the plurality of periods (a function for executing the determination process in the confirmation process for the second hold notice by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) And
The special notification control means executes the special notification corresponding to the first process so that one special information corresponds to one period, and the special notification corresponding to the second process. Is executed so that a plurality of pieces of the special information correspond to the one period.

  According to the feature A9, one period corresponds to one special information until the special notification corresponding to the special information specified that the special information corresponding to the given information is stored is executed. . Moreover, about the subsequent special alerting | reporting, one period respond | corresponds to several special information. Thereby, when each of the first process and the second process is executed, the special notification is executed even if the number of periods included in the game period is smaller than the total of the special information subjected to each process. It becomes possible.

  The special notification corresponding to the first process corresponds to one special information in one period, and the special notification corresponding to the second process corresponds to a plurality of special information in one period. Here, the special information that is a specific target in the first process becomes a target for determination of grant at an earlier timing than the special information that is the specific target in the second process. Further, when the special notification is executed, the player wants to know in detail which special information the special notification corresponds to the special information that is subject to the grant determination at an early timing. In this regard, according to this feature, since the special notification corresponding to the first process corresponds to one special information in one period, the player details which special information corresponds to the special notification. Can grasp.

  In addition, since the special notification corresponding to the second process corresponds to a plurality of special information in one period, in order to execute the special notification corresponding to the first process, all of the storable special information is specified in advance. It is possible to prevent the device from becoming a target of specific processing of the means.

Feature A10. In the notifying means or a specific notifying means different from the notifying means, after the change display of the pattern is started, the result corresponding to the result of the application determination by the application determining means is displayed and the display of the change of the pattern is terminated. A game time control means (a function for executing a game time control process by the main control device 81) for controlling the notification means or a display means different from the notification means as one game time,
The special notification control means includes a timing at which the predetermined special information, which has been specified by the destination specifying means, is a target for grant determination by the grant determination means, and a period of time that has elapsed since one game is started. The game machine according to any one of features A1 to A9, wherein the special notification is executed in the game times.

  According to the feature A10, the special notification is executed by associating the period that has elapsed since the start of the game times with the timing that is the target of the grant determination by the grant determination unit. Thereby, when special alerting | reporting is performed, a player can be made to grasp | ascertain which special alerting | reporting is with respect to which special information.

  Moreover, the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is displayed by executing the game times. For this reason, when game times are being executed, it is considered that the player's attention to the game is increasing. By executing the special notification in this case, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the timing at which the special notification is executed.

  In order to make the player understand that the special notification has been executed, it is preferable to execute the display of the variation of the pattern and the special notification by a common notification means. In this configuration, it is expected that the player can easily grasp the execution of the special notification while grasping the change display of the pattern.

Feature A11. In the notifying means or a specific notifying means different from the notifying means, after the change display of the pattern is started, the result corresponding to the result of the application determination by the application determining means is displayed and the display of the change of the pattern is terminated. A game time control means (a function for executing a game time control process by the main control device 81) for controlling the notification means or a display means different from the notification means as one game time,
The game times control means is for executing the display of variation of the pattern in a plurality of variation display areas, and sequentially stopping and displaying the variation display of the patterns in the plurality of variation display areas,
The special notification control means includes a timing at which the predetermined special information, which has been specified by the destination specifying means, is to be given by the grant judging means, and a variable display of the pattern among the plurality of variable display areas. The game machine according to any one of features A1 to A10, wherein the special notification is executed in the game times in association with the number of variable display areas in which the game is performed.

  According to the feature A11, the special notification is executed by associating the number of the variable display areas in which the variable display of the pattern is performed with the timing at which the special information is determined to be given. Thereby, for the player, when the special notification is executed, it is only necessary to grasp the number of the variable display areas in which the pattern is displayed in a variable manner. As a result, if the change display of the pattern is visually recognized so as to grasp the result of the grant determination in the current game round, it is possible to grasp which special information is the special notification when the special notification is executed. As described above, it is not necessary to perform an operation different from the operation of grasping the result of the grant determination in order to grasp which special information the player is informing.

  Feature A12. The notification means is a special in which the notification mode is determined by the special notification control means regardless of the timing at which the predetermined special information that is specified by the destination specifying means is the target of the determination by the assignment determination means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A11, further comprising a notification unit (special display device 48).

  According to the feature A12, the notification mode by the special notification unit is not affected by the timing at which the special information is subjected to the determination of application by the application determination unit. Thereby, it is not necessary to set a plurality of types of notification modes in the special notification means in association with the timings to be given for the determination. As a result, the amount of information related to the control of the special notification means can be reduced.

  In addition, since it is possible to allow the player to know which special information is for the special notification at the timing when the special notification is executed, it is not notified which special information is for the special information in the notification mode. In any case, it is possible to prevent the player from understanding which special information the special notification is for.

  In addition, since it is possible to grasp which special information is notified by the prior specifying means for which special information at the timing when the special notification is executed, even if it is a special notification for which special information, the special information being executed The notification mode of notification can be shared. Thereby, the information amount concerning execution of special information can be reduced.

Feature A13. As the special notification, a first special notification and a second special notification are set,
When the special notification is executed, each of the first special notification and the second special notification is executed,
The special notification control means includes
First special notification control means for executing the first special notification (special light emission processing by the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 is executed) according to the timing at which the predetermined special information is subject to the determination of application by the application determination unit. Function)
Second special notification control means (a function for executing a special display process by the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) for executing the second special notification after the first special notification is executed by the first special notification control means; ,
With
The first special notification control means determines the content of the first special notification regardless of the timing at which the predetermined special information is subject to the determination of grant by the grant determination means.
The second special notification control unit is configured to determine the content of the second special notification based on a timing at which the predetermined special information is a target of the determination of the grant by the grant determination unit. The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to A12.

  According to the feature A13, the content of the first special notification is determined regardless of the timing at which the special information is subjected to the determination of grant. The content of the second special notification is determined according to the timing at which the special information is subject to grant determination.

  By determining the content of the first special notification regardless of the timing at which the special information is subject to grant determination, the content of the first special alert can be made common regardless of the timing at which the special information is subject to grant determination. . As a result, the amount of information related to the execution of the first special notification can be reduced. In addition, since the timing at which the first special notification is executed corresponds to the timing at which the determination is made, by understanding the timing at which the first special notification is executed, any special information can be notified. The player can grasp whether there is.

  Here, even if the first special notification is executed, if the first special notification is suddenly executed, it is conceivable that the player cannot understand at which timing the first special notification is executed. In this regard, in this feature, the second special notification is executed after the first special notification is executed. The contents of the second special notification differ depending on the timing at which the special information is subject to determination. Thereby, by grasping the contents of the second special notice, the player can grasp which special information the special notice corresponds to. Further, by executing the second special notification after the first special notification, the player can understand that the second special notification is executed when the first special notification is executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player from grasping the second special notification, for example, overlooking the second special notification.

Feature A14. There is a limited period during which the grant determination by the privilege granting unit is limited (period in which the opening / closing execution mode is shifted, period in which game times are being executed),
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A13, wherein the destination specifying unit executes a specific process in the restriction period.

  According to the feature A14, the specific process by the destination specifying unit is executed in the restriction period in which the determination of the grant is not performed by the grant determining unit. As a result, the specific process by the destination specifying unit and the grant determination by the grant determination unit are performed at the same time, and an excessive processing load on the gaming machine can be suppressed.

  Feature A15. Limiting means for restricting execution of the specific processing by the destination specifying means when the determination by the grant determining means is performed (for each holding notice by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in the first embodiment) A function for determining whether or not the open / close execution mode is in the confirmation process, whether the confirmation process execution flag is stored in the confirmation process for holding notice by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in the third embodiment The gaming machine according to Feature A14, further comprising:

  According to the feature A15, when the grant determination by the privilege grant unit is executed, the execution of the specific process by the destination specifying unit is restricted. Thereby, it can suppress that the grant determination by a privilege provision means and the specific process by a destination specific means are performed simultaneously. As a result, the excellent effect described in the feature A14 can be obtained favorably.

Feature A16. The grant determination means includes a high probability grant determination means (function of executing the processing of step S703 in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81) and a low probability grant determination means (main And the function of executing the process of step S702 in the MPU 202 of the control device 81, and further, after the result of the grant determination becomes the grant correspondence result, until a predetermined number of grant determinations are made. The grant determination by the high probability grant determination means is performed, and the grant determination by the low probability grant determination means is performed after the grant determination of the number of times is performed,
The game according to any one of features A1 to A15, wherein the destination specifying unit performs the specific process on special information for which a determination is made by the high-probability giving determination unit. Machine.

  According to the feature A16, the destination specifying unit performs a specific process on the special information that is the target of the determination by the high probability determination unit. Thereby, when executing a specific process, whether the special information that is the target of the specific process is to be subjected to the grant determination by the grant determination means of the high probability grant determination means and the low probability grant determination means, There is no need to judge each time. As a result, when the specific process is executed, the specific process by the destination specifying unit is executed as compared with the configuration in which the specific information is subject to the determination of the grant by each grant determination unit. The processing load in case can be reduced.

Feature B1. Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (entrance to each operation port 33, 34) (function of executing information acquisition processing in MPU 202 of main controller 81) When,
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
A determination is made as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to preset provision information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means In such a case, a grant determination unit (a function for executing the determination process in the variation start process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that sequentially performs the grant determination on the plurality of special information,
A privilege granting unit (main control) that grants a privilege to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit being the grant response result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. A function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the device 81),
A destination for identifying information that reflects a determination result when the special information acquired by the information acquisition unit is a target of the determination of grant at a timing before the special information is a target of the determination of grant Specifying means (function of executing confirmation processing for holding notice in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
The special notification based on the specifying result by the destination specifying means is notified at a timing before the special information that is the target to be specified by the destination specifying means becomes the target of the grant determination (symbol display device 41, special Special notification control means (round display start process and special effect round display process in the MPU 252 of the display control apparatus 212 of the first embodiment), which is executed by the display apparatus 48), the second embodiment A function of executing the variable display control process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 and the mid-variation process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 of the third embodiment),
With
In the destination specifying means, the specification result of the specific process executed first is a switching target result (determined as a big win in the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the first hold notice). Based on the special information (the hold information that is the object of the determination in the confirmation process for each hold notice in the first embodiment) and the specific process thereafter At least one of the execution modes (a function of executing the determination process corresponding to the high probability mode or the determination process corresponding to the low probability mode in the confirmation process for the second hold notice in the second embodiment) A gaming machine comprising switching means for switching (a function for executing a confirmation process for second hold notice by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81).

  According to the feature B1, the special notification according to the predetermined special information that is not the target of the grant determination is executed by the notifying unit at a timing before the special information is the target of the grant determination. is there. As a result, for the player, when special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result when the special information that is the target of the grant determination later becomes the target of the grant determination is determined according to the content of the special notification. The game of confirming or predicting the game is added and the game is diversified. As a result, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

  Based on the fact that the specific result has become the switching target result, the special information to be executed for the subsequent specific process and the execution mode of the specific process are switched. As a result, it is possible to diversify the specific processing when the switching target result is obtained and the timing at which the specific processing is executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the monotonous processing mode and timing when the specific processing is executed, and to increase the player's attention to the game.

  Feature B2. The destination specifying means executes the specific processing corresponding to the switching target result before the special information that is the switching target result is the target of the grant determination. The gaming machine according to Feature B1, which is characterized.

  According to the feature B2, the specific process corresponding to the switching target result is executed before the special information that is the switching target result is the target of the determination to be given. This makes it possible to execute a specific process based on the result of the switching target at an early timing.

  Feature B3. The destination specifying means executes the specific process with a predetermined number of the special information as an upper limit, and the special information that is the target of the specific process when the switching target result is obtained. The gaming machine according to feature B1 or B2, characterized in that

  According to the feature B3, when the switching target result is obtained, it is possible to increase the number of special information to be subjected to specific processing. By varying the number of the hold information that is the target of the specific process according to the result of the specific process, it is possible to diversify the pattern when the specific process is executed. As a result, the player can play a game paying attention to the number of special information to be subjected to a specific process, and can increase the degree of attention to the game.

  Feature B4. The special notification control means includes the special notification based on the specific processing by the destination specifying means until the switching target result is obtained, and the specific processing by the destination specifying means after the switching target result is obtained. The gaming machine according to the feature B3, wherein the special notification based on is executed in a distinguishable manner.

  According to the feature B4, by grasping the special notification, the player can grasp whether or not the special information to be subjected to the specific processing by the first specifying unit is increasing. Thereby, the special notification based on the specific process by the destination specifying means until the switching target result is obtained, and the special notification based on the specific process by the destination specifying means after the switching target result is executed, respectively. This makes it possible for the player to grasp this fact.

  Feature B5. The special notification control means includes the special notification based on the specific processing by the destination specifying means until the switching target result is obtained, and the specific processing by the destination specifying means after the switching target result is obtained. The gaming machine according to the feature B4, wherein the special notification based on each is executed as a common notification mode.

  According to the feature B5, the special notification based on the specific process by the destination specifying unit until the switching target result is obtained and the special notification based on the specific process by the destination specifying unit after the switching target result is obtained are common. It is a notification mode. Thereby, in order to perform special alerting | reporting, the information amount memorize | stored previously can be reduced.

  When the notification mode of the special notification is common, the special notification based on the specific processing by the destination specifying means until the switching target result is obtained, and the specific processing by the destination specifying means after the switching target result is obtained. What is necessary is just to make the timing which performs special alerting differ, for example with special alerting based on.

Feature B6. As the special notification, a first special notification and a second special notification are set,
When the special notification is executed, each of the first special notification and the second special notification is executed,
The special notification control means includes
First special notification control means for executing the first special notification (special light emission processing by the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 is executed) according to the timing at which the predetermined special information is subject to the determination of application by the application determination unit. Function)
A second special notification control means (a function for executing a special display process by the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) for executing the second special notification;
With
The first special notification control means determines the content of the first special notification regardless of the timing at which the predetermined special information is subject to the determination of grant by the grant determination means.
The second special notification control unit is configured to determine the content of the second special notification based on a timing at which the predetermined special information is a target of the determination of the grant by the grant determination unit. A gaming machine according to B4 or B5.

  According to the feature B6, the content of the first special notification is determined regardless of the timing at which the special information is subject to determination. The content of the second special notification is determined according to the timing at which the special information is subject to grant determination.

  By determining the content of the first special notification regardless of the timing at which the special information is subject to grant determination, the content of the first special alert can be made common regardless of the timing at which the special information is subject to grant determination. . As a result, the amount of information related to the execution of the first special notification can be reduced. In addition, since the timing at which the first special notification is executed corresponds to the timing at which the determination is made, by understanding the timing at which the first special notification is executed, any special information can be notified. The player can grasp whether there is.

  Here, even if the first special notification is executed, it is conceivable that the player cannot understand at which timing the first special notification is executed. In this regard, in this feature, the second special notification is executed in which the content differs depending on the timing at which the special information is to be given. Thereby, by grasping the contents of the second special notice, the player can grasp which special information the special notice corresponds to.

Feature B7. The switching target result is that the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is determined as the grant correspondence result,
The special notification control unit is configured to execute the special notification when a result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit is the grant correspondence result, and further, the grant by the specific process by the destination specifying unit. After it is specified that the special information corresponding to the correspondence result is stored, it is specified that the special information corresponding to the assignment correspondence result is stored again by the specific processing by the destination specifying unit. The special notification corresponding to the special information identified as corresponding to the grant correspondence result later corresponds to the special information previously identified as corresponding to the grant correspondence result. The gaming machine according to any one of features B3 to B6, characterized in that the probability of being executed is lower than that of the special notification.

  According to the feature B7, the special notification is executed when the result of the grant determination by the grant determining unit is the grant correspondence result. In addition, the special notification based on the special information identified as corresponding to the grant response result later than the special notification based on the special information identified as corresponding to the grant response result earlier by the destination specifying means. The probability of being executed is lower. Thereby, it is possible to increase the frequency at which the special notification based on the special information previously identified as corresponding to the assignment correspondence result is executed. In addition, there is an effect that the player can expect that the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence result is stored even if the special notification based on the special information identified as corresponding to the grant correspondence result is not executed later. It is done.

  Here, the special notification regarding the special information identified as corresponding to the grant correspondence result later is executed when the special information previously identified as corresponding to the grant correspondence result is the subject of the grant determination. Can be done. For this reason, even if the probability that the special notification about the special information identified later corresponding to the assignment correspondence result is executed is set to be low, an opportunity to execute the special notification about the special information is provided. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the frequency at which the special notification related to the special information is executed from becoming extremely low.

Feature B8. The grant determination means is configured to change a probability that the grant determination result becomes the grant correspondence result until the grant determination is performed a specific number of times after the grant determination result becomes the grant correspondence result. ,
The switching target result is that the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is determined as the grant correspondence result,
In the case where it is determined that the result of the specific process corresponds to the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence result, the destination specifying unit further determines that the grant determination by the grant determination unit is the specific number of times in view of the special information. The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics B3 to B7, wherein the specific process is executed on the special information that is a target of the determination of the grant before the execution.

  According to the feature B8, after the result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit becomes the grant correspondence result, the probability of the grant correspondence result is changed until a predetermined number of grant determinations are executed. If the result of the specific processing by the first specifying means corresponds to the grant correspondence result, the special subject to the grant judgment before the special number of grant judgment is executed in view of the special information corresponding to the particular result Specific processing is performed on the information. In other words, when it is specified that the special information corresponding to the assignment correspondence result is stored by the first specifying means, the probability that the special correspondence information is subject to the grant determination and then the probability of the grant correspondence result is changed The special information that is the target of the specific process by the pre-specifying unit increases so that the specific process by the pre-specifying unit is executed for the special information that is the target of the grant determination.

  When the probability of the assignment correspondence result is changed, it is considered that the player plays the game paying attention to the result of the assignment determination. In this regard, this feature can increase the chance that special notification is executed for special information that increases the degree of attention of the player to the game. Thereby, it becomes possible to raise the player's attention to the special notification.

Feature B9. The grant determination means changes the probability of the grant correspondence result when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
In the case where the result of the specific process corresponds to the establishment of the predetermined condition, the destination specifying unit responds to a change in the probability that the subsequent specific process becomes the grant correspondence result. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B8, wherein the gaming machine is executed.

  According to the feature B9, when the result of the specific process by the first specifying unit corresponds to the establishment of a predetermined condition corresponding to the change in the probability of being the assignment correspondence result, the probability of being the assignment correspondence result is changed. A specific process is performed by the corresponding point specifying means. Thereby, even if the probability of the assignment correspondence result may be changed, the specific process by the first specifying unit can be executed satisfactorily.

Feature B10. As the special notification, when executed, a plurality of types with different expectations corresponding to the special correspondence result corresponding to the grant correspondence result are set,
The special notification control means determines that the special information corresponding to the assignment correspondence result is stored by the specific processing by the destination specifying means, and then again performs the specific processing by the destination specifying means. When it is specified that the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence result is stored, the special notification corresponding to the special information specified later as corresponding to the grant correspondence result is first described above. The degree of expectation corresponding to the provision correspondence result is lower than that of the special notification corresponding to the special information identified as corresponding to the provision correspondence result. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B9.

  According to the feature B10, the special notification is executed when the result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit is the grant correspondence result. In addition, the special notification based on the special information identified as corresponding to the grant response result later than the special notification based on the special information identified as corresponding to the grant response result earlier by the destination specifying means. The one with the lower expectation degree corresponding to the assignment correspondence result is executed. As a result, the special notification based on the special information previously identified as corresponding to the grant correspondence result was supported rather than the special notification based on the special information identified as corresponding to the grant correspondence result later. It is possible to increase the player's attention to the special information.

  Here, the special notification regarding the special information identified as corresponding to the grant correspondence result later is executed when the special information previously identified as corresponding to the grant correspondence result is the subject of the grant determination. Can be done. For this reason, the special notification regarding the special information identified as corresponding to the grant correspondence result later is selected even if the low expectation level corresponding to the grant correspondence result is selected. Is provided, the player's attention to the special information can be increased later.

  Feature B11. The special notification control means responds to the grant correspondence result after the special information identified as corresponding to the grant correspondence result is subjected to grant determination by the grant determination means. When the special notification corresponding to the special information identified as being performed is performed, the degree of expectation corresponding to the grant correspondence result is higher than that of the special notification performed immediately before the special information The gaming machine according to Feature B10, wherein:

  According to the feature B11, when the special notification corresponding to the special information identified later as corresponding to the assignment correspondence result is executed again, it corresponds to the assignment correspondence result rather than the special notification executed previously. The one with high expectation is executed. Thereby, a player's attention degree with respect to the special information specified as corresponding to a provision correspondence result later can be raised. As a result, when the special notification corresponding to the special information identified as corresponding to the grant correspondence result is executed, the player pays attention to the special notification, and the special information is subject to the grant determination. When it becomes, the player pays attention to the special information identified as corresponding to the assignment correspondence result later. Therefore, when multiple special notifications are executed, it is possible to cause the player to expect that the special information that is subject to the grant determination corresponds to the grant determination result.

  As described above, the special notification corresponding to the special correspondence information is executed after the special notification corresponding to the special information identified as corresponding to the grant correspondence result is executed. It is possible to suppress the player's attention to the result of the assignment determination for the special information specified as being previously corresponding to the assignment correspondence result, and to reduce the player's attention level. As a result, when the special notification is executed a plurality of times, it is possible to suppress the player's attention level from becoming sufficiently high for one special notification (special notification executed first).

Feature C1. Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (entrance to each operation port 33, 34) (function of executing information acquisition processing in MPU 202 of main controller 81) When,
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
A determination is made as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to preset provision information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means In such a case, a grant determination unit (a function for executing the determination process in the variation start process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that sequentially performs the grant determination on the plurality of special information,
A privilege granting unit (main control) that grants a privilege to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit being the grant response result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. A function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the device 81),
A destination for identifying information that reflects a determination result when the special information acquired by the information acquisition unit is a target of the determination of grant at a timing before the special information is a target of the determination of grant Specifying means (function of executing confirmation processing for holding notice in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
The special notification based on the specifying result by the destination specifying means is notified at a timing before the special information that is the target to be specified by the destination specifying means becomes the target of the grant determination (symbol display device 41, special Special notification control means (round display start process and special effect round display process in the MPU 252 of the display control apparatus 212 of the first embodiment), which is executed by the display apparatus 48), the second embodiment A function of executing the variable display control process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 and the mid-variation process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 of the third embodiment),
In the notifying means or a specific notifying means different from the notifying means, after the change display of the pattern is started, the result corresponding to the result of the application determination by the application determining means is displayed and the display of the change of the pattern is terminated. Game time control means for controlling the notification means or specific notification means different from the notification means (function for executing game time control processing by the main control device 81),
With
The grant determination means includes a high probability grant determination means (function of executing the processing of step S703 in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81) and a low probability grant determination means (main If the MPU 202 of the control device 81 has a function of executing the process of step S702 and the result of the grant determination is the first grant correspondence result corresponding to the first grant information, When the grant determination is performed by the high-probability grant determination means after the grant determination, and the result of the grant determination is a second grant correspondence result corresponding to the second grant information, The grant determination by the low probability grant determination means is performed later,
The destination specifying means can specify which of the first grant information and the second grant information corresponds to the special information,
When the result of the grant determination is the first grant correspondence result, the game times control means finally displays the first grant picture or the combination of the first grant pictures as a result corresponding to the grant judgment result. And when the result of the grant determination is a second grant correspondence result, as a result corresponding to the grant decision result, the second grant pattern or a combination of the second grant patterns is finally stopped and displayed.
Further, it is specified that the special information corresponding to the assignment correspondence result is stored in the acquired information storage means by the destination specifying means, and the special information is again before the assignment determination target. When it is specified by the destination specifying means that the special information corresponding to the assignment correspondence result is stored in the acquired information storage means, the destination specifying means first specifies that it corresponds to the assignment correspondence result. When the special information is the target of the grant determination, regardless of whether the grant determination result is the first grant correspondence result or the second grant correspondence result, the first grant picture or the A gaming machine characterized in that a combination of first assigned pictures is finally stopped and displayed.

  According to the feature C1, the special notification according to the predetermined special information that is not the subject of the grant determination is executed by the notifying unit at a timing before the special information is the subject of the grant determination. is there. As a result, for the player, when special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result when the special information that is the target of the grant determination later becomes the target of the grant determination is determined according to the content of the special notification. The game of confirming or predicting the game is added and the game is diversified. As a result, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

  When it is specified that special information corresponding to a plurality of grant correspondence results is stored by the destination specifying means, among the plurality of special information, the special information that is subject to grant determination first is the subject of grant determination. In this case, regardless of whether the result is the first grant correspondence result or the second grant correspondence result, the first design or the combination of the first design is displayed as a final stop. As a result, it is possible to increase the frequency at which the first pattern or the combination of the first pattern is finally stopped and displayed. In this way, the number of times that the first pattern or the combination of the first pattern is finally stopped and displayed increases the interest of the game, or increases the willingness to continue the game because there are many opportunities to be given benefits. It is conceivable that the player's attention to the game can be increased.

  Further, since the second destination specifying means specifies that the special information corresponding to the grant information is stored, the special information identified as corresponding to the grant information by the first destination specifying means is given. In this state, the special information corresponding to the given information is already stored in the acquired information storage means. For this reason, even if the special information identified as corresponding to the grant information by the first destination identification means is the subject of grant determination, even if the first picture or the first picture combination is finally stopped and displayed, Then, it can suppress that the timing used as a provision determination result becomes late. Thereby, while increasing the frequency at which the first design or the combination of the first design is finally stopped and displayed, the second design or the combination of the second design when the first design or the combination of the first design is finally displayed is stopped. Superiority over the last stop display can be secured.

Feature D1. Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (entrance to each operation port 33, 34) (function of executing information acquisition processing in MPU 202 of main controller 81) When,
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
A determination is made as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to preset provision information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means In such a case, a grant determination unit (a function for executing the determination process in the variation start process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that sequentially performs the grant determination on the plurality of special information,
A privilege granting unit (main control) that grants a privilege to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit being the grant response result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. A function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the device 81),
A destination for identifying information that reflects a determination result when the special information acquired by the information acquisition unit is a target of the determination of grant at a timing before the special information is a target of the determination of grant Specifying means (function of executing confirmation processing for holding notice in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
The special notification based on the specifying result by the destination specifying means is notified at a timing before the special information that is the target to be specified by the destination specifying means becomes the target of the grant determination (symbol display device 41, special Special notification control means (function to execute round display start processing and special effect in-round display processing in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) to be executed by the display device 48);
With
The special notification control means is the second special information as the special information and the second special information to be given by the grant judging means after the first special information is given by the grant judging means. When executing the special notification for the special information, the content of the special notification corresponding to the second special information is determined according to the content of the special notification corresponding to the first special information. A gaming machine characterized by being.

  According to the feature D1, the special notification according to the predetermined special information that is not subject to the grant determination is executed by the notifying unit at a timing before the special information is subject to the grant determination. is there. As a result, for the player, when special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result when the special information that is the target of the grant determination later becomes the target of the grant determination is determined according to the content of the special notification. The game of confirming or predicting the game is added and the game is diversified. As a result, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

  Further, when the special notification for the second special information is executed after the special notification for the first special information is executed, the second special information is changed according to the content of the special notification for the first special information that has been executed. The content of the corresponding special notification is determined. Thereby, when the special alerting | reporting with respect to 1st special information is performed, a player pays attention to the content. As a result, the player's attention to the game can be increased.

  Furthermore, after the special notification corresponding to the first special information is executed, until the special notification corresponding to the second special information is executed, the player is assumed to maintain the state of grasping the content. As a result, the period during which the player is paying attention to the contents of the special notification can be lengthened.

Feature E1. Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
A determination is made as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to preset provision information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means In some cases, the grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination on the plurality of special information in a predetermined order (a function for executing the pass / fail determination process in the variation start process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
The game state is shifted to a specific game state advantageous to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. Transition means (function to execute a game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
In a gaming machine equipped with
Information reflecting the determination result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means is the target of the determination of grant at a timing prior to the predetermined special information being the target of the determination of grant. A destination specifying means for specifying (a function of executing a confirmation process for holding notice by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in the sixth embodiment);
The special notification reflecting the result of specification by the destination specifying means is performed by the notification means (symbol display device 41) at a timing before the predetermined special information that has been specified by the destination specifying means becomes the target of the grant determination. ) To execute the special notification control means (steps S3106 to S3108 by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in the sixth embodiment and round display start processing in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212). Function)
With
The special notification control means performs the special notification on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means during the specific gaming state, and sets an execution period for executing the special notification for the special information. The information is made different in correspondence with the order of the grant determination after the end of the specific gaming state, and the special information subject to the special notification in each execution period corresponds to the grant response result. Specific control means for changing the execution frequency of the special notification that becomes the execution mode of the special notification or the predetermined notification mode depending on whether or not it exists (function of executing the round display start process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 in the sixth embodiment) )
As the specific gaming state, a high-expected specific gaming state that proceeds in a situation where the special information that becomes the grant correspondence result in the grant determination executed after the end of the specific gaming state can be relatively increased, and a relative There is a specific game state with low expectation that progresses in a situation that can be reduced in number,
The special notification during the specific game state by the specific control means is executed in the specific game state with the high expectation level, but is not executed in the specific game state with the low expectation level.

  According to the characteristic E1, the special notification according to the predetermined special information that is not the subject of the grant determination is executed by the notifying unit at a timing before the special information is the subject of the grant determination. is there. As a result, for the player, when special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result when the special information that is the target of the grant determination later becomes the target of the grant determination is determined according to the content of the special notification. The game of confirming or predicting the game is added and the game is diversified. As a result, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

  Further, the execution period during which the special notification is executed is different in correspondence with the order in which the special information is subjected to the determination of grant after the end of the specific gaming state. As a result, by grasping the execution period during which the special notification is executed, it is possible to specify the order in which the special information related to the special notification is to be given after the end of the specific gaming state.

  Furthermore, since the execution mode or execution frequency of the special notification differs depending on whether or not the special information corresponds to the assignment correspondence result, the special information can be provided by grasping the execution mode or execution frequency of the special notification. Whether or not it corresponds to the result can be specified. Thereby, the attention degree to special alerting | reporting can be raised.

  In such a configuration, in a specific game state with a low expectation degree that the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence result, the special information is difficult to perform special notification of the execution mode corresponding to the grant correspondence result. Or the execution frequency with which special alerting | reporting is performed does not change easily. For this reason, the special notification of the execution mode in which the special information does not correspond to the assignment correspondence result is repeatedly executed, or the execution frequency does not change, and the special notification is likely to be monotonous.

  On the other hand, according to this feature, the special notification by the special control means is executed only in the specific game state with high expectation, and is not executed in the specific game state with low expectation. A monotonous thing can be suppressed and the fall of the attention degree to the game resulting from the said special alert | report becoming monotonous can be suppressed.

Feature E2. As the mode of the grant determination, there are a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability that the determination result by the grant determination means becomes the grant correspondence result is relatively high and low,
The specific game state with high expectation is a specific game state in which the mode of the grant determination executed after the end of the specific game state is the high probability mode,
The gaming machine according to Feature E1, wherein the specific game state with low expectation is a specific game state in which the mode of the grant determination executed after the end of the specific game state is the low probability mode.

  According to the feature E2, in the high-probability mode specific gaming state, the probability that the special information becomes the grant correspondence result is relatively high, and therefore the special information that becomes the grant correspondence result in the grant determination can be relatively large. On the other hand, in the specific game state for the low probability mode, since the probability that the special information becomes the grant correspondence result is relatively low, the special information that becomes the grant correspondence result in the grant determination can be relatively low.

  In such a configuration, the special notification by the special control means is executed only in the specific game state for the high probability mode and is not executed in the specific game state for the low probability mode, so that the effect of the feature E1 can be achieved.

Feature E3. Based on the player's launch operation, a launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A starting ball entry portion (each of the operation ports 33 and 34) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
With
In the starting entrance part,
A first starting entrance (upper working port 33);
A second starting ball entrance (lower working port 34) that can be switched between an open state and a closed state;
Is included,
The information acquisition means acquires the special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered one of the start ball entering sections as the acquisition condition,
An opening / closing control means (a function for executing the electric power support process) for controlling the second starting entrance part so that the opening / closing operation is performed in a predetermined operation mode in the second starting entrance part;
As the operation modes, there are a high expectation mode (high frequency support mode) and a low expectation mode (low frequency support mode) in which the degree of expectation of entering the second starting entrance portion is relatively high or low. ,
The high expectation specific game state is a specific game state when the operation mode is the high expectation mode and the state is shifted to the specific game state,
The gaming machine according to Feature E1, wherein the specific game state with low expectation is a specific game state when the operation mode is the low expectation mode and transitions to the specific game state.

  According to the feature E3, it is assumed that the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage unit in the low expectation aspect is smaller than that in the high expectation aspect. As a result, when the operation mode shifts to the specific game state in a situation where the mode of low expectation is the mode, it is expected that the number of special information to be specified by the first specifying means is small, and the special result corresponding to the grant corresponding to that amount is expected. Information can be less. Therefore, it can be said that the specific game state in the case where the operation mode is the low expectation mode and the game state is shifted to the specific game state is the low expectation specific game state.

  On the other hand, in the situation where the operation mode is a high expectation mode, it is expected that the number of special information to be specified by the first specifying means is relatively large, and the corresponding correspondence result There can be a lot of special information. Thereby, it can be said that the specific game state in the case where the operation mode is the high expectation mode and the game state is shifted to the specific game state is the high expectation specific game state.

Feature E4. The acquired information storage means includes
First acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means when the game ball enters the first starting entrance part with the first prescribed number as the upper limit (first result display part hold) Area Ra)
Second acquisition information storage means (second result display section on-hold) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means when the game ball enters the second starting entrance part with the second prescribed number as an upper limit Area Rb)
With
The feature determination means according to claim E3, wherein the assignment determination means performs the assignment determination with respect to each of the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means or the second acquisition information storage means. Game machines.

  According to the feature E4, since the first prescribed number and the second prescribed number are set separately, the maximum number of special information acquired in the situation where the second starting ball-in part is in an open state, The maximum number of special information acquired in the situation where the second starting entrance part is in a closed state will be substantially different. This clearly causes a difference in the number of special information when shifting to the specific gaming state.

  On the other hand, by applying the configuration such as the feature E1, the special notification can be executed only when the special notification can be suitably performed.

Feature E5. Non-special notification executing means for executing a series of non-special notifications different from the special notification over a specific number of execution periods (steps in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) during the low-expected specific gaming state. S3302 to step S3305)
The feature number E3 or feature feature E4 is characterized in that the specific number is set to be larger than an expected number that is expected to be acquired by the information acquisition means in a situation where the operation mode is the low expectation mode. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to feature E5, in a specific game state with a low expectation level, instead of special notification, a series of non-special notifications are executed to suppress a decrease in attention to a game that may be caused by the absence of special notification. can do.

  In addition, since the non-special notification is a series of operations performed over a specific number of execution periods, the non-special notification is continuous over a long period that cannot be set by special notification performed individually for each execution period. The production can be set as non-special notification. Thereby, the freedom degree of a non-special alert | report can be raised and the attention degree to a non-special alert | report can be raised.

  In particular, since the specific number is set to be larger than the expected number, the execution period in which non-special notification is executed is longer than the execution period in which special notification related to special information for the expected number is performed. Thereby, the freedom degree of non-special alert | report can be raised more suitably.

  Here, according to the feature E1 or the like, since the special notification is not executed in the specific game state with low expectation, the period for performing the special notification in the specific game state can be used as the period for performing the non-special notification. it can. Thereby, a specific number of execution periods longer than the expected number of execution periods can be secured.

  According to the relationship with the feature E4, a configuration in which “the expected number is the first specified number” can be considered.

Feature E6. There is provided an effect execution means (symbol display device 41) which has a display area and performs a predetermined effect in the display area during the specific gaming state,
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, wherein the specific control means performs the special notification by changing a progress of an effect displayed in the display area.

  According to the feature E6, the special notification is performed when the progress of the effect displayed in the display area is different. Thereby, if attention is paid to the predetermined effect performed during the specific game state, the special notification is naturally visually recognized. Therefore, the inconvenience that the special notification is missed can be avoided.

  Further, since the special notification is not performed in the specific game state with a low expectation level, a predetermined effect is performed in the display area. Thereby, in a specific game state with a low expectation level, a predetermined effect can be suitably shown. Therefore, the predetermined effect and the special notification can be suitably executed, and the degree of attention to the game to the specific game state can be further increased.

Feature E7. Based on the player's launch operation, a launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
Variable pitching means (variable winning device 32) provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state and a closed state;
Variable entry control means (a function for executing a large winning opening opening / closing process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for executing variable entry control for switching to the closed state after the variable entry means is in the open state;
With
In the specific game state, a round game in which the variable pitch control is continued until a predetermined end condition is satisfied is executed over a plurality of specific times (8 times).
The game machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, wherein an execution period for executing the special notification corresponds to a period for executing a round game.

  According to the feature E7, it is possible to grasp the execution period during which the special notification is performed by grasping the round game. Thereby, when special notification is performed, it becomes easy to grasp in which execution period the special notification is performed. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp the order in which the grant determination is performed for the special information related to the special notification, and it is possible to closely associate the round game and the special notification.

Feature F1. Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
A determination is made as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to preset provision information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means In some cases, the grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination on the plurality of special information in a predetermined order (a function for executing the pass / fail determination process in the variation start process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
The game state is shifted to a specific game state advantageous to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. Transition means (function to execute a game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
In a gaming machine equipped with
Information reflecting the determination result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means is the target of the determination of grant at a timing prior to the predetermined special information being the target of the determination of grant. A destination identifying means for identifying (a function for executing a confirmation process for holding notice by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in the seventh embodiment);
The special notification reflecting the result of specification by the destination specifying means is performed by the notification means (symbol display device 41) at a timing before the predetermined special information that has been specified by the destination specifying means becomes the target of the grant determination. ) And a special notification control means (function for executing round effect determination processing by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 and round display start processing by the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) in the seventh embodiment. ,
With
The special notification control means performs the special notification on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means during the specific gaming state, and sets an execution period for executing the special notification for the special information. The information is made different in correspondence with the order of the grant determination after the end of the specific gaming state, and the special information subject to the special notification in each execution period corresponds to the grant response result. Specific control means for varying the execution frequency of the special notification or the execution frequency of the special notification to be a predetermined notification mode depending on whether or not there is a first hold in the round display start process of the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 in the seventh embodiment With a function to execute a notice effect)
The special notification during the specific gaming state by the specific control means is when the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means is greater than a predetermined specific number in the situation of shifting to the specific gaming state However, the game machine is not executed when the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means is less than or equal to the specific number in the situation of shifting to the specific game state.

  According to the feature F1, the special notification according to the predetermined special information that is not the subject of the grant determination is executed by the notifying unit at a timing before the special information is the subject of the grant determination. is there. As a result, for the player, when special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result when the special information that is the target of the grant determination later becomes the target of the grant determination is determined according to the content of the special notification. The game of confirming or predicting the game is added and the game is diversified. As a result, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

  Further, the execution period during which the special notification is executed is different in correspondence with the order in which the special information is subjected to the determination of grant after the end of the specific gaming state. As a result, by grasping the execution period during which the special notification is executed, it is possible to specify the order in which the special information related to the special notification is to be given after the end of the specific gaming state.

  Furthermore, since the execution mode or execution frequency of the special notification differs depending on whether or not the special information corresponds to the assignment correspondence result, the special information can be provided by grasping the execution mode or execution frequency of the special notification. Whether or not it corresponds to the result can be specified. Thereby, the attention degree to special alerting | reporting can be raised.

  In such a configuration, when the number of special information acquired in the situation of shifting to the specific gaming state is small, the frequency of special notification is reduced, and the degree of expectation that special information corresponding to the grant correspondence result exists Becomes lower. For this reason, the frequency with which special alerting | reporting is performed may fall, and the problem that special alerting | reporting will become monotonous may arise.

  On the other hand, according to this feature, the special notification by the special control means is executed only when the number of special information acquired in the situation of shifting to the specific gaming state is greater than the specific number, and the specific number or less. In such a case, since it is not executed, it is possible to avoid the above inconvenience and to suppress a decrease in the degree of attention to the game.

Feature F2. The specific control means is a first specific control means,
In the specific gaming state, the special notification control means is in the specific gaming state when the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means is 1 or more and not more than the specific number in the situation of shifting to the specific gaming state. Second specific control means for performing the special notification related to one special information over a plurality of execution periods (execution of the second hold notice effect in the round display start process of the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 in the seventh embodiment) The gaming machine according to Feature F1, further comprising:

  According to the feature F2, when the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means is 1 or more and less than the specific number in the situation of shifting to the specific gaming state, the special notification by the second specific control means Is done. The execution period of the special notification by the second specific control means is set longer than the execution period of the special notification by the first specific control means. Thereby, even if there is little special information, the period during which special alerting | reporting is performed can be lengthened, and the attention degree to a game can be raised.

  In addition, since the execution period of the special notification by the second specific control unit is set to be long, an execution mode that requires a relatively long period of time for the story to progress is executed by the second specific control unit. It becomes possible to set to an aspect. Thereby, the freedom degree of the execution aspect of the special alerting | reporting by a 2nd specific control means can be raised, and the attention degree to the special alerting | reporting by a 2nd specific control means can be raised.

  Feature F3. The special notification control means does not perform the special notification when the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is 0 in the situation of shifting to the specific gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature F1 and the feature F2.

  According to the feature F3, when there is no special information stored in the acquired information storage unit in the situation of shifting to the specific gaming state, the special notification is not executed. Thereby, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the special notification is executed even though the special information is not stored.

  Feature F4. When the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is equal to or less than the specific number in the situation of transitioning to the specific gaming state, a series of non-special notifications different from the special notification is made more than the specific number. Non-special notification execution means (a function for executing a normal round effect in the round display start process of the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 in the seventh embodiment) executed over a large specified number of execution periods The gaming machine according to Feature F1, characterized by:

  According to feature F4, when the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means is less than or equal to the specific number in the situation of transition to the specific gaming state, a series of non-special notifications are executed instead of the special notification. It is possible to suppress a decrease in attention to the game that may be caused by the absence of special notification.

  In addition, since the non-special notification is a series of events performed over a specified number of execution periods, the non-special notification is not performed for a long period of time that cannot be set by the special notification performed individually for each execution period. It can be set as a special notification. Thereby, the freedom degree of a non-special alert | report can be raised and the attention degree to a non-special alert | report can be raised.

  In particular, since the specified number is set to be larger than the specific number, the execution period in which the non-special notification is executed is longer than the execution period in which the special notification related to the specific number of special information is performed. Thereby, the freedom degree of non-special alert | report can be raised more suitably.

  Here, according to the feature F1, since the special notification is not executed if the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means is equal to or less than the specific number in the situation of shifting to the specific gaming state, the special notification is performed in the specific gaming state. The period for performing the notification can be used as a period for performing the non-special notification. Thereby, a specified number of execution periods longer than the specific number of execution periods can be secured.

  Note that this feature may be applied to the feature F2 or the feature F3. In this case, “when the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is equal to or less than the specific number in the situation of shifting to the specific gaming state” is referred to as “the acquisition information in the situation of shifting to the specific gaming state. It is replaced with “when the number of the special information stored in the storage means is 0”.

Feature F5. There is provided an effect execution means (symbol display device 41) which has a display area and performs a predetermined effect in the display area during the specific gaming state,
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4, wherein the specific control unit performs the special notification by changing a progress of an effect displayed in the display area.

  According to the feature F5, the special notification is performed when the progress of the effect displayed in the display area is different. Thereby, if attention is paid to the predetermined effect performed during the specific game state, the special notification is naturally visually recognized. Therefore, the inconvenience that the special notification is missed can be avoided.

  Further, according to the relationship with the feature F4, if the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means is equal to or less than the specific number in the situation of shifting to the specific game state, a predetermined effect is performed in the display area. Thereby, a predetermined effect can be shown suitably. Therefore, the predetermined effect and the special notification can be suitably executed, and the degree of attention to the game to the specific game state can be further increased.

Feature F6. Based on the player's launch operation, a launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
Variable pitching means (variable winning device 32) provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state and a closed state;
Variable entry control means (a function for executing a large winning opening opening / closing process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for executing variable entry control for switching to the closed state after the variable entry means is in the open state;
With
In the specific game state, a round game in which the variable pitch control is continued until a predetermined end condition is satisfied is executed over a plurality of specific times (8 times).
The game machine according to any one of features F1 to F5, wherein an execution period for executing the special notification corresponds to a period for executing a round game.

  According to the feature F6, it is possible to grasp the execution period during which the special notification is performed by grasping the round game. Thereby, when special notification is performed, it becomes easy to grasp in which execution period the special notification is performed. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp the order in which the grant determination is performed for the special information related to the special notification, and it is possible to closely associate the round game and the special notification.

Feature G1. Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Special information acquired by the information acquisition means is acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 301 in the eighth embodiment) for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a plurality of numbers,
A determination is made as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to preset provision information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means In such a case, a grant determination unit (a function for executing the determination process in the variation start process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that sequentially performs the grant determination on the plurality of special information,
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result that the special information to be judged corresponds to the grant information, the privilege grant means for granting a privilege to the player ( A function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
In a gaming machine equipped with
Information reflecting the determination result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means is the target of the determination of grant at a timing prior to the predetermined special information being the target of the determination of grant. A destination identifying means for identifying (a function for executing a confirmation process for holding notice by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in the eighth embodiment);
The special notification reflecting the result of specification by the destination specifying means is performed by the notification means (symbol display device 41) at a timing before the predetermined special information that has been specified by the destination specifying means becomes the target of the grant determination. ) Special notification control means (function to execute the round effect execution processing of the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 in the eighth embodiment),
With
The special notification control means performs the special notification for the special information stored in the acquired information storage means during a specific period (during a round game), and sets an execution period for executing the special notification for the special information. Special control means (special control means (function to execute the hold notice effect determination process of the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) for making the special information different in correspondence with the digestion order to be subject to the grant determination after the end of the specific period,
The specific control means is
The special notification about the special information of the specific order is completed before the execution period of the predetermined order in the one specific period, and the special information of the specific order If the special information for which the order of execution of the special notification is later is special information and the digest information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the special information of the predetermined order is stored. While performing the special notification about information in the execution period of the predetermined order,
In a case where a predetermined irregular condition is satisfied, in the execution period of the predetermined order, the special notification about the special information of the order in which the digestion order is different from the predetermined order is executed. A gaming machine characterized by being.

  According to the characteristic G1, the special notification according to the predetermined special information that is not the target of the grant determination is executed by the notification unit at a timing before the special information is the target of the grant determination. is there. As a result, for the player, when special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result when the special information that is the target of the grant determination later becomes the target of the grant determination is determined according to the content of the special notification. The game of confirming or predicting the game is added and the game is diversified. As a result, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

  In addition, the execution period in which the special notification is executed is different in correspondence with the digestion order in which the special information is subject to determination after the end of the specific period. Thereby, by grasping the execution period during which the special notification is executed, it is possible to specify the number of the determination for granting the special information related to the special notification after the end of the specific period.

  In such a configuration, when special information whose digestion order is the predetermined order is stored in the acquired information storage means before the execution period of the predetermined order during the specific period, the special information of the predetermined order is stored. A special notification is executed for. On the other hand, when the irregular condition is satisfied, the special notification is executed for the special information of the order in which the digestion order is different from the predetermined order in the execution period of the predetermined order. Thereby, even if the irregular condition is satisfied, the special notification can be executed in correspondence with the irregular condition, so that the special notification corresponding to the digestion order can be executed in a preferable mode.

  In addition, when the said privilege provision means is the structure which is a transfer means which transfers a game state to the specific game state advantageous to a player, the said specific period is corresponded to the period which is the said specific game state.

  Feature G2. The specific control means is for the digestion order to execute the special notification first from the special information, and when the special notification in the execution period of the predetermined order is performed, the digestion order is the When the special notification about the special information of the order before the predetermined order is not executed, the special notification about the special information of the previous order is executed in the execution period of the predetermined order The gaming machine according to Feature G1, characterized in that:

  According to the feature G2, if special information is newly acquired during a specific period, special notification in an order before the predetermined order is performed when the special notification is performed in the execution period of the predetermined order. Even when the situation where the special notification is not executed for the information occurs, the special notification is executed for the newly acquired special information. Thereby, the frequency with which special alerting | reporting is performed can be raised and the attention degree to special alerting | reporting can be raised.

Feature G3. The specific control means includes
Grasping means for grasping the special information whose digestion order is the earliest among the special information that is not yet the execution target of the special notification in the specific period this time when executing the special notification in each execution period (The function of executing the process of step S3901 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212);
Execution means for executing the special notification about the earliest special information grasped by the grasping means in each execution period (a function of executing the processing of steps S3902 to 3908 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212);
The gaming machine according to Feature G2, further comprising:

  According to the feature G3, in each execution period, the special information with the earliest digestion order is selected as the execution target of the special notification among the special information that is not the execution target of the special notification. Thereby, when many special information is memorize | stored at the start timing of a specific period, while being able to perform special alerting | reporting in the digestion order of each special information, special information was newly acquired during the specific period In such a case, special notification can also be performed in accordance with the digestion order for the newly acquired special information.

Feature G4. The execution mode of the special notification is set in a plurality of types with different expectation levels as the grant correspondence results,
In the execution period of the situation where the special information on which the special notification is to be executed is not stored in the acquired information storage unit, the specific control unit is an execution mode having a low degree of expectation as a result of the assignment correspondence. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3, wherein a special notification (fifth hold notice effect) is executed.

  According to the feature G4, in the execution period in which the special information to be subjected to special notification is not stored, the special notification in the execution mode with a relatively low degree of expectation is executed. Thus, if special information is newly acquired during a specific period and special notification is executed for the newly acquired special information, the content of the special notification is performed in a situation where no special information is stored. It is possible to avoid the disadvantage that the degree of expectation is lower than the content of the special notice and the willingness to play is reduced.

  Feature G5. When the special notification is executed in the execution period, the specific control unit is in a state corresponding to the digestion order information of the special information that is the execution target of the special notification even after the execution period. Any of the features G1 to G4, comprising post-execution notification means (a function of displaying the pending notice result pattern Pb in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) for causing the notification means to notify the special notification information. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature G5, after the special notification is executed, the special notification information is notified after the execution period. Thereby, the player can perform the subsequent game while grasping the contents of the special notification. Therefore, the subsequent game can be performed while the game result is predicted based on the content of the special notification.

Feature G6. The execution mode of the special notification is set in a plurality of types with different expectation levels as the grant correspondence results,
The post-execution notification unit is configured to execute the non-acquisition special notification based on the fact that the special information to be subjected to the special notification is not stored in the acquisition information storage unit, and then the information acquisition unit. When the special information is newly acquired and the special notification is executed for the newly acquired special information, the special information newly acquired from the unacquired special notification information is notified. Switching to the information of the special notice about
In the execution period in which the special information on which the special notification is to be executed is not stored in the acquired information storage unit, the specific control unit provides the grant response result as the non-acquired special notification. The gaming machine according to Feature G5, which performs the special notification (fifth hold notice effect) in an execution mode with low expectation.

  According to the feature G6, when the special information is newly acquired after the unacquired special notification is executed, the newly acquired special information is used instead of the unacquired special notification information. Information on special notifications about is provided. Thereby, the information of the special alerting | reporting concerning the newly acquired special information can be grasped | ascertained.

  In such a configuration, the non-acquired special notification execution mode is relatively low. As a result, when the special notification is executed for the newly acquired special information after the unacquired special notification is executed, the content of the special notification is higher than the unacquired special notification content. Therefore, the disadvantage that the willingness to play is reduced can be avoided.

Feature G7. The specific control means is for the digestion order to execute the special notification first from the special information, and when the special notification in the execution period of the predetermined order is performed, the digestion order is the When the special notification about the special information of the order before the predetermined order is not executed, the special notification about the special information of the previous order is executed in the execution period of the predetermined order Is what
Furthermore, the special information is acquired by the information acquisition means during the specific period, so that even if the special notification is executed in the last execution period among the execution periods, the acquisition information storage means is still in the acquisition information storage means. Any one of the characteristics G1 to G6 is characterized in that when the special information that is not the subject of the special notification remains, the special notification is not executed for the remaining special information. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature G7, it is possible to execute special notification corresponding to the digest order of special information that is the target of special notification in each execution period, and associate one special information with one execution period. Special notification can be performed in the state.

  In addition, special information that is not a target for executing special notification is expected to be stored in the next specific period because the digestion order becomes special information later. Thereby, even if it is not the target of special notification in the current specific period, there is an opportunity to be the target of special notification in the next specific period, so the opportunity to execute the special notification is secured.

  Feature G8. When the special notification is executed, the specific control unit notifies the notification unit of how many times the special information that is the target of the special notification is the target of the grant determination after the end of the specific period. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G7, characterized in that:

  According to the feature G8, when the special notification is performed, the special information that is the target of the special notification is notified of the number of the target for the determination of the grant after the end of the specific period. Can be closely associated with the special information subject to the special notification.

  In particular, when the configuration of the feature G1 is applied, depending on the acquisition timing of the special information during the specific period, a special notification may be performed on the special information that does not correspond to the execution timing at the execution timing. For this reason, by grasping the execution timing, it may be unclear how many times the special notification this time is about the special information that is the target of the grant determination after the end of the specific period.

  On the other hand, according to this feature, when special notification is executed, how many times the special information that is the target of the special notification is the target of the grant determination after the end of the specific period Therefore, the above inconvenience can be avoided.

Feature G9. Based on the player's launch operation, a launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
Variable pitching means (variable winning device 32) provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state and a closed state;
Variable entry control means (a function for executing a large winning opening opening / closing process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for executing variable entry control for switching to the closed state after the variable entry means is in the open state;
With
The privilege giving means changes the gaming state to a specific gaming state in which the round game in which the variable pitch control is continued until a predetermined end condition is satisfied is executed a plurality of specific times (8 times). Is a transition means to migrate,
The specific period is a period of the specific gaming state,
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G8, wherein the execution period is a period in which the round game is being performed.

  According to the feature G9, when a special notification is performed, by grasping in which round game the special notification is performed, what is the special information subject to the special notification after the end of the specific gaming state. It can be grasped whether it becomes the object of the second grant determination.

  In addition, when special information corresponding to a round game prior to the predetermined round game is newly acquired at the start timing of the predetermined round game, a special notification is issued for the newly acquired special information. Executed. Thereby, the execution frequency of special notification can be improved.

Feature G10. Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Special information acquired by the information acquisition means is acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 301 in the eighth embodiment) for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a plurality of numbers,
A determination is made as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to preset provision information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means In such a case, a grant determination unit (a function for executing the determination process in the variation start process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that sequentially performs the grant determination on the plurality of special information,
The game state is shifted to a specific game state advantageous to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. Transition means (function to execute a game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
In a gaming machine equipped with
Information reflecting the determination result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means is the target of the determination of grant at a timing prior to the predetermined special information being the target of the determination of grant. A destination identifying means for identifying (a function for executing a confirmation process for holding notice by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in the eighth embodiment);
A special notification reflecting the result of specification by the destination specifying means is in the specific gaming state and before the predetermined special information that has been specified by the destination specifying means becomes the subject of the grant determination. Special notification control means (function of executing round effect execution processing of the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 in the eighth embodiment) to be executed by the notification means (symbol display device 41) at the timing;
With
The special notification control means performs the special notification for the special information stored in the acquired information storage means during the specific gaming state, and the special information includes an execution period for executing the special notification for the special information. Provided with a specific control means (a function for executing a hold notice effect determination process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) that is made different in correspondence with the digestion order to be the subject of the determination of grant after the end of the specific gaming state,
The specific control means performs the special notification on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means at the timing when the specific gaming state is set, and the special information newly acquired during the specific gaming state. A gaming machine characterized in that a notification is executed.

  According to the feature G10, the special notification according to the predetermined special information that is not the subject of the grant determination is executed by the notifying unit at a timing before the special information is the subject of the grant determination. is there. As a result, for the player, when special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result when the special information that is the target of the grant determination later becomes the target of the grant determination is determined according to the content of the special notification. The game of confirming or predicting the game is added and the game is diversified. As a result, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

  In addition, the execution period during which the special notification is executed is different in correspondence with the digestion order in which the special information is subject to determination after the end of the specific gaming state. Thereby, by grasping the execution period during which the special notification is executed, it is possible to specify the number of the grant determination target after the end of the specific gaming state for the special information related to the special notification.

  In such a configuration, the special notification is executed not only for the special information already acquired at the timing of shifting to the specific gaming state, but also for the special information newly acquired during the specific gaming state. Thereby, the execution frequency with which special alerting | reporting is performed can be raised and the attention degree to a game can be raised.

Feature H1. Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 301) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit with a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
A determination is made as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to preset provision information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means In such a case, a grant determination unit (a function for executing the determination process in the variation start process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that sequentially performs the grant determination on the plurality of special information,
The game state is shifted to a specific game state advantageous to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. Transition means (function to execute a game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
In a gaming machine equipped with
The information reflecting the determination result when the special information acquired by the information acquisition unit is the target of the grant determination is specified at a timing before the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination. A destination specifying means (function for executing a confirmation process for holding notice by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in the eighth embodiment);
The special notification reflecting the result of specification by the destination specifying means is a timing before the predetermined special information that is specified by the destination specifying means during the specific gaming state becomes the target of the grant determination. Special notification control means (function of executing round effect execution processing in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 in the eighth embodiment) to be executed by the notification means (symbol display device 41) in FIG.
With
The special notification control means is the case where the special notification is executed with respect to predetermined special information during a predetermined specific gaming state, and the predetermined notification state is also determined during the next specific gaming state with respect to the predetermined specific gaming state. When the special notification is executed for the special information, the content of the special notification on the rear side is not limited to the lower limit means (the first restriction) so that the degree of expectation for the grant correspondence result is lower than the content of the special notification on the front side. A game machine having a function of executing the processing of steps S3910 to S3915 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 in the eighth embodiment.

  According to the feature H1, the special notification according to the predetermined special information that is not the subject of the grant determination is executed by the notifying unit at a timing before the special information becomes the subject of the grant determination. is there. As a result, for the player, when special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result when the special information that is the target of the grant determination later becomes the target of the grant determination is determined according to the content of the special notification. The game of confirming or predicting the game is added and the game is diversified. As a result, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

  In such a configuration, in a situation where the special notification is performed on the predetermined special information during the predetermined specific gaming state, the specific notification is performed on the predetermined special information in the next specific gaming state with respect to the predetermined specific gaming state. In such a case, the content of the special notification in the next specific gaming state is not expected to be lower than the content of the special notification executed in the predetermined specific gaming state. Thereby, when performing special notification about the same special information over a plurality of specific gaming states, the contents of the special notification on the back side are not demoted, or special notification is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the willingness to play that can be caused by the demotion.

Feature H2. The execution mode of the special notification is set in a plurality of types with different expectation levels as the grant correspondence results,
The lowering restricting means is the case where the special notification is executed with respect to predetermined special information during a predetermined specific gaming state, and the predetermined special gaming state is also performed during the next specific gaming state. When executing the special notification for information, the execution mode of the rear side special notification is to select an execution mode that has the expectation level higher than the execution mode performed in the front special notification. The gaming machine according to Feature H1, which is characterized.

  According to the feature H2, since multiple types of special notification execution modes having different degrees of expectation are provided, the special notification can be diversified. In addition, by grasping the execution mode of the special notification, the player can grasp the degree of expectation as to whether or not the special information targeted for the special notification corresponds to the grant response result. The degree of attention can be increased.

  In such a configuration, when performing special notification on predetermined special information targeted for special notification in the predetermined specific gaming state during the next specific gaming state with respect to the predetermined specific gaming state, the predetermined specific gaming state The special notification with the expected degree equal to or higher than the execution mode of the special notification executed in the above is executed. Thereby, the effect of the characteristic H1 can be show | played.

Feature H3. The special notification control means includes
When the special notification is executed in the specific gaming state, the special information that is the execution target of the special notification corresponds to the digestion order information that is the target of the grant determination after the specific gaming state ends. Information notification means (a function of executing the process of step S3806 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) that causes the notification means to notify the special notification information even after the specific gaming state;
When the specific gaming state is newly started or is started, the notification by the information notification unit is cleared and the special notification is newly started (step S4006 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212). The function of executing the process of step S4007),
The gaming machine according to Feature H1 or H2, characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature H3, the information of the special notification is notified even after the specific gaming state in which the special notification is executed. Thereby, the player can play the game after the specific gaming state while grasping the content of the special notification. Therefore, it is possible to play a game after the specific game state while predicting the game result based on the content of the special notification.

  In such a configuration, when the specific gaming state is newly started, the notification by the information notification unit is cleared and a new special notification is started. Thus, even if special notification is made on the special information that is the target of special notification in the previous specific gaming state in the newly started specific gaming state, what kind of content is the content of the special notification Can be expected, and the degree of attention to the game in the new specific game state can be increased.

Feature H4. The execution mode of the special notification is set in a plurality of types with different expectation levels as the grant correspondence results,
The lowering restricting means includes storage means (comparison storage area) for storing information capable of specifying an execution mode of the special notification executed for the predetermined special information in the predetermined specific gaming state. When the special notification is executed for the predetermined special information during the next specific gaming state, the special notification executed in the predetermined specific gaming state is based on the information stored in the storage means. It is a special notification that exceeds expectations.
When a special notification of an execution mode having a higher expectation level than the special notification executed in the predetermined specific gaming state is executed in the next specific gaming state, the information stored in the storage means is Any one of features H1 to H3, comprising update means for updating to information corresponding to the executed special notification (function of executing step S3915 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212). Game machines.

  According to the feature H4, when a special notification is performed during a predetermined specific gaming state, information for specifying the execution mode of the special notification is stored in the storage unit. Thereby, when executing a special notification in a next specific gaming state with respect to a predetermined specific gaming state, by grasping the information stored in the storage means, the execution mode of the previous special notification is grasped. be able to. And based on the grasping result, it is possible to execute a special notification with an expectation level equal to or higher than the previous time.

  In such a configuration, if the current special notification has a higher degree of expectation than the previously performed special notification, the information stored in the storage unit is rewritten with information corresponding to the current special notification. Thereby, the execution mode of the special notification executed this time in the next specific game state with respect to the current specific game state (next specific game state) can be grasped. Therefore, the execution mode of the special notification related to the same special information can gradually increase the degree of expectation every time the special notification is performed, thereby further improving the degree of attention to the special notification. it can.

Feature H5. The execution mode of the special notification is set in a plurality of types with different expectation levels as the grant correspondence results,
The lowering limiting means is
In the case where the special notification is executed for the predetermined special information during the next specific gaming state, selection means for selecting one of the special notifications of the plurality of types of execution modes (step in the display control device 212) The function of executing the processing of S3905 or step S3906),
Comparison means (MPU 252 of the display control device 212) for comparing the expected degree of special notification selected by the selection means with the expected degree of special notification executed for the predetermined special information during the predetermined specific gaming state. The function of executing the process of step S3913 in FIG.
With
Further, if the comparison result by the comparison means is a result in which the expectation degree of the special notification selected by the selection means is higher than the expectation degree of the special notification executed during the predetermined specific gaming state, the selection While performing special alerts selected by means,
If the comparison result by the comparison means is a result in which the expectation level of the special notification selected by the selection means is lower than the expectation level of the special notification executed during the predetermined specific gaming state, The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H4, wherein the special notification executed during the specific gaming state is executed again.

  According to the feature H5, if the special notification selected by the current selection unit has a higher expectation level than the previous special notification, the special notification selected by the current selection unit is executed as it is. On the other hand, if the special notification selected by the selection means this time has a lower expectation than the special notification executed last time, the special notification executed last time is executed again. Thereby, the execution mode of the special notification is not demoted.

Limiting means for limiting the number of the special information in which the execution mode of the special notification is a predetermined mode in the specific gaming state of the feature H6.1 to a specific number (once) (Steps S3904 to S3904 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) A function of executing the process of step S3908),
The lowering restriction unit is selected by the selection unit without performing comparison by the comparison unit when the specific notification of the predetermined mode is executed for the predetermined special information during the predetermined specific gaming state. The game machine according to Feature H5, wherein the game machine is configured to execute a special notification.

  According to the feature H6, the number of times that the special notification in a predetermined mode can be executed during one specific gaming state is limited to a specific number. Thereby, it is possible to suppress uniformization of the special notification that may occur when the special notification in the predetermined mode is executed more frequently than others.

  In this case, when a specific notification of a predetermined mode is executed for predetermined special information in a predetermined specific gaming state, the predetermined notification of the predetermined mode or a higher degree of expectation than the predetermined special information is performed in the subsequent specific gaming state. High special notification will be performed. For this reason, in the situation where the frequency | count which can be performed is restrict | limited, bias may arise in the special information by which the special alerting | reporting of a predetermined aspect is performed.

  On the other hand, according to this feature, when the special notification in a predetermined mode is executed in the previous specific game state, the special notification selected by the selection unit in the current specific game state is executed as it is. . Thereby, since the case where the special alert | report of a predetermined aspect is not performed may arise, the said inconvenience can be avoided.

  In particular, when the special notification of the winning mode is executed in the previous specific gaming state, the special notification selected by the selection means is executed without performing the comparison by the comparison means, so that the processing load is reduced. Can do.

  Feature H7. The special notification control means performs the special notification for the special information stored in the acquired information storage means during the specific gaming state, and the special information indicates an execution period for executing the special notification for the special information. It is provided with specific control means (a function for executing a hold notice effect determination process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) that changes in correspondence with the digestion order that is the subject of the determination of grant after the end of the specific game state. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H6.

  According to the feature H7, the execution period during which the special notification is executed is different in correspondence with the digestion order in which the special information is subject to the determination of grant after the end of the specific gaming state. As a result, by grasping the execution period during which the special notification is executed, it is possible to specify the order in which the special information related to the special notification is to be given after the end of the specific gaming state.

Feature H8. Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 301) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit with a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
A determination is made as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to preset provision information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means In such a case, a grant determination unit (a function for executing the determination process in the variation start process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that sequentially performs the grant determination on the plurality of special information,
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result that the special information to be judged corresponds to the grant information, the privilege grant means for granting a privilege to the player ( A function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
In a gaming machine equipped with
Information reflecting the determination result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means is the target of the determination of grant at a timing prior to the predetermined special information being the target of the determination of grant. A destination identifying means for identifying (a function for executing a confirmation process for holding notice by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in the eighth embodiment);
The special notification reflecting the result of specification by the destination specifying means is performed by the notification means (symbol display device 41) at a timing before the predetermined special information that has been specified by the destination specifying means becomes the target of the grant determination. ) Special notification control means (function for executing round effect execution processing in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 in the eighth embodiment),
With
The special notification control means executes the special notification for the predetermined special information during the specific period next to the specific period when the special notification is performed for the predetermined special information during the specific period. In this case, the content of the special notification on the rear side is not limited to the lower limit means (in step S3910 to step S3915 in the display control device 212), so that the degree of expectation for the assignment correspondence result is not lower than the content of the special notification on the front side. A gaming machine having a function of executing processing).

  According to the feature H8, the special notification according to the predetermined special information that is not the subject of the grant determination is executed by the notifying unit at a timing before the special information is the subject of the grant determination. is there. As a result, for the player, when special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result when the special information that is the target of the grant determination later becomes the target of the grant determination is determined according to the content of the special notification. The game of confirming or predicting the game is added and the game is diversified. As a result, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

  In such a configuration, when the special notification is executed for the predetermined special information in a plurality of specific periods, the content of the special notification on the rear side is not expected to be lower than the content of the special notification on the front side. As a result, when performing special notification for predetermined special information in a plurality of specific periods, the contents of the special notification on the back side will not be demoted or special notification may not be performed. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the willingness to play that can be caused by demotion.

Feature H9. The special notification control means includes
In the case where the special notification is executed in the specific period, the special information that is a target of execution of the special notification is in a state in which the special information is associated with the digestion order information that is the target of the determination of grant after the end of the specific period. Information notifying means (notifying the function of executing step S3806 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) that informs the notifying information to the notifying means and also after the specific period;
When the specific period is newly started or when the specific period is started, a clear unit (step S4006 and step S4006 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) that clears the notification by the information notification unit and newly starts the special notification. The function of executing the processing of S4007),
A gaming machine according to Feature H8, comprising:

  According to the feature H9, the special notification information is notified even after the specific period in which the special notification is executed. Thereby, the player can play the game after the specific period while grasping the contents of the special notification. Therefore, it is possible to play a game after a specific period while predicting the game result based on the content of the special notification.

  In such a configuration, when the specific period is newly started, the notification by the information notification unit is cleared and a new special notification is started. As a result, even if special notification is made on special information that was the target of special notification in the previous specific period in the newly started specific period, the content of the special notification will be what kind of content. Can be expected, and the degree of attention to the game in the new specific period can be increased.

Feature I1. Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 301) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit with a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
A determination is made as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to preset provision information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means In such a case, a grant determination unit (a function for executing the determination process in the variation start process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that sequentially performs the grant determination on the plurality of special information,
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result that the special information to be judged corresponds to the grant information, the privilege grant means for granting a privilege to the player ( A function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
In a gaming machine equipped with
Information reflecting the determination result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means is the target of the determination of grant at a timing prior to the predetermined special information being the target of the determination of grant. A destination identifying means for identifying (a function for executing a confirmation process for holding notice by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in the eighth embodiment);
The special notification reflecting the result of specification by the destination specifying means is performed by the notification means (symbol display device 41) at a timing before the predetermined special information that has been specified by the destination specifying means becomes the target of the grant determination. ) Special notification control means (function for executing round effect execution processing in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 in the eighth embodiment),
With
The special notification control means includes
Specific control means for performing the special notification during the specific period for each special information stored in the acquired information storage means during the specific period (determination of the hold notice effect in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 in the eighth embodiment) Processing function), and
Limiting means for restricting the number of the special information in which the execution mode of the special notification is a predetermined mode during the specific period of 1 to a specific number (function of executing the processing of steps S3904 to S3908 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 )When,
With
The specific control means is a case where the special notification in the predetermined mode is executed for predetermined special information during the predetermined specific period, and the predetermined control unit is also in the next specific period with respect to the predetermined specific period. When the special notification is executed for the special information, the special notification in the predetermined mode may not be executed in the rear special notification.

  According to the feature I1, the special notification according to the predetermined special information that is not the subject of the grant determination is executed by the notifying unit at a timing before the special information is the subject of the grant determination. is there. As a result, for the player, when special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result when the special information that is the target of the grant determination later becomes the target of the grant determination is determined according to the content of the special notification. The game of confirming or predicting the game is added and the game is diversified. As a result, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

  In such a configuration, the number of times that the special notification in a predetermined mode can be executed during one specific period is limited to a specific number. Thereby, it is possible to suppress uniformization of the special notification that may occur when the special notification in the predetermined mode is executed more frequently than others. However, if special notification in a predetermined mode is executed for the same special information in a plurality of specific periods, there may be a disadvantage that it is difficult to execute special notification in a predetermined mode for other special information.

  On the other hand, according to the present feature, in a situation where a special notification in a predetermined mode is executed for predetermined special information during a predetermined specific period, the predetermined predetermined period during the next specific period with respect to the predetermined specific period. When performing special notification about special information, the special notification of a mode different from the special notification of a predetermined mode may be performed. Thereby, the expectation that the special notification related to the special information different from the predetermined special information in the specific period can be the special notification in the predetermined mode increases, and the execution mode of the special notification for each specific period can be diversified. .

  Note that “the case where the special notification in the predetermined mode is not executed” includes a configuration in which the special notification in the execution mode different from the special notification in the predetermined mode is executed and a configuration in which the special notification itself is not executed.

  Further, when the privilege granting means is a transition means for shifting the gaming state to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, a configuration in which the specific period is a period of the specific gaming state can be considered.

Feature I2. The execution mode of the special notification is set in a plurality of types with different expectation levels as the grant correspondence results,
The predetermined mode is a winning mode (special hold notice effect) executed when the special information targeted for the special notification corresponds to the grant correspondence result or a mode with the highest expectation. The gaming machine according to Feature I1, characterized by:

  According to the feature I2, the winning aspect or the aspect with the highest expectation is set as the predetermined aspect. Thereby, it can grasp | ascertain that the thing corresponding to the provision response | compatibility result is contained in the special information acquired now by performing the special alert | report of those aspects. Accordingly, the player can visually recognize the special notification while expecting whether or not the special notification such as the winning mode will be performed, and the degree of attention to the special notification can be increased.

  However, if the special notification such as the winning mode is executed more than necessary, there is a risk that the player's gambling will be mischievous and a healthy game cannot be performed. On the other hand, according to this feature, since the number of times that the special notification such as the winning mode can be executed in one specific period is determined in advance, the special notification such as the winning mode is not excessively executed. Yes. Thereby, the soundness of the game is ensured.

  In such a configuration, by applying the configuration of the feature I1, there is a bias in the content of the special notification such that the special notification such as the winning mode is performed only on certain special information and the special notification is not performed on other special information. It is possible to suppress the occurrence. As a result, the player can enjoy the game while expecting whether the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence result is acquired separately from the special information in which the special notification such as the winning mode has already been executed. . Therefore, the inconvenience which may arise by setting the frequency | count which can perform the special alert | report of a winning aspect can be avoided.

Feature I3. The specific control means includes
When the special notification is executed in the specific period, the special information that is the execution target of the special notification is the information on the digestion order that is the target of the grant determination after the end of the specific period even after the specific period. A post-execution notification means (a function of executing the process of step S3806 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) that causes the notification means to notify the special notification information in a state corresponding to
When the specific period is newly started or is started, clearing by the post-execution notification unit is cleared and the special notification is newly started (steps S4006 and S4006 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212). The function of executing the process of step S4007),
The gaming machine according to Feature I1 or Feature I2, characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature I3, the special notification information is notified even after the specific period in which the special notification is executed. Thereby, the player can play the game after the specific period while grasping the contents of the special notification. Therefore, it is possible to play a game after a specific period while predicting the game result based on the content of the special notification.

  In such a configuration, when the specific period is newly started, the notification by the information notification unit is cleared and a new special notification is started. As a result, even if special notification is made on special information that was the target of special notification in the previous specific period in the newly started specific period, the content of the special notification will be what kind of content. Can be expected, and the degree of attention to the game in the new specific period can be increased.

  Feature I4. The specific control means performs the special notification for the special information stored in the acquired information storage means during the specific period, and the special information specifies the execution period for executing the special notification for the special information. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I3, wherein the gaming machine is made different in correspondence with a digestion order to be subjected to the grant determination after a period.

  According to the characteristic I4, the execution period in which the special notification is executed is different in correspondence with the digestion order for which the special information is to be determined after the specific period. As a result, by grasping the execution period during which the special notification is executed, it is possible to specify the order in which the special information related to the special notification is subject to the determination of grant after the specific period.

  Feature I5. The specific control means is the case where the special notification in the predetermined mode is executed for the predetermined special information during the predetermined specific period, and the special notification is performed for the predetermined special information even during the next specific period. The game machine according to any one of features I1 to I4, wherein the special notification in the predetermined mode can be executed in the special notification on the rear side.

  According to the characteristic I5, the special notification in a predetermined mode can be executed for the same special information in a specific period and a specific period next to the specific period. Thereby, since the variation of the execution mode in which the special notification executed in the next specific period is executed is not limited, the special notification can be diversified.

Feature I6. The execution mode of the special notification is set in a plurality of types with different expectation levels as the grant correspondence results,
The predetermined mode is a winning mode (special hold notice effect) or a mode with the highest degree of expectation that is executed when the special information targeted for the special notification corresponds to the grant response result.
In the case where the specific control means does not execute the special notification of the winning mode or the special notification of the execution mode having the highest expectation degree in the special notification on the rear side, Among these, the gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics I1 to I5, wherein the special notification in an execution mode having a relatively high expectation is easily executed.

  According to the feature I6, when the special notification on the winning aspect or the like is not performed in the special notification on the rear side, the special notification with a relatively high expectation is performed. Thereby, it can be made to recognize that the expectation degree of the special information used as the object of the special alert | report is high, ensuring the effect of the characteristic I1.

Feature I7. The execution mode of the special notification is set in a plurality of types with different expectation levels as the grant correspondence results,
The predetermined mode is a winning mode (special hold notice effect) or a mode with the highest degree of expectation that is executed when the special information targeted for the special notification corresponds to the grant response result.
The specific control unit is configured to execute the special notification in a mode other than the predetermined mode for the predetermined special information during the predetermined specific period, and the predetermined special information also during the next specific period. When the special notification is executed, a reduction limiting unit (display control device 212) that prevents the content of the rear special notification from being less expected than the content of the front special notification. The MPU 252 has a function of executing the processing of steps S3910 to S3915), and the gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I6.

  According to the characteristic I7, when the special notification is performed for the predetermined special information in the next specific period in the situation where the special notification of the aspect other than the predetermined aspect is performed for the predetermined special information during the predetermined specific period, The content of the rear special notification is not expected to be lower than that of the front special notification. As a result, when special notification is executed for the same special information over a plurality of specific periods, the content of the special notification on the rear side is not demoted, or special notification is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the willingness to play that can be caused by the demotion.

  In addition, if the predetermined mode is a winning mode, etc., it can be recognized that it corresponds to the grant determination result, so even if a special notification is demoted, the willingness to play is reduced by the demotion Is alleviated.

Feature I8. The execution mode of the special notification is set in a plurality of types with different expectation levels as the grant correspondence results,
The specific control means includes
When the special notification is executed with respect to the predetermined special information, a selection unit (step S3905 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) that selects a special notification of any execution mode among the special notifications of the plurality of types of execution modes The function of executing the process of step S3906),
Grasping means for grasping the expectation degree of the special notification executed for the predetermined special information in the previous execution period with respect to the current execution period (function for executing the process of step S3911 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212);
Comparison means for comparing the expectation level of the special notification selected by the selection means and the expectation level of the special notification grasped by the grasping means in the current execution period (the process of step S3913 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) Function to execute)
With
In the case where the grasping means grasps that the special notice executed in the previous execution period is the special notice in the predetermined mode, it is selected by the selecting means without performing the comparison by the comparing means. While running special alerts,
If the grasping means grasps that the special notification executed in the previous execution period is not the special notification in the predetermined mode, the execution grasped by the grasping means based on the comparison result by the comparing means The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I7, wherein the special notification of the execution mode that is the above-described expectation degree is executed.

  According to the feature I8, when performing special notification on the same special information in different execution periods, the special notification executed in the current execution period is higher than the expected degree of special notification executed in the previous execution period. Expectation does not decrease. Thereby, the fall of the willingness to the game which may arise by special notification demoting can be suppressed.

  In such a configuration, when the special notification in the predetermined mode is executed in the previous execution period, the special notification selected by the selection unit is executed as it is. Thereby, the case where the special alert | report of a predetermined aspect is not performed may arise.

  In particular, when a special notification in a predetermined mode is executed in the previous execution period, the special notification selected by the selection unit is executed without performing comparison by the comparison unit, so that the processing load can be reduced. it can.

Feature I9. Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 301) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit with a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
A determination is made as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to preset provision information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means In such a case, a grant determination unit (a function for executing the determination process in the variation start process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that sequentially performs the grant determination on the plurality of special information,
The game state is shifted to a specific game state advantageous to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. Transition means (function to execute a game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
In a gaming machine equipped with
Information reflecting the determination result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means is the target of the determination of grant at a timing prior to the predetermined special information being the target of the determination of grant. A destination identifying means for identifying (a function for executing a confirmation process for holding notice by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in the eighth embodiment);
The special notification reflecting the result of specification by the destination specifying means is performed by the notification means (symbol display device 41) at a timing before the predetermined special information that has been specified by the destination specifying means becomes the target of the grant determination. ) Special notification control means (function for executing round effect execution processing in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 in the eighth embodiment),
With
The special notification control means causes the special notification to be executed for each special information during the specific gaming state when a plurality of the special information is stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state. A gaming machine comprising specific control means (a function of executing a hold notice effect determination process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 in the eighth embodiment).

  According to the characteristic I9, the special notification according to the predetermined special information that is not the target of the grant determination is executed by the notifying unit at a timing before the special information is the target of the grant determination. is there. As a result, for the player, when special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result when the special information that is the target of the grant determination later becomes the target of the grant determination is determined according to the content of the special notification. The game of confirming or predicting the game is added and the game is diversified. As a result, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

  In such a configuration, when there are a plurality of acquired special information, special notification is executed for each special information during the specific gaming state. Thereby, the degree of attention to the special notification can be improved, and the degree of attention to the specific gaming state can be increased.

Feature I10. Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 301) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit with a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
A determination is made as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to preset provision information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means In such a case, a grant determination unit (a function for executing the determination process in the variation start process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that sequentially performs the grant determination on the plurality of special information,
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result that the special information to be judged corresponds to the grant information, the privilege grant means for granting a privilege to the player ( A function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
In a gaming machine equipped with
Information reflecting the determination result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means is the target of the determination of grant at a timing prior to the predetermined special information being the target of the determination of grant. A destination identifying means for identifying (a function for executing a confirmation process for holding notice by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in the eighth embodiment);
The special notification reflecting the result of specification by the destination specifying means is performed by the notification means (symbol display device 41) at a timing before the predetermined special information that has been specified by the destination specifying means becomes the target of the grant determination. ) Special notification control means (function for executing round effect execution processing in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 in the eighth embodiment),
With
When there are a plurality of special information stored in the acquired information storage unit corresponding to the assignment correspondence result, the special notification control means corresponds to the assignment correspondence result. Specific control means (a function for executing a hold notice effect determining process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 in the eighth embodiment) is provided to execute the special notification in a manner in which it can be recognized. A gaming machine.

  According to the feature I10, the special notification according to the predetermined special information that is not the target of the grant determination is executed by the notifying unit at a timing before the special information is the target of the grant determination. is there. As a result, for the player, when special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result when the special information that is the target of the grant determination later becomes the target of the grant determination is determined according to the content of the special notification. The game of confirming or predicting the game is added and the game is diversified. As a result, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

  In such a configuration, when there are a plurality of special information corresponding to the assignment correspondence result among the acquired special information, the special notification is made in a manner capable of recognizing that the plurality of special information corresponds to the assignment correspondence result. Is executed. As a result, it is possible to grasp that the special information currently acquired includes a plurality of special information corresponding to the assignment correspondence result. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

Feature J1. Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Special information acquired by the information acquisition means is acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 301 in the eighth embodiment) for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a plurality of numbers,
A determination is made as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to preset provision information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means In such a case, a grant determination unit (a function for executing the determination process in the variation start process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that sequentially performs the grant determination on the plurality of special information,
The game state is shifted to a specific game state advantageous to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. Transition means (function to execute a game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
Prior to the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means or based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, a game turning action is started, corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means. The game turn operation of each game time is performed in accordance with the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with the game result operation being ended as a notification result as one game time. Game time control means (function for executing the game time control process of the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in the eighth embodiment) for controlling the notification means (the symbol display device 41);
In a gaming machine equipped with
Information reflecting the determination result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means is the target of the determination of grant at a timing prior to the predetermined special information being the target of the determination of grant. A destination identifying means for identifying (a function for executing a confirmation process for holding notice by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in the eighth embodiment);
The special notification reflecting the result of specification by the destination specifying means is a timing before the predetermined special information that is specified by the destination specifying means during the specific gaming state becomes the target of the grant determination. Special notification control means (function of executing round effect execution processing in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 in the eighth embodiment), which is executed by the notification means or a different notification means.
When the special notification is performed in the specific gaming state, the special information that is the execution target of the special notification is given after the end of the specific gaming state even in the game rotation operation after the specific gaming state. Special notification result control means (eighth notification) that causes the notification means to notify a special notification result (pending notice result pattern Pb) that is a notification result of the special notification in a state corresponding to the digestion order information to be determined. The function of executing the process of step S3806 of the display control device 212 in the embodiment of FIG.
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature J1, the special notification according to the predetermined special information that is not the target of the grant determination is executed by the notifying unit at a timing before the special information is the target of the grant determination. is there. As a result, for the player, when special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result when the special information that is the target of the grant determination later becomes the target of the grant determination is determined according to the content of the special notification. The game of confirming or predicting the game is added and the game is diversified. As a result, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

  In such a configuration, when a special notification is executed in the specific gaming state, a special notification result is notified. The special notification result is also notified in the game turning operation after the end of the specific gaming state. For this reason, it is possible to digest the game turning operation related to the special information while grasping the special notification result, and it is possible to suitably associate the special notification and the game turning operation.

  In particular, during a specific game state, there is a case where a special game is executed instead of a game replay operation. For this reason, if a special notification is executed during a specific gaming state, the interval between the execution timing of the special notification and the execution timing of the game turning operation related to the special information that is the subject of the special notification increases, There is a case where the special notification result of the special information related to the game replay operation is forgotten at the execution timing.

  On the other hand, according to this feature, since the period during which the special notification result is notified is set to be long, even if the interval is increased, the state in which the special notification result is grasped is maintained. can do.

  In addition, as a specific configuration of this feature, for example, “the notification unit is a pattern display unit in which a pattern is variably displayed on a display screen, and the game times control unit is configured to perform the grant determination by the grant determination unit. Prior to being performed or based on the fact that the application determination has been performed by the application determination unit, the display of the variation of the image is started in the image display unit, and a stop result corresponding to the determination result of the application determination is displayed. Then, the display of the variation of the picture is terminated once, and the variation display of the pattern of each game is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A "some" configuration is possible.

Feature K1. Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 301) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit with a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
A determination is made as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to preset provision information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means In such a case, a grant determination unit (a function for executing the determination process in the variation start process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that sequentially performs the grant determination on the plurality of special information,
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result that the special information to be judged corresponds to the grant information, the privilege grant means for granting a privilege to the player ( A function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
Prior to the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means or based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, a game turning action is started, corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means. The game turn operation of each game time is performed in accordance with the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with the game result operation being ended as a notification result as one game time. Game time control means (function for executing the game time control process of the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in the eighth embodiment) for controlling the notification means (the symbol display device 41);
In a gaming machine equipped with
Information reflecting the determination result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means is the target of the determination of grant at a timing prior to the predetermined special information being the target of the determination of grant. A destination identifying means for identifying (a function of executing a confirmation process for holding notice of the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in the eighth embodiment);
The special notification reflecting the specification result by the destination specifying means is different from the notification means or the timing at a timing before the predetermined special information that is the specification target by the destination specifying means becomes the subject of the grant determination. Special notification control means (a function of executing round effect execution processing in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 in the eighth embodiment) to be executed by the notification means;
With
The game times control means determines the mode information corresponding to the mode of operation when the game round operation is performed based on the result of the grant determination in each game time (of the main control device 81). MPU 202 has a function of executing variation start processing), and when the game times operation for each game time is performed, the game times operation is performed in an operation mode according to the mode information determined by the mode information determination unit. And
The aspect information determined by the aspect information determining means includes long-term aspect information (effect A, effect corresponding to a long-term aspect in which the game turn operation period in which the game turn operation is performed is relatively long or short. Information corresponding to B etc.) and short-term aspect information corresponding to the short-term aspect (information corresponding to production C etc.),
The special notification includes a special notification (special hold notice effect) of the winning mode that is executed when the special information targeted for the special notification corresponds to the grant response result, The special notification of the winning mode is characterized in that it is easier to execute when the mode information determined by the mode information determining means is the short-term mode than when the mode information is the long-term mode information. Gaming machine.

  According to the characteristic K1, the special notification according to the predetermined special information that is not the subject of the grant determination is executed by the notifying unit at a timing before the special information is the subject of the grant determination. is there. As a result, for the player, when special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result when the special information that is the target of the grant determination later becomes the target of the grant determination is determined according to the content of the special notification. The game of confirming or predicting the game is added and the game is diversified. As a result, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

  In addition, a winning mode is set as the execution mode of the special notification. Thereby, it can grasp | ascertain that the thing corresponding to the provision response | compatibility result is contained in the special information acquired now by performing the special alert | report of the said winning aspect. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the special notification while expecting whether or not the special notification of the winning mode will be performed, and the degree of attention to the special notification can be increased.

  In such a configuration, the special notification of the winning mode is easy to be executed when the game turning operation related to the special information targeted for special notification is relatively short. Thereby, the inconvenience which may arise when performing the operation | movement for game rotation which concerns on the special information used as the object of the special alert | report of the winning aspect can be avoided.

  That is, it is possible to grasp that the special information that is the target of the special notification corresponds to the assignment correspondence result by the special notification of the winning mode. For this reason, the player will digest the game times corresponding to the special information that is the target of the special notification in the winning mode while knowing the game result. In this case, when the game operation for a long-term mode is executed in the above-mentioned game times, the effect is performed over a long period of time despite knowing the game result, and the effect is forcibly shown. May give an impression.

  On the other hand, according to this feature, the game turning operation related to the special information that is the target of the special notification of the winning mode is completed in a relatively short period of time, and thus the above inconvenience is avoided. be able to.

  In addition, as a specific configuration of this feature, for example, “the notification unit is a pattern display unit in which a pattern is variably displayed on a display screen, and the game times control unit is configured to perform the grant determination by the grant determination unit. Prior to being performed or based on the fact that the application determination has been performed by the application determination unit, the display of the variation of the image is started in the image display unit, and a stop result corresponding to the determination result of the application determination is displayed. Then, the display of the variation of the picture is terminated once, and the variation display of the pattern of each game is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A "some" configuration is possible. In this case, the operation period for the game times corresponds to the display time for changing the pattern.

Feature K2. Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 301) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit with a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
A determination is made as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to preset provision information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means In such a case, a grant determination unit (a function for executing the determination process in the variation start process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that sequentially performs the grant determination on the plurality of special information,
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result that the special information to be judged corresponds to the grant information, the privilege grant means for granting a privilege to the player ( A function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
Prior to the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means or based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, a game turning action is started, corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means. The game turn operation of each game time is performed in accordance with the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with the game result operation being ended as a notification result as one game time. Game time control means (function for executing the game time control process of the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in the eighth embodiment) for controlling the notification means (the symbol display device 41);
In a gaming machine equipped with
Information reflecting the determination result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means is the target of the determination of grant at a timing prior to the predetermined special information being the target of the determination of grant. A destination identifying means for identifying (a function of executing a confirmation process for holding notice of the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in the eighth embodiment);
The special notification reflecting the specification result by the destination specifying means is different from the notification means or the timing at a timing before the predetermined special information that is the specification target by the destination specifying means becomes the subject of the grant determination. Special notification control means (a function of executing round effect execution processing in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 in the eighth embodiment) to be executed by the notification means;
With
The game times control means determines the mode information corresponding to the mode of operation when the game round operation is performed based on the result of the grant determination in each game time (of the main control device 81). MPU 202 has a function of executing variation start processing), and when the game times operation for each game time is performed, the game times operation is performed in an operation mode according to the mode information determined by the mode information determination unit. And
The aspect information determined by the aspect information determining means includes long-term aspect information (effect A, effect corresponding to a long-term aspect in which the game turn operation period in which the game turn operation is performed is relatively long or short. Information corresponding to B etc.) and short-term aspect information corresponding to the short-term aspect (information corresponding to production C etc.),
The special notification includes a special notification (special hold notice effect) of a winning aspect that is executed when the special information targeted for the special notification corresponds to the grant correspondence result,
The short-term mode information is special information corresponding to the grant correspondence result, and is special information corresponding to the grant correspondence result and special information corresponding to the grant correspondence result. A gaming machine characterized in that the special information is easily selected in the special information to be executed.

  According to the feature K2, the special notification according to the predetermined special information that is not the subject of the grant determination is performed by the notifying unit at a timing before the special information is the subject of the grant determination. is there. As a result, for the player, when special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result when the special information that is the target of the grant determination later becomes the target of the grant determination is determined according to the content of the special notification. The game of confirming or predicting the game is added and the game is diversified. As a result, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

  In addition, a winning mode is set as the execution mode of the special notification. Thereby, it can grasp | ascertain that the thing corresponding to the provision response | compatibility result is contained in the special information acquired now by performing the special alert | report of the said winning aspect. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the special notification while expecting whether or not the special notification of the winning mode will be performed, and the degree of attention to the special notification can be increased.

  In such a configuration, for the purpose of diversifying the game turning operation, a game turning operation having a different game turning operation period is provided. In this case, with regard to the special information in which the special notification of the winning mode is performed, the special operation of the mode other than the winning mode can be performed by adopting a configuration in which the game-turning operation with a relatively short game-playing operation period is easily performed. With respect to the performed special information, it is possible to easily execute a game turning operation in a mode in which the game turning operation period is relatively long. As a result, for the special information in which the special notification of the mode other than the winning mode is performed, the game result corresponds to the grant correspondence result by executing the game cycle operation with a relatively long game cycle operation period. The game can be performed while expecting to be.

  In addition, as a specific configuration of this feature, for example, “the notification unit is a pattern display unit in which a pattern is variably displayed on a display screen, and the game times control unit is configured to perform the grant determination by the grant determination unit. Prior to being performed or based on the fact that the application determination has been performed by the application determination unit, the display of the variation of the image is started in the image display unit, and a stop result corresponding to the determination result of the application determination is displayed. Then, the display of the variation of the picture is terminated once, and the variation display of the pattern of each game is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A "some" configuration is possible. In this case, the operation period for the game times corresponds to the display time for changing the pattern.

Feature L1. It is a configuration where the production is executed based on the start opportunity,
First control means (main control device 81) for transmitting a command based on the start trigger;
Second control means (display control device 212) for causing the performance corresponding to the command to be executed by effect execution means (symbol display device 41);
In a gaming machine equipped with
As the effect, at least a first effect (game time effect) and a second effect (holding notice effect) that are different in timing at which the start opportunity occurs are set,
The first control means includes
First output means for outputting a command based on the first start trigger corresponding to the execution of the first effect (function of transmitting an effect pattern command);
Second output means for outputting a command based on the second start trigger corresponding to the execution of the second effect (function of transmitting a command for holding advance notice);
With
The second control means includes
First effect control means (function for executing game times effect) for causing the effect execution means to execute the first effect corresponding to the command output by the first output means;
Second effect control means (function to execute a hold notice effect) that causes the effect execution means to execute the second effect corresponding to the command output by the second output means;
With
The command output by the first output means includes specific information used when the first effect control means determines the effect mode of the first effect,
The command output by the second output means includes the specific information,
The second effect control means uses the specific information included in the command output by the second output means to determine the effect aspect of the second effect (display in the ninth embodiment) A gaming machine having a function of executing a hold notice effect determination process of the control device 212).

  According to the feature L1, by executing the first effect and the second effect that is different from the first effect, the player can recognize each effect in time series, The degree of attention can be increased.

  In such a configuration, the command output by the second output means used to execute the second effect includes specific information, and the effect mode of the second effect is determined using the specific information. The Thereby, since the structure for performing a 1st effect can be diverted as a part of the structure for performing a 2nd effect, the simplification of the structure for performing a 2nd effect can be achieved.

Feature L2. The first control means includes storage means (ROM 203) in which a plurality of types of commands having different specific information are stored,
The first output means is a selection means (of the MPU 202 in the ninth embodiment) for executing a selection process for selecting one command among the plurality of types of commands based on the trigger for the first start. A function for executing classification information setting processing and variable command determination processing), and reading and outputting a command selected by the selection processing,
The second output means selects the one command by executing at least the selection process based on the second start trigger, and specifies the specific information of the selected one command. The gaming machine according to Feature L1, wherein the game machine outputs a command that includes the command.

  According to the feature L2, the configuration is such that one command among a plurality of types of commands stored in the storage unit is read out, so that the processing load related to the output of the command can be reduced compared to the configuration in which the command is created. You can plan.

  In such a configuration, the command output by the second output unit uses the specific information of the command output by the first output unit, so that the storage capacity required for the command output by the second output unit is reduced. can do. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity necessary for performing the second performance.

  Further, since the first output means and the second output means execute a common selection process, a part of the program related to the command output by the first output means can be output by the second output means. It can be used as a program related to As a result, the program capacity can be reduced.

Feature L3. The first control means is a process including the selection process based on the first start trigger, and a first effect process (variation start process) for causing the first effect to be performed. ) (A function for executing variation start processing of the MPU 202 in the ninth embodiment)
The gaming machine according to Feature L2, wherein the selection process is set separately from other processes of the first effect process.

  According to the feature L3, since the selection process is set separately from the other processes for the first effect, when the second output means outputs a command, a process other than the selection process is executed. There is no need to do. Thus, the specific information can be shared between the command output by the first output means and the command output by the second output means, and the processing load related to the output of the command by the second output means Can be reduced.

Feature L4. The selection process is to perform a lottery process a plurality of times in order to select one command among the plurality of types of commands.
Among the plurality of lottery processes, a lottery process for deriving the specific information and other lottery processes are divided,
The second output means derives the specific information by executing at least a lottery process for deriving the specific information based on the trigger for the second start, and issues a command including the specific information. The gaming machine according to Feature L2 or Feature L3, wherein the gaming machine is an output.

  According to the feature L4, a lottery process is performed a plurality of times in the selection process. In this case, since the lottery process for deriving the specific information is separated from the other lottery processes, when the second output means outputs a command including the specific information, the lottery for deriving the specific information There is no need to execute the process and perform another lottery process. Thus, the specific information can be shared between the command output by the first output means and the command output by the second output means, and the processing load related to the output of the command by the second output means Can be reduced.

Feature L5. The command output by the first output means includes a plurality of commands including a command in which the specific information is set, and is a first effect command (effect pattern command) that determines the effect mode of the first effect,
The first output means includes
Means for executing a first process for determining a command in which the specific information is set (function for executing the processes of steps S4102 and S4103 of the MPU 202 in the ninth embodiment);
Means for executing a second process for determining other commands excluding the command for which the specific information is set and constituting the first effect command (steps S4104 to S4104 of the MPU 202 in the ninth embodiment) And a function for executing the process of step S4106), and based on the first start trigger, outputs the first effect command consisting of each command determined by each means,
The second output means derives a command in which the specific information is set by executing at least the first process based on the second start trigger, and outputs a command including the specific information related to the command The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L4, characterized in that:

  According to the feature L5, the first effect command for determining the effect mode of the first effect is composed of a plurality of commands including a command for which the specific information is set. Therefore, by combining different combinations of the plurality of commands. Thus, it is possible to diversify the information of the first effect command. As a result, it is possible to diversify the first effect by determining the effect mode of the first effect according to the information of the first effect command.

  In such a configuration, a first process for determining a command in which specific information is set among the plurality of commands and a second process for determining other commands are divided. And when the 2nd production is performed, the 1st processing which determines the command in which specific information was set is used, and it is not necessary to use the 2nd processing. Thereby, the processing load of the determination process of the command used for determining the effect mode of the second effect can be reduced.

Feature L6. The other commands determined in the second process include a game situation command (holding number corresponding command D (z)) reflecting the game situation at the start timing of the first effect,
The gaming machine according to Feature L5, wherein the first effect control means is capable of changing an effect mode of the first effect based on the specific information based on the gaming situation command.

  According to the feature L6, the game status command is included in the other commands, and the effect mode of the first effect based on the specific information can be changed based on the game status command. Thereby, it becomes possible to closely associate the game situation and the first effect, and the degree of attention to the first effect can be increased.

  In this case, for example, a configuration in which a command in which specific information corresponding to the game situation is set in the first process is derived is also conceivable. However, in this case, when it is desired to make the effect mode of the second effect the same regardless of the game situation, it becomes difficult to share the process related to the command output by the second output means.

  On the other hand, according to this feature, since the game situation command is determined in the second process, the effect of the first effect can be achieved without affecting the process related to the command output by the second output means. The mode and the game situation can be associated with each other.

Feature L7. Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Special information acquired by the information acquisition means is acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 301 in the ninth embodiment) for storing a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers as an upper limit,
A determination is made as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to preset provision information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means In such a case, the grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination on the plurality of special information (the processing of step S4201 and step S4203 is executed in the variation start process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 of the ninth embodiment). Function)
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result that the special information to be judged corresponds to the grant information, the privilege grant means for granting a privilege to the player ( A function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
With
The first start opportunity is an opportunity that occurs based on whether the grant determination unit performs the grant determination or the grant determination is performed,
The gaming status command is an acquisition information number command including the number information of the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means at the start timing of the first effect,
The first effect control means can change the effect mode of the first effect based on the specific information based on the number information included in the acquired information number command. Game machines.

  According to the feature L7, it is possible to change the effect mode of the first effect according to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage unit at the start timing of the first effect. Thereby, for example, in the situation where the number of special information is large, the production time of the first effect is shortened to increase the digestion rate of the special information. For example, in the situation where the number of special information is saved, the effect time of the first effect is shortened. Thus, the time during which the first effect is not performed can be made less likely to occur, and the first effect can be suitably performed.

  Feature L8. The second output means includes the identification information among the commands output by the first output means, and identification information for specifying by the second control means that the command has been output by the second output means. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L7, wherein the gaming machine outputs a command including at least

  According to the feature L8, the command output by the second output means includes at least specific information and identification information. Thereby, it can be recognized that the command is output from the second output means by the second control means. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a mixture of commands that may be caused by sharing specific information.

Feature L9. The first control means includes
Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Grant determination means for determining whether or not the special information acquired by the information acquisition means corresponds to predetermined grant information (variation start in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 of the ninth embodiment) The function of executing the processing of step S4201 and step S4203 in the processing),
A privilege granting unit that grants a privilege to a player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit being a grant response result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information (A function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
With
The specific information is information that reflects a determination result in a case where predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition unit is a target of the determination of grant,
The effect execution means is a display means capable of displaying a variation display of a pattern,
The first effect control means starts the display of the variation of the picture on the display means prior to the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means or based on the fact that the grant determination has been performed. Displaying the stop result corresponding to the information and ending the display of the variation of the pattern as one game time effect so that the game time effect is performed in the effect mode determined using the specific information Game time effect control means for controlling the display means,
The mode determining means uses the specific information included in the command output by the second output means, and uses the specific information to determine the second aspect corresponding to the game mode effect mode determined using the specific information. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L8, which determines an effect mode of the effect.

  According to the feature L9, the game times effect and the second effects can be associated with each other by executing the second effect in the effect mode corresponding to the game times effect. In this case, for example, by setting the second effect to be executed before the game times effect, the expectation for the game times effect can be increased. On the other hand, for example, by setting the second effect to be executed after the game time effect, it is possible to increase the reverberation of the game time effect or to execute a series of effects. From the above, the degree of attention to games can be increased.

Feature L10. The first control means stores acquisition information storage means (reserved ball storage area 402 in the ninth embodiment) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as a plurality of numbers, with a predetermined number as an upper limit. )
The grant determination means determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to the grant information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means. If so, the above-mentioned grant determination is sequentially performed for the plurality of special information.
The first control means specifies the specific information at a timing prior to the predetermined special information being subject to the grant determination (confirmation process for reservation notice in the ninth embodiment) Function to execute)
The second output means outputs a command including the specific information specified by the destination specifying means at a timing prior to a start timing of the game turn effect related to the predetermined special information,
In the second effect, the special notification corresponding to the specific information included in the command output by the second output means is the game times effect related to the predetermined special information that is specified by the destination specifying means. The gaming machine according to Feature L9, wherein the gaming machine is a special notification effect that is executed by the display means at a timing prior to the start timing.

  According to the feature L10, the special notification according to the predetermined special information that is not the subject of the grant determination is executed by the effect execution unit at a timing before the special information becomes the subject of the grant determination. There is. As a result, for the player, when special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result when the special information that is the target of the grant determination later becomes the target of the grant determination is determined according to the content of the special notification. The game of confirming or predicting the game is added and the game is diversified. As a result, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

  In this case, since the specific information is shared by the command output from the first output means and the command output from the second output means, the configuration required for performing the special notification can be simplified. Further, it is possible to suppress complication of the configuration that may be caused by performing special notification.

Feature M1. An information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit with a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers (the reserved ball storage area 402 in the ninth embodiment, the tenth embodiment) Holding ball storage area 501),
A process for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage unit corresponds to preset information is executed, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage unit. If so, grant determination means (steps S4201 and S4203 of the MPU 202 in the ninth embodiment, etc.) for sequentially executing the grant determination processing for the plurality of special information,
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result that the special information to be judged corresponds to the grant information, the privilege grant means for granting a privilege to the player ( A function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 202),
Prior to the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means or based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, a game turning action is started, corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means. The game turn operation of each game time is performed in accordance with the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with the game result operation being ended as a notification result as one game time. Game time control means for controlling the notification means (symbol display device 41) (function to set and transmit the effect pattern command of the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in the ninth and tenth embodiments, and the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) Function to execute processing corresponding to the production pattern command in)
In a gaming machine equipped with
Information reflecting the determination result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means is the target of the determination of grant at a timing prior to the predetermined special information being the target of the determination of grant. Destination specifying means (function for executing the processing of step S4506 of the MPU 202 in the ninth and tenth embodiments);
The special notification reflecting the specification result by the destination specifying means is different from the notification means or the timing at a timing before the predetermined special information that is the specification target by the destination specifying means becomes the subject of the grant determination. Special notification control means to be executed by the notification means (function to execute confirmation processing for holding notice of the MPU 202 in the ninth and tenth embodiments and function to execute round effect execution processing in the MPU 252) When,
With
A gaming machine, wherein at least a part of a process for determining a notification mode of the special notification is common to a process for determining an operation mode of the game turning operation.

  According to the feature M1, the special notification according to the predetermined special information that is not subject to the grant determination is executed by the notifying unit at a timing before the special information is subject to the grant determination. is there. As a result, for the player, when special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result when the special information that is the target of the grant determination later becomes the target of the grant determination is determined according to the content of the special notification. The game of confirming or predicting the game is added and the game is diversified. As a result, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

  In such a configuration, at least a part of the process for determining the notification mode of the special notification is common to the process for determining the operation mode of the game turning operation. As a result, it is possible to reduce the program capacity for executing the process for performing the special notification. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in program capacity that may occur due to the special notification.

Feature M2. The game times control means is means for determining an operation mode when the game turn operation is performed based on the determination result of the grant determination (classification information setting process and variation in the ninth and tenth embodiments). Command decision processing function)
The destination specifying means derives the determination result of the grant determination corresponding to the predetermined special information by executing at least the grant determination process for the predetermined special information,
The special notification control unit determines a notification mode of the special notification based on the determination result of the grant determination corresponding to the predetermined special information (the holding notice effect of the MPU 252 in the ninth and tenth embodiments) The gaming machine according to feature M1, further comprising a function for executing a determination process.

  According to the feature M2, at least the grant determination process is common to the process for determining the notification mode of the special notification and the process for determining the operation mode of the game turning operation. Thereby, the program capacity required for the process for deriving the pre-specified result can be reduced.

Feature M3. The game time control means performs mode information determination processing for determining mode information used to determine an operation mode when the game rotation operation is performed based on the determination result of the grant determination for each game time. If the game times operation for each game time is performed, the mode information determination means (function to execute the classification information setting process and the variable command determination process in the ninth and tenth embodiments) to be executed, The game turning operation is performed in the operation mode determined using the mode information determined by the mode information determination unit,
The special notification control means derives the aspect information corresponding to the predetermined special information by executing at least the aspect information determination process for the predetermined special information, and notifies the special notification based on the aspect information. A feature determining means (a function of executing the processing of step S4506 and step S4507 of the MPU 202 in the ninth and tenth embodiments and a function of executing the holding notice effect determination processing of the MPU 252) is provided. The gaming machine according to feature M1 or feature M2.

  According to the feature M3, when the special notification is performed, the aspect information determination process is performed on the predetermined special information, and the aspect information corresponding to the predetermined special information is derived. And special alerting | reporting is performed by the alerting | reporting aspect corresponding to the said aspect information. Thereby, diversification of special notification can be achieved.

  Further, when determining the notification mode of the special notification, the mode information determination process used when determining the operation mode of the game turning operation is executed. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the program capacity required to determine the notification mode of the special notification. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the program capacity for the diversification while diversifying the notification mode of the special notification.

Feature M4. The process for determining the operation mode of the game turning operation is composed of a plurality of processes including the mode information determination process,
The gaming machine according to Feature M3, wherein the mode information determination process is set separately from other processes included in the process for determining an operation mode of the game turning operation.

  According to the feature M4, the mode information determination process is set separately from other processes for determining the operation mode of the game turning operation. Therefore, when performing special notification, the mode information determination process is performed. And the above-mentioned other processes need not be executed. Thereby, the processing load for the process for performing the special notification while making the process common in the process for determining the operation mode of the game turning operation and the process for determining the notification mode of the special notification Can be reduced.

Feature M5. The aspect information is first aspect information, and the first aspect information includes a plurality of types.
Further, second mode information (variable command C (y) in the ninth and tenth embodiments) associated with at least a plurality of types of predetermined first mode information is provided,
The mode information determination unit is a unit that executes a first mode information selection process for selecting any one of the plurality of types of first mode information for each game time based on a result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit. (A function for executing classification information setting processing of the MPU 202 in the ninth and tenth embodiments)
The game times control means includes:
Means for executing a second mode information determination process for determining the second mode information based on the first mode information selected by the first mode information selection process (of the MPU 202 in the ninth and tenth embodiments) And a game command in an operation mode corresponding to the second mode information determined by the second mode information determination process. To perform a reusable action,
The special notification control means selects the first aspect information corresponding to the predetermined special information by executing at least the first aspect information selection process for the predetermined special information, and sets the first aspect information as the first aspect information. In the feature M3 or feature M4, characterized in that the feature M3 or the feature M4 is provided with notification mode determination means (a function for executing the hold notice effect determination processing of the MPU 202 in the ninth embodiment) that determines the notification mode of the special notification based on The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature M5, when the special notification is performed, at least a first mode information selection process is performed on the predetermined special information, and the first mode information corresponding to the predetermined special information is selected. And special alerting | reporting is performed by the alerting | reporting aspect corresponding to the said 1st aspect information. In this case, since it is not necessary to execute the second mode information determination process when performing special notification, the processing load for performing special notification can be reduced.

Feature M6. As the game turn operation, when executed, a plurality of types of special information corresponding to the grant correspondence result with different expectations are set,
The first aspect information is classification information that divides a plurality of types of gaming operations for each expectation,
The game according to Feature M5, wherein the second mode information is information set in association with the classification information and is game operation information that determines an operation mode of the game operation. Machine.

  According to the feature M6, one piece of division information is selected from a plurality of pieces of division information having different degrees of expectation, and the game turning operation information is derived based on the division information. In this case, since the notification mode of the special notification is determined based on the division information or the operation information for game times, it is possible to associate the expected degree of the operation for game times with the notification mode of the special notification. This makes it possible to closely associate the game turning operation and the special notification, and to further improve the degree of attention to the game through these effects.

  Feature M7. The game times control means is a process executed separately from the first mode information selection process and the second mode information determination process when performing the game times operation in each game time, the game times control means Means (in the ninth embodiment) for executing a change process for changing the operation mode based on the second mode information determined by the second mode information determination process according to the game situation when the operation is started The gaming machine according to the feature M5 or the feature M6, which is provided with a function of executing a pending number corresponding command determination process of the MPU 202).

  According to the feature M7, the operation mode of the game turning operation is changed according to the game situation when the game turning operation is started by the change process. Thereby, since the operation | movement for game times according to the said game condition can be performed, game time can be digested suitably.

  In such a configuration, the change process is performed separately from the first mode information selection process and the second mode information determination process, so that the change process is not performed when the notification mode of the special notification is determined. Is possible. Thereby, it is possible to perform a game turning operation according to the game situation while sharing the processing until the game turning operation information is derived.

  In addition, “the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage unit” can be considered as the “game situation when the game turning operation is started”, for example.

Feature M8. Among the second mode information, the second mode information that can be changed by the change process and the second mode information that can be changed are predetermined.
The notification mode of the special notification based on the second mode information to be changed in the change process and the notification mode of the special notification based on the second mode information of the change destination are indistinguishable. The gaming machine according to feature M7, characterized by:

  According to the feature M8, even when the second mode information is changed by the change process when the game turning operation is performed, the notification mode of the special notification cannot be identified from the viewpoint of the player. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid a mismatch between the notification mode of the special notification and the operation mode of the game turning operation that may be caused by the change of the second mode information by the change process.

  As a specific configuration of this feature, for example, “the notification mode of the special notification corresponds to the second mode information to be changed in the change process and the second mode information of the change destination”. It is possible to use a configuration that is common to all

Feature N1. Predetermined effect control means for executing a predetermined effect (game time effect) (function for executing the game time effect of the MPU 252 in the tenth embodiment);
A plurality of lotteries that are used when executing the predetermined performance and include at least a first lottery and a second lottery that is a subsequent lottery with respect to the first lottery. Lottery means (function to execute variation start processing of the MPU 202 in the tenth embodiment);
Based on the lottery result of the first lottery, first start effect control means (round of MPU 202 in the tenth embodiment) that executes a first start effect (holding notice effect) that starts before the predetermined effect. Function to execute the production execution process), and
With
The predetermined effect control means uses, when executing the predetermined effect, the lottery result of the first lottery used when the first start effect is executed to execute the predetermined effect. A gaming machine comprising specific control means (a function for executing the process of step S4804 of the MPU 202 in the tenth embodiment) used as the lottery result of the first lottery.

  According to the feature N1, the first start effect may be executed before the predetermined effect. Thereby, the attention degree to a game can be raised through a first start effect and a predetermined effect.

  In this configuration, the predetermined effect is executed using the lottery result of the first lottery used when the first start effect is executed. Thereby, when performing a predetermined effect, since it is not necessary to perform the first lottery again, the processing load for performing the predetermined effect can be reduced.

Feature N2. As the lottery mode of the first lottery, a high load mode (high load) in which the processing load required for the first lottery becomes relatively high when the amount of information used for the first lottery becomes relatively large or small Probability mode) and low load mode (low probability mode)
The specific control means is used when the first start effect is executed when the predetermined effect is executed at least in the situation where the lottery aspect of the first lottery is the high load aspect. The gaming machine according to Feature N1, wherein a lottery result of one lottery is used as a lottery result of the first lottery used to execute the predetermined effect.

  According to the feature N2, when the high load mode and the low load mode are set as the lottery mode of the first lottery and the predetermined effect is started in the situation of the high load mode, it is used for the first start effect. The lottery result of the first lottery is used again. Thereby, since it is not necessary to perform the first lottery of the high load mode twice, it is possible to reduce the processing load for performing the first start effect and the predetermined effect.

Feature N3. Based on the fact that a predetermined acquisition condition is satisfied, an acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202) for acquiring predetermined numerical information is provided,
The first lottery includes a determination process for determining whether or not the numerical information corresponds to predetermined specific numerical information,
The lottery result of the first lottery is set differently depending on whether the determination result of the determination process is a specific result that the numerical information corresponds to the specific numerical information,
When the lottery result of the first lottery corresponds to the specific result, privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player (a function of executing the game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) )
The high load mode and the low load mode are set so that the number of numerical information set as the specific numerical information is relatively large and small, so that the numerical information becomes the specific numerical information. A high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the corresponding probability is relatively high and low,
The first control unit used when the first start effect is executed when the predetermined effect is executed in a situation where the lottery mode of the first lottery is the low load mode. The gaming machine according to Feature N2, wherein the lottery result of the lottery is not used.

  According to the feature N3, since the high probability mode and the low probability mode with different probabilities of the specific result are set, the lottery result of the first lottery corresponds to the specific result in the situation of the high probability mode. It is easy to become. Then, when the lottery result of the first lottery corresponds to the specific result, a privilege is given to the player. Thereby, the attention degree to the game in a high probability aspect can be raised.

  In such a configuration, a fraudulent act is assumed in which the lottery result of the first lottery is changed to one corresponding to the specific result for the purpose of obtaining profits illegally. It is assumed that the fraudulent act is performed in a situation with a low probability mode that is relatively difficult to obtain a specific result.

  In addition, since the above fraudulent acts are likely to be changed in comparison with the act of changing various information used in the determination process or the determination process itself so that a specific result is derived in the determination process, It is easy to be performed easily.

  In this regard, according to this feature, when the lottery mode of the first lottery is a low probability mode, the first lottery is executed again without using information that is highly likely to be changed by the illegal act. By adopting the configuration to do so, it is possible to suppress the above fraud.

  Feature N4. The game machine according to Feature N3, wherein the first start effect is performed for a result of the lottery result of the first lottery used for the predetermined effect derived based on the high probability mode. .

  According to the feature N4, the first start effect is performed based on the first lottery result when the first lottery effect mode is a high probability mode. Thereby, when a privilege is relatively easily given to the player, the first start effect and the predetermined effect are executed, and the degree of attention to the first start effect can be further improved.

Feature N5. When the lottery result of the first lottery corresponds to the specific result, the privilege granting means shifts the gaming state to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, and is performed after the specific gaming state ends. The predetermined production of the number of times is based on a lottery result by the first lottery in the high probability mode,
During the specific gaming state, the first lottery related to the predetermined production of the predetermined number of times after the end of the specific gaming state can be performed,
The second lottery related to the predetermined performance of the predetermined number of times is configured to be performed after the end of the specific gaming state,
The specific control means, when performing the second lottery related to the predetermined performance of the predetermined number of times after the end of the specific gaming state, lottery of the first lottery performed during the specific gaming state The gaming machine according to Feature N3 or Feature N4, wherein the result can be used.

  According to the feature N5, when the lottery result of the first lottery corresponds to the specific result, the gaming state becomes a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, and a predetermined number of times after the end of the specific gaming state. One lottery is performed in a high probability manner. Thereby, it becomes easy to give a privilege with respect to a player.

  In such a configuration, the first lottery related to the predetermined number of predetermined effects is performed during the specific gaming state, and the second lottery related to the predetermined number of predetermined effects is performed after the end of the specific gaming state. Thereby, since the execution timing of the first lottery and the execution timing of the second lottery relating to the predetermined number of the predetermined effects are different, the processing load can be distributed, and the local processing load can be reduced. The increase can be suppressed.

Feature N6. As information for determining the production mode of the predetermined production,
A plurality of types of first information (classification information B (x));
Second information (variable command C (y)) set in association with a plurality of types for at least the predetermined first information;
Is provided,
In the first lottery, one of the plurality of types of first information is selected.
The second lottery is to determine the second information based on the first information selected in the first lottery,
The first start effect control means includes means for determining the first start effect effect mode using the first information selected by the first lottery (function to execute the hold notice effect determination process of the MPU 202).
The predetermined effect control means determines means for determining the effect aspect of the predetermined effect using the second information selected by the second lottery (executes the variable command determination process of the MPU 202 in the tenth embodiment). The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N5, wherein the gaming machine is provided with a function).

  According to the feature N6, the effect mode of the first start effect is determined using the first information. In this case, since it is not necessary to derive the second information when performing the first start effect, the processing load related to the first start effect can be reduced.

Feature N7. An information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Special information acquired by the information acquisition means is acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 501 in the tenth embodiment) for storing a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers as an upper limit;
A determination is made as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to preset provision information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means In some cases, the grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination on the plurality of special information in a predetermined order (a function of executing the processing of steps S4201 and S4203 of the MPU 202 in the tenth embodiment),
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result that the special information to be judged corresponds to the grant information, the privilege grant means for granting a privilege to the player ( A function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 202),
With
The predetermined effect control means is a predetermined display means (symbol display device 41) based on the fact that the provision determination is performed by the provision determination means before the provision determination is performed by the provision determination means. The display of the variation of the picture is started, the stop result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination is displayed, and the fact that the variation display of the pattern is terminated is stored in the acquired information storage means as one game round effect. Game time effect control means for controlling the display means so that the game time effect is performed according to the special information being,
Information that reflects the determination result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means is the target of the determination of grant, is the timing before the game round effect related to the predetermined special information is started. And a destination specifying means (function for executing a confirmation process for holding notice of the MPU 202 in the tenth embodiment),
The pre-start effect control means is configured so that the special notification reflecting the specification result by the pre-specifying means is before the game turn effect relating to the predetermined special information that has been specified by the pre-specifying means is started. Special notification control means (function for executing round effect execution processing in the tenth embodiment) to be executed by the notification means (symbol display device 41) at the timing,
The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N6, wherein the first lottery includes a grant determination by the grant determination means.

  According to the feature N7, the special notification according to the predetermined special information not subject to the grant determination is executed by the notification means at a timing before the game turn effect related to the predetermined special information is started. May be. Thereby, for the player, when special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result when the special information related to the game round effect is later subject to grant determination is determined according to the content of the special notification. A game of confirming or predicting is added to diversify the game. As a result, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

  In such a configuration, since the first lottery includes a grant determination by the grant determination unit, it can be specified whether or not a privilege is granted based on the lottery result of the first lottery. Thereby, it is possible to associate the game round effect and the special notification determined based on the lottery result of the first lottery with the grant of the player's privilege, and further improve the degree of attention to these effects. Can do.

Feature N8. A plurality of types of production modes of the game times production are set,
As information for determining the effect mode of the game times effect,
A plurality of types of classification information (classification information B (x)) for classifying the effect modes of the plurality of types of game times effects in a predetermined unit;
Game time effect information (variation command C (y)) that is set in association with a plurality of types of at least predetermined category information among the plurality of types of category information and determines the effect mode of the game time effect. When,
Is provided,
In the first lottery, the special information is used to select one of the plurality of types of division information,
The second lottery is to determine the game round effect information based on the division information selected by the first lottery,
The game times effect control means is for causing the game times effect to be executed in an effect mode determined using the game time effect information selected by the second lottery,
The special notification control means performs the special notification in a notification mode determined using the classification information selected by the first lottery for the predetermined special information. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature N8, one division information is selected from a plurality of pieces of division information having different degrees of expectation, and game turn effect information is selected based on the division information. In this case, since it becomes the structure which determines the alerting | reporting mode of special alerting | reporting based on division | segmentation information, the division | segmentation of the effect aspect of a game round effect and the alerting | reporting mode of special alerting | reporting can be linked | related. This makes it possible to closely associate the game turning operation and the special notification, and to further improve the degree of attention to the game through these effects.

Feature N9. Among the plurality of types of division information, at least the first division information and the second division information, the special information is the grant correspondence result when the game times effect is performed in the production mode corresponding to each division information. Certain expectations are different,
The special notification control means is capable of executing the special notification in a notification mode having different expectation levels in the special notification corresponding to the first classification information and the special notification corresponding to the second classification information. The gaming machine according to Feature N8, wherein there is a game machine.

  According to the feature N9, in the configuration in which the degree of expectation is different between at least the first category information and the second category information, the degree of expectation related to the notification mode of the special notification corresponding to these category information can be made different. Thereby, the production mode of the game times effect and the notification mode of the special notification can be associated with each other by the concept of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to suitably associate the game turning operation and the special notification.

Feature N10. The acquired information storage means includes a plurality of reserved storage areas (each area Ra1 to Ra4, Rb1 to Rb4) capable of storing the special information,
Based on the acquisition of the special information by the information acquisition means, the special information is sequentially stored in the hold storage area, and when the grant determination by the grant determination means is performed, the plurality of holds Special information shift means (function to execute data setting processing in the tenth embodiment) for sequentially shifting special information stored in the storage area within the reserved storage area,
Each holding storage area can store lottery result information reflecting the lottery result of the first lottery (classification information storage areas Ka1 to Ka4, Kb1 to Kb4 in the tenth embodiment). Is provided,
When the first lottery is performed, the lottery result information is stored in the lottery result information storage area of the holding storage area in which the special information used for the first lottery is stored. Lottery result information setting means (function to execute the process of step S4707 of the MPU 202 in the tenth embodiment),
The special information shifting means, when shifting the special information, shifts the lottery result information stored in the lottery result information storage area,
The gaming machine according to any one of features N7 to N9, wherein the second lottery uses the lottery result information stored in the lottery result information storage area.

  According to the feature N10, when the first lottery is performed, the lottery result information of the first lottery is the lottery of the reserved storage area in which the special information used for the first lottery is stored It is stored in the result information storage area. Further, when the grant determination by the grant determination unit is performed, the special information and the lottery result information stored in each holding storage area are shifted together. Then, the second lottery is performed using the lottery result information stored in each holding storage area. As a result, the data processing of the lottery result information can be executed simultaneously with the data processing of the special information. Therefore, the data processing of the lottery result information can be relatively easily performed, and the special information and the lottery result information can be easily synchronized.

Feature O1. Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit with a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers (holding ball storage area 402 in the ninth embodiment, eleventh embodiment Storage ball storage area 601)
A determination is made as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to preset provision information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means In this case, the grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination on the plurality of special information (function of executing the processes of steps S4201 and S4203 of the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in the ninth and eleventh embodiments). When,
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result that the special information to be judged corresponds to the grant information, the privilege grant means for granting a privilege to the player ( A function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
Prior to the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means or based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, a game turning action is started, corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means. The game turn operation of each game time is performed in accordance with the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with the game result operation being ended as a notification result as one game time. Game time control means for controlling the notification means (symbol display device 41) (the function of setting and transmitting the effect pattern command of the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in the ninth and eleventh embodiments) and the display control device 212 A function of executing processing corresponding to the effect pattern command in the MPU 252),
In a gaming machine equipped with
Information reflecting the determination result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means is the target of the determination of grant at a timing prior to the predetermined special information being the target of the determination of grant. A destination specifying means for specifying (a function of executing a confirmation process for holding notice of the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in the ninth and eleventh embodiments);
The special notification reflecting the result of specification by the destination specifying means is different from the notification means or the timing before the game times related to the predetermined special information that is specified by the destination specifying means are started. Special notification control means (function to execute round effect execution processing of the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 in the ninth and eleventh embodiments) to be executed by the notification means;
With
The game times control means includes:
Aspect information lottery that executes a lottery process for selecting any one of a plurality of types of aspect information by using lottery numerical value information (reach random number counter C3) included in the special information that triggered the game times in each game time Means (a function for executing the classification information setting process of the MPU 202 in the ninth embodiment, a function for executing the holding number correspondence classification information setting process of the MPU 202 in the eleventh embodiment), and the game of each game time When the recycle operation is performed, the game recycle operation is executed in the operation mode determined using the mode information selected by the mode information lottery means,
and,
If at least the lottery value information is specific lottery value information determined in advance, depending on the game situation at the start timing of the game turning operation, it corresponds to the grant correspondence result regardless of the same special information. The operation for game replay is executed in an operation mode having different expectations.
As for the special information including the specific lottery value information, when an operation mode having a relatively high expectation degree is executed among the operation modes having a different expectation level in the game rotation operation related to the special information. A gaming machine configured to prevent special notification that is easily recognized from being performed or difficult to perform.

  According to the characteristic O1, the special notification according to the predetermined special information that is not the target of the grant determination is executed by the notification unit at a timing before the game times related to the predetermined special information are started. Sometimes. As a result, for the player, when special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result when the special information that is the target of the game round later is subject to the granting determination is determined according to the content of the special notification. The game of confirming or predicting the game is added and the game is diversified. As a result, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

  In addition, the operation mode of the game rotation operation based on the specific lottery value information may differ depending on the game situation at the start timing of the game rotation operation. As a result, it is possible to execute the game turning operation according to the game situation at the start timing of the game turning operation.

  In such a configuration, the special information including the specific lottery numerical value information is not likely to be recognized as a special notification that is likely to be recognized when a relatively high expectation is executed as the game rotation operation related to the special information. Therefore, the degree of expectation between the special notification and the game rotation operation in the configuration in which the operation mode of the game rotation operation is different depending on the game situation at the start timing of the game rotation operation. Demotion is difficult to occur.

  That is, depending on the game situation at the start timing of the game turning operation, a game expectation operation based on the specific lottery value information may be executed with a low degree of expectation. In this case, if a special notification with a high expectation is performed as a special notification related to the special information including the specific lottery value information, the expectation may be demoted between effects based on the same special information. On the other hand, according to this feature, the special information including the specific lottery value information is not notified specially or has a relatively high expectation as a game-return operation related to the special information. Since it is difficult to execute a special notification that is easily recognized when is executed, occurrence of the event to be demoted can be suppressed.

Feature O2. Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit with a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers (holding ball storage area 402 in the ninth embodiment, eleventh embodiment Storage ball storage area 601)
A determination is made as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to preset provision information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means In this case, the grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination on the plurality of special information (function of executing the processes of steps S4201 and S4203 of the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in the ninth and eleventh embodiments). When,
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result that the special information to be judged corresponds to the grant information, the privilege grant means for granting a privilege to the player ( A function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
Prior to the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means or based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, a game turning action is started, corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means. The game turn operation of each game time is performed in accordance with the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with the game result operation being ended as a notification result as one game time. Game time control means for controlling the notification means (symbol display device 41) (the function of setting and transmitting the effect pattern command of the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in the ninth and eleventh embodiments) and the display control device 212 A function of executing processing corresponding to the effect pattern command in the MPU 252),
In a gaming machine equipped with
Information reflecting the determination result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means is the target of the determination of grant at a timing prior to the predetermined special information being the target of the determination of grant. A destination specifying means for specifying (a function of executing a confirmation process for holding notice of the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in the ninth and eleventh embodiments);
The special notification reflecting the result of specification by the destination specifying means is different from the notification means or the timing before the game times related to the predetermined special information that is specified by the destination specifying means are started. Special notification control means (function to execute round effect execution processing of the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 in the ninth and eleventh embodiments) to be executed by the notification means;
With
The game times control means includes:
Aspect information lottery that executes a lottery process for selecting any one of a plurality of types of aspect information by using lottery numerical value information (reach random number counter C3) included in the special information that triggered the game times in each game time Means (a function for executing the classification information setting process of the MPU 202 in the ninth embodiment, a function for executing the holding number correspondence classification information setting process of the MPU 202 in the eleventh embodiment), and the game of each game time When the recycle operation is performed, the game recycle operation is executed in the operation mode determined using the mode information selected by the mode information lottery means,
and,
In the case where at least the lottery value information is predetermined specific lottery value information, the same value is obtained depending on the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means at the start timing of the game turning operation. The game turn operation is executed in an operation mode having different expectation levels corresponding to the grant correspondence results regardless of special information,
As for the special information including the specific lottery value information, when an operation mode having a relatively high expectation degree is executed among the operation modes having a different expectation level in the game rotation operation related to the special information. A gaming machine configured to prevent special notification that is easily recognized from being performed or difficult to perform.

  According to the feature O2, the special notification according to the predetermined special information that is not the subject of the grant determination is executed by the notification means at a timing before the game times related to the predetermined special information are started. Sometimes. As a result, for the player, when special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result when the special information that is the target of the game round later is subject to the granting determination is determined according to the content of the special notification. The game of confirming or predicting the game is added and the game is diversified. As a result, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

  In addition, the operation mode of the game turning operation based on the specific lottery value information may differ depending on the number of special information at the start timing of the game turning operation. As a result, it is possible to execute the game turning operation according to the game situation at the start timing of the game turning operation.

  In such a configuration, the special information including the specific lottery numerical value information is not likely to be recognized as a special notification that is likely to be recognized when a relatively high expectation is executed as the game rotation operation related to the special information. Therefore, the degree of expectation between the special notification and the game rotation operation in the configuration in which the operation mode of the game rotation operation is different depending on the game situation at the start timing of the game rotation operation. Demotion is difficult to occur.

  That is, depending on the number of special information at the start timing of the game turning operation, a game expectation operation based on the specific lottery value information may be executed with low expectation. In this case, if a special notification with a high expectation is performed as a special notification related to the special information including the specific lottery value information, the expectation may be demoted between effects based on the same special information. On the other hand, according to this feature, the special information including the specific lottery value information is not notified specially or has a relatively high expectation as a game-return operation related to the special information. Since it is difficult to execute a special notification that is easily recognized when is executed, occurrence of the event to be demoted can be suppressed.

Feature O3. Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit with a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers (holding ball storage area 402 in the ninth embodiment, eleventh embodiment Storage ball storage area 601)
A determination is made as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to preset provision information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means In this case, the grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination on the plurality of special information (function of executing the processes of steps S4201 and S4203 of the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in the ninth and eleventh embodiments). When,
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result that the special information to be judged corresponds to the grant information, the privilege grant means for granting a privilege to the player ( A function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
Prior to the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means or based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, a game turning action is started, corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means. The game turn operation of each game time is performed in accordance with the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with the game result operation being ended as a notification result as one game time. Game time control means for controlling the notification means (symbol display device 41) (the function of setting and transmitting the effect pattern command of the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in the ninth and eleventh embodiments) and the display control device 212 A function of executing processing corresponding to the effect pattern command in the MPU 252),
In a gaming machine equipped with
Information reflecting the determination result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means is the target of the determination of grant at a timing prior to the predetermined special information being the target of the determination of grant. A destination specifying means for specifying (a function of executing a confirmation process for holding notice of the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in the ninth and eleventh embodiments);
The special notification reflecting the result of specification by the destination specifying means is different from the notification means or the timing before the game times related to the predetermined special information that is specified by the destination specifying means are started. Special notification control means (function to execute round effect execution processing of the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 in the ninth and eleventh embodiments) to be executed by the notification means;
With
The game times control means includes:
Aspect information lottery that executes a lottery process for selecting any one of a plurality of types of aspect information by using lottery numerical value information (reach random number counter C3) included in the special information that triggered the game times in each game time Means (a function for executing the classification information setting process of the MPU 202 in the ninth embodiment, a function for executing the holding number correspondence classification information setting process of the MPU 202 in the eleventh embodiment), and the game of each game time When the recycle operation is performed, the game recycle operation is executed in the operation mode determined using the mode information selected by the mode information lottery means,
and,
When at least the lottery value information is predetermined specific lottery value information, depending on the game situation at the start timing of the game rotation operation, the game operation is performed in a different manner regardless of the same special information. Perform the action,
The special information including the specific lottery value information is configured to execute a common special notification or not to execute the special notification.

  According to the feature O3, the special notification according to the predetermined special information that is not the object of the grant determination is executed by the notification unit at a timing before the game times related to the predetermined special information are started. Sometimes. As a result, for the player, when special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result when the special information that is the target of the game round later is subject to the granting determination is determined according to the content of the special notification. The game of confirming or predicting the game is added and the game is diversified. As a result, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

  In addition, the operation mode of the game rotation operation based on the specific lottery value information may differ depending on the game situation at the start timing of the game rotation operation. As a result, it is possible to execute the game turning operation according to the game situation at the start timing of the game turning operation.

  In such a configuration, the special information including the specific lottery value information is configured such that the special notification is not executed or the common special notification is executed. Thereby, when the game turning operation having a different operation mode is executed depending on the game situation, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of inconsistency between the special notification and the game turning operation.

Feature O4. As an operation mode of the game turn operation that can be executed in the case of the specific lottery value information, a long-term mode (effects A to F) in which the operation period in which the game turn operation is performed is relatively long and short, A short-term mode (effect G) is set,
According to the gaming situation at the start timing of the game turn operation, at least one of the probability that the long-term mode is executed and the probability that the short-term mode is executed varies. The gaming machine according to feature O3.

  According to the feature O4, the period during which the game turning operation is performed can be adjusted according to the game situation, so that the digestibility of the special information can be adjusted according to the game situation.

  In such a configuration, the special notification is not executed or the common special notification is executed regardless of the short-term mode and the long-term mode. Thereby, even if it is a case where game operation | movement operation | movement is performed in which operation | movement aspect, a player does not receive the impression which demoted between special alerting | reporting and game operation | movement about the same special information. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the degree of attention to the game that may occur due to the above demotion.

  Feature O5. The longer the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means at the start timing of the game rotation operation, the less likely the long-term aspect is executed as the game rotation operation related to the specific lottery value information. While the short-term mode is easy to execute, as the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means decreases at the start timing of the game turn operation, the game turn operation related to the specific lottery value information is reduced. The gaming machine according to feature O4, characterized in that the short-term aspect is difficult to be executed and the long-term aspect is easy to be executed.

  According to the feature O5, in a situation where the number of special information is relatively large, the game turning operation is performed in a short period of time, so that the game turning operation can be ended earlier and the special information can be digested more quickly. Can do.

  On the other hand, in a situation where the number of special information is relatively small, the game turning operation is performed for a long time, so that the special information is easily acquired during the game turning operation. As a result, a period during which no game replay operation is performed is unlikely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the degree of attention to the game that may occur due to a period in which the game turning operation is not performed.

Feature O6. The special notification control means, when performing the special notification about the predetermined special information, selects the aspect information by executing at least a lottery process by the aspect information lottery means for the predetermined special information, and the selected special information is selected. The special notification corresponding to the aspect information is executed,
The gaming machine according to any one of features O3 to O5, wherein the special notification corresponding to the mode information that can be selected based on the specific lottery value information is common.

  According to the feature O6, the game notification operation and the special notification can be associated by performing the special notification according to the mode information. In this case, in the case of performing special notification, the lottery is performed by the mode information lottery means executed when the game turning operation is performed. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the program capacity related to the process for performing the special notification associated with the game turning operation.

  In such a configuration, the special notification corresponding to the mode information that can be selected based on the specific lottery value information is common. As a result, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of inconsistency between the special notification and the game replay operation.

  In this case, when performing the special notification related to the specific lottery value information, for example, it is determined whether or not it is the specific lottery value information, and if it is the specific lottery value information, a common special notification is also considered. It is done. In this case, the lottery process of the aspect information for performing the special notification and the lottery process of the aspect information for performing the game turning operation are different, and the program capacity is increased. On the other hand, according to this feature, by sharing the special notification corresponding to the mode information that can be selected based on the specific lottery numerical value information, it is possible to suppress the above-mentioned inconvenience while achieving the common processing. it can.

Feature O7. A plurality of types of information set with respect to at least predetermined specific mode information (B (6)), which is used to determine the mode of operation of the game rotation operation (variation) Command C (y)) is further provided,
The game times control means includes:
A game turn action information determining means for executing a game turn action information determining process for determining the game turn action information using the aspect information selected by the form information lottery means (variation in the ninth embodiment) A function for executing a command determination process), and executing the game rotation operation in an operation mode determined using the game rotation operation information determined by the game rotation operation information determination means,
and,
If at least the lottery value information is the specific lottery value information, a plurality of types of games corresponding to the specific mode information regardless of the same special information, depending on the game situation at the start timing of the game turning operation The game turning action is executed in an action mode corresponding to any of the turning action information,
The special information for which the specific mode information is selected by the mode information lottery means based on the specific lottery value information is configured not to execute the special notification or to execute a common special notification. The gaming machine according to any one of features O3 to O6.

  According to the feature O7, the game turning operation is executed in an operation mode according to the game turning operation information. The game turn operation information is determined by lottery for selecting one piece of aspect information from a plurality of types of piece information and a game turn action information determination process based on the lottery result. In this case, when specific aspect information is selected by the lottery, one of a plurality of types of game turn operation information corresponding to the specific aspect information is selected. As a result, it is possible to diversify the operation mode of the game turning operation.

  In such a configuration, the mode information is not changed by the specific mode information even when the operation mode differs depending on the game situation at the start timing of the game turning operation. And about special information for which the specific mode information is selected, special notification is not executed or common special notification is executed. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconsistency between the special notification and the game rotation operation when the operation mode of the game rotation operation is different depending on the game situation at the start timing of the game rotation operation.

  Feature O8. The game time control means, when at least the lottery value information is the specific lottery value information, the degree of expectation corresponding to the grant correspondence result according to the game situation at the start timing of the game turn operation The gaming machine according to any one of features O3 to O7, wherein the game turning operation is performed in a different operation mode.

  According to the feature O8, there may be a case where a game expectation operation with different degrees of expectation is performed on the same special information in accordance with the game situation at the start timing of the game turn operation. Thereby, the game situation and the game turning operation can be associated with each other, and the game turning operation can be suitably performed.

  In such a configuration, the special notification is not executed or common special notification is executed for the special information including the specific lottery value information. As a result, in a configuration in which a game turning operation with a different degree of expectation is performed according to the game situation at the start timing of the game turning operation, the expectation is not easily demoted between the special notification and the game turning operation. ing.

  That is, depending on the game situation at the start timing of the game turning operation, a game expectation operation based on the specific lottery value information may be executed with a low degree of expectation. In this case, if a special notification with a high expectation is performed as a special notification related to the special information including the specific lottery value information, the expectation may be demoted between effects based on the same special information. On the other hand, according to this feature, the special notification including the specific lottery numerical value information is not executed or the common special notification is executed, so that the occurrence of the demoted event is suppressed. can do.

Feature O9. The operation mode of the game turning operation is divided into a plurality of types of operation modes having different expectations.
The operation mode that can be selected as the operation mode of the game turn operation corresponding to the specific lottery value information varies between the operation modes on the side where the expectation is low among the plurality of types of operation modes. A gaming machine described in the characteristic O8.

  In the configuration in which an operation mode with a different expectation can be selected as an operation mode of the game turn operation corresponding to the specific lottery value information, depending on the game situation at the start timing of the game turn operation, the operation of the game turn operation The degree of expectation of the aspect will vary depending on the game situation. In this case, when the degree of expectation related to an operation mode with a relatively high degree of expectation varies, the change in the degree of expectation is easily noticed by the player.

  On the other hand, according to this feature, since the fluctuation occurs between the operation modes on the low expectation side, the fluctuation of the expectation is relatively difficult to notice. Thereby, the said inconvenience can be avoided.

  Furthermore, the target for which special notification is not executed or common special notification is executed is special information corresponding to the operation mode on the side with a relatively low expectation, so that the special notification is not executed or is simple. However, it is difficult for players to feel uncomfortable. Thereby, the uncomfortable feeling which may arise by not performing special alerting | reporting or performing common special alerting | reporting can be reduced.

Feature O10. The operation mode of the game turning operation is divided into a plurality of types of operation modes having different expectations.
In the operation mode that can be selected as the operation mode of the game turn operation corresponding to the specific lottery value information,
Of the plurality of types of operation modes, a first operation mode (effect G),
A second operation mode (effect F) in which the difference from the expected degree of the first operation mode is minimized;
Is included in the feature O8 or the feature O9.

  According to the characteristic O10, the operation mode of the game turning operation corresponding to the specific lottery value information is at least the first operation mode and the second operation mode in which the first expected degree is close to the expected degree of the first operation mode. Fluctuates between. Thereby, the range of the expectation degree which fluctuates according to the gaming situation can be reduced, and the preset expectation degree can be ensured as much as possible. Therefore, effects such as the feature O3 can be achieved while maintaining the balance of the operation mode of the game turning operation.

Feature P1. Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Special information acquired by the information acquisition unit is acquired information storage unit (holding ball storage area 601 in the eleventh embodiment) for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a plurality of numbers,
A determination is made as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to preset provision information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means In some cases, a grant determination unit (function to execute the processes of steps S4201 and S4203 of the MPU 202 of the main controller 81) that sequentially performs the grant determination on the plurality of special information,
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result that the special information to be judged corresponds to the grant information, the privilege grant means for granting a privilege to the player ( A function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
Prior to the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means or based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, a game turning action is started, corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means. The game turn operation of each game time is performed in accordance with the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with the game result operation being ended as a notification result as one game time. Game time control means for controlling the notification means (symbol display device 41) (the function of setting and transmitting the effect pattern command of the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in the ninth and eleventh embodiments) and the display control device 212 A function of executing processing corresponding to the effect pattern command in the MPU 252),
In a gaming machine equipped with
Information reflecting the determination result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means is the target of the determination of grant at a timing prior to the predetermined special information being the target of the determination of grant. A destination specifying means for specifying (a function of executing a confirmation process for holding advance notice of the MPU 202 of the main controller 81 in the eleventh embodiment);
The special notification reflecting the specification result by the destination specifying means is different from the notification means or the timing at a timing before the predetermined special information that is the specification target by the destination specifying means becomes the subject of the grant determination. Special notification control means (function of executing round effect execution processing in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) to be executed by the notification means,
The game times control means includes:
A mode in which a lottery process for selecting any one of a plurality of types of mode information by lottery using lottery numerical value information (reach random number counter C3) included in the special information that triggers the game time in each game round Provided with information lottery means (function to execute the holding number correspondence classification information setting process of the MPU 202 in the eleventh embodiment), when the game times operation of each game time is performed, the mode information lottery means is selected. Executing the game recovery operation in an operation mode according to the mode information,
and,
If at least the lottery value information is specific lottery value information determined in advance, depending on the game situation at the start timing of the game turning operation, it corresponds to the grant correspondence result regardless of the same special information. The operation for game replay is executed in an operation mode having different expectations.
As for the special information including the specific lottery value information, when an operation mode having a relatively low expectation degree is executed among the operation modes having different expectation levels in the game rotation operation related to the special information. A gaming machine that is configured so that special notification that is easy to be recognized is easily performed.

  According to the characteristic P1, the special notification according to the predetermined special information that is not the subject of the grant determination is executed by the notification means at a timing before the game times related to the predetermined special information are started. Sometimes. As a result, for the player, when special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result when the special information that is the target of the game round later is subject to the granting determination is determined according to the content of the special notification. The game of confirming or predicting the game is added and the game is diversified. As a result, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

  In addition, the operation mode of the game rotation operation based on the specific lottery value information may differ depending on the game situation at the start timing of the game rotation operation. As a result, it is possible to execute the game turning operation according to the game situation at the start timing of the game turning operation.

  In such a configuration, with regard to special information including specific lottery value information, it is recognized that an operation mode with a relatively low degree of expectation is executed out of operation modes with different degrees of expectation in the game rotation operation related to the special information. Special notification that is easy to be made is easy to be performed. As a result, in a configuration in which the operation mode of the game turning operation is different depending on the game situation at the start timing of the game turning operation, the expectation is unlikely to be demoted between the special notification and the game turning operation. Yes.

  That is, depending on the game situation at the start timing of the game turning operation, a game expectation operation based on the specific lottery value information may be executed with a low degree of expectation. In this case, if a special notification with a high expectation is performed as a special notification related to the special information including the specific lottery value information, the expectation may be demoted between effects based on the same special information. On the other hand, according to this feature, with regard to special information including specific lottery value information, it is easily recognized that an operation with a relatively low degree of expectation is executed as a game turning operation related to the special information. Since special notification is easy to be executed, the occurrence of the event to be demoted can be suppressed.

Feature P2. In the lottery mode of the lottery process by the mode information lottery means,
A high expectation aspect (fourth outlier table TD24) in which a relatively high expectation degree corresponding to the assignment correspondence result is easily selected;
A low expectation aspect (first off-table TD21) in which the one with a low expectation compared to the high expectation aspect is easily selected;
Is set,
The aspect information lottery means, when executing the lottery process using the specific lottery value information, executes the lottery process in a different lottery aspect according to the game situation at the start timing of the game turning operation. By this, it is possible to select the mode information with different expectations regardless of the same special information,
When the predetermined special information includes the specific lottery numerical value information, the special notification control means executes the lottery process in the low expectation mode to obtain aspect information corresponding to the predetermined special information. Specific control means (a function for executing the process of step S5110 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in the eleventh embodiment) to select and execute the special notification of the notification mode determined using the mode information is provided. The gaming machine according to Feature P1, characterized in that:

  According to the feature P2, in the configuration in which the aspect information having different expectations can be selected regardless of the same special information by determining the lottery aspect of the lottery process, the notification aspect of the special notification is determined. It was set as the structure which uses aspect information. Thereby, a special alerting | reporting and operation | movement for game rotation can be linked | related by using common aspect information.

  In this case, the mode information used to determine the notification mode of the special notification related to the special information including the specific lottery numerical value information is selected in the lottery process of the lottery mode in which a low expectation is easily selected. The configuration is as follows. Thereby, special information with low expectation is easily executed for special information including specific lottery value information. When a special notification with a low degree of expectation is executed, the player may recognize that a game operation related to the special information that triggered the special notification is executed with a relatively low expectation. is assumed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the demotion between the special notification and the game replay operation.

Feature P3. As an operation mode of the game turn operation that can be executed in the case of the specific lottery value information, a long-term mode (effects A to F) in which the operation period in which the game turn operation is performed is relatively long and short, A short-term mode (effect G) is set,
Different expectations are set in association with each period aspect,
According to the gaming situation at the start timing of the game turn operation, at least one of the probability that the long-term mode is executed and the probability that the short-term mode is executed varies. The gaming machine according to the feature P1 or the feature P2.

  According to the feature P3, since the period during which the game turning operation is performed can be adjusted according to the game situation, the digestion rate of the special information can be adjusted according to the game situation.

  Further, since the period for performing the game turning operation varies depending on the degree of expectation, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation related to the current game turning operation based on the period. Thereby, the further improvement of the attention degree to operation | movement for game rotation can be aimed at.

  In such a configuration, regardless of the short-term mode and the long-term mode, as for the special information including the specific lottery value information, the operation with a relatively low expectation is executed as the game turning operation related to the special information. It is easy to execute special notification that is easily recognized. This makes it difficult for the player to receive the impression that the player has been demoted between the special notification and the game turning operation for the same special information, regardless of which operation mode is used. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the degree of attention to the game that may occur due to the above demotion.

  In addition, it is good to set it as the structure which "the said long-term aspect is set as a thing with the said relatively high expectation degree, and the said short-term aspect is set as the said expectation degree is relatively low." As a result, it is possible to further increase the degree of attention to the game because the period during which the game turning operation with a high interest of the player is performed due to the high possibility of being the grant correspondence result is performed. .

  Feature P4. The longer the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means at the start timing of the game rotation operation, the less likely the long-term aspect is executed as the game rotation operation related to the specific lottery value information. While the short-term mode is easy to execute, as the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means decreases at the start timing of the game turn operation, the game turn operation related to the specific lottery value information is reduced. The gaming machine according to Feature P3, characterized in that the short-term aspect is difficult to be executed and the long-term aspect is easy to be executed.

  According to the feature P4, in a situation where the number of special information is relatively large, the game turning operation is performed in a short period, so that the game turning operation can be ended earlier and the special information can be consumed more quickly. Can do.

  On the other hand, in a situation where the number of special information is relatively small, the game turning operation is performed for a long time, so that the special information is easily acquired during the game turning operation. As a result, a period during which no game replay operation is performed is unlikely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the degree of attention to the game that may occur due to a period in which the game turning operation is not performed.

Feature P5. The special notification control means selects the aspect information by executing at least the lottery processing by the aspect information lottery means for the predetermined special information when performing the special notification for the predetermined special information, and selects the selection The special notification corresponding to the performed aspect information is executed,
In the special notification corresponding to the mode information that can be selected based on the specific lottery value information, the expectation level is relative among the operation modes having different expectation levels in the game rotation operation related to the predetermined special information. The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics P1 to P4, wherein the gaming machine is easily recognized as being executed at a low operating mode.

  According to the feature P5, the game notification operation and the special notification can be associated by performing the special notification according to the mode information. In this case, when performing the special notification, at least the aspect information lottery means is configured to perform the lottery, thereby reducing the program capacity related to the process for performing the special notification associated with the game turning operation. .

  In such a configuration, the special notification corresponding to the mode information that can be selected based on the specific lottery value information recognizes that the operation mode with a relatively low expectation is executed in the game-return operation related to the predetermined special information. Things that are easy to do are easy to execute. As a result, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the expectation is demoted between the special notification and the game replay operation.

  In this case, when performing a special notification related to the specific lottery value information, for example, it is determined whether or not the information is specific lottery value information. A configuration is also conceivable in which a special notification that is easily recognized when a low game rotation operation is performed is performed. In this case, the lottery process of the aspect information for performing the special notification and the lottery process of the aspect information for performing the game turning operation are different, and the program capacity is increased. On the other hand, according to this feature, by sharing the special notification corresponding to the mode information that can be selected based on the specific lottery numerical value information, it is possible to suppress the above-mentioned inconvenience while achieving the common processing. it can.

Feature P6. A plurality of types of information set with respect to at least predetermined specific mode information (B (6)), which is used to determine the mode of operation of the game rotation operation (variation) Command C (y)) is further provided,
The game times control means includes:
A game turn action information determining means for executing a game turn action information determining process for determining the game turn action information using the aspect information selected by the form information lottery means (variation in the ninth embodiment) A function for executing a command determination process), and executing the game rotation operation in an operation mode determined using the game rotation operation information determined by the game rotation operation information determination means,
and,
If at least the lottery value information is the specific lottery value information, a plurality of types of games corresponding to the specific mode information regardless of the same special information, depending on the game situation at the start timing of the game turning operation The game turning action is executed in an action mode corresponding to any of the turning action information,
Regarding the special information in which the specific mode information is selected by the mode information lottery means based on the specific lottery value information, the expectation degree among the operation modes having different expectation levels in the game rotation operation related to the special information. The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics P1 to P5, characterized in that a special notification that is easily recognized when an operation mode with a relatively low is executed is easily performed.

  According to the feature P6, the game turning operation is executed in an operation mode according to the game turning operation information. The game turn operation information is determined by lottery for selecting one piece of aspect information from a plurality of types of piece information and a game turn action information determination process based on the lottery result. In this case, when specific aspect information is selected by the lottery, one of a plurality of types of game turn operation information corresponding to the specific aspect information is selected. As a result, it is possible to diversify the operation mode of the game turning operation.

  In such a configuration, for the special information in which the specific mode information is selected by the mode information lottery means based on the specific lottery numerical information, even if the operation mode differs depending on the game situation at the start timing of the game turning operation, The information is not changed by specific mode information. For the special information for which the specific mode information is selected, a special notification that is easily recognized when an operation mode with a relatively low degree of expectation is executed in the game turning operation related to the special information is executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the demotion of the expected degree between the special notification and the game rotation operation when the operation mode of the game rotation operation is different depending on the game situation at the start timing of the game rotation operation. be able to.

Feature P7. The operation mode of the game turning operation is divided into a plurality of types of operation modes having different expectations.
The operation mode that can be selected as the operation mode of the game turn operation corresponding to the specific lottery value information varies between the operation modes on the side where the expectation is low among the plurality of types of operation modes. The gaming machine according to any one of features P1 to P6.

  In the configuration in which an operation mode with a different expectation can be selected as an operation mode of the game turn operation corresponding to the specific lottery value information, depending on the game situation at the start timing of the game turn operation, the operation of the game turn operation The degree of expectation of the aspect will vary depending on the game situation. In this case, when the degree of expectation related to an operation mode with a relatively high degree of expectation varies, the change in the degree of expectation is easily noticed by the player.

  On the other hand, according to this feature, since the fluctuation occurs between the operation modes on the low expectation side, the fluctuation of the expectation is relatively difficult to notice. Thereby, the said inconvenience can be avoided.

  Furthermore, a special notification that is easily recognized when a game turning operation with a relatively low degree of expectation is executed is executed for the special information in which the game turning operation corresponding to the operation mode with a relatively low expectation is performed. Since it is easy, the notification mode of the special notification and the operation mode of the game turning operation can be closely related.

Feature P8. The operation mode of the game turning operation is divided into a plurality of types of operation modes having different expectations.
In the operation mode that can be selected as the operation mode of the game turn operation corresponding to the specific lottery value information,
Of the plurality of types of operation modes, a first operation mode (effect F),
A second operation mode (effect G) in which the difference from the expected degree of the first operation mode is minimized;
The gaming machine according to any one of features P1 to P7, wherein:

  According to the feature P8, the operation mode of the game turn operation corresponding to the specific lottery value information is at least the first operation mode and the second operation mode in which the first expected level is close to the expected level of the first operating mode. Fluctuates between. Thereby, the range of the expectation degree which fluctuates according to the gaming situation can be reduced, and the preset expectation degree can be ensured as much as possible. Therefore, effects such as the feature P1 can be achieved while maintaining the balance of the operation mode of the game turning operation.

  The feature A group to the feature P group are effective for the following problems.

  For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to a predetermined gaming state such as a big hit gaming state is triggered by the fact that a gaming ball has entered the start ball entering section provided in the gaming area. Done. Further, for example, in the display device provided in the game area, the display of the variation of the picture is started based on the fact that the lottery has been performed, and a stop result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed in the final stop display of the variation display. A display effect corresponding to one game is displayed. In addition, when the lottery result is a so-called jackpot gaming state transition winning, opening and closing of a variable pitching device provided in a gaming area, for example, is executed after a display effect for one game is executed, The game balls are paid out according to the number of balls entered into the variable pitching device.

  In addition, when a game ball enters the starting entrance part while the display of the change of the pattern is being performed, information used for the winning lottery is held and stored with a predetermined number (for example, 4) as an upper limit. There are pachinko machines that are designed to be used. In the case of the hold storage, after the display of the variation of the pattern is completed, a winning lottery is performed using the information stored and stored, and the next variation display of the pattern is started.

  In the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, a game in which a game ball is fired so that a ball enters the starting pitching part, and a lottery result when a ball enters the starting pitching part is hit. It can be said that it consists of a game of confirming whether or not. With respect to the former game, the player pays attention to whether or not the starting ball entering portion occurs until the upper limit of the reserved memory is reached, and with respect to the latter game, the variation display mode of the pattern However, the player pays attention to whether or not it is likely to be a stop result corresponding to winning the transition to the jackpot gaming state.

  Here, in the gaming machine, it is necessary to increase the degree of attention to the game by diversifying the game. In order to diversify such games, in the game of firing game balls as described above, a method of diversifying the flow mode of game balls in the game area can be considered, and lottery is performed for each game as described above. In the game of confirming whether or not the result is successful, a method of diversifying the display pattern of the display effect performed every game time is conceivable.

  However, since the game area is limited for the former, there is a limit in trying to diversify the game, and for the latter, even if the display pattern for each game is diversified, attention to the game There is still a limit in terms of increasing the degree. Therefore, there is still room for improvement in increasing the degree of attention to games. This point applies not only to pachinko machines but also to other game machines in which display effects are executed.

Feature Q1. Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Grant determination means for determining whether or not the special information acquired by the information acquisition means corresponds to predetermined grant information (step S5301 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 of the twelfth embodiment) , The function of executing the processing of step S5401 and step S5403),
A privilege granting unit that grants a privilege to a player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit being a grant response result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information (A function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
Prior to the grant determination being made by the grant determination means or based on the grant determination being performed, a game turn operation is started, and a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination is used as the game count. The game operation control means (the twelfth embodiment) for controlling the notification means (the symbol display device 41) so that the operation for the game times of each game time is performed, with the game operation being ended as one game time. A function of setting and transmitting the effect pattern command of the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in the embodiment, and a function of executing processing corresponding to the effect pattern command of the MPU 252 of the display control device 212).
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game times control means performs game times action information determination means for determining game times action information used to determine an action mode when the game times action is performed. (The function of executing various classification information setting processes and various variable command determination processes of the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in the twelfth embodiment), and when the game times of the game times are performed, the game The game turning action is performed in the action mode determined using the game turning action information determined by the turning action information determining means,
The probability of the grant correspondence result is relatively high by setting the grant determination means such that the number of grant information that is the grant correspondence result is relatively large and small as the grant determination mode. High probability mode and low probability mode are set,
As a determination aspect by the game times operation information determination process,
A mode that is set when the grant determination mode is the low-probability mode, and is a first mode (low probability that is determined using a plurality of types of lottery information including information that reflects at least the determination result of the grant determination Mode-compatible classification information setting process and low-probability mode-compatible variable command determination process),
A mode that is set when the grant determination mode is the high-probability mode, and a second mode that uses fewer types of lottery information than the first mode (high-probability mode-compatible classification information setting process and high probability Mode compatible variable command decision processing),
A gaming machine characterized by that is set.

  According to the feature Q1, the number of types of lottery information is relatively high in the high probability mode in which the processing load related to the grant determination is relatively large due to the increase in the number of grant information that is the subject of the grant determination. The processing load can be suppressed by determining the game-turning operation information in the second mode that is very small. On the other hand, in the low probability mode in which the processing load related to the grant determination is relatively small, by determining the game turn operation information in the first mode in which the number of types of lottery information is relatively large, Aspects can be more diversified than in the high probability mode. Thereby, determination of the operation mode of the operation for game rotation can be performed suitably.

  In particular, in the low probability mode, the probability of a result corresponding to the grant is relatively low, so that the game is likely to be monotonous as compared to the high probability mode. On the other hand, according to this feature, it is possible to diversify the operation mode of the game turning operation in the low probability mode in which the game tends to be relatively monotonous, thereby avoiding the disadvantage in the low probability mode. be able to.

Feature Q2. The multiple types of lottery information include
Common lottery information (a jackpot random number counter C1 and a reach random number counter C3) used in common in the first mode and the second mode;
Specific lottery information (first variation type counter CS1) that is used in the first mode but not used in the second mode;
Is set,
The game turn action information determination process of the second aspect includes a predetermined lottery process (high probability mode correspondence classification information setting process) using the common lottery information, and the game turn action information is obtained by the predetermined lottery process. Is to determine
In the game turn action information determination process of the first aspect,
A first lottery process (low probability mode compatible classification information setting process) using at least the common lottery information;
A second lottery process (low probability mode compatible variable command determination process) using at least the lottery result of the first lottery process and the specific lottery information;
Is included,
The game times operation information determination means executes at least the first lottery process and the second lottery process, thereby increasing the number of types larger than the number of types of the game times motion information that can be determined according to the second mode. The game machine according to Feature Q1, wherein the game-turning operation information can be determined.

  According to the feature Q2, in the first aspect, the second lottery process is executed by executing at least the first lottery process and the second lottery process using the lottery result of the first lottery process and the second lottery process using the specific lottery information. It is possible to determine more types of operation information for game times than the operation information for game times set in the aspect. This makes it possible to diversify the operation mode of the game turning operation in the low probability mode.

  On the other hand, in the second mode, the game turn operation information is determined by a one-stage lottery process, so the processing load is reduced compared to the first mode. Thereby, increase of the processing load in the high probability mode can be suppressed.

  In particular, in the predetermined lottery process and the first lottery process, since the common lottery information is used, compared with the configuration in which the lottery information necessary for performing each lottery process is individually prepared. Thus, the configuration can be simplified.

  In this case, if only the common lottery information is used in the second lottery process, the relationship between the lottery result of the first lottery process and the lottery result of the second lottery process becomes strong, and the lottery result of the first lottery process Accordingly, the lottery result of the second lottery process may be biased. Thereby, even if it is a case where a two-stage lottery process is provided, there may be a disadvantage that the game information is not appropriately distributed.

  On the other hand, according to this feature, since at least the specific lottery information is used in the second lottery process, the relevance between the lottery result of the first lottery process and the lottery result of the second lottery process is lowered. And the above disadvantages can be avoided.

  The predetermined lottery process and the first lottery process may be a common lottery process. In this case, since the same program can be used in the first mode and the second mode, the program capacity can be reduced.

Feature Q3. As information used to determine the game turn operation information, a plurality of types of division information (classification information B (x)) for dividing the operation mode of the game turn operation in a predetermined unit are provided,
A plurality of types of game operation information are set in association with at least predetermined classification information among the plurality of types of classification information,
The first lottery process is a process of selecting any of the plurality of types of classification information using at least the common lottery information.
In the second lottery process, when the predetermined division information is selected by the first lottery process, at least the specific lottery information is used and the plurality of types of game operations corresponding to the predetermined division information The gaming machine according to Feature Q2, which is a process of selecting any of the information.

  According to the feature Q3, in the first mode, it is possible to handle game operation information more than the number of types of division information, and the operation modes of the game operation can be diversified. And while providing a certain division | segmentation in the operation mode of operation | movement for game rotation, the operation mode of operation | movement for game rotation within the said division can be diversified.

Feature Q4. The predetermined notifying means is a display means capable of variably displaying a pattern on a display screen (display screen G),
The game time control means starts displaying the variation of the picture on the display means before the grant determination is performed by the grant determination means or when the grant determination is performed by the grant determination means. Each game time is displayed in accordance with the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, with a stop result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination being displayed and the display of the variation of the pattern being terminated. To display the variation of the pattern of
The operation information for game times is variable display mode information that determines a variable display mode of the pattern,
The variation display mode of the pattern includes a reach display,
The plurality of types of classification information includes at least classification information corresponding to performing the reach display,
The common lottery information includes
Information reflecting the determination result of the grant determination;
Reach lottery information (reach random number counter C3) used to determine whether or not to perform the reach display as the variation display mode of the pattern;
Is included,
The first lottery process is a process of selecting any one of the plurality of types of classification information using at least information reflecting the determination result of the grant determination and the lottery information for reach.
In the second lottery process, when the predetermined category information is selected by the first lottery process, the plurality of types of variable display mode information corresponding to the predetermined category information using at least the specific lottery information Is a process for selecting one of
The gaming machine according to Feature Q3, wherein the predetermined lottery process is a process of determining the variable display mode information using information reflecting the determination result of the grant determination and the reach lottery information.

  According to feature Q4, in the low probability mode, any one of a plurality of types of classification information including information corresponding to reach display using information reflecting the determination result of the grant determination and reach lottery information Select. As a result, whether or not to perform reach display is determined by lottery. Then, using at least the specific lottery information, the variation display mode of the current pattern is determined by selecting one of a plurality of types of variation display mode information corresponding to the selected category information.

  On the other hand, in the case of the high probability mode, the variable display mode information is determined using the information reflecting the determination result of the grant determination and the reach lottery information. As a result, the lottery information used to determine the main part (presence / absence of reach display) of the pattern variation display mode is common to the high probability mode and the low probability mode. The lottery mode of the lottery process can be suitably synchronized with the mode. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the high probability mode and the low probability mode to cause inconvenience that the tendency of the pattern variation display mode is remarkably changed.

Feature Q5. Information reflecting the determination result of the grant determination in the case where the grant determination is performed on the advantageous target special information for which the grant determination is performed in the high probability mode among the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means. , A destination specifying means for specifying the advantageous target special information at a timing prior to the grant determination target (a function for executing a confirmation process for holding notice of the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in the twelfth embodiment) )When,
The special notification reflecting the specification result by the destination specifying means is different from the notification means or the timing before the game times related to the advantageous target special information that has been specified by the destination specifying means are started. Special notification control means (function of executing round effect execution processing in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) to be executed by the notification means,
When the special notification is performed on the advantageous target special information, the special notification control means executes the game rotation operation information determination process at least in the second mode for the advantageous target special information. The game according to any one of features Q1 to Q4, characterized in that motion information is determined, and the special notification is executed in a notification mode determined using the determined game rotation operation information. Machine.

  According to the feature Q5, special notification is performed on the advantageous target special information when the grant determination is performed in the high probability mode. The advantageous target special information is special information in which the determination result of the grant determination is likely to be the grant response result, and thus the player is highly interested. Thereby, the special alerting | reporting is performed about the advantageous object special information with a high player's interest, and the attention degree to a special alerting | reporting can be aimed at.

  In such a configuration, the notification mode of the special notification is determined by using the game rotation operation information determined by executing the game rotation operation information determination process in at least the second mode for the advantageous target special information. This makes it possible to associate the notification mode of the special notification and the operation mode of the game turning operation with respect to one advantageous target special information, and further increase the degree of attention to the game through the special notification and the game rotation operation. Improvements can be made.

  In addition, as part of the process for determining the notification mode of the special notification, the game time operation information determination process of the second mode is used. Thereby, a part of the process for performing the game turning operation can be diverted to the process for performing the special notification, so that an increase in the program capacity for performing the special notification can be suppressed.

  Feature Q6. The gaming machine according to Feature Q5, wherein the lottery information used in the game turn action information determination process of the second aspect is only the advantageous target special information that is the subject of the grant determination.

  According to the feature Q6, the game turn operation information used for both determination of the notification mode of the special notification and determination of the operation mode of the game turn operation is determined based on the same lottery information. Thereby, the same game turn operation information is determined when the notification mode of the special notification is determined and when the operation mode of the game rotation operation is determined. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a mismatch between the notification mode of the special notification and the operation mode of the game turning operation.

Feature Q7. Lottery information update means for sequentially updating predetermined lottery information (first variation type counter CS1) every time a predetermined update timing is reached (function of updating the first variation type counter CS1 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81). With
In the first mode, the game turn motion information determining means, when executing the game turn motion information determining process, acquires the predetermined lottery information (in the twelfth embodiment). A function of executing the process of acquiring the first variation type counter CS1 of step S5202 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
In the lottery information used in the operation information determination process for game times of the first aspect,
The predetermined lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means;
The special information subject to the grant determination;
Is included, The gaming machine according to Feature Q6.

  According to the feature Q7, when the game turn action information determination process is executed in the first mode, predetermined lottery information is used separately from the special information. Since the predetermined lottery information varies depending on the timing to be acquired, the randomness and the degree of freedom of setting are increased when determining the game-turning motion information in the game-turning motion information determination process in the first mode. be able to. Thereby, in the high probability mode, the notification mode of the special notification and the operation mode of the game turn operation can be associated, and the lottery of the game turn operation information in the low probability mode can be suitably performed.

Feature Q8. The privilege granting means is a transition means (main control device 81) for shifting the gaming state to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the granting determination by the granting determining means being the granting result. A function to execute the gaming state transition process of the MPU 202 of the
During the specific game state, the game replay operation is configured not to be performed,
As the advantageous target special information, the special information related to the specified number of game times performed after the end of the specific gaming state is set,
The destination specifying means performs the specification during the specific gaming state with respect to the special information acquired by the information acquisition means during the specific gaming state,
The special notification control unit causes the special notification to be performed on the special information acquired by the information acquisition unit during the specific gaming state, according to any one of the characteristics Q5 to Q7, Gaming machine.

  According to the feature Q8, the specification by the first specifying means is performed during the specific game state. During the specific game state, the game turning operation is not performed. As a result, the processing related to the specification by the destination specifying means and the processing for performing the game replay operation are not performed simultaneously, so that an increase in local processing load can be suppressed.

  In addition, regarding the special information related to the predetermined number of game times performed after the end of the specific game state, the determination is made in the high probability mode. In this case, since the maximum number of special information that can be acquired during the specific gaming state is a prescribed number, all the special information acquired during the specific gaming state is determined to be given in the high probability mode. For this reason, it can be set as the structure which identifies by special identification means uniformly about each special information acquired in a specific game state, and can simplify a structure.

Feature Q9. Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Grant determination means for determining whether or not the special information acquired by the information acquisition means corresponds to predetermined grant information (step S5301 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 of the twelfth embodiment) , The function of executing the processing of step S5401 and step S5403),
A privilege granting unit that grants a privilege to a player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit being a grant response result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information (A function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
Prior to the grant determination being made by the grant determination means or based on the grant determination being performed, a game turn operation is started, and a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination is used as the game count. The game operation control means (the twelfth embodiment) for controlling the notification means (the symbol display device 41) so that the operation for the game times of each game time is performed, with the game operation being ended as one game time. A function of setting and transmitting the effect pattern command of the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in the embodiment, and a function of executing processing corresponding to the effect pattern command of the MPU 252 of the display control device 212).
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game turn control means is a game used to determine an operation mode when the game turn operation is performed based on a determination result of the grant determination when the game turn operation of each game time is performed. Game operation information determining means for determining game operation information for determining game operation information (various classification information setting processing and variable command determination processing of the MPU 202 of the main controller 81 in the twelfth embodiment) In the operation mode determined using the operation information for game times determined by the operation information determination means for game times when the operation for game times of each game time is performed. To perform a reusable action,
As a determination aspect by the game times operation information determination process,
A first mode (low probability mode correspondence classification information setting processing and low probability mode correspondence variation command determination processing) determined using a plurality of types of lottery information including information reflecting at least the determination result of the grant determination;
A second mode (high probability mode compatible classification information setting process and high probability mode compatible variable command determination process) in which the number of types of lottery information used is smaller than that of the first mode;
A gaming machine characterized by that is set.

  According to the feature Q9, the lottery information used to determine the game turn operation information is different between the first mode and the second mode. Thereby, for example, in a situation where the processing load is relatively large, the processing load can be reduced by determining the game-turning operation information in the mode with the smaller number of lottery information, while the operation of the game-playing operation is more When it is desired to diversify the mode, it is possible to suitably cope with the above diversification by adopting a configuration in which the operation information for game times is determined in a mode having a larger number of lottery information. Therefore, it is possible to suitably determine the operation mode of the game turning operation.

  The feature Q group is effective for the following problems.

  For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to a predetermined gaming state such as a big hit gaming state is triggered by the fact that a gaming ball has entered the start ball entering section provided in the gaming area. Done. Further, for example, in the display device provided in the game area, the display of the variation of the picture is started based on the fact that the lottery has been performed, and a stop result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed in the final stop display of the variation display. The game times operation for one game time that is displayed is executed. In addition, when the lottery result is a so-called jackpot gaming state transition winning, opening and closing of a variable pitching device provided in a gaming area, for example, is executed after a display effect for one game is executed, The game balls are paid out according to the number of balls entered into the variable pitching device.

  Here, for example, in order to increase the degree of attention to a game, there are those that prepare a plurality of types of operation modes for a game turning operation and determine one operation mode from the plurality of types of operation modes. In this case, with the diversification of the operation modes, the processing load related to the determination of the operation modes increases, which may hinder the progress of the game. In particular, for example, in a configuration in which processing related to the progress of a game such as processing related to detection of various winnings and update processing of counters used in various lotteries is performed at a predetermined cycle, the processing load related to lottery increases within a predetermined cycle. In other words, the process cannot be executed, and so-called process failure may occur.

  The configuration limited in any one of the features B1 to B11 may be applied to the configuration in any one of the features A1 to A16.

  The configuration limited in any one of the features A1 to A16 may be applied to any one of the features B1 to B11.

  The configuration limited in any one of the features A1 to A16 and the features B1 to B11 may be applied to the feature C1.

  The configuration limited in any one of the features A1 to A16 and the features B1 to B11 may be applied to the feature D1.

  The configuration limited by any one of the features A1 to A16, the features B1 to B11, the feature C1, and the feature D1 may be applied to the configuration limited by any one of the features E1 to E8.

  The configuration limited by any one of the features A1 to A16, the features B1 to B11, the feature C1, the feature D1, and the features E1 to E8 is applied to the configuration limited by any one of the features F1 to F6. May be.

  With respect to the configuration limited by any one of the features G1 to G10, any one of the features A1 to A16, the features B1 to B11, the features C1, the features D1, the features E1 to E8, and the features F1 to F6. A limited configuration may be applied.

  For the configuration limited by any one of the features H1 to H9, the features A1 to A16, the features B1 to B11, the features C1, the features D1, the features E1 to E8, the features F1 to F6, and the features G1 to G10. You may apply the structure limited in any one.

  For the configuration limited by any one of the features I1 to I10, the features A1 to A16, the features B1 to B11, the features C1, the features D1, the features E1 to E8, the features F1 to F6, the features G1 to G10, The configuration limited in any one of the features H1 to H9 may be applied.

  For the configuration limited by the feature J1, the features A1 to A16, features B1 to B11, feature C1, feature D1, features E1 to E8, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G10, features H1 to H9, features The configuration limited by any one of I1 to I10 may be applied.

  For the configuration limited by any one of the features K1 to K2, the features A1 to A16, features B1 to B11, features C1, features D1, features E1 to E8, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G10, A configuration limited by any one of the features H1 to H9, the features I1 to I10, and the feature J1 may be applied.

  For the configuration limited by any one of the features L1 to L10, the features A1 to A16, features B1 to B11, features C1, features D1, features E1 to E8, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G10, The configuration limited by any one of the features H1 to H9, the features I1 to I10, the feature J1, and the features K1 to K2 may be applied.

  For the configuration limited by any one of the features M1 to M8, the features A1 to A16, the features B1 to B11, the features C1, the features D1, the features E1 to E8, the features F1 to F6, the features G1 to G10, A configuration limited by any one of the features H1 to H9, the features I1 to I10, the feature J1, the features K1 to K2, and the features L1 to L10 may be applied.

  For the configuration limited by any one of the features N1 to N10, the features A1 to A16, features B1 to B11, features C1, features D1, features E1 to E8, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G10, A configuration limited by any one of the features H1 to H9, the features I1 to I10, the feature J1, the features K1 to K2, the features L1 to L10, and the features M1 to M8 may be applied.

  For the configuration limited by any one of the features O1 to O10, the features A1 to A16, features B1 to B11, features C1, features D1, features E1 to E8, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G10, A configuration limited by any one of the features H1 to H9, the features I1 to I10, the feature J1, the features K1 to K2, the features L1 to L10, the features M1 to M8, and the features N1 to N10 may be applied.

  For the configuration limited by any one of the features P1 to P8, the features A1 to A16, features B1 to B11, features C1, features D1, features E1 to E8, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G10, A configuration limited by any one of the features H1 to H9, the features I1 to I10, the feature J1, the features K1 to K2, the features L1 to L10, the features M1 to M8, and the features N1 to N10 may be applied.

  For the configuration limited by any one of the features Q1 to Q9, the features A1 to A16, features B1 to B11, features C1, features D1, features E1 to E8, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G10, Feature H1-H9, Feature I1-I10, Feature J1, Feature K1-K2, Feature L1-L10, Feature M1-M8, Feature N1-N10, Feature O1-O10, Feature P1-P8 A configuration may be applied.

  The basic configuration of various gaming machines to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball path for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes gaming components arranged in an area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion among the gaming components.

  Revolving type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, variably starting display of the plurality of pictures due to the operation of the start operation means, and due to the operation of the stop operation means In addition, the game machine is configured such that the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped when a predetermined time elapses and a privilege is given to the player according to the pattern after the stop.

  Ball-use belt-type game machine: Equipped with variable display means that displays the symbol sequence consisting of multiple symbols in a variably displayed state, and then stops and displays the symbol sequence. The special game state (bonus) that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the change of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operating means or when the predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol A throwing device that performs a throwing process for taking a game ball from the ball tray and a payout device for paying out the game ball to the ball tray, A gaming machine configured such that the operation of the starting operation means is made effective when a game ball is inserted by.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 32a ... Grand prize opening, 33 ... Upper operation opening, 34 ... Lower operation opening, 41 ... Symbol display device, 48 ... Special display device as special notification means, 53 ... Game ball launching mechanism, 81 ... Main Control device 202... MPU provided with point identification means, 203... ROM, 204... RAM, 212... Display control device, 232. 254 ... Work RAM, 255 ... VDP, 301 ... Reserved ball storage area in the eighth embodiment, 401 ... Lottery counter area in the ninth embodiment, 402 ... Reserved ball storage area in the ninth embodiment , 501... Reserved ball storage area in the tenth embodiment, 601... Reserved ball storage area in the eleventh embodiment, Ra. Reserved area, Rb ... reserved area for second result display section, Pa ... reserved pattern, Pb ... reserved reserved result pattern, TD11 ... variable command table, TD12 ... reserved number corresponding command table, TD13 ... effect table, TD21-TD24 ... the off table.

Claims (2)

It is a configuration where the production is executed based on the start opportunity,
First control means for transmitting a command based on the start trigger;
Second control means for causing the performance executing means to execute an effect corresponding to the command;
In a gaming machine equipped with
As the effect, at least a first effect and a second effect that are different in timing at which the start opportunity occurs are set,
The first control means includes
A first output means for outputting a command based on a first start opportunity corresponding to the execution of the first effect;
A second output means for outputting a command based on the second start trigger corresponding to the execution of the second effect;
With
The second control means includes
First effect control means for causing the effect execution means to execute the first effect corresponding to the command output by the first output means;
Second effect control means for causing the effect execution means to execute the second effect corresponding to the command output by the second output means;
With
The command output by the first output means includes specific information used when the first effect control means determines the effect mode of the first effect,
The command output by the second output means includes the specific information,
The second effect control means includes an aspect determining means for determining an effect aspect of the second effect using the specific information included in the command output by the second output means,
The command output by the first output means includes a plurality of commands including a command in which the specific information is set, and is a first effect command that determines an effect mode of the first effect,
The first output means includes a gaming situation command that reflects the gaming situation at the start timing of the first presentation, except for commands that constitute the first presentation command, the specific information being set. It comprises means for executing a process for determining another command, and outputs the first effect command including the command determined by the means based on the first start opportunity,
The first effect control means can change the effect mode of the first effect based on the specific information based on the game situation command,
The second output means derives a command in which the specific information is set by executing a process for determining at least a command in which the specific information is set based on the second start trigger, Output a command containing information,
Means for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player,
The gaming machine, wherein the first effect and the second effect are effects based on the grant determination.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the effect executing means is a display means for performing a display effect that is visible to a player.

Images